Geography Anatomised: Or, The Complete Geographical Grammar.  
Being a Short and Exact ANALYSIS Of the whole Body of Modern Geography, after a New and Curious Method.  
COMPREHENDING  
I A General View of the Terraqueous Globe. Being a Compendious System of the true Fundamentals of Geography; Digested into various Definitions, Problems, Theorems, and Paradoxes: With a Transient Survey of the whole Surface of the Earthly Ball, as it consists of Land and Water.  
II. A Particular View of the Terraqueous Globe. Being a clear and pleasant Prospect of all remarkable Countries upon the Face of the whole Earth; Showing their Situation, Extent, Division, Subdivision, Cities, Chief Towns, Name, Air, Soil, Commodities, Rarities, Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities, Manners, Language, Government, Arms, Religion.  
Collected from the best Authors, and Illustrated with divers Maps.  
The Second Edition much Improved and Enlarged.  
By PAT. GORDON, M. A. And Fellow of the Royal Society.  
Omne tulit punctum qui miscuit utile dulci. Hor.  
LONDON: Printed for Robert Morden and Thomas Cockerill; at the Atlas in Cornhill, and in Amen-Corner. 1699.   

THE Geographical Grammar.   

IMPRIMATUR, Liber cui Titulus, Geography Anatomised, etc.  
John Hoskyns, V. P. R. S.   

TO The Right Honourable THOMAS Lord Viscount Deerhurst, Eldest Son and Heir Apparent of The Right Honourable THOMAS Earl of COVENTRY,  
THIS New Edition of the following Tract of MODERN GEOGRAPHY is (with the profoundest Respect) Dedicated by  
Your Lordship's Most Humbly Devoted Servant, PAT. GORDON.   

THE PREFACE.  
MY principal Design in publishing the following Treatise, is to present the younger Sort of our Nobility and Gentry, with a Compendious Pleasant and Methodical Tract of MODERN GEOGRAPHY, that most useful Science, which highly deserves their Regard in a peculiar manner. If it be alleged, That the World is already overstockt with Composures of this Nature. I freely grant the Charge; but withal, I'll be bold to say, That there's none as yet published, which is not palpably faulty, in one or more of these three respects. Either they are too Voluminous, and thereby fright the Young Student from so much as ever attempting that Study. Or, Secondly, too Compendious, and thereby give him only a bare Superficial Knowledge of Things. Or finally Confused (being writ without any due Order or Method) and so confound him before he is aware. But all these are carefully avoided in the following Treatise; for in framing of it, I've industriously endeavoured, to make it observe a just Mean, between the two Extremes of a large Volume and a narrow Compend. And as to the Method in which it now appears, the same is (I presume) so Plain and Natural, that I may safely refer the trial thereof, to the Impartial Judgement of the Severest Critic.  
To descend to Particulars. The whole consists now of Two Parts, whereof the first gives a General; and the second a Particular View of the Terraqueous Globe.  
Part I. In giving a General View of the said Globe, I've performed these five Things, viz. (1.) I've illustrated (by way either of a Definition, Description, or Derivation) all those Terms that are any ways necessary for the right understanding of the aforesaid Globle, as also the Analytical Tables of the following Treatise. (2.) I've set down all those pleasant Problems performable by the Terrestrial Globe, together with the manner of their performance. (3.) I've subjoined divers plain Geographical Theorems [or self-evident Truths] clearly deducible from the foregoing Problems. (4.) I've advanced some Paradoxical Positions in Matters of Geography, which mainly depend on a thorough Knowledge of the Globe, and are equally certain with the aforesaid Theorems, though many of them, may possibly appear to some as the greatest of Fables. Lastly, I've taken a Transient Survey of the whole Surface of the Terraqueous Globe, as it consists of Land and Water, as its sole constituent Parts.  
This is the Substance of the first Part; and before I proceed to the Second, I must here desire the Reader may be pleased to observe these two Things, viz. (1.) That in defining the various Geographical Terms [mentioned Sect. I.] I have not strictly tied myself to the Logical Rules of a Definition; for if the Term proposed be only explained, that is all required here. (2.) In advancing those Geographical Paradoxes (mentioned Sect. iv.) which will probably so startle the Reader at first [being a mere Novelty in Tracts of this kind] as that he can't readily comprehend either their Meaning or Design; let him therefore be pleased to know, that the main Drift of such an uncommon Essay, is, in short, To whet the Appetite of our Geographical Student for a complete Understanding of the Globe, [upon a thorough Knowledge of which, these seeming Mysteries do mainly depend] or more briefly, 'tis to set our young Student a thinking. Although the Soul of Man is a cogitating Being, and its Thoughts so nimble as to surround the Universe itself in a trice; yet so unthoughtful and strangely immured in Sense is the generality of Persons, that they need some startling Noise (like a sudden Clap of Thunder) to rouse and awake them. Now, as a strange and unheard-off Phenomenon, suddenly appearing in the Natural World, doth attract the Eyes of all Men, and raiseth a Curiosity in some to inquire into the Reason of it; even so is the Proposal of a Paradoxical Truth to the Intellectual: for it immediately summons all the Powers of the Soul together, and sets the Understanding awork to search into, and Scan the Matter. To awaken the Mind of Man to its Natural Act of Thought and Consideration, may be justly reckoned no trivial Business; if we consider, that 'tis to the want thereof (or a stupid Inconsideration) that we may chiefly impute all the Enormities of Mankind, whether in Judgement or Practice. If therefore those Paradoxes abovementioned shall obtain the End proposed, (the rousing of the Mind to think) it matters the less, if some of them, upon strict enquiry, should be found, to consist of Equivocal Terms, or perhaps prove little more than a Quibble at the Bottom. Proceed we now to  
Part II. Giving a Particular View of the Terraqueous Globe. By such a View, I understand a clear and exact Prospect of all remarkable Countries, and their Inhabitants, on the Face of the whole Earth; and that in these following Particulars: viz. Their 

Situation,  
Extent,  
Division,  
Subdivision,  
Chief Towns,  
Name,  
Air,  
Soil,  
Commodities,  
Rarities,  
Archbishoprics,  
Bishoprics,  
Universities,  
Manners,  
Language,  
Government,  
Arms,  
Religion.    
What is said upon each of those Heads, will best appear by the following Table.  
Concerning Situation— are briefly declared The Degr. of Long. between which any Country lies. Latit. Extent.— Its due Dimensions from E. to. W. in English Miles. S. to N. Division— 2 Things, viz. The general Parts or Classes to which any Country is reducible. How those Parts or Classes are most readily found. Subdivision— 2 Things, viz. The particular Provinces which any Country contains. How those Provinces are most readily found. Chief Towns— 2 Things, viz. The Modern Names of those Towns. How such Towns are most readily found. Name— 3 Things, viz. How termed by the Ancients. The various Modern Appellations. The Etymology of the English Name. Air— 2 Things, viz. It's Nature as to Heat and Cold, etc. The Antipodes of that part of the Globe. Soil.— 3 Things, viz. The proper Climate thereof. It's natural Product. The Extent of Days and Nights. Commodities— Those in particular which the Country produceth. Rarities— 2 Things, viz. Those of Nature where certain. Those of Art, especially Monuments of Antiquity. Archbishoprics 2 Things, viz. their Number. Bishoprics— 2 Things, Universities— 2 Things, Names. Manners— 2 Things, viz. The Natural Temper of the People The most noted Customs Language— 2 Things, viz. It's Composition and Propriety. Paternoster as a Specimen thereof. Government— 2 Things, viz. It's Nature or Real Constitution. The Public Courts of Judicatory. Arms.— 2 Things, viz. The true Coat quartered. The proper Motto. Religion— 2 Things, viz. The chief Tenets thereof. When and by whom Christianity was planted, if ever.  
The Reader can't here expect a very large Account of all these several Heads, it being impossible in so little room, as the narrow Compass of a Compend allows, to say the half of what might be said upon many of them; however he may here find all those things that are most essential: These few Sheets being an Abstract of what is more largely expressed in the greatest Volumes. Several of those Heads abovementioned, being Subjects that don't much admit of new Relations, I reckon myself no Plagiary, to grant, that I've taken th' assistance of others; esteeming it needless sometimes to alter the Character either of a People or Country, when I found it succinctly worded by a credible Pen. Here the Reader may be pleased to know, That in treating of all Countries, I've made their Situation my only Rule, beginning still with those towards the North, excepting North America, where I thought good to end at the Pole. But as touching the Analytical Tables of this Treatise, (the main Business of the Book) their Design and Use in short, is, To present to the Eye at one view, a complete Prospect of a Country in all its remarkable Divisions, Subdivisions, and Chief Towns, with the manner how all these are most readily found. The Letters of N. S. W. E. [signifying the four Cardinal, and N. W. N. E. S W. S. E. the four Intermediate Points of the Compass] being affixed to the outside of the various Braces in the aforesaid Tables, do express the Situation of the Parts of any Country there mentioned; as (page 44.) where the Divisions of Africa are said to be found from N. to S. If only Cities and Towns, and no Divisions of a Country are set down, than these Letters have the same Relation to them, showing their Situation in respect of one another. If a little Brace fall within a greater, [as page 44. where Egypt and Barbary have their peculiar Brace] this is to show, that those two Countries are taken together, and considered as one Division, when reckoned with the following Countries, in respect of their Situation, expressed on the backside of the outmost Brace; the same is to be said of Cities and Towns, if only such are set down. But finally, if neither Divisions nor Towns can be so ordered, as to have their Situation expressed in a conjunct manner; then the respective Distance of such Towns from some remarkable City, is particularly declared in English Miles, as (page 144.) where those in the Circle of Suabia are so set down. If it be objected, that not all, but only the Chief Towns of every Country are mentioned in these Tables. To this I answer, That to mention all were needless; for I presume, that he who knows the true Situation of the fifty two Counties of England, and can readily point at the Chief Town in each of 'em, may easily find any other in the same County if expressed in the Map. Besides, the business of a Geographical Tract, is not so much to heap up a vast multitude of Names, as to show the Divisions, and Subdivisions of every Country, with the Principal Town in each of 'em, and how all such are most readily found. If it be farther objected, that neither the Analytical Tables of this Treatise, nor the various Descriptions of Countries annexed to them, are any thing of a new Discovery in the Science of Geography, but only the bare Crambe recocta of those who have gone before us. To this I answer, That the Tables are indeed materially the same with others [and otherways it cannot be, unless we of this Age were so extremely fortunate, as to make a complete Discovery of all the Countries and Towns as yet unknown; or so absurdly ridiculous, as to Coin new Names for those we know already] yet notwithstanding of this, they are highly preferable to all others whatsoever. For such Tables, hitherto published, (whether English, French, or Dutch) being only a bare Catalogue of Names, confusedly set down without any due Order and Method, are of so little use to the Reader, that his Pains are still the same as before, to find out those Names in the Map: Whereas the Tables of the following Treatise are so contrived, by particular Directions on the outside of their respective Braces, that he may point at those various Countries and Towns in the Map (almost) as fast as he can read their Names in the Table. And as touching the Descriptions of those Countries and their Inhabitants; 'twere indeed most unreasonable to expect a Narrative of them completely new, unless it be in those Countries, which have undergone such wonderful Changes, that the very face of Things is completely New; or some remote Parts of the World, where latter Intelligence hath rectified former Mistakes. Besides, 'tis not so much my present Design in the following Tract, to present the Reader with perfectly new Relations, (except in such Cases abovementioned) as to Abridge and Methodise those already known. And this sufficiently answers the proposed End of the Treatise, being calculated (as I already binted) for those, who are mere Strangers to Geography, or [at least] but young Proficients in that excellent Science; I mean the generality of them, who either attend our Public Schools, or Study under the Care and Conduct of private Tutors. And so much for the Second Part.  
To these Two Parts is annexed an Appendix, comprehending the European Plantations [whether Countries, Towns, or Factories] in Asia, Africa, and America. As also some Proposals (I hope very reasonable, and I wish acceptable) concerning the Propagation of the Blessed Gospel in all Pagan Countries.  
This, in short, is the Sum and Method of the following Geographical Treatise, which (as I said) is principally designed for the use and benefit of the younger Sort of our Nobility and Gentry. And did such Persons apply their Minds, in their younger Years, to this most useful and diverting Science; 'tis more than probable, that they might thereby avoid these many and gross Immoralities which abound among us. For if we strictly inquire into the source of these foul and loathsome Streams, (especially in those whom Fortune hath raised above the common level) we may readily find, that they mainly flow from that detestable Habit of Idleness, in which the generality of such Persons are bred up, during their youthful Days, and to which they wholly give up themselves, when arrived to more riper Years. By which means they're exposed to a thousand Temptations, and continually lie open to the grand Adversary of Souls. For the remeding of this great Evil, 'tis highly to be wished, that such Persons would daily employ a few of their many spare Hours (that now lie heavy upon their Hands) in some proper diverting Study, which carries along with it both Profit and Pleasure, as its constant Attendants. Now, such a Study is undoubtedly that of History, a Study that's particularly proper for a Gentleman, and adorns him with the best Accomplishments; a Study that begets Experience without Grey Hairs, and makes a Man wise at the Toil and Charge of others. If it be objected, that many have made attempts at the same, and that without Success. Most certain it is, I own, and the reason is ready at hand, namely, their Omission of a needful Preliminary Study, viz. That of GEOGRAPHY, which, with some small taste of Chronology, may be deservedly termed, The Eyes and Feet of History, and aught to be acquired by our Historian, either in his younger Days, or (at least) in the first place. On which account, I've drawn up the following Treatise, adapting it chiefly to the younger Sort of our Nobility and Gentry; by the help of which, they may quickly acquire such an Idea of all remarkable Countries, as to fit 'em sufficiently for turning over any Modern History whatsoever. This one stepped in Education of Youth, were preferable [methinks] to a Seven Years Drudgery in the dry Study of bare Words; and a Second Apprenticeship that's usually spent in a Fantastic Improvement of the Mind, with many useless Speculations. And I may be bold to say, That to exercise the Thoughts in such a manner as this, or to be but tolerably accomplished in these diverting Studies, would vastly transcend most of those other Accomplishments and Diversions, so much in Vogue among our Gentry at present. And 'tis highly probable, that such a Method as this, might more effectually check the Growth of Vice among 'em, than the most elaborate Moral Discourse that can be framed; [the very Title of such Composures being enough many times to fright them from the perusal] whereas a moderate Application of Mind to the aforesaid Studies, would insensibly wean the Thoughts of some, from the reigning Impieties of the Age; and in others, it might even happily prevent an early acquaintance with Vice in general.  
And thus you see the Design, Method, and Substance of the whole Treatise; one Word now, concerning this Edition, and I have done. The kind Reception of my first Essay, and its ready Admittance into many of our Public Schools, gave me fresh Encouragement to send it abroad again; and that in a much better Dress than formerly, being now as Complete as the Nature of the Subject, and Bigness of the Volume will permit. So considerable indeed are those Improvements made in this Impression, that the Book is in effect New. I have cast it in another Mould, and 'tis now above twice as big as the former; the First Part (except the last Section) being entirely added, and above two Thirds of the Second. I have not indeed augmented the number of Maps, because the Analytical Tables of this Tract are designed for particular Sheet Maps, whether English, French, or Dutch; and are not to be read with those here inserted, which (though very good of their kind) yet being of so small a Scale, they're more for Ornament than Use. How far this Treatise in the whole doth answer its proposed End; and how much this Impression is preferable to the former, I entirely leave to the Reader's Judgement to determine. This being all I think necessary to premise concerning the following Composure, I shall no longer detain the Reader by way of Preface, concluding the same with the Words of the Poet,  Vive, vale: Si quid novisti rectius istis, Candidus imperti: si non, his utere mecum. Q. Hor. Epist. Lib. 1.  

The CONTENTS.  
THE following Treatise being divided into Two Parts; whereof  
The First gives a General View of the Terraqueous Globe. Second a Particular View  

PART. I. Giving a General View.  

Comprehend 

Sect. I. Containing 38 Georaphical Definitions. From Page 1 to 15  
Sect. II. Containing 48 Geographical Problems— 15 to 32  
Sect. III. Containing 41 Geographical Theorems— 32 to 37  
Sect. IU. Containing 39 Geographical Paradoxes— 37 to 43  
Sect. V. Concerning Land and Water.— 43 to 59      

PART II. Giving a Particular View. Comprehends  

CHAP. I. Of EUROPE.  
Sect. I. Concerning Scandinavia Sweden 63 Denmark 67 Norway 70 Sect. II. Moscovia 73 Sect. III. France 79 Sect. IU. Germany Upper Holland 108 Flanders 112 Upper Germany 114 Sect. V. Poland 125 Sect. VI. Spain and Portugal 133 Sect. VII. Italy 145 Sect. VIII. Turkey in Europe, partilarly Hungary 170 Greece 172 Tartary 177 Danubian Provinces 178 Sect IX. European Islands, particularly Britain Scotland 186 England 197 Wales 208 Ireland 211   

CHAP. II. Of ASIA.  
Sect. I. Concerning Tartary— Page 238 Sect. II. China— 241 Sect. III. India— 247 Sect. IU. Persia— 256 Sect. V. Turkey in Asia— 260 Sect. VI. The Asiatic Islands— 282   

CHAP. III. Of AFRICA.  
Sect. I. Concerning Egypt— 294 Sect. II. Barbary— 298 Sect. III. Bildulgerid— 303 Sect. IU. Zaara or the Desert— 305 Sect. V. Negroeland— 307 Sect. VI. Guinea— 310 Sect. VII. Nubia— 313 Sect. VIII. Ethiopia— 315 Sect. IX. African Islands— 325   

CHAP. IV. Of AMERICA.  
Sect. I. Concerning New Spain— 334 Sect. II. Nova Granada— 338 Sect. III. Florida— 340 Sect. IU. Terra Canadensis— 342 Sect. V. Terra Arctica— 357 Sect. VI. Terra Firma— 358 Sect. VII. Peru— 361 Sect. VIII Amazonia— 365 Sect. IX. Brasil— 367 Sect. X. Chili— 371 Sect. XI. Paraguay— 373 Sect. XII. Terra Mageilanica— 375 Sect. XIII. Terra Antarctica— Ibid. Sect. XIV. The American Islands— 376 APPENDIX— 391     


A NEW MAP of y c WORLD by Robt Morden    

Modern Geography. PART 1. Comprehending a GENERAL VIEW OF THE Terraqueous GLOBE.  

INTRODUCTION.  
IN taking a General View of the Terraqueous Globe, we shall observe the following Method:  
1. We shall Illustrate (by way either of Definition, Description, or Derivation) all those Terms that are any ways necessary for the right understanding of the aforesaid Globe, as also the Analytical Tables of the following Treatise.  
2. We shall set down in due Order and Method all those pleasant Problems, or delightful Operations performable by the Artificial Globe, together with the manner of their performance.  
3. We shall subjoin divers plain Geographical Theorems, or self-evident Truths clearly deducible from the foregoing Problems.  
4. We shall advance some Paradoxical Positions in Matters of Geography, (or a few infallible Truths in Masquerade) which mainly depend upon a thorough Knowledge of the Globe, and are equally certain with the aforesaid Theorems, though many of them may possibly appear to some, as the greatest of Fables.  
Lastly, We shall take a Transient Survey of the whole Surface of the Terraqueous Globe, as it consists of Land and Water, as its sole constituent Parts.  
Of these five General Heads separately, and in their order. Therefore   

SECT. I. Containing some necessary Geographical Definitions.  

Def. 1. GEography [a Science both pleasant and profitable] doth mainly consist in giving a true Description of the exterior Part or Surface of the Earthly Globe, as 'tis composed of Land and Water, especially the former.  
That Geography doth merit the Title of Science in several Respects, and that the knowledge thereof is attended both with Pleasure and Profit, is so universally granted by all who make any considerable Progress therein, that to enter upon a Probation of it, would be every whit as superfluous, as if one should go about to evince that the Sun is risen at Noonday. It derives its compound Name from the two Greek Primitives of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Terra, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, scribo vel describo, and differeth from Cosmography, [quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 vel 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Mundi Descriptio] as a part doth from the whole; as also from Chorography and Topography [quasi 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Regionis ac Loci Descriptio] as the Whole from its Parts. By a true Description of the Exterior Part of the Globe of the Earth, we understand purely an Account of the Situation, Extent, Divisions, and Subdivisions, of all remarkable Countries on the Surface of the said Globe, together with the Names of their Cities and Chief Towns, and that accordingly as those Countries are already projected to our Hands upon particular Geographical Maps, and not an actual Survey or Mensuration of them, which the Science of Geography presupposeth, and which properly belongs to Geodaesia, or the Art of Surveying Land. In giving such a Description of Countries (as aforesaid) doth the Science of Geography properly consist; as for other Narratives relating either to Countries themselves, or their Inhabitants, and which commonly swell up Geographical Tracts, we reckon them (though the more pleasant part of this Study) rather the Fringes of Geography, than its real or essential Parts. In the foregoing Definition we entirely restrict the Science of Geography to the exterior Part or Surface of the Earthly Globe, and that as it's composed of Land and Water, as its sole constituent Parts, designing thereby to distinguish it from Natural Philosophy, which (in its curious and pleasant Inquiries) reacheth not only the said Surface in all its constituent Parts, but also the whole Globe of the Earth, with the whole Body of the Atmosphere surrounding the same, yea, and even the outmost imaginable Expanse of the Firmament it self. We again restrict that Science mainly to one Part of the aforesaid Surface (viz. the Dry Land) thereby to distinguish it from Hydrography, which particularly treateth of the other, namely Water. The Object therefore of Geography in a large Sense, is the whole Surface of the Ball of the Earth consisting of Land and Water as its sole constituent Parts, or (in a strict and more proper Sense) only One of those Parts, to wit, the Firm Land. For the more distinctly viewing of which Parts, and the better comprehending of the Science of Modern Geography in the true Fundamentals thereof, we shall begin with that Artificial Representation of the Earthly Ball, commonly called the Terraqueous Globe.   

Def. 2. The Terraqueous Globe is an Artificial Spherical Body, on whose Convex Part is truly represented the whole Surface of the Ball of the Earth, as it consists of Land and Water.  
That this Globe is termed Terraqueous from Terra and Aqua, (the two constituent Parts of its Surface) or Terrestrial to distinguish it from the Celestial; or finally, the Artificial Globe as a differencing Mark from the Natural or Real Globe of the Earth, are all so notoriously known, that the least Illustration were wholly superfluous. We reckon it also superfluous, to show that there is a true Resemblance in Figure, between the Artificial and Natural Globe, or that the Body of the Earth is truly Spherical: This being now beyond all dispute, and never (at least very rarely) called in question, except it be only by Women and Children But here note, That in the following Treatise, we entirely restrict ourselves to this Globe, so that wheresoever the Name of Globe is indefinitely mentioned, we are never to understand the Celestial. Note, also that wheresoever we are upon the Surface of the Natural Globe, that the Point in the Heavens exactly Vertical to us, is termed our Zenith, and that Point diametrically opposite thereto, is styled our Nadir, which are two corrupted Arabian Terms in Astronomy, importing what is here asserted of them. The first observables that present themselves to our view in treating of the Globe, are its Axis and Poles.   

Def. 3. The Axis is an imaginary Line passing through the Centre of the real Globe of the Earth, upon which the whole Frame thereof is supposed to turn round.  
It's termed Axis from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, quod circa illam agatur Terra. As this Axis in the Natural Globe, is an imaginary Line, so in Artificial Globes its a real one, it being a straight piece of Iron, or solid Wood, passing through the middle of the Globe, as the Axletree of a Wheel.   

Def. 4. The Poles are the two Extremities of the Axis, one whereof is termed the North or Arctic, and the other the South or Antarctick.  
They are called Poles from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, verto, because upon them the whole Frame of the Globe turneth round. The North is termed Arctic from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signifying a Bear, because the real North Pole in the Heavens is commonly taken for a certain noted Star in that Constellation which bears the Name of the Little Bear: And the South is styled Antarctick from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [contra] and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [Ursa] because of its Diametrical Opposition to the other The Terraqueous Globe being a Spherical Body (as aforesaid) turning round upon its own Axis: For the better understanding of that Globe in all its exterior Parts, and the various Operations performed by the same; we are to conceive it, not only as a bare Spherical Body, but also as such a Body surrounded with many imaginary Circles; the chief of which are Eight, divided into 

Five Parallel, viz.  
The Equator.  
The two Tropics.  
The two Polar Circles.   

Three not Parallel, viz.  
The Horizon.  
The Meridian.  
The Zodiac.    
Otherwise divided into 

Four Greater, viz.  
The Horizon:  
The Meridian.  
The Equator.  
The Zodiac.   

Four Lesser, viz.  
The two Tropics.  
The two Polar Circles.     

Def. 5. The Horizon is that great Circle which divideth the Globe into two equal Parts, termed the Upper and the Lower Hemispheres.  
It's so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Terminans vel siniens, quia nostrum terminat prospectum, it being the outmost bounds or limits of our Sight, when situated in any Plain, or at Sea. This Circle is twofold, viz. The Sensible, and the Rational Horizon: The Sensible is that already described, bounding the outmost prospect of the Eye, when viewing the Heavens round from any part of the Surface of the Earth; but the other is purely formed in the Mind, and supposeth the Eye to be placed in the very Centre of the Earth, beholding the entire Upper Hemisphere of the Firmament: The Circle terminating such a prospect is reckoned the true Rational Horizon, which is duly represented by that broad wooden Circle, usually fitted for all Globes. Upon which are inscribed several other Circles, particularly those two containing the Names of the Months, and Number of their Days, according to the Julian and Gregorian Account; as also that other divided into the Thirty two Points of the Compass.   

Def. 6. The Meridian is that great Circle, which passing through the Two Poles, divideth the Globe into two equal Parts, termed the Eastern and Western Hemispheres.  
It's so called from Meridies vel medius dies, because the Sun coming to the Meridian of any Place, is due South, or maketh Midday in the said place. The Meridian here defined is that great brazen Circle, in which the Globe turneth round upon the two Extremities of its Axis passing through the said Circle; but the Meridian's inscribed on the Globe itself, are those Thirty six Semicircles terminating in both the Poles; besides which, we may imagine as many as we please; only note, That one of those Meridian's is always reckoned the first; however it's matter of indifference, which of them we take for such.   

Def. 7. The Equator or Equinoctial, is that great Circle which divideth the Globe into two equal Parts, called the Southern and Northern Hemispheres.  
It's called Equator, because the Sun coming to this Circle, tune aequantur noctes & dies, or Equinoctial for the same reason, viz. aequalitas noctium cum diebus. By others it's simply termed the Line, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, and that chiefly by Navigators, as being of singular use in their Operations. It's divided into 360 degrees, which are reckoned round the Globe, beginning at the first Meridian, and proceeding Eastward.   

Def. 8. The Zodiac is that great broad Circle, which cutteth the Equinoctial Line obliquely, one side thereof extending itself exactly so far North, as the other doth to the South of the said Line.  
It's so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, (Animal) because it's adorned with Twelve Asterisms, (commonly termed the Twelve Signs) being most of them Representations of divers Animals. The Names and Characters of which Signs are these following,  
Aries. Taurus. Gemini. Cancer. Leo. Virgo. ♈ ♉ ♊ ♋ ♌ ♍ Libra. Scorpio. Sagittarius. Capricornus. Aquarius. Pisces. ♎ ♏ ♐ ♑ ♒ ♓  
Of all Circles inscribed on either of the Globes, this alone admits of Latitude, and is divided in the middle by a Concentric Circle, termed the Ecliptic, which properly is that Circle set upon the Globe comprehending the Characters of the Twelve Signs abovementioned, each of which Signs is 1/12 part of that Circle, and contains 30 degrees.   

Def. 9 The Tropics are the two biggest of the four lesser Circles, which run parallel to the Equator, and are equidistant therefrom.  
They're termed Tropics from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, (verto) because the Sun in his Annual Course arriving at one of those Circles, doth return towards the other. They derive their respective Denominations of Cancer and Capricorn from touching the Zodiac at the two Signs of that Name, and each of them is distant from the Equator, exactly 23 degr. 1/2.   

Def. 10. The Polar Circles are the two least of the four Lesser Circles running parallel to the Equator, and at the same distance from the Poles, as the Tropics are from the Equator.  
They're termed Polar, because of their Vicinity to the Poles. That Circle nearest the North, is called the Arctic; and the other, next to the South Pole, the Antarctick Polar Circle, and that for the same reason already given, (Def. 4.) when treating of the Poles themselves.  
These are the eight necessary Circles abovementioned; but to complete the Furniture of the Globe, there remain as yet three Particulars, viz. the Horary Circle, the Quadrant of Altitude, and Semicircle of Position.   

Def. 11. The Horary Circle is a small Circle of Brass, and so affixed to the Brazen Meridian, that the Pole (or end of the Axis) proves its Centre.  
Upon this Circle are inscribed the Twenty four Hours of the Natural Day at equal distance from one another; the Twelfth for Midday being in the upper part towards the Zenith, and the other Twelfth for Midnight in the lower towards the Horizon; so that the Hours before Noon are in the Eastern, and those for the Afternoon in the Western Semicircle: As for an Index to this Horary Circle, the same is fixed upon the end of the Axis, and turneth round with the Globe. The Use of this Circle and Index will sufficiently appear in many pleasant Problems hereafter mentioned.   

Def. 12. The Quadrant of Altitude is a narrow thin Plate of pliable Brass, exactly answerable to a fourth part of the Equinoctial.  
Upon this Quadrant, are inscribed 90 Degrees, each of them being according to the same Scale with those upon the Equator. How useful this Quadrant is, will also appear in the Solution of several Problems hereafter mentioned.   

Def. 13. The Semicircle of Position is a narrow solid Plate of Brass exactly answerable to one half of the Equinoctial.  
Upon this Semicircle are inscribed 180 Degrees, exactly the same with those upon the Equinoctial. We may term it a double Quadrant of Altitude in some respect, and it's of considerable Use in several delightful Problems.  
To these I might add the Mariner's Compass, that most necessary Instrument, commonly used by Navigators, which being duly touched with the Loadstone, and horizontally fixed upon the Pedestal of the Globe, is frequently needful for the right Solution of several Problems.  
The necessary Circles of the Globe being Eight (as aforesaid); Of them, and some others, hereafter mentioned are formed the Latitude and Longitude of Places, as also Zones and Climates.   

Def. 14. Latitude is the distance from the Equator to either of the Poles, and measured upon the brazen or first Meridian.  
No Term is more frequently used in Geography than that of Latitude, which is twofold, viz. North and South. In reckoning of the Northern Latitude, you are to begin at the Equinoctial Line, and proceed to the Arctic; and the Southern from the Equinoctial to the Antarctick Pole, still numbering the Degrees of Latitude, either upon the brazen or first Meridian. The many Circles inscribed on the Globe, at the distance of 10 Degrees from one another, and parallel to the Equator, are termed Parallels of Latitude. But besides those actually inscribed, we are to conceive the Globe as furnished with a vast multitude of such Circles, for every degree of Latitude, yea, and every sixtieth part of each degree is supposed to have an imaginary Parallel Circle passing through the same. But since Latitude (as aforesaid) is the Distance from the Equator to either of the Poles; it from hence follows, that the greatest Latitude consisteth of 90 Degrees. Now correspondent to each of those Degrees (or the 1/360 of a great Circle in the Heavens) is a certain Space of the Surface of the Earth, which is every where of the same Extent in itself, but different in its number of Parts, according to the different reckoning of various Countries. To know the said different number of Parts, (of what sort soever, whether they be Miles, Leagues, or other Measures) corresponding to one Degree in the Heavens, is absolutely necessary for the right understanding of the true Distance of Places in different Countries; we shall therefore illustrate the same, and that by the following Table,  
answerable to one Degree, are Common Italian, English, and Turkish Miles.— 60 Ordinary French Leagues— 20 Spanish Miles according to Vulgar reckoning.— 17½ German, Dutch, Danish, and Great Poland Miles.— 15 Miles usual in Swedeland.— 12 Miles usual in Hungary.— 10 The Versts of Muscovy.— 80 Persian, Arabtan, and Egyptian Parasanga.— 20 The Indian Cos.— 24 The Stades of China.— 250 The Inks of Japan.— 400  
But here note, That though these are the most remarkable Measures of Distance throughout the inhabited World, with their respective Proportion to one Degree in the Heavens; yet, we are not to imagine that these Measures are of the same Extent in the various Provinces of the same Country, as is evident from the different length of Leagues in different Parts of France; as also the diversity of Miles in the South and North of England.   

Def. 15. Longitude is the Distance from the first Meridian, and measured upon the Equator.  
In reckoning the various Degrees of Longitude (which are 360 in all) you are to begin at the first Meridian wherever it is, and to proceed upon the Equator quite round the Globe. Correspondent to each of those Degrees in the Equator, [as to Degrees of Latitude on the Meridian] are sixty Italian Miles, or twenty French Leagues, according to Vulgar Calculation: But this is to be understood only of Places exactly under the Equator; for the true Distance between two Places lying due East and West in any considerable Latitude is far less in Miles than between other two Places lying exactly under the Equator, and likewise under the same Meridian's; The Reason of which is most evident, namely, the approaching of the Meridian's nearer and nearer to one another, till at last they unite all in the Pole. But that you may readily find the true Distance in Miles from East to West between any two Places in any Parallel of Latitude, we shall here subjoin the following Table, in which is set down, to every Degree of Latitude, the exact number of Miles, and sixtieth Part of a Mile, that are answerable to one Degree in the Equator, still allowing sixty Italian Miles to such a Degree.  
Lat. m. s Lat. m s At m. s. Lat. m. s 0 60 00 23 55 12 46 41 40 69 21 32 1 59 56 24 54 48 47 41 00 70 20 32 2 59 54 25 54 24 48 40 08 71 19 32 3 59 52 26 54 00 49 39 20 72 18 32 4 59 50 27 53 28 50 38 32 73 17 32 5 59 46 28 53 00 51 37 44 74 16 32 6 59 40 29 52 28 52 37 00 75 15 32 7 59 37 30 51 56 53 36 08 76 14 32 8 59 24 31 51 24 54 35 26 77 13 32 9 59 10 32 50 52 55 34 24 78 12 32 10 59 00 33 50 20 56 33 32 79 11 28 11 58 52 34 49 44 57 32 40 80 10 24 12 58 40 35 49 08 58 31 48 81 9 20 13 58 28 36 48 32 59 31 00 82 8 20 14 58 12 37 47 56 60 30 00 83 7 20 15 58 00 38 47 16 61 29 04 84 6 12 16 57 40 39 46 36 62 28 08 85 5 12 17 57 20 40 46 00 63 27 12 86 4 12 18 57 04 41 45 16 64 26 16 87 3 12 19 56 44 42 44 36 65 25 20 88 2 04 20 56 24 43 43 52 66 24 24 89 1 04 21 56 00 44 43 08 67 23 28 90 0 00 22 55 36 45 42 24 68 22 32   

Def 16. Zones are large Tracts of the Surface of the Earth, lying Parallel to the Equator, and distinguished by the four lesser Circles of the Globe.  
They're termed Zones from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [Zona vel Cingulum] because they encompass the Globe of the Earth in some manner, as a Girdle doth surround the Body of a Man; and are in number Five,  
Viz. Two Frigid comprehended between The Polar Circles, and the Poles. Two Temperate The Polar Circles, and the Tropics. One Torrid The Two Tropics, and divided by the Equator.  
Of these the Ancients imagined only the Two Temperate to be habitable; esteeming the scorching Heat of the Torrid, and pinching Cold of the two Frigid to be equally intolerable; according to that of the Poet,  Quarum quae media est, non est habitabilis aestu: Nix tegit alta duas:— Ovid. Metam. 1.  

Def. 17. Climates are those Tracts of the Surface of the Earth, bounded by imaginary Circles, running Parallel to the Equator, and of such a breadth from South to North, that the length of the Artificial Day in one surpasseth that in the other, by half an Hour.  
They're termed Climates from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [Declino vel Inclino] because in numbering of them they decline from the Equator, and incline to either Pole. Not to mention what the Ancients taught of Climates, either as to their number, or manner of reckoning them; It's sufficient for our present purpose to consider that Modern Geographers have advanced the Number of them to 60. From the Equator to each of the Polar Circles, are 24 arising from the difference of ½ Hour in the longest Day; and from the Polar Circles to the Poles themselves, are Six arising from the difference of an entire Month, the Sun being seen in the first of these a whole Month without setting, in the second two, and in the third three Months, etc. How all these Climates are framed, viz. the true Parallel of Latitude in which they end, (that being likewise the beginning of the following) with the respective breadth of each of them, you may clearly see by the following Tables.  
Climate Climates between the Equator and Polar Circles. d. m. d. m Clim d. m. d. m. Par. of Lat. Breadth Par. of Lat. Breadth 1 08 25 8 25 13 59 58 1 29 2 16 25 8 00 14 61 18 1 20 3 23 50 7 25 15 62 25 1 07 4 30 20 6 30 16 63 22 0 57 5 36 28 6 08 17 64 6 0 44 6 41 22 4 54 18 64 49 0 43 7 45 29 4 07 19 65 2● 0 32 8 49 01 3 32 20 65 47 0 26 9 51 58 2 57 21 66 6 0 19 10 54 27 2 29 22 66 20 0 14 11 56 37 2 10 23 66 28 0 08 12 58 29 1 52 24 66 31 0 03  
Climates between the Polar Circles and the Poles. d. m. d. m. d. m. d. m d. m. d. m. Par. Lat. Par. Lat. Par. Lat. Par. Lat. Par. Lat. Par. Lat. 67 30 69 30 73 20 78 20 84 00 90 00 Breadth Breadth Breadth Breadth Breadth Breadth 01 00 02 00 03 50 05 00 05 40 06 00 1 Month 2 Month 3 Month 4 Month 5 Month 6 Month  
Having thus taken a view of the chief Circles belonging to the Terrestrial Globe, as also the manner how Latitude and Longitude with Zones and Climates are framed; proceed we next to the various Positions of the Globe, commonly termed Spheres, which are three in Number, viz. Parallel, Right, and Oblique.   

Def. 18. A Parallel Sphere is that Position of the Globe, which hath these three Properties, viz. (1.) The Poles in the Zenith and Nadir: (2.) The Equator in the Horizon: (3.) The Parallel Circles parallel to the Horizon.  
The Inhabitants of this Sphere, are those (if any) who live under the two Poles.   

Def. 19 A Right Sphere is that Position of the Globe, which hath these three Properties, viz. (1.) Both the Poles in the Horizon. (2.) The Equator passing through the Zenith and Nadir. (3.) The Parallel Circles perpendicular to the Horizon.  
The Inhabitants of this Sphere, are they who live under the Equinoctial Line.   

Def. 20. An Oblique Sphere is that Position of the Globe, which hath these three Properties, viz. (1.) One of the Poles above, and the other under the Horizon. (2.) The Equator partly above, and partly under the Horizon. (3.) The Parallel Circles cutting the Horizon obliquely.  
The Inhabitants of this Sphere are they, who live on all Parts of the Globe of the Earth, except those exactly under the Poles and Equinoctial Line.  
But having no regard to these Positions of the Globe; The various Inhabitants of the Earth are likewise considered with respect to the several Meridian's and Parallels peculiar to their Habitations, and that under these three Titles, viz. Antaeci, Periaci, and Antipodes.   

Def. 21. The Antaeci are those People of the Earth, who live under the same Meridian, but opposite Parallels.  
Peculiar to such People are these following Particulars, viz. (1.) They have both the same Elevation of the Pole, but not the same Pole. (2.) They are equally distant from the Equator, but on different sides. (3) They have both Noon and Midnight at the same time. (4) The Days of one are equal to the Nights of the other, & vice versâ. (5.) Their Seasons of the Year are contrary, it being Winter to one, when Summer to the other, etc.   

Def. 22 The Perlaeci are those People of the Earth, who live under the same Parallels, but opposite Meridian's.  
Peculiar to such People are these following Particulars, viz. (1.) One of the Poles is equally elevated to both, and the other equally depressed. (2.) They are equally distant from the Equator, and both on the same side. (3.) When its Noon to one, it's Midnight to the other, & econtra. (4) The length of the Day to one, is the Compliment of the other's Night, & vice versâ. (5.) They both agree in the four Seasons of the Year, etc.   

Def. 23. The Antipodes are those People of the Earth, who live under opposite Parallels and Meridian's.  
Peculiar to such People are these following Particulars, viz. (1.) They have both the same Elevation of the Pole. (2) They are both equally distant from the Equator, but on different sides, and in opposite Haemispheres. (3.) When its Noon to one, it's Midnight to the other, & vice versâ. (4.) The longest Day or Night to the one, is the shortest to the other. (5.) Their Seasons of the Year are contrary, etc.  
The Inhabitants of the Earth were likewise considered by the Ancients with respect to the Diversity of their Shadows, and accordingly reduced to three Classes, viz. Amphiscii, Periscii, and Heteroscii.   

Def. 24. Amphiscii were those People of the Earth, who lived in the Torrid Zone, or between the two Tropics.  
They're so termed from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [utrinque] and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 [Umbra] because they cast their Shadows on both sides of them, viz. North and South, according to the Nature of the Sun's Declination.   

Def. 25. Periscii were those People of the Earth, who lived in the Frigid Zones, or between the Polar Circles and the Poles.  
They're so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [Circà] and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 [Umbra] because they cast their Shadows round about them, towards all Points of the Compass.   

Def. 26. Heteroscii were those People of the Earth, who lived in the two Temperate Zones, or between the Tropics and the Polar Circles.  
They're so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [Alto] and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 [Umbra] because they cast their Shadows only one way, viz. North, if in the North temperate; or South, if in the South temperate Zone  
But leaving the various Inhabitants of the Earth, and to come closer to our main Design, let us return to the Globe of the Earth itself, considered simply as a Spherical Body, whose Surface we are to view as composed of Land and Water, as its sole constituent Parts, and those two Parts, thus subdivided as followeth, to wit, 

Land into  
Continents,  
Isthmus,  
Islands  
Promontories,  
Peninsula's,  
Mountains.   

Water into  
Oceans,  
Straits,  
Seas,  
Lakes,  
Gulfs,  
Rivers.     

Def. 27. A Continent [Lat. Continens à Contineo] is a large and spacious Space of dry Land, comprehending divers Countries, Kingdoms, and States, all joined together without any entire Separation of its Parts by Water.   

Def. 28. An Island [Lat. Insula, quasi in salo] is a part of dry Land environed round with Water.   

Def. 29. A Peninsula [quasi penè Insula, otherwise Chersonesus from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Terra, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Insula] is a part of the dry Land every where enclosed with Water, save one narrow Neck adjoining the same to the Continent.   

Def. 30. An Isthmus [ab 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 vel 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Ingredior] is that narrow Neck of Land annexing the Peninsula to the Continent, by which People may enter into one from the other.   

Def. 31. A Promontory [quasi Mons in mare prominens] is a high part of Land stretching itself out in the Sea, the Extremity whereof is commonly termed a Cape or Head-Land.   

Def. 32. A Mountain [à moneo vel emineo] is a rising part of the dry Land, over-topping the adjacent Country, and appearing the first at a distance.   

Def. 33. The Ocean [Gr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 quasi ex 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, citò, & 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Fluo] is a mighty Rendesvouz, or large Collection of Waters environing a considerable Part of the Main Continent.   

Def. 34. The Sea [Lat. Salum à sale quia salsum] is a smaller Collection of Waters intermingled with Islands, and entirely (or mostly) environed with Land.   

Def. 35. A Gulf [Lat. Sinus, quasi sinu suo mare complectens] is a part of the Sea every where environed with Land, except one Passage whereby it communicates with the neighbouring Sea, or main Ocean.   

Def. 36. A Strait [Lat. Fretum à ferveo, quod ibi ferveat mare propter angustiam] is a narrow Passage, either joining a Gulf to the neighbouring Sea or Ocean, or one part of the Sea or Ocean to another.   

Def. 37. A Lake [Lat. Lacus, a Gr. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Fossa vel Fovea] is a small Collection of deep standing Water, entirely surrounded with Land, and having no visible or immediate Communication with the Sea.   

Def. 38. A River [Lat. Flumen vel Fluvius à fluo] is a considerable Stream of fresh Water issuing out of one, or various Fountains, and continually gliding along in one or more Channels, till it disgorgeth itself at last into the gaping Mouth of the thirsty Ocean.   

These being all the necessary Terms commonly used in Modern Geography; and particularly those, that either need or can well admit of a Definition, Description, or Derivation: We proceed in the next place to    

SECT. II. Containing some pleasant Geographical Problems.  

Prob. 1. THE Diameter of the Artificial Globe being given, to find its Surface in Square, and its Solidity in Cubick Measure.  
Multiply the Diameter by the Circumference (or a great Circle dividing the Globe into two equal Parts) and the Product will give the first: Then Multiply the said Product by ⅙ of the Diameter, and the Product of that will give the second. After the same manner we may find the Surface and Solidity of the Natural Globe, as also the whole Body of the Atmosphere surrounding the same, providing it be always and every where of the same height; for having found the perpendicular height thereof by that common Experiment of the ascent of Mercury at the foot and top of a Mountain; double the said Height, and add the same to the Diameter of the Earth; then Multiply the whole (as a new Diameter) by its proper Circumference, and from the Product subtract the Solidity of the Earth, the Remainder will give the Solidity of the Atmosphere.   

Prob. 2. To Rectify the Globe,  
The Globe being set upon a true Plain, raise the Pole according to the given Latitude; then fix the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, and (if any Mariner's Compass upon the Pedestal) let the Globe be so situated, as that the brazen Meridian may stand due South and North, according to the two Extremities of the Needle.   

Prob. 3. To find the Longitude and Latitude of any place.  
By Longitude we do not here understand that Opprobrium Navigatorum of Easting and Westing, but simply the distance between the given place and the first Meridian inscribed on the Surface of the Globe. For the finding of which, bring the given place to the East-side of the brazen Meridian, and observe what Degree of the Equator is just under the said Meridian, for that is the Degree of Longitude peculiar to the given place; and the Degree of the Meridian exactly above that place is its proper Latitude, which is either Southern or Northern, according as the place is South or North of the Equinoctial Line.   

Prob. 4. The Longitude and Latitude of any place being given, to find that place on the Globe.  
Bring the given Degree of Longitude to the brazen Meridian; reckon upon the same Meridian the Degree of given Latitude, whether South or North, and make a mark with Chalk where the reckoning ends; the Point exactly under that Chalk is the place desired.   

Prob. 5. The Latitude of any place being given, to find all those places that have the same Latitude.  
The Globe being rectified 
a Prob. 2.  according to the Latitude of the given place, and that place being brought to the brazen Meridian, make a mark exactly above the same, and turning the Globe round, all those places passing under the said mark, have the same Latitude with the given place   

Prob. 6. To find the Sun 's place in the Ecliptic at any time.  
The Month and Day being given, look for the same upon the wooden Horizon, and over against the Day you will find the particular Sign and Degree in which the Sun is at that time (observing withal the difference between the Julian and Gregorian Calendar) which Sign and Degree being noted in the Ecliptic, the same is the Sun's place (or pretty near it) at the time desired.   

Prob. 7. The Month and Day being given, as also the particular time of that Day, to find those places of the Globe, to which the Sun is in their Meridian at that particular time.  
The Pole being elevated 
a Prob. 2.  according to the Latitude of the place in which you are, and the Sun's Place found 
b Prob. 6.  in the Ecliptic at the time given; bring the same to the brazen Meridian, and setting the Index of the Horary Circle at the upper Figure of XII. turn the Globe till the said Index point at the given Hour of the Day. Which done, fix the Globe in that Situation, and observe all those places exactly under the brazen Meridian, for those are the places desired.   

Prob. 8. To know the Length of the Day and Night in any place of the Earth at any time.  
Elevate the Pole 
a Prob. 2.  according to the Latitude of the given place; find the Sun's place in the Ecliptic 
b Prob. 6.  at that time, which being brought to the East side of the Horizon, set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, (or the upper Figure of 12.) and turning the Globe about till the aforesaid place of the Ecliptic touch the Western side of the Horizon, look upon the Horary Circle, and wheresoever the Index pointeth, reckon the Number of Hours between the same and the upper Figure of 12. for that is the Length of the Day at the time desired, the Compliment whereof is the Length of the Night.  
Note, There is a Mistake in working the 7th Problem, for the same aught to be performed thus: The Pole being elevated according to the Latitude of the given Place, bring the said Place to the brazen Meridian, and setting the Index of the Horary Circle at the Hour of the Day in the given Place, turn the Globe till the Index point at the upper Figure of XII. which done, fix the Globe in that Situation, and observe what places are exactly under the upper Hemisphere of the brazen Meridian, for those are the Places desired.   

Prob. 9 To find by the Globe the Antaeci, Periaeci, and Antipodes, of any given place.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and finding 
a Prob. 3.  its true Latitude, count upon the Equator the same number of Degrees towards the opposite Pole and observe where the reckoning ends, for that is the place of the Antaeci. The given Place continuing under the brazen Meridian, set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, and turning the Globe about till the same Point at Midnight, (or the lower 12.) the place which then comes to the Meridian, (having the same Latitude with the former) is that of the Perioeci. As for the Antipodes of the given Place, reckon from the said place upon the brazen Meridian 180 Degrees, either South or North, or as many Degrees beyond the farthest Pole as you are to the nearest; and observe exactly where the reckoning ends, for that is the place desired.   

Prob. 10. To know what a Clock it is by the Globe in any place of the World, and at any time, providing you know the Hour of the Day where you are at the same time.  
Bring the place in which you are, to the brazen Meridian (the Pole being raised 
a Prob. 3.  according to the Latitude thereof) and set the Index of the Horary Circle at the Hour of the Day at that time. Then bring the desired Place to the brazen Meridian, and the Index will point out the present Hour at that place where ever it is.   

Prob. 11. To know by the Globe when the Great Mogul of India, and Czar of Moscovia, sit down to Dinner.  
This being only to know when its Noon at Agra and Moscow, (the Imperial Seats of those Mighty Monarches) which we may very easily do, at what time soever it be, or wheresoever we are: For finding (by the foregoing Problem) the present Hour of the Day in the City's abovementioned, supposing withal that Midday in the aforesaid Cities is Dining-time, we may readily determine how near it is to the time desired,   

Prob. 12. To find the Hour of the Day by the Globe at any time when the Sun shines.  
Divide your Ecliptic Line in Twenty four equal Parts, and in small Figures set down the Hours of the Natural Day after the following manner. At the Intersections of the Ecliptic and Equator place the Figure 6; and bring both those Figures to the brazen Meridian, one being in the upper, and the other in the lower Hemisphere. Which done, place the twelve Figures in the Western Hemisphere in this order following, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Beginning then at the same Figure of 6, and proceeding Eastward, set down the other twelve Figures thus, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6. The Equinoctial being thus divided and marked, elevate the Globe 
a Prob. 3.  according to the Latitude of the place where you are, and bring the Intersection of the Vernal Equinox to the upper Part of the brazen Meridian; and situating the Globe 
b Prob. 2.  duly South and North, observe exactly that half of the Globe upon which the Sun doth actually shine; for the last part of the enlightened Hemisphere doth always show the Hour of the Day upon the Equinoctial Line.   

Prob. 13. The Latitude of the Place, and Height of the Sun being given at any time, to find thereby the Hour of the Day.  
The Globe being rectified 
a Prob. 2.  according to the Latitude of the given Place, and the Height of the Sun at that time being found by an exact Quadrant; mark his place in the Ecliptic 
b Prob. 6.  for the given Day, and bring the same to the brazen Meridian. After this, fix the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, and mark in the said Quadrant the particular Degree of the Sun's Altitude, and placing the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, move the Globe together with the Quadrant of Altitude, till the Sun's place marked in the Ecliptic, and his Degree of Altitude marked upon the said Quadrant do come both in one. Which done, observe what Hour the Index doth point at, for that is the Hour desired.   

Prob. 14. The Latitude of the Place being given, as also the true bearing of the Sun in the said Place at any time, to find thereby the Hour of the Day.  
The Globe being 
a Prob. 2.  rectified, and the Sun's Place 
b Prob. 6.  marked in the Ecliptic, fix the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, and by the Mariner's Compass observe the true bearing of the Sun; then bring the Quadrant of Altitude to the observed Point of the Compass upon the wooden Horizon, and move the Globe till the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic coincide with the said Quadrant: Which done, and the Globe continuing in that Position, the Index of the Horary Circle will point at the Hour of the Day, at the time desired.   

Prob. 15. The Latitude of the Place, and Sun 's Place in the Ecliptic being given, to find thereby the Hour of the Day.  
Elevate the Pole according to the given Latitude, and situate the Globe duly South and North 
a Prob. 2.  by the Mariner's Compass; then fix a small Needle perpendicularly in the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, and bringing the same to the brazen Meridian, set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon: Which done turn the Globe till the Needle cast no Shadow at all, and then observe the Index, for it will then point at the true Hour of the Day.   

Prob. 16. Any Place being given, to move the Globe so as that the wooden Horizon shall be the Horizon of the same.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and reckon from it upon the said Meridian the number of 90 Degrees towards either of the Poles, and where the reckoning ends, place that part of the Meridian in the Notch of the wooden Horizon, and it will prove the Horizon of the given Place.   

Prob. 17. To find the Meridian-Line by the Globe in any place, and at any time of the Day.  
The Latitude of the Place being known, and the Globe 
a Prob. 2.  elevated accordingly; observe the height of the Sun above the Horizon at that time, and draw upon a true Plain a straight Line in, or Parallel to the Shadow of a Style perpendicularly erected upon that Plain: In which describe a Circle at any opening of the Compasses, and find 
b Prob. 6.  the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, and mark his observed height in the Quadrant of Altitude. Then move the Globe together with the said Quadrant, till that Mark in the Quadrant, and the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, come both in one; which done, count upon the wooden Horizon the number of Degrees between the Quadrant of Altitude, and the brazen Meridian, and set off the same number of Degrees upon the aforesaid Circle drawn upon the Plain, by making a visible Point in the Circumference where the reckoning ends (beginning still at the side towards the Sun, and proceeding East or West according to the time of the Day) Then draw a Line from that Point in the Circumference through the Centre of the said Circle, and the same will prove the true Meridian-Line of that Place, at what time soever the Observation is made.   

Prob. 18. A Place being given in the Torrid Zone, to find those Days in which the Sun shall be vertical to the same.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and mark what Degree of Latitude is exactly above it. Move the Globe round, and observe the two Points of the Ecliptic that pass through the said Degree of Latitude. Search upon the wooden Horizon (or by proper Tables of the Sun's Annual Motion) on what Days he passeth through the aforesaid Points of the Ecliptic, for those are the Days required, in which the Sun is vertical to the given Place.   

Prob. 19 The Month and Day being given, to find by the Globe those places of the North Frigid Zone, where the Sun beginneth then to shine constantly without setting; as also those places of the South Frigid Zone, in which he then beginneth to be totally absent.  
The Day given, (which must always be one of those, either between the Vernal Equinox and Summer Solstice, or between the Autumnal Equinox and Winter Solstice) find 
a Prob. 6.  the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, and marking the same, bring it to the brazen Meridian, and reckon the like number of Degrees from the North Pole towards the Equator, as there is betwixt the Equator and the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, and set a mark with Chalk where the reckoning ends. Which done, turn the Globe round, and all the Places passing under the said Chalk are those in which the Sun begins to shine constantly without setting upon the given Day. For Solution of the latter part of the Problem; set off the same distance from the South Pole upon the brazen Meridian towards the Equator, as was formerly set off from the North, and making a mark with Chalk, and turning the Globe round, all Places passing under the said mark are those desired, viz. them in which the Sun beginneth his total Absence, or Disappearance from the given Day.   

Prob. 20. A Place being given in the North Frigid Zone, to find by the Globe what number of Days the Sun doth constantly shine upon the said Place, and what Days he is absent; as also the first and last Day of his appearance.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and observing its Latitude, 
a Prob. 2.  elevate the Globe accordingly, then turn the Globe about till the first Degree of Cancer come under the Meridian, and count the same number of Degrees upon the Meridian from each side of the Equator, as the Place is distant from the Pole; and making a mark where the reckoning ends, turn the Globe round, and carefully observe what two Degrees of the Ecliptic pass exactly under the two Points marked in the Meridian, for the Northern Arch of the Circle (viz. that comprehended between the two marked Degrees) being reduced to time, will give the number of Days that the Sun doth constantly shine above the Horizon of the given Place, and the opposite Arch of the said Circle will give the number of Days in which he is absent. The Pole continuing in the same Elevation, bring the beginning of Cancer to the brazen Meridian, and observe the two Degrees of the Ecliptic which in the mean time coincide with the Horizon; then search upon the wooden Horizon for those Days that the Sun doth enter into the aforesaid Degrees of the Ecliptic, for those are the Days of his first and last appearance in the given Place.   

Prob. 21. The Month and Day being given, to find that place on the Globe to which the Sun (when in its Meridian) shall be vertical on that Day.  
The Sun's Place in the Ecliptic being 
a Prob. 6.  found, bring the same to the brazen Meridian, in which make a small mark with Chalk, exactly above the Sun's Place. Which done, find 
b Prob. 7.  those places that have the Sun in the Meridian at the time given; and bringing them to the brazen Meridian, observe that part of the Globe exactly under the aforesaid mark in the Meridian, for that is the place desired.   

Prob. 22. The Month and Day being given, to find upon what Point of the Compass the Sun riseth and setteth in any place at the time given.  
Elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the desired Place, and finding the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic at the given Time, bring the same to the Eastern side of the Horizon, and you may clearly see the Point of the Compass upon which he then riseth. By turning the Globe about till his place coincide with the Western side of the Horizon, you may also see upon the said Circle the exact Point of his setting.   

Prob. 23. To know by the Globe the Length of the longest and shortest Days and Nights in any place of the World.  
Elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the given Place, and bring the first Degree of Cancer (if in the Northern, or Capricorn, if in the Southern Hemisphere) to the East-side of the Horizon; and setting the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, turn the Globe about till the Sign of Cancer touch the Western-side of the Horizon, and then observe upon the Horary Circle the number of Hours between the Index and the upper Figure of XII. (reckoning them according to the Motion of the Index) for that is the Length of the longest Day, the Compliment whereof is the Extent of the shortest Night. As for the shortest Day and longest Night, they are only the reverse of the former.   

Prob. 24. To know the Climates of any given Place.  
Find 
a Prob. 23.  the Length of the longest Day in the given Place, and whatever be the number of Hours whereby it surpasseth Twelve, double that number, and the Product will give the true Climate of the Place desired. But here note, That this is to be understood of Places within the Latitude of 66½. As for those of a greater Latitude, (where the Climates increase by entire Months, enter the second Table of Climates (page 10) with the Latitude of the given Place, and opposite thereto you'll find the proper Climate of a place in the said Latitude.   

Prob. 25. The Length of the longest Day in any place being known, to find thereby the Latitude of that place.  
Having the Length of the longest Day you may know thereby 
a Prob. 24.  the proper Climate of that Place, and by the Table of Climates (pag. 10.) you may see what Degree of Latitude corresponds to that Climate, which Degree is the Latitude of the Place desired.   

Prob. 26. The Latitude of the Place being given, as also the Sun 's Place in the Ecliptic, to find thereby the beginning of the Morning, and end of the Evening Twilight.  
The Globe being rectified, and the Sun's Place brought to the brazen Meridian, set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon; then bring that Degree of the Ecliptic (which is opposite to the Sun's Place) to the Western Quarter, and so move the Globe together with the Quadrant of Altitude, till the Degree opposite to the Sun's Place, and the 18 Degree of the said Quadrant come both in one; Which done, observe what Hour the Index than pointeth at, for at that Hour doth the Morning Twilight begin. As for the Evening Twilight, bring the Degree of the Ecliptic, opposite to the Sun's Place at that time to the Eastern Quarter, and so move the Globe till the same and the 18th Degree of the Quadrant come both in one, and the Index will point at the Hour when the Evening Twilight doth end.   

Prob. 27. The Length of the longest day being given, to find thereby those places of the Earth in which the longest Day is of that Extent.  
By the given Length of the longest Day 
a Prob. 25.  find the true Degree of Latitude, where the Day is of that Extent, and making a mark upon that Degree in the brazen Meridian, turn the Globe round, and observe what Places pass exactly under the said Mark, for they are the Places desired.   

Prob. 28. A certain number of Days, not surpassing 182. being given, to find thereby that Parallel of Latitude on the Globe, where the Sun setteth not during those Days.  
Take half of the given Number of Days, and whatever it is, count so many Degrees upon the Ecliptic, beginning at the first of Cancer, and make a mark where the reckoning ends; only observe, that if your number of Days surpass thirty, than your number of Degrees ought to be less than it by one. Bring then the marked Point of the Ecliptic to the brazen Meridian, and observe exactly how many Degrees are intercepted between the aforesaid Point and the Pole, for the same is equal to the desired Parallel of Latitude. If the desired Parallel of Latitude be South of the Line, the Operation is the same, bringing only the first Degree of Capricorn to the Meridian in lieu of Cancer.   

Prob. 29. The Hour of the Day being given, according to our way of reckoning in England, to find thereby the Babylonick Hour at any time.  
The Babylonick Hour is the number of Hours from Sun rising, it being the manner of the Babylonians of old, and the Inhabitants of Norimberg at this Day, to commence their Hours from the appearance of the Sun in the Eastern Horizon. For the finding of this Hour at any time, and in any place, First elevate the Pole 
a Prob. 2.  according to the Latitude of the given Place, and 
b Prob. 6.  noting the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic at that time, bring the same to the brazen Meridian, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon; after this, roll the Globe either Eastward or Westward according to the time of the Day, till the Index point at the given Hour. Then fix the Globe in that Position, and bring back the Index again to Noon, and move the Globe from West to East, till the Sun's Place marked in the Ecliptic, coincide with the Eastern Horizon; which done, reckon upon the Horary Circle the number of Hours between the Index and Noon (or the upper Figure of 12.) for that is the number of Hours from Sun rising for that Day in the given Place, or the true Babylonick Hour desired.   

Prob. 30. The Babylonick Hour being given, to find the Hour of the Day at any time, according to our way of reckoning in England.  
Elevate the Pole according to the given Latitude of the Place, and marking the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, bring the same to the brazen Meridian, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon. Then Rowl the Globe Westward till the Index point at the given Hour from Sun rising, and fixing the Globe in that Situation, bring the Index back again to Noon, and turn the Globe backwards till the Sun's Place marked in the Ecliptic return to the same Semicircle of the brazen Meridian from whence it came; which done, observe what Hour the Index of the Horary Circle pointeth at, for the same is the Hour desired.   

Prob. 31. The Hour of the Day being given according to our way of reckoning in England, to find thereby the Italic Hour at any time.  
The Italic Hour is the number of Hours from Sun setting at all times of the Year, to Sun setting the next following Day. For the ready finding of such Hours, 
a Prob. 2.  elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the Place, and 
b Prob. 6.  noting the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic upon the given Day, bring the same to the brazen Meridian, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon. Then turn the Globe either East or West according to the time of the Day, till the Index point at the given Hour, and fixing the Globe in that Situation, bring the Index back to Noon. Which done, turn the Globe about Eastwards till the mark of the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic coincide with the Western Horizon, and observe how many Hours there are between the upper Figure of 12. and the Index (reckoning them Eastward as the Globe moved) for these are the Hours from Sunset, or the Italic Hour desired.   

Prob. 32. The Italic Hour being given, to find thereby the Hour of the Day at any time according to our way of reckoning in England.  
This being the Reverse of the former Problem, 
a Prob. 2.  elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the given Place, and noting the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, bring the same to the Western Horizon, and setting the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, turn the Globe Westward till the Index point at 
b Prob. 31.  the Italic Hour given; then fixing the Globe in that Position, bring the Index back to Noon, and move the Globe backward till the Mark of the Sun's Place return to the same Semicircle of the brazen Meridian from whence it came. Which done, observe how many Hours are between Noon and the Index, (reckoning them from West to East) for those are the Hours desired according to our way of reckoning in England.   

Prob. 33. The Hour of the Day being exactly given according to our way of reckoning in England, to find thereby the Judaical Hour at any time.  
By the Judaical Hour we understand the exact Time of the Day according to the Ancient Jews, who in reckoning their time, divided the Artificial Day into twelve Hours, and the Night into as many, which Hours proved every Day unequal in extent (unless in Places exactly under the Equator) they still decreasing or increasing according to the Seasons of the Year, or the various Declination of the Sun. For the finding of which Hours, observe the following Method, 
a Prob. 2.  Elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the given Place, and 
b Prob. 6.  marking the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic at that time, bring it to the Eastern Horizon, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon; then turn the Globe about till that place marked in the Ecliptic come to the Western Horizon, and observe the number of Hours between Noon and the Index, these being the Hours of which the given Day doth consist, which number you are to Note down, and 
c Prob. 29, 31.  to find what Hour from Sunrising corresponds with the given Hour, or from Sunsetting, if the given Hour be after Sunsetting. Which done, work by the following Proportion. As the number of Hours, whereof the given Day consisteth, (viz. those noted down) is to 12; so is the number of Hours from Sunrising, (if it be an Hour of the Day) or from Sunsetting (if an Hour of the Night) to a fourth proportional, which is the number desired, viz. the Judaical Hour at the time given.   

Prob. 34. The Judaical Hour being given, to find thereby the Hour of the Day at any time, according to our way of reckoning in England.  
Elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the given Place, and finding the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic at the time given, bring the same to the Eastern Horizon, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, than Rowl the Globe Westward, till the Sun's Place coincide with the Western Horizon, and the Index will point at the number of equal Hours. whereof that Day consisteth. Which Number you are to note down, and bring the Sun's Place to the brazen Meridian, and setting the Index again at Noon, turn the Globe about till the Sun's Place coincide with the Eastern Horizon, and the Index will point at the Hour when the Sun riseth in the given Place. Which done, work by the following Proportion. As 12 is to the given Number of Judaical Hours, so is the Length of the Day in equal Hours (formerly found out) to a fourth proportional, which is the Number desired, viz. the Hour of the Day according to our way of reckoning in England. Only note, That if the fourth proportional be less than 12, you are to add the same to the Hour of Sunrising, and the Product will give the Number of Hours before Noon for that Day; but if it be more than 12, then Subtract it from 12, and the Remainder will give the Hour of the Day for the Afternoon.   

Prob. 35. To find the true Area of the five Zones in square Measure, allowing 60 Miles to one Degree in the Equator.  
The Breadth of the Torrid Zone being 47 Degrees which reduced to Miles, make 2820; each of the Temperate 43 Degrees, which make 2580; and each of the Frigid 23 Degrees ½, which make 1410 Miles. The true Area of each of those Zones may be found in Square Measure by the following Proportion. (1.) For the Torrid. The Area of the whole Globe being found, (per Prob. 1.) say as Rad. to the Sine of 47; so is the ½ the Area of the Globe, to the Area of the Torrid Zone. (2.) For each of the Temperate Zones; say as Rad. to the difference of the Sins of 23½ and 66½; so is ½ Arch of the Globe to the Area of one of the Temperate Zones. Lastly, For the Frigid Zones, add ½ Area of the Torrid to the whole Area of one of the Temperate, and Subtract the Product from ½ Area of the Globe, and the Remainder will give the true Area of either of the Frigid Zones.   

Prob. 36. A Place being given on the Globe; to find those which have the same Hour of the Day with that in the given Place, as also that have the contrary Hours, i. e. Midnight in the one, when it's Midday in the other.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and observe what Places are then exactly under that Semicircle of the said Meridian, for the People in them have the same Hour with that they have in the given Place. The Globe continuing in that Position, set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, and turn the Globe till the Index point at Midnight, and observe that Places are then in that Semicircle of the Meridian, for the Inhabitants of those Places do reckon their Hours contrary to these in the given Place.   

Prob. 37. The Hour of the Day being given in any place, to find those places of the Earth where it's either Noon or Midnight, or any other particular Hour at the same time.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at the Hour of the Day in that place. Then turn about the Globe till the Index point at the upper Figure of XII, and observe what Places are exactly under the upper Semicircle of the brazen Meridian, for in them its Midday at the time given. Which done, turn the Globe about till the Index point at the lower Figure of XII, and what Places are then in the lower Semicircle of the Meridian, in them its Midnight at the given Time. After the same manner we may find those Places that have any other particular Hour at the Time given, by moving the Globe till the Index point at the Hour desired, and observing the Places that are then under the brazen Meridian.   

Prob. 38. The Day and Hour being given, to find by the Globe that particular Place of the Earth, to which the Sun is vertical at that very time.  
The Sun's Place in the Ecliptic 
a Prob 6.  being found, and brought to the brazen Meridian, make a Mark above the same with Chalk; then 
b Prob. 37.  find those Places of the Earth, in whose Meridian the Sun is at that instant, and bring them to the brazen Meridian. Which done, observe narrowly that individual Part of the Earth which falls exactly under the aforesaid Mark in the brazen Meridian, for that is the particular Place, to which the Sun is vertical at that very time.   

Prob. 39 The Day and Hour of the Day being given, to find those Places on the Globe, in which the. Sun then riseth. 2dly, Those in which he then setteth. 3dly, Those to whom its Midday. And Lastly, Those Places that are actually enlightened, and those that are not.  
Find that Place of the 
a Prob. 38.  Globe, to which the Sun is vertical at the given Time, and bringing the same to the brazen Meridian, 
b Prob. 2.  elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the said Place. The Globe being fixed in that Position, observe what Places are in the Western Semicircle of the Horizon, for in them the Sun riseth at that time. 2dly, Those in the Eastern Semicircle, for in them the Sun setteth. 3dly, Those that are exactly under the brazen Meridian, for in them it's Mid day. And Lastly, All those upon the úpper Hemisphere of the Globe, for they are actually enlightened, and those upon the lower are then in darkness, or deprived of the Sun at that very time.   

Prob. 40. The Month and Day being given, as also the Place of the Moon in the Zodiac, and her true Latitude, to find thereby the exact Hour when she shall rise and set, together with her Southing (or coming to the Meridian) of the given Place.  
The Moon's Place in the Zodiac may be found ready enough at any time by an ordinary Almanac, and her Latitude (which is her distance from the Ecliptic) by applying the Semicircle of Position to her Place in the Zodiac. For the Solution of the Problem, 
a Prob. 2.  elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the given Place, and the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic at that time being 
b Prob. 6.  found, and marked with Chalk, as also the Moon's Place at the same time: Bring the Sun's Place to the brazen Meridian, and set the Index of the Horary Circle at Noon, and turn the Globe till the Moon's Place successively coincide with the Eastern and Western-side of the Horizon, as also the brazen Meridian, and the Index will point, at those various times, the particular Hour of her Rising, Setting, and Southing.   

Prob. 41. The Day and Hour of either a Solar or Lunar Eclipse being known, to find by the Globe all those Places in which the same will be visible.  
Mark the Sun's Place in the 
a Prob. 6.  Ecliptic for the given Day, as also the opposite Point thereto, which is the Place of the Moon at that time. Then find 
b Prob. 38.  that Place of the Globe to which the Sun is vertical at the given Hour, and bring the same to the Pole (or vertical Point) of the wooden Horizon, and fixing the Globe in that Situation, observe what Places are in the upper Hemisphere, for in most of them will the Sun be visible during his Eclipse. As for the Lunar Eclipse, you are to find 
c Prob. 9  the Antipodes of that place which hath the Sun vertical at the given Hour, and bringing the same to the Pole of the wooden Horizon, observe (as formerly) what Places are in the upper Hemisphere of the Globe, for in such will the Moon be visible during her Eclipse, except those that are very near unto, or actually in the Horizon.   

Prob. 42. A Place being given on the Globe, to find the true Situation thereof from all other Places desired, or how it beareth in respect of such Places.  
The various Places desired [which are supposed to be some of those that lie upon the intermediate Points of the Compass] being pitched upon, bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and elevate the Pole according to its Latitude, and fixing the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, apply the same successively to the Places desired, and the lower Part of the said Quadrant will intersect the wooden Horizon at those various Points of the Compass (inscribed upon the said Circle) according to the true bearing of the given Place, in respect of the Places desired.   

Prob. 43. A Place being given on the Globe, to find all other Places that are situated from the same, upon any desired Point of the Compass.  
Elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the given Place, and bring the said Place to the brazen Meridian, and fixing the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, apply the lower Part thereof to the desired Point of the Compass upon the wooden Horizon; and observe what Places are exactly under the Edge of the said Quadrant, for those are the Places that are situated from, or bear off, the given Place according to the desired Point of the Compass.   

Prob. 44. Two Places being given on the Globe, to find the true distance between them.  
The two Places given must of necessity lie under either the same Meridian, the same Parallel of Latitude, or else differ both in Longitude and Latitude. (1.) If they lie under the same Meridian, then bring them both to the brazen Meridian, and observe the number of Degrees of Latitude comprehended between them, which being reduced into Leagues or Miles, will give the Distance required. (2.) If they lie under the same Parallel of Latitude, then bring them separately to the brazen Meridian, and observe the Number of Degrees between them upon the Equator; which done, enter the Table [page 9] with the Latitude of the given Places, and seeing thereby how many Miles in that Parallel are answerable to one Degree in the Equator, multiply those Miles by the aforesaid number of Degrees upon the Equator, and the Product will give the Distance required. But, Lastly, if the two Places given do differ both in Longitude and Latitude, then bring one of them to the vertical Point of the brazen Meridian, and extending the Quadrant of Altitude to the other, observe upon the said Quadrant the number of Degrees between them, which being reduced into Leagues or Miles, will give the distance required. This third Case of the Problem being most considerable and occurring more frequently than the other two, we shall here annex another way of performing the same besides the Globe, and that is by resolving a Spherical Triangle, two Sides whereof (viz. the Compliments of the different Latitudes, or the distance of the given Places from the Poles) are not only given, but also the Angle comprehended between them, (it being equal to the difference of their Longitude) by which Sides and Angle given, we may very easily find the third Side by the noted Rules in Trigonometry, which third Side is the distance required.   

Prob. 45. A Place being given on the Globe, and its true Distance from a second place, to find thereby all other Places of the Earth that are of the same distance from the given Place.  
Bring the given Place to the brazen Meridian, and elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the said Place; then fix the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, and reckon upon the said Quadrant, the given Distance between the first and second Place (providing the same be under 90 Degrees, otherwise you must use the Semicircle of Position) and making a Mark where the reckoning ends, and moving the said Quadrant or Semicircle quite round upon the Surface of the Globe, all Places passing under that Mark, are those desired.   

Prob. 46. The Latitude of two Places being given, and how one of them beareth off the other, to find thereby the true Distance between them.  
For the Solution of this Problem. Suppose the first Meridian to be the true Meridian of one of the given Places, particularly that whose bearing is unknown. Upon the upper Semicircle of that Meridian, mark the Latitude of the said Place; then elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the other place, and fixing the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, extend the same to the given Point of the Compass upon the wooden Horizon, and turn the Globe about till the Point marked in the aforesaid Meridian coincide with the said Quadrant. Which done, reckon upon that Quadrant the number of Degrees between that Point marked in the first Meridian and the vertical Point; which Degrees being converted into Leagues or Miles, will give the Distance required.   

Prob. 47. The Longitude of two Places being given, as also the Latitude of one of them, and its Bearing from the other, to find thereby the true Distance between them.  
For the Solution of this Problem, suppose the first Meridian to be the true Meridian of the Place, whose Latitude is unknown. Reckon from that Meridian upon the Equator the number of Degrees equal to the difference of Longitude of the two Places, and make a Mark where the reckoning ends, and bringing the same to the brazen Meridian, (which represents the Meridian of the second Place) reckon upon it the Degrees of the given Latitude; and fixing the Globe in that Situation, raise the Pole according to that Latitude, and fix the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, extending the other extremity thereof to the given Point of the Compass upon the wooden Horizon. The Globe continuing in this Position, observe that Point of the Surface, where the Quadrant of Altitude intersects the first Meridian, for the same representeth the second Place, and that Arch of the Quadrant between the said Point and the Zenith, being converted into Leagues or Miles, will give the Distance required.   

Prob. 48. The Distance between two Places lying under the same Meridian, being given, as also their respective bearing from a third Place, to find thereby that Place with its true Distance from the other two.  
The given Distance being reckoned any where upon the brazen Meridian, and those places of the Globe exactly under the beginning and end of that Reckoning being marked, raise the Pole according to the Latitude of one of them, (which for Distinctions sake we'll term the first Place) and fixing the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, extend the other extremity thereof to the given Point of the Compass upon the wooden Horizon, according as the said first Place beareth off the third unknown, and make a small Tract with Chalk upon the Globe, where the Edge of the Quadrant passeth along. Which done, elevate the Pole according to the Latitude of the second Place, and fixing the Quadrant of Altitude in the Zenith, extend the same (as formerly) to the given Point of the Compass upon the wooden Horizon, and observe where the said Quadrant intersects the aforesaid Tract of Chalk made upon the Surface of the Globe, for that is the third Place desired, whose Distance from the other two may be found by the foregoing Problem.  
These are the Chief Problems performable by the Terrestrial Globe, as also the manner of their Performance. But if the Reader desire more, let him Consult Varenius, (his Geographia Generalis) from whom we have borrowed several of those abovementioned. Now followeth according to our proposed Method    

SECT. III.  
Containing some plain Geographical Theorems.  
Theor. 1. THE Latitude of any Place is always equal to the Elevation of the Pole in the same Place. & econtrá.  
Theor. 2. The Elevation of the Equator in any Place is always equal to the Compliment of the Latitude in the same place, & vice versâ.  
Theor. 3. Those Places that lie under the Equinoctial Line, have nothing of Latitude, it being there that the Calculation of Latitude begins.  
Theor. 4. Those Places that lie exactly under the two Poles have the greatest Latitude, it being there that the Calculation of Latitude doth end.  
Theor. 5. Those Places that lie exactly under the first Meridian, have nothing of Longitude, it being there that the Calculation of Longitude begins.  
Theor. 6. Those Places that are immediately adjacent to the Western - side of the first Meridian have the greatest Longitude, it being there that the Calculation of Longitude doth end.  
Theor. 7. All Places lying upon either side of the Equator, have the greater or lesser Latitude, according to their respective Distance therefrom.  
Theor. 8. All Places lying upon either side of the Equator, and exactly under the same, have the greater or lesser Longitude, according to their respective Distance from the first Meridian.  
Theor. 9 That particular Place of the Earth lying exactly under the Intersection of the first Meridian and Equinoctail Line, hath neither Longitude nor Latitude.  
Theor. 10. No place of the Earth is distant from another above 10800 Italian Miles, allowing 60 to one Degree in the Equator.  
Theor. 11. No Place of the Earth is distant from its proper Antipodes (diametrically taken) above 7200 Italian Miles, still allowing 60 to one Degree in the Equator.  
Theor. 12. The sensible Horizon of every Place doth as often change, as we happen to change the Place itself.  
Theor. 13. The apparent Semediameter of the sensible Horizon in most Places, doth frequently vary according to the Refraction of the Sun - beams.  
Theor. 14. All Countries upon the Face of the whole Earth do equally enjoy the Light of the Sun (in respect of Time) and are equally deprived of the benefit thereof.  
Theor. 15. In all Places on the Globe of the Earth, (save exactly under the two Poles) the Days and Nights are of an equal Length (viz. twelve Hours each) when the Sun cometh to the Equinoctial. Line.  
Theor. 16. In all Places between the Equinoctial and the two Poles, the Days and Nights are never equal to one another, save only those two times of the Year, when the Sun entereth the Signs of Aries and Libra.  
Theor. 17. The nearer any Place is to the Line, the lesser is the difference between the Length of the Artificial Days and Nights in the said Place; and on the contrary, the farther removed, the greater.  
Theor. 18. In all Places lying under the same Parallel of Latitude, the Days and Nights are of the same extent, and that at all times of the Year.  
Theor. 19 Three or more Places being given on the Globe that lie between the Equator and either of the Poles, and equidistant from one another; the Extent of the longest Day in those Places doth not increase proportionably to the distance of the Places themselves.  
Theor. 20. Three or more Places being given on the Globe that lie between the Equator and the Poles, in which the Length of the longest Day doth equally increase; the distance between the Paralles of those Places is not equal to one another.  
Theor. 21. Three or more Places being given on the Globe, whose distance from the Equator to either Pole exceeds one another in Arithmetical Proportion: The Length of the longest Day in one doth not keep the same Analogy to that in the other, according to the Proportion of their distance.  
Theor. 22. In all Places of the Torrid Zone, the Morning and Evening Twilight is least; in the Frigid, greatest; and in the Temperate it's a Medium between the two.  
Theor. 23. To all Places lying within the Torrid Zone, the Sun is duly Vertical twice a Year; to those under the Tropics, once; but to them in the Temperate and Frigid, never.  
Theor. 24. In all Places of the two Frigid Zones, the Sun appeareth every Year without setting for a certain number of Days, and disappeareth for the same space of time. And the nearer unto, or the farther from the Pole those places are, the longer or shorter is his continued Presence in, or Absence from the same.  
Theor. 25. In all places exactly under the Arctic and Antarctick Circles, the Sun (at his greatest Declination) appeareth every Year for one Day completely without setting, and entirely disappeareth another, but daily riseth and setteth in those Places at all other times, as elsewhere.  
Theor. 26. In all places between the Equator and the North Pole, the longest Day and shortest Night, is always when the Sun hath the greatest Northern Declination; and the shortest Day and longest Night, when he hath the greatest Southrens.  
Theor. 27. In all places between the Equator and the South Pole, the longest Day and shortest Night is always when the Sun hath the greatest Southern Declination; and the shortest Day and longest Night, when the greatest Northern  
Theor. 28. In all places situated under the Equinoctial Line, the Meridian Shadow of the Sun doth cast itself towards the North for one half of the Year, and towards the South during the other.  
Theor. 29. In all places lying under the Equinoctial Line, there is no Meridian Shadow on those two Days of the Year, that the Sun doth enter the Signs of Aries and Libra.  
Theor. 30. The nearer that places are unto, or the farther removed from the Equator, the shorter or longer accordingly is the Meridian Shadow of a Style perpendicularly erected in such places.  
Theor. 31. The farther that places are removed from the Equator (yet not surpassing 66 Degrees of Latitude) the greater is the Sun 's Amplitude, or that Arch of the Horizon between the Points of due East and West, and those in which the Sun riseth and setteth on the Days of the Summer and Winter Solstice.  
Theor. 32. In all places lying under the same Semi Circle of the Meridian, the Hours both of the Day and Night are always the same in one, as in the other.  
Theor. 33. In all places both of the North and Southern Hemispheres, that lie under opposite Parallels of Latitude, the Seasons of the Year are always the same in one, as in the other.  
Theor. 34. In all places situated in a Parallel Sphere, the Circle of the Sun 's Diurnal Motion runs always Parallel (or very near it) to the respective Horizon of such places.  
Theor. 35. In all places situated in a Right Sphere, the Circle of the Sun 's Diurnal Motion is still perpendicular (or very near it) to the respective Horizon of such places.  
Theor. 36. In all places situated in an Oblique Sphere, the Circle of the Sun 's Diurnal Motion is always Oblique unto, or cutteth the Horizon of such places at unequal Angles.  
Theor. 37. If the difference of Longitude in two places be exactly 15 Degrees. The People residing in the Eastmost of them will reckon the time of the Day sooner by one Hour, than those in the other. If the difference be 30 Degrees, then they'll reckon their Hours sooner by 2. If 45 Degrees, by 3. and if 60, then by 4, etc.  
Theor. 38. If People residing in two distinct places do differ exactly one Hour in reckoning their time (it being only Noon to one, when one Afternoon to the other) the true distance between the respective Meridian's of those places is exactly 15 Degrees upon the Equator. If they differ 2 Hours, the distance is 30 Degrees. If 3, it's 45. and if 4, it's completely 60, etc.  
Theor. 39 If a Ship set out from any Port, and steering Eastward doth entirely surround the Globe of the Earth, the People of the said Ship in reckoning their time, will gain one Day completely at their return, or count one more than those residing at the said Port. If Westward, then they'll lose one, or reckon one less.  
Theor. 40. If two Ships set out from the same Port at the same time, and both surround the Globe of the Earth, one steering East, and the other Westward, they'll differ from one another in reckoning their time two Days completely at their return, even suppose they happen to arrive on the same Day. If they surround the Earth twice (steering as aforesaid) they'll differ 4 Days; if thrice, then 6, etc.  
Theor. 41. If several Ships set out from the same Port, either at the same, or different times, and do all surround the Globe of the Earth, some steering due South, and others due North, and arrive again at the same Port; the respective People of those different Ships at their return will not differ from one another in reckoning their time, nor from those who reside at the said Port.  
These are the chief Geographical Theorems, or self-evident Truths clearly deduclble from the foregoing Problems, and to these we might add a great many more; but leaving such Truths, we pass to some others (in pursuance of our proposed Method) and such as are equally certain with the aforesaid Theorems, though not so apparent, yet probably more diverting. Therefore followeth   

SECT. IV. Containing some amazing Geographical Paradoxes.  
Par. 1. THERE are two remarkable Places on the Globe of the Earth, in which there is only one Day and one Night throughout the whole Year.  
Par. 2. There are also some Places on the Earth, in which it is neither Day nor Night at a certain time of the Year, for the space of twenty four Hours.  
Par. 3. There is a certain Place of the Earth, at which if two Men should chance to meet, one would stand upright upon the Soles of the others Feet, and neither of them should feel the others weight, and yet both should retain their Natural Posture.  
Par. 4. There is also a certain Place of the Earth, where a Fire being made, neither Flame nor Smoke would ascend, but move circularly about the Fire. Moreover, if in that Place one should fix a smooth or plain Table without any Ledges whatsoever, and pour thereon a large Quantity of Water, not one Drop thereof could run over the said Table, but would raise itself up in a large heap.  
Par. 5. There is a certain Place on the Globe, of a considerable Southern Latitude, that hath both the greatest and least Degree of Longitude.  
Par. 6. There are three remarkable Places on the Globe, that differ both in Longitude and Latitude, and yet all lie under one and the same Meridian.  
Par. 7. There are three remarkable Places on the Continent of Europe, that lie under three different Meridian's, and yet all agree both in Longitude and Latitude.  
Par. 8. There is a certain Island in the Aegaean Sea, upon which, if two Children were brought forth at the same instant of time, and living together for many Years, should both expire on the same Day, yea, at the same Hour and Minute of that Day, yet the Life of one would surpass the Life of the other by divers Months.  
Par. 9 There are two observable Places belonging to Asia, that lie under the same Meridian, and of a small distance from one another, and yet the respective Inhabitants of them in reckoning their time, do differ an entire Natural Day every Week.  
Par. 10. There is a particular Place of the Earth, where the Winds (though frequently veering round the Compass) do always blow from the North Point.  
Par. 11. There is a certain Hill in the South of Bohemia, on whose Top, if an Equinoctial Sundial be duly erected, a Man that is Stone-blind may know the Hour of the Day by the same, if the Sun shines.  
Par. 12. There is a considerable number of places lying within the Torrid Zone, in any of which, if a certain kind of Sundial be duly erected, the Shadow will go back several Degrees upon the same, at a certain time of the Year, and that twice every Day for the space of divers Weeks, yet no ways derogating from that miraculous returning of the Shadow upon the Dial of Ahaz in the Days of King Hezekiah.  
Par. 13. There is a certain Island in the vast Atlantic Ocean, which being descried by a Ship at Sea, and bearing due East of the said Ship, at twelve Leagues distance per Estimation; The truest Course for hitting of the said Island is to steer six Leagues due East, and just as many due West.  
Par. 14. There is a remarkable Place on the Globe of the Earth, of a very pure and wholesome Air to breath in, yet of such a strange and detestable Quality, that it's absolutely impossible for two of the intirest Friends that ever breathed, to continue in the same, in Mutual Love and Friendship for the space of two Minutes of time.  
Par. 15. There is a certain Island in the Baltic Sea, to whose Inhabitants the Body of the Sun is clearly visible in the Morning before he ariseth, and likewise in the Evening after he is set.  
Par. 16. There is a certain Village in the Kingdom of Naples, situated in a very low Valley, and yet the Sun is nearer to the Inhabitants thereof every Noon by 3000 Miles, and upwards, than when he either riseth or setteth to those of the said Village.  
Par. 17. There is a certain Village in the South of Great Britain, to whose Inhabitants the Body of the Sun is less visible about the Winter Solstice, than to those who reside upon the Island of Ice-land.  
Par. 18. There is a vast Country in Ethiopia Superior, to whose Inhabitants the Body of the Moon doth always appear to be most enlightened when she's least enlightened; and to be least when most.  
Par. 19 There is a certain Island, (whereof mention is made by several of our latest Geographers) whose Inhabitants cannot properly be reckoned either Male or Female, nor altogether Hermaphrodites; yet such is their peculiar Quality, that they're seldom liable unto either Hunger or Thirst, Cold or Heat, Joy or Sorrow, Hopes or Fears, or any such of the common Attendants of Human Life.  
Par. 20. There is a remarkable Place of the Earth of a considerable Southern Latitude, from whose Meridian the Sun removeth not for several Days at a certain time of the Year.  
Par. 21. There is a certain Place of the Earth of a considerable Northern Latitude, where though the Days and Nights (even when shortest) do consist of several Hours; yet in that place its Midday or Noon every Quarter of an Hour.  
Par. 22. There are divers Places on the Globe of the Earth, where the Sun and Moon, yea, and all the Planets, do actually rise and set according to their various Motions, but never any of the fixed Stars.  
Par. 23. There is a large and famous Country on the Continent of Africa, many of whose Inhabitants are born perfectly Deaf, and others Stone-blind, and continue so during their whole Lives; and yet such is the amazing Faculty of those Persons, that the Deaf are as capable to judge of Sounds as those that hear, and the Blind of Colours as they who see.  
Par. 24. There is a certain People in South America, who are properly furnished with only one of the five Senses, viz. that of Touching, and yet they can both Hear and See, Taste and Smell, and that as nicely as we Europeans, who have all the Five.  
Par. 25. There is a certain Country in South America, many of whose Savage Inhabitants are such unheard-off Cannibals, that they not only feed upon Human Flesh; but also some of them do actually eat themselves, and yet they commonly survive that strange Repast.  
Par. 26. There is a remarkable River on the Continent of Europe, over which there is a Bridge of such a breadth, that above three thousand Men abreast may pass along upon the same, and that without crowding one another in the least.  
Par. 27. There is a large and spacious Plain in a certain Country of Asia, able to contain six hundred thousand Men drawn up in Battle Array; which number of Men being actually brought thither, and there drawn up, it were absolutely impossible for any more, than one single Person, to stand upright upon the said Plain.  
Par. 28. There is a certain European City, whose Buildings being generally of firm Stone, are (for the most part) of a prodigious height, and exceeding strong; and yet it is most certain that the Walls of those Buildings are not parallel to one another, nor perpendicular to the Plain on which they are built.  
Par. 29. There is a certain City in the Southern Part of China, whose Inhabitants (both Male and Female) do observe almost the same Posture and Gate in Walking, as we Europeans; and yet they frequently appear to Strangers, as if they walked on their Heads.  
Par. 30. There are ten Places of the Earth, distant from one another three hundred Miles and upwards, and yet none of them hath either Longitude or Latitude.  
Par. 31. There are two distinct Places of the Earth lying under the same Meridian, whose Difference of Latitude is sixty Degrees completely; and yet the true Distance between those two Places, doth not really surpass sixty Italian Miles.  
Par. 32. There are also two distinct Places of the Earth, lying under the Equinoctial Line, whose difference of Longitude is completely 86 Degrees ½, and yet the true Distance between those two Places, is not full eighty six Italian Miles.  
Par. 33. There are three distinct Places of the Earth, all differing both in Longitude and Latitude, and distant from one another two thousand Miles completely, and yet they do all bear upon one and the same Point of the Compass.  
Par. 34. There are three distinct Places on the Continent of Europe, equidistant from one another (they making a true Equilateral Triangle, each of whose sides doth consist of a thousand Miles) and yet there is a fourth Place so situated in respect of the other three, that a Man may travel on Foot from it to any of the other three, in the space of one Artificial Day at a certain time of the Year; and that without the least hurry or fatigue whatsoever.  
Par. 35. There are three distinct Places on the Continent of Europe lying under the same Meridian, and at such a distance, that the Latitude of the third surpasseth that of the second by so many Degrees and Minutes exactly, as the second surpasseth the first; and yet the true Distance of the first and third from the second (or Intermediat Place) is not the same by a great many Miles.  
Par. 36. There are two distinct Places on the Continent of Europe, so situated in respect of one another, that though the first doth lie East from the second, yet the second is not West from the first, and yet both of them are under the same Parallel of Latitude.  
Par. 37. There is a certain European Island, the Northmost Part whereof doth frequently alter both its Longitude and Latitude.  
Par. 38. There is a certain Place in the Island of Great Britain, where the Stars are always visible at any time of the Day, if the Horizon be not overcast with Clouds.  
Par. 39 It may be clearly demonstrated by the Terrestrial Globe, That it is not above Twenty four hours Sailing from the River of Thames in England to the City of Messina in Sicily, at a certain time of the Year, providing there be a brisk North Wind, a light Frigate, and an Azimuth Compass.  
These are the chief Paradoxical Positions in matters of Geography, which mainly depend on a thorough Knowledge of the Globe; and though it is highly probable, that they'll appear to some as the greatest of Fables; yet we may boldly affirm, That they're not only equally certain with the aforesaid Theorems, but also we are well-assured that there's no Mathematical Demonstration of Euclid, more infallibly true in its self, than is every one of them. However we think it not fit to pull off the Vizor, or expose those masked Truths to public View, since to endeavour the unmasking of them may prove a private Diversion, both pleasant and profitable to the Ingenious Reader at his more vacant Hours; we hastening in the mean time to the last Thing proposed, viz.   

SECT. V. Concerning Land and Water.  
THE Surface of the Terraqueous Globe [too which we entirely restrict ourselves both here, and in the following Part of this Treatise] being always considered by Geographers as a Supersicies composed of Land and Water, as its sole constituent Parts; and these Parts being subdivided (page 13.) as followeth, viz. 

Land into  
Continents,  
Isthmus,  
Islands,  
Promontories,  
Peninsula's,  
Mountains.   

Water into  
Oceans,  
Straits,  
Seas,  
Lakes,  
Gulfs,  
Rivers.    
Of all these separately, and in their Order. Therefore  

§. 1. Of CONTINENTS.  
Commonly reckoned Four, viz. those 

of  
Europe,  
Africa,  
Asia,  
America.    
Europe North Scandinavia— found from W. to E. Muscovia [or Russia]— Middle France— found from W. to E. Germany— Poland— South Spain— found from W. to E. Italy— Turkey in Europe— Asia North, comprehending the vast Body of Tartary. South China— found from E. to W. India— Persia— Turkey in Asia—  
Africa Egypt — found from N. to S. Barbary Bildulgerid — Zaara or the Desert — Land of the Negroes — Guinea — Nubia — Ethiopia Interior— Exterior— America North Mexico or New Spain— from S. to N. New Mexico or Nova Granada— Florida— Terra Canadensis— Terra Arctica— South Terra Firma— from N. to S. Peru— Land of the Amazons— Brasil— Chyli— Paraguay— Terra Magellanica— Terra Antarctica—   

§. 2. Of ISLANDS.  
They belong either  

to  
Europe,  
Africa,  
Asia,  
America.   
Europe. The Scandinavian Islands— Lying in the N. and Baltick-Sea. The Island of Ice-land— W. of Scandinavia. The Britannic Islands— N. of France. The Azores— W. of Spain. The Mediterranean Islands— S. of Europe. Asia. The Japan Islands— E. of China. The Philippin— S. W. of Japan The Isles des larron's— E. of the Philippin. The Moloccoes— S. of the Philippin. The Islands of the Sund— W. of the Moluccoes. Ceylon and the Maldives— W. of the Isles of Sund. Africa. more Remarkable Madagascar— E. of Ethiopia. The Isles of Cape Verde W. of Negroland. The Canary Islands W. of Bildulgerid. The Madera— W. of Barbary. Less Remarkable The Isles of Comore N. W. of Madagascar. St. Thomas' Island— W. of Ethiopia. Lat. 00 The Princess Island W. of Ethiopia. Lat. 3. St. Helena— S. W. of St. Thomas. Isle of Ascention— N. E. of St. Helena. America North are California— W. of Nova Granada. Newfoundland— E. of Terra Canadensis. Middle are the Antilles Greater Cuba— E. of New Spain. Jamaica Hispaniola Port-rito Lesser Caribees— S. E. of the greater Antilles. Lucayes— S. E. of Florida. Sotovento— N. of Terra Firma. Bermudas— E. of Florida. South is Terra del Fuogo— S. of Terra Magellanica.   

§. 3. Of PENINSULA's.  
Europe. Juitland— adjacent to Germany. Morea— Greece. Taurica Chersonesus— Little Tartary. Asia Peninsula Indiae intra Gangem the Continent of Asia extra Gangem the Continent Mallaca [or Chersonese d'or]— Peninsula Indiae intra Gangem. In Africa is none but Africa itself the W. of Asia. America Mexico or North America— South America. Peru or South America— North   

§. 4. Of ISTHMUS.  
In Europe are the Isthmus of Corinth— joining Morea to Greece. Taurica Chersonesus Taurica Chersonesus to Little Tartary. In Asia is the Isthmus of Malacca Malacca to Penins. Indiae intra Gangem. In Africa is the Isthmus of Swez— Africa to Asia. In America is the Isthmus of Panama Mexico and Peru.   

§. 5. Of PROMONTORIES or CAPES.  
In Europe Cape Nord— Extending from The Northmost part of Norway. Cape la Hogue— The N. of France. The Landsend— The S. W. of England. The Lizard— The S. The Start— The S. Cape de Finisterra— The W. of Spain. Cape de Rocca— The W. Cape St. Vincent— The W. Asia Cape Ningpo— The E. of China. Cape Comorin— Penins. Indiae inter Gangem. Cape Razalgate— S. E. part of Arabia. Africa Cape Spartel— The W. of Barbary. Cape Verde— The W. of Negroeland. Cape of Good Hope— The S. of Ethiopia exterior. Cape of Guardifeu— The N. E. part of Ethiopia exterior America Cape de Florida— The S. of Florida. Cape de Coriente— The W. of New Spain. Cape Froward— The S. of Terra Magellanica. Cape Hoorn— The S. of Terra del Fuogo. Cape de S. Augustine— The E. of Brasil.   

§. 6. Of MOUNTAINS.  
Remarkable Mountains in Europe The Dolfrine Hills— To be seen Between Sweden and Norway. Boglowy— In the Souther. part of Moscovia. Hyperborean Mountains— In the Norther. part The Sevennes— In the South part of France. Auvergne— The Vauge— In Lorraine. Fitshtelberge— In circulating Bohemia. Schwartzwaldin— In the S. of Germany, viz. Suabia. The Carpathean Mount. In the South parts of Poland. The Pyrenaean Hills— Between Spain and France. The Alps— Between Italy and France. Germany. The Apennine Hills— Dividing Italy into East. West. Vesuvius [à Vulcano]— In the Kingdom of Naples. Balkan— In the N. of Macedon. The Holy Mount— In the E. of Macedon. Lacha— Between Thessaly and Macedon. The Grampion Hills— In Scotland, viz. S. of the River Dee. The Cheviot Hills— Between Scotland and England. Malvern Hills— In England, viz. Worcestershire. The Peake— In England, viz. Darbyshire. Snowdon— In Wales, viz. Carnarvenshire. Plinlimmon— In Wales, viz. Cardiganshire. Knock Patrick— In Ireland, viz. in the C. Limerick. Stromboli [à Vulcano] In a little Island W. of Naples. Aetna [à Vulcano]— In the Island of Sicily. Remarkable Mountains in Asia Imaus— To be seen In Tartary: Caucasus— Between Tartary. Mogul's Empire. Sardonix— On the N. of Penin intra Gangem. Guaco— In Peninsula Indiae intra Gangem. Taurus— reaching from E. to W. of all Asia. Adam's Pike— In the Island of Ceylon. Africa Montes Lybici— Between Zaara and Egypt— Atlas— In the W. of Barbary. Bildulgerid. Basili— In the N. of the Abyssine Empire. Amara— Under the Eq. in the same Empire Montes Lunae— Between Abyssine Empire. Monomotapa. Tenerife— In the Island of Tenerife. America The Apalachin Hills Between Florida. Terra Canadensis. The Andes— In S. America running from S. to N   

§. 7. Of OCEAN'S.  
Europe The Hyperborean Ocean Enclosing Europe in the North. The vast Western West. Asia Tartarean Ocean.— Asia on the North. China— East. Indian— South. Persian— Arabic Africa Oriental Ocean— Africa on the East. Ethiepick South. Atlantic West. Amer. Vast Eastern Ocean— America on the East. The Pacifick West.   

§. 8. Of SEAS.  
Europe Baltic Sea— Enclosed with Swedeland on the W. Poland in part E. Germany in part S. German Sea— with Scandinavia on the E. Britain— W. Irish Sea— with Britain— on the E. Ireland— W. Mediterranean Sea with Europe— on the N. Barbary— S. Euxine Sea— with part of Europe on the N. & W. part of Asia. S. and E.  
The Seas in the other three Parts of the world, are different Parts of the Ocean [except Mare Caspium in Asia] variously named according as they lie adjacent to different Countries.   

§. 9 Of GULFS.  
Europe Sinus Botnicas Bending up Northward into Swedeland. Sinus Finnicus Eastward Sinus Adriaticus N. W. between Italy. Turkey in Europe. Gulf of Lions N. into the S. of France. Gulf of Tarentum N. W. into the S. of Italy. Gulf of Lepanto E. N. E between Greece: Morca. Asia Persian Gulf— N. W. between Persia. Arabia Gulf of Bengal N. bet. Penins. Indiae intra Gangem. Penins. Indiae extra In Africa is the Arabian Gulf.— N. W. between Asia. Africa. America Gulf of Mexico W. Between Florida. Terra Firma. Button's Bay S. W. between Terra Canadensis. Terra Arcticá. Baffiu's Bay N. W. into Terra Arctica.   

§. 10. Of STRAITS.  
Europe Straits of Dover Joining The Germ. Ocean to the Engl. Channel. Straits of the Sound The Danish to the Baltic Sea. Straits of Gibraltar The Medit to the Western Ocean. Straits of Caffa Palus Meotis to Pontus Euxinus. Thracian Bosphorus Pontus Euxinus to the Propontis. The Hell●spont— Propontis to the Archipelagus. Veer of Messina One part of Mediter. to another. Book of Corsica One part of Mediter. to another. Asia Straits of the Sund The Indian and East Ocean. Straits of Ormus The Persian Gulf to the S. Ocean. In Africa is Babelmandel The Red Sea to the E. Ocean. America Hudson's Straits.— Button's Bay to the E Ocean. Fretum Davis Baffin's Bay to the E. Ocean. Magellanick Straits The vast E. and W. Ocean.   

§. 11. Of LAKES.  
Most remarkable Lakes in Europe, are Ladoga— Found towards the Eastern part of Swedeland. Jend— Ula— Peipus— Wener— Western part of Swedeland. Veter— Meler— Onega— Western part of Moscovia. Ilment— Constance— Geneva— Southern part of Germany. Lucern— Winander-mere North of England, viz. Lancashire. Wittles-mere Middle of England, viz. Huntingtonshire. Lough Ness— Northern part of Scotland. Lomond Southern Foil— Northern part of Ireland. Neagh— Northern Earn Northern Derge Middle Asia Corus— North part of Tartary. Kithack— North Kithay— Middle Piex— Eastern part of China. Tai— Chiamy— Northern part of India. Astamar— Northern part of Persia. Babaconbar Northern Burgian— Middle Asphaltis— South part of Palestine. Africa Elbuciara— Western part of Egypt. Lybia— Middle part of Zaara. Guard— Middle part of Negroeland. Borno— Eastern Niger— North of Ethiopia Interior. Aquili●●ia— Middle Sachaf— South Zaire— South parts of Ethiopia Exterior. Zambre— Zaflan— America Nicaragua South of New Spain. Mexico— Middle Parime— East part of Terra Firma. Titicaca— South part of Peru.   

§. 12. Of RIVERS.  

Those of Europe.  
Scandinavia Swedeland are Dalcarle Anciently Unknown— Running Eastward. Kimi Unknown— Southw. Torno Unknown— Elf Unknown— Denmark None remarkable  Norway  Moscovi. Volga— Rha— E. turning S Don— Tanais— E. turn. W. Dwina— Unknown— N. W. France Sein— Sequana— N. W. Loir— Ligeris— W. Rhone— Rhodanus— S. Garonne— Garumna— N. W. Germany Danube— Danubius or Ister E. Scheld— Scaldis— N. turn W Maes— Mosa— Rhine— Rhenus— N. W. Elm— Amasius— Weser— Visurgis— Elbe— Albus— Oder— Odera or Viadrus N. Poland Nieper— Boristhenes— S. E. Niester— Tyras— Bogg— Hypanis— Vistule— Unknown— N. W. Niemen— Unknown— Duna— Unknown—  
Spain Ebre— Anciently Iberus— Running S. E. Xucar— Suero— Guadalquivir— Batis— S. W. Gualiana— Anas— Tago— Tagus— Douro— Durius— W. in its main Body. Italy Po— Eridanus or Padus E. Adige— Athesis— Arno— Arnus— S. W. Tiber— Tiber— Volturno— Uulturnus— W. In European Turkey is the Danube Danubius or Ister E. Scotland Tay— Taus— E. Clyde— Glotta— N. W. Spey— Speia— N. dye— Dea, Diva, Ocasa E. Don— Dona— England Thames— Tamesis— E. Severn— Sabrina— S. W. Humber Ouse Abus Ure E. S. E. Trent Triginta N. in main Body. Tine— Tina— E. tweed— Tuesis— E. Medway— Vaga— N. turning E. Cam— Camus— N. Ireland Shannon— Sinus— S. W. Lee— Sauranus— E. Blackwater— Avenmoore— E. turning S, Barrow— Birgus— S. Lift— Libnius— N. E. Boyne— Buvinda, Boina  
A New Map of HISFANIA and PORTUGALLIA By Robt. Morden   

Those of Asia.  
Tartary Oby— Anciently Margus— Running W. turningN Ochardus Unkonwn— N. Tartar— Unknown— Palisanga Unknown— E. Chesel— Laxartus— W. China Croceus— Unknown— E. various turnings. Kiang— Unknown— E. India Ganges— Idem— S. Guenga— Not remarkable— E. Indus— Idem— S. W. Persia Abiamus— Oxus— W. Palimalon— Not remarkable— E. Ilment— Arabs— S. Bendimur— Bagradas. Agradatus. S. W. Tiriti— Euletis. Choaspes Hidaspes Sylli— Araxes. Arases.— Asiatick Turkey Tegil— Tigris— S. E. Prat— Euphrates—   

Those of Africa.  
In Egypt is the Nile— Anciently Nilus'— Running N. Barbary Guadilbarbara— Bagradas, Macra N. Major— Rubricatus— Bildulgerid Origin of Guadilbarbara Not remarkable N. W Major— Not remarkable Branches of Gir— Giras— S. E. In Zaara is the Body of Gir— Giras— S. E. In Negroeland is the 〈◊〉 Idem W. Gulma Guinea Sweria de Costa— Not remarkable S. Rivere de Volta— Not remarkable In Nubia is the River Nuba— Not remarkable N. E.  Exterior Zaire— Unknown W. Coanza— Unknown W. Ethiopia R. de Infanto— Unknown S. E. Zambre— Unknown S. E. R. de Spiritu S.— Unknown S. E. Interior is Nile its main Body Nilus— N.   

Those of America.  
In New Spain none remarkable Anciently  Running  In N. Granada is Rio deal Nort.— Unknown S. W. Florida is R. del Spiritu S.— Unknown S. Terra Canadensis The great River Canada Unknown E. Branch of the Canada The Connecticut Unknown S. Hudson's River Unknown Rivere de la Ware Unknown The Sesquahana Unknown The Patomeck Unknown In Terra Arctica none— Terra Firma R. de Paria or Orinoque Unknown N. R. de Madeline— Unknown S. Martha— Unknown Brafil Miary— Unknown N. E. Siope— Unknown N. S. Francis— Unknown E. Parama— Unknown S. W. In Amazonia is the Amazon with its Branches— Unknown N. E. In Peru none remarkable— Unknown Paraguay is Rio de la Plata S. E. Chili none considerable— Terra Magellanica none Terra Antarctica  
These are the most Remarkable Rivers in the World, as also their old Names, and how they run; which Rivers will be found very necessary for the better understanding of the Second Part of this Treatise, wherein we design to view all Remarkable Countries in their Situation, Extent, Division, and Subdivisions, and more, especially those of Europe. But since most of those Rivers abovementioned belonging to the Continent of Europe do consist of several considerable Branches very necessary to be known; we shall rehearse such Rivers, and annex to each of them their Principal Branches, all which may be readily found by travelling from the Mouth of the Rivers towards their Heads. Therefore  
Remarkable Branches of the Dwina are Wayma— Running S. W. Juga— W. Volga are Sosowoia— S. Occareca— N. E. Seine are L'Oyse— S. W. Marn— Yonne— N. W. Loir are Mayenne— S. Le Sarte— S. W. Le Loir— Vienne— N. W. Indre— le Cheer— Allier— Rhone are Durance— S. W. Isere— Saene— S. Garrone are Dardonne— W. Lot— Tarne— Danube are Pruth— S. Misone— S. E. Alouta— S. Morawa— N. Teyssa— S. Drove— E. Save— Inn— N. E. Iser— Lech— N. Iler— Scheld are Ruppel [running W.] augmented by Senne N. Dyle Demer W. Dender— N. Lis— N. E. Scarpe— Haisne— W. Elm are soft— W. Haise— Rhine are Lip— W Roer— Moselle— N. E. Lahn— S. W. Maine— W Neckar— Maese are Dommel— N. Niers— N. W. Roer— Ourt— Sambre— N. E. Semoy— W Chiers— Wiser are Aller [W.] augmented by Leine N. Ocker Fuld— Elbe are Ilmenow— N. W. Havel— Saaldre— N. Muldaw— Oder are Warta— W. Bober— N. Westritz— N. E. Nieper are Dizna— S. W. Przypiecz, or Pereptus— N. E. Vistul is the Bugg— N. turn W Niemen is the Vilna— W. Ebro are Segre— S. W. Cinca— S. E. Gallega— S. W. Xalo— N. E. Guadalquivir Xenil— W. Guardamena— S. W. Guadiana are none remarkable— Tago are Zatas— W. Zezer— S. Guadarran— Xaruma— Douro are Tonroes— N. W. Tormes— Arlanza— S. W. Po are Oglio— S E. Adda— Tesine— Tanero [running E. turning N.] augmented by Bormida  Stura— N E. Sesia— S. E. Dora Baltea— Adige is Bachiglione— S. Arno are Elsa— N. W. Sieve— E. turning S. Tiber are Quartitio— W. Nera— S. W. Chiane— S. E. Volturno, its chief Branch is Sabate— W.  
These are all the Remarkable Branches of the Chief Rivers on the Continent of Europe. And thus we are come to a Period, not only of this Section, but also of the First Part of this Treatise, having now performed those five Things at first proposed, which was to entertain the Reader with some Geographical Definitions, Problems, Theorems, and Paradoxes; as also a Transient Survey of the whole Surface of the Terraqueous Globe, as it consists of Land and Water. And so much for a General View thereof, Now followeth,     

   

Modern Geography. PART II. Comprehending a PARTICULAR VIEW OF THE Terraqueous GLOBE.  
BY a Particular View of the Terraqueous Globe, we understand a clear and exact Prospect of all remarkable Countries on the Face of the whole Earth, according as they are represented by particular Geographical Maps; as also a true and compendious Narrative of the chief. Observables relating either to them or their Inhabitants: All which may be briefly reduced to these following Heads; viz. their 

Situation,  
Extent,  
Division,  
Subdivision,  
Chief Towns,  
Name,  
Air,  
Soil,  
Commodities,  
Rarities,  
Archbishoprics,  
Bishoprics,  
Universities,  
Manners,  
Language,  
Government,  
Arms,  
Religion.    
In taking such a Prospect of all remarkable Countries, we shall begin with Europe, and travel through the various Divisions thereof in the same order as they are set down (page 43.) Therefore  

CHAP. I. Of EUROPE.  
The Continent of Europe being divided (Pag. 43.) into VIII. great Parts.  
Viz Scandinavia Swedeland Capital City Stockholm. Denmark Copenhagen. Norway Bergen. Moscovia or Russia— Moscow. France.— Paris. Germany— Vienna. Poland— Cracow. Spain— Madrid. Italy— Rome. Turkey in Europe— Constantinople.  
To these add the European Islands. The Chief of which  
are Great Britain.— Cap. C. Those of London. Edinburgh. Ireland.— That of Dublin.  
Of all these in their proper Places.  


SWEDEN & NORWAY    

SECT. I. Concerning Scandinavia.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 26 20 of Long. It's greatest Length is about 1030. 53 10 between 54 10 of Lat. Breadth is about 840. 71 06 Divided into the Kingdoms of Swedeland Ch. T. Stockholm. Denmark Copenhagen. Norway Bergen. Swedeland comprehends Scania— Chief Town Lunden— from S. to N. Gothland— Calmar— Swedeland prop. Stockholm— Lapland— Tornia— Finland— Abo— from N. to S. Ingria— Notteborg or Oresca— 〈◊〉— Riga— Denmark ●●●tland— Sleswick— from W. to E. 〈◊〉 Islands Copenhagen—  
Norway comprehends five Governments. Of which hereafter.  
More Particularly,  

§. 1. SWEDELAND.  
Scania contains the Provinces of Halland— Ch. Town Helmstat— W. to E. Bleking— Christianstat Schonen— Lunden, Southward. Gothland contains the Provinces of Vermelandia— Chief Town Carolstadt N. to S. in the West part. Dallia— Daleburge Westrogoth— Gottenburge Ostrogothia— Norkoping N. to S. in th' E. part Swedeland Smalandia— Calmar— Swedeland [properly so called] contains the Provinces of Sudermania— Nikoping— from S. to N. Nericia— Orebro— Westmania— Arosen— Uplandia— those of Opsal and Stockolm Gestricia— Geval— Dalcarlia— Hedemore— Helsingia— Hadswickwalt— Medelpandia— Selanger— Jemptia— Ressundt— Angermannia Hernosand— Lapland contains the Provinces of Uma Lapmark Uma— from S. to N. Pitha-Lapmark Pitha— Lula-Lapmark Lula— Tornia-Lapmark Tornia— Kimi-Lapmark Kimi— Finland contains the Provinces of Cajania— Cajaneburgh upon the Ula. N. Finland— Biorneberge W. to E. Tavastia— Tavastus— Savolaxia— Nyslot— Kexholmia— Kexholm— Carelia— Wiborg— E. to W. Nylandia— Borgo— S. Finland— Abo— Ingria contains the Provinces of Ingria propria Orcsca, or Notteborg N. to S. W. Ingermania— Caporio— Solouski— Juanagorod Livonia contains the Provinces of Lettenland— Riga— S. to N. Estland— Narva—   

§. 2. DENMARK.  
Being divided into The Peninsula of Juitland. The Danish Islands. The Peninsula of Juitland comprehends North Juitland Ch. Town Wiborg. South Juitland Sleswick. D. of Holstein [of which in Lower Saxony.  
Juitland divided into North comprehends the Dioceses of Aalborg— Chief Town Idem— from N. to S. Wiborg— Idem— Arhusen— Aarhus— Ripen— Idem— South comprehends the Praefectures of Hedersleve Idem— from N. to S. upon the Baltic Sea. Appenrade Idem— Flemborge Idem— Gottorpe Sleswick Tonderen Idem— N. to S. upon the Germany Sea. Husum Idem— Eyderstede Tonningen—  
The chief of the Danish Islands are Zealand, Funen, etc. Of which hereafter when we come to treat of Islands.   

§. 3. NORWAY.  
Divided into the Governments of Bahus— Chief Town Idem— S. to N. E. Aggerus— Agger— Bergenus— Bergen— Dronthemus Dronthem Wardus— Idem—   

This vast Continent of Scandinavia comprehending (as aforesaid) three distinct Kingdoms, viz. those of Swedeland, Denmark, and Norway. Of each of these separately, and in their Order. Therefore   

§. I. SWEDELAND.  
THIS Country (formerly Succia, a Part of Ancient Scandinavia) is termed by the Italians, Suezia; 
Name.  by the Spaniards, Suedia; by the French, Suede; by the Germans, Schweden; and by the English, Sueden or Swethland; so called from its Ancient Inhabitants the Sueones, Suevi, or Suethidi, with the Addition of Land for Termination.  
The Air of this Country is generally very Cold, but (if not too nigh some Lake or Marish) very pure and 
Air.  wholesome; yea, so healthful to breath in, that many of its Inhabitants do frequently live to an hundred years, especially they who abstain from excessive drinking, a thing too much practised by many of them. The Antipodes to this People, or the opposite Place of the Globe to Swedeland, is that Part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, comprehended between the 220th and 230th Degree of Longitude, with 50 and 70 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 9th, 10th, 11th, and 12th Northern Climates) is not very fruitful, 
Soil.  but yet where less fertile in Corn, that disadvantage is recompensed with tolerable Pasturage. It's numerous Lakes are very well stored with various kinds of Fishes. Its Mountains are generally covered over with Trees, and several of them lined with considerable Mines of Silver, Tin, Brass, and Iron. The longest Day in the Northmost part of this Country is about two Months (the Sun being so long without setting when near the Summer Solstice). The shortest in the Southmost, is about 6 Hours 1/●, and the Nights proportionably.  
The Chief Commodities of this Country, are Metals, Ox-hides, Goatskins, Buck-skins, and costly Furs, 
Commodities.  Pine trees, Fir-trees, Oales, Tallow, Tar, Honey, and such like.  
The Chief Rarities of this Country may be reckoned two Public Clocks of admirable Workmanship; one 
Rarities.  belonging to the Cathedral Church of Upsal; the other to that of St. Laurence in Lunden, especially the latter, which (supposed to be the Work of Casper Bartholinus) shows not only the Day, Hour, and Minute, but also all the remarkable Motions of the Celestial Bodies, with all Festivals, both fixed and movable, and several other pleasant Curiosities. To these add that famous Slimy Lake in the Southern Part of Gothland, which burns such things as are put into it. As also a certain Stone found in several Parts of Sueden, which being of a Yellow Colour, intermixed with several Streaks of white, (as if composed of Gold and Silver) affords both Sulphur, Vitriol, Alium, and Minium. Some write of a Lake in Lapland, which hath as many Islands in it, as there are Days in the Year.  
Archbishoprics belonging to Sueden, are Two, viz. those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Upsal,  
Riga.    
Bishoprics in this Kingdom are Eight, viz. those of 
Bishoprics.  

W●steras,  
Strergnes,  
Wexioc,  
Lunden,  
Lindkaeping,  
Scaren,  
Abo.  
Wiburg.    
Universities established here, are Two, viz. those of. 
Universities.  

Upsal.  
Abo.    
The Swedes (for the most part) are Men of big and strong Bodies; Men whose very Constitution doth fit 
Manners.  them to be Soldiers, but generally they weaken Nature by extravagant excess in Drinking. Their Gentry are much given to Hospitality, very Affable and Civil to Strangers, and many of them become considerable Proficients in several Arts and Sciences. The Commons are generally esteemed good Mechanics, but looked upon by all, as too much addicted to Laziness in point of improving their Country, by not cutting down many unnecessary Forests, and improving that Ground to better advantage.  
The Swedes speak a Dialect of the Teutonic, which is somewhat different from that used in Denmark and Upper 
Language.  Germany. Persons of Quality understand and speak the High-German Language in its Native purity. The Finlanders have a peculiar Gibberish of their own, For a Specimen of the Swedish Tongue, we shall here subjoin the Lord's Prayer in that Language, intending to observe the same Method in treating of all other Languages in Europe. Their Paternoster runs thus, Fadher war some est i himlem; helghat ward tiett namyn, till komme titt rick, skee tin wily sa comi himmelen, sa ock pa jordenne, wart dagliha broad giffosz ay dagh; och forlat osz wara skuld, sa some ock wforlate them osz skyldighe aro; Och in leedh osz ickei frestelse uthan frels oszi fra ondo. Amen.  
The Kingdom of Swedeland having suffered various turns of Fortune, being frequently disturbed by the 
Government.  Adjacent Nations, at last got rid of them all, and becoming terrible to others, spread itself over a considerable Part of its Neighbours Territories. At present 'tis subject unto, and governed by its own Monarch, who, since the last Age, is not only Hereditary, but by the late turn of Affairs in his Country, hath also attained unto, and now exerciseth such a Power over the Subject, that the same is really astonishing to any considering Person, who looks back unto the State of that Kingdom, only a few Years ago. He is styled King of the Swedes, Goths, and Vandals; Grand Prince of Finland, Duke of Estonia and Carelia, and Lord of Ingria, etc. The different Orders in this Realm are Six, viz. Princes of the Blood, the Nobility, Clergy, Soldiery, Merchantry, and Commonalty. These by their Representatives being assembled in Parliament, make four different Houses, viz. that of the Nobility, where the Grand Marshal presides. 2. That of the Clergy, where the Archbishop of Upsal presides. 3. That of the Burgesses, where one of the Consuls of Stockholm presides. And lastly, That of the Knights of the Shir●, where one of their own Number elected by themselves presides. Chief Courts established in this Kingdom, are these Five, viz. (1) That commonly called the King's Chamber, designed for the Decision of all Cases happening between the Nobility, Senators, or any of the Public Officers, and here the King is (at least, aught to sit as) Precedent. (2) The Court - Marshal, in which all Matters relating to War are determined, and here the Grand Marshal of the Army is Precedent. (3.) The Court of Chancery, in which Edicts, Mandates, Commissions, and such like, are made out in the King's Name, and here the Chancellor of the Kingdom is Precedent. (4) The Court of Admiralty, in which all business relating to Maritime Affairs are transacted, and here the High Admiral is Precedent. Lastly, The Court of Exchequer, in which all Matters concerning the Public Revenue are managed, and here the Grand Treasurer is Precedent.  
The King of Sweden bears quarterly. In the First and fourth, Azure, three Crowns, Or, two in Chief, and 
Arms.  one in Base, for Swedeland. In the second and third, Barry, Argent and Azure, a Lion, Or, Crowned Gules, for Finland. Over all quatterly, in the first and fourth, Sable, a Lion, Or, crowned, armed and languid, Gules, for the Palatinate of the Rhine. In the second and third, Lozenges, Bendwise of twenty one pieces Argent and Azure, for Bavaria. For the Crest, a Crown Royal, adorned with eight Flowers, and closed by as many Demi-Circles terminating in a Mond, Or. The Supporters are two Lions, Or, Crowned of the same. And his Motto is in these words, Dominus Protector Meus.  
Lutheranism is the established Religion of this Country, being universally professed by all Orders and Degrees 
Religion.  of Men, (except in Livonia, where is a considerable Number of Papists intermixed; and Lapland, many of whose Inhabitants are mear Heathens, usually worshipping the Sun, Fire, Serpents, and the like) and that ever since the Days of the Reformation, which was happily effected in this Kingdom by Gustavus the First, upon his Accession to the Swedish Crown, since which time their Religion hath not been disturbed from abroad but once, and since that Disturbance, never distracted at home by Nonconformity; for Persons of all Ranks adhering to the Tenets of Luther, give constant attendance on Divine Service, and join in the same manner of Worship. Christianity was first planted in this Kingdom by the care and diligence of Ansgarius, Archbishop of Breme, the Apostle General of the North.   

§. 2. DENMARK.  
THis Country, especially Juitland (formerly Cimbrica Chersonesus, a part of Ancient Scandinavia) is 
Name.  termed by the Italians, Dania; by the Spaniards, Dinmarca; by the French, Danemarc; by the High Germans, Dennemark; and by the English, Denmark; so called from the Bounds and Mar●es of its Inhabitants the Danes, whose Country bordering on the Ancient Batavi and Saxons, was thereupon called Dane-march, which Name in process of time did turn into that of Denmark.  
The Air of this Country is much the same with that in the Southern Part of Swedeland, it being extremely 
Air.  Cold, but in most places, very wholesome. The opposite place of the Globe to Denmark, is that part of the Pacifick Ocean lying between 210 and 220 Degrees of Longitude, with 50 and 60 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 10th and 11th North Climates) is very good for Grain and Pasturage. 
Soil.  Here is abundance of Fish, especially Herrings, as also many wild Fowls, and most kinds of wild Beasts. The longest Day in the Northmost part is 17 Hours ½, the shortest in the Southmost is 8 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The Chief Commodities of this Country are Fish, Tallow, Furniture for Ships, Armour, Ox-hides, 
Commodity's  Buck-skins, Fir-wood, and Wainscot, etc.  
Near to Sleswick (Southward) are yet to be seen the Remains of that famous Wall and Trench, made above 
Rarities.  880 Years ago by Gotricius (than King of Denmark) to hinder the Incursions of the Saxons, resembling somewhat the Pict's Wall in Great Britain (2.) Between Flensburg and Sleswick is a small Village, which goes by the Name of Anglen, remarkable in so far, that from the said Village and Country adjacent, came our Ancestors, the Ancient Angles into Great Britain. (3.) In Gottorp is an admirable Globe of Copper, 10 Foot ½ in Diameter, so contrived by one of the Dukes of Holstein, that (by certain Wheels turned about by Water) it represents exactly the Motions of the Celestial Bodies. As also another in the Arsenal at Copenhagen of 6 Foot Diameter, framed by Tycho Brahe, that famous Danish Astronomer. (4.) In the Island Ween are the Ruins of the Tower of Uraniburge, renowned for the Observations made thereon, by the aforesaid Tycho Braye. As also the Dungeon, called Stelliburg, beset with Looking-Glasses, where he was wont to sit and observe the Stars in all Seasons. (5.) The Island Ween is likewise remarkable in that, it will harbour no Dormice; (none such being able to live when imported thither) as also a Spring whose Waters never freeze, even, in the extremest Cold of Winter. To these we may add, (as a singular Curiosity of this Country) That magnificent Throne framed of prodigious long Horns of a certain Sea Animal, which the Vulgar are willing to take for the Unicorn. Vid. Dr. Brown 's Travels.  
As for Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, there's only one, viz. that of 
Archbishoprics.   
Copenhagen.  
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Sleswick,  
Arhusen,  
Alburg,  
Ripen,  
Wiburg.    
Universities in this Kingdom, are those at 
Universities.  

Copenhagen,  
Kiel.    
The Danes (a very warlike People of old, having constrained many of the Northern Nations to submit 
Manners.  to the force of their Arms at some time or other) are now almost of the same Temper with their Neighbours the Swedes and Germans; but that they are generally esteemed a People more given to Pride and Cunning, than either of the former. They are Industrious and Frugal enough: as also considerable Lovers of Learning, but generally greater Lovers of Excess, whether in Drinking or Eating, especially the former, and that ever since the Juice of the Grape was recommended to them by the High Germans, whom they now equal (if not exceed) in all manner of Carousing.  
The Modern Language of Denmark, is originally a Dialect of the Teutonit. The Court, Gentry, and 
Language.  Chief Burghers, commonly use the High Germane in ordinary Discourse, and French when they talk with Strangers. How the Danish Tongue differs from the High Germane, and the Modern Language in Swedeland will best appear from their Paternoster, which runs thus, Fader vor du som est himmelen; helligt vorde die naffu tilkomme dit rige, vorde din vilely s●● pa● jordan, some hander i himmelen. Gift osz ● dagh vort daglige broad; oc forlad osz vor skilled, some widow forlade vare skyldener; ock lead osz ickudi fristelse: Men frele osz fra ont. Amen.  
This Kingdom was formerly Elective (although they usually advanced the next Heir to the Crown) until 
Government.  the Year 1659. that Frederick the Ill having bravely repulsed the Swedes, besieging the Capital City, Copenhagen, it was then rendered Hereditary to his Family. The Nobility here had hitherto a considerable Stroke until these our own Days, that this Kingdom is so strangely Frenchified in Point of Government, that the Danish and French Monarchy's are now almost of the same Mould. The King assumes to himself the Power of disposing of all Heirs and Heiresses, of any Note, as 'tis practised in France. The Danish Law is highly to be prized in that it's short and perspicuous surpassing the like of all other Nations in that respect. It's wholly founded upon Equity, and Comprised in one Quarto Volume in the Danish Tongue, and that so plain, that any Man may understand and plead his own Cause without the Aid of either Counsel or Attorney; and no Suit is to hang in suspense beyond one Year and a Month. This is indeed a mighty Advantage, and a singular Property of the Danish Law upon one hand, but the same is attended with a vast Inconvenience on the other; for the first and principal Article thereof runs thus, That the King hath the Privilege reserved to himself to explain, nay, to alter and change the same as he shall think good. Chief Courts for Administration of Justice, both in Civil and Criminal Affairs, are four; viz. Byfoghts, Heredsfought's, Lanstag, and High-Right. The first is peculiar for deciding Matters which happen in Cities and Towns. The second for those of the Country. The third is the High-Court of the Province, to which Appeals are made from the two former. And the fourth is the Supreme of all the rest, held commonly at Copenhagen, and consisting of the Principal Nobility, in which Court the King himself sometimes sits in Person. Beside these, there is the Court of Admiralty for Maritime Affairs; as also a Rend Chamber (resembling our Court of Exchequer) for managing all Matters relating to the Public Revenue.  
The King of Denmark bears Party of three, and 
Arms.  Coupè of two, which makes twelve Quarters. In the first Or, Semè of Hearts Gules, three Lions passant, guardant Azure, crowned Languid and Armed of the first, for Denmark. 2 Gules, a Lion Rampant Or, Crowned and Armed of the first, in his Paws a Battleax Argent, hilted of the second, for Norway. 3. Gules, a Lion Passant-guardant Or, on Nine Hearts of the same in Fez, for Gothland. 4. Gules, a Dragon crowned, Or, for Schonen. 5. Azure, three Crowns Or; for Sweden. 6. Gules a Paschal Lamb, Argent, supporting a Flag of the same, marked with a Cross Gules, for Juitland. 7. Or, two Lions Passant-guardant, Azure, for Sleswick. 8. Gules, a Fish crowned Argent, for Ice land. Over these eight Quartors, a great Cross Argent (which is the ancient Devise of the Kingdom) on the Centre of which are placed the Arms of Dithmarsh, viz. Gules, a Cavalier Armed Argent. 9 Gules, a Nettle-leaf open, and charged in the middle with a little Escutcheon, the whole Argent for Holstein. 10. Gules, a Cygnet Argent; gorged with a Crown Or, for Stormarsh. 11. Gules, two Fesses Or, for Delmenhorst. 12. Gules, a Cross Pattree-fitchree Argent, for Oldenburgh. The Shield surrounded with the Collar of the Order of the Elephant. The Crest is a Crown Or, flowered, raised with eight Diadems, terminating in a Mond of the same. For the Motto are these words, Pietas & Justitia coronant.  
The Errors and Practices of the Roman Church being grown at length so intolerable, that an Universal Reformation 
Religion.  became expedient, this Kingdom, among the other Northern Crowns, threw off that insupportable Yoke, and cordially embraced the Doctrine of Luther, which being allowed off by Frederick the First, about the middle of the last Century, was so firmly and universally established in Denmark, that in all the Danish Dominions there is no other Religion but Lutheranism professed, except some French Refugees, who are allowed a Church at Copenhagen; and a few Popish Families, who were lately permitted to perform their Worship in a Chapel at Gluckstat. The Danish Clergy do still retain the Practice of Confession, which all Persons are obliged unto before they participate of the Blessed Sacrament of the Lord's Supper; they likewise retain Crucifixes, and several Ceremonies of the Roman Church. Christianity was fully Established in this Country about the middle of the XII. Century, and that by the means of Pope Adrian the IV. (an Englishman) who before his Assumption of the Popedom, was termed Nicholaus Breakspear.   

§. 3. NORWAY.  
THis Country (formerly Norvegia, a Part of Ancient Scandinavia) is termed by the Italians, Neruegia; 
Name.  by the Spaniards, Noruega; by the French, Norwegue; by the Germans, Norwegen; and by the English, Norway; so called from its Northern Situation (Nort being for North, and weg, way,) seeing it is the way to and from the North in respect of the rest of Europe.  
The Air of this Country is so extremely Cold, especially towards the North parts of the Kingdom, 
Air.  that 'tis but thinly inhabited, and that by the meanest of People. The opposite Place of the Globe to Norway, is part of the Pacifick Ocean between 200 and 230 Degrees of Longitude, with 60 and 70 Degrees of South Latitude.  
By reason of the excessive Coldness of the Country (it lying in the 11th, 12th, and 13th North Climate) 
Soil.  the Soil is very barren, not having force enough to produce the very necessaries of Life, the Common People being forced to use dry Fish instead of Bread. In short, this Country is overspread either with vast Forests, barren Mountains, or formidable Rocks: In the Northmost parts of it, the longest Day is above two Months, the Sun not setting for that time; the shortest in the Southmost about 6 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The Chief Commodities of this Country, are Stockfish, Rich Furs, train-oil, Pitch, and Tackling for 
Commodities.  Ships, as Masts, Cables, Deal-boards, and the like, which the Inhabitants exchange for Corn, Wine, Fruits, Beer, and other Necessaries of Life.  
What chiefly deserves the Name of Rarity in this Country, is that remarkable Lake near Drontheim, 
Rarities.  whose Waters never freeze even in the dead of Winter, notwithstanding of the excessive Cold at that Season. Near to the Isle of Hiteren is that wonderful and dangerous Whirly-pool, commonly called Maelstroom (and by Navigators, The Navel of the Sea) which swallows up Ships with their whole Cargo, if they unhappily approach too nigh.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, only one, viz. that of 
Archbishoprics.   
Drontheim.  
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Anslo,  
Bergen,  
Staffanger.    
Universities in this Kingdom. None. 
Universities.   
The Norvegians (being notorious Pirates of old, became very formidable to several of the Northern Nations) 
Manners.  are now looked upon as a very mean, simple, and ignorant sort of People; a People however that's very hardy, much given to Toiling and Labour, very Just in their Dealings, and abundantly Civil (after their own Manner) to the few Strangers who come among them. In the Northmost Parts of the Kingdom they have no Towns, but generally live in Tents, and Travel in great Companies from one place to another in Hunting.  
The Language now spoken in this Country, (especicially in all the civilised Parts thereof) is little different 
Language.  from that used in the Kingdom of Denmark, a Specimen of which is already given in the foregoing Paragraph.  
This Kingdom was formerly a distinct Body by itself, and independent of any other, but (being incorporated 
Government.  with Denmark, Anno 1387.) is now subject to his Danish Majesty, who, besides particular Governors in the five Castles of Bahus, Aggerus, etc. abovementioned, doth ordinarily keep a Viceroy there for the better Administration of the Public Affairs of that Kingdom; his Place of Residence is commonly at Bergen, and his Power is extraordinary great.  
See Denmark. 
Arms.   
The established Religion in Norway, is the same as in Denmark, only that in the Northmost Parts of the 
Religion.  Kingdom, the knowledge of Christiany (which was at first planted in this Country much about the same time with the two other Northern Crowns) is so decayed, that on the Borders of Lapland they differ but little from mere Heathens.    


MOSCOW VIE or RUSSIE    

SECT. II. Concerning Moscovia.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 46 00 of Long. It's greatest Length is about 1630. 105 00 between 45 10 of Lat. Breadth is about 1500. 71 00 Divided into North Chief Town St. Michael Archangel. South Moscow, Capital City.  
More Particularly,  
North contains many Provinces, but chiefly these of  
Trines— Chief Town — — W. to E. Kargapolia— Kargapol.— Dwina— St. Michael Archangel— Condora— Wirgatouria— Sibiria— Tobol— — Obdora— Berezow— Vologda— Idem, upon the upper part of the Dwina.  
South containing many Provinces, but chiefly these of  
Casan— Chief Town Idem— from E. to W. upon the Volga. Mordowitz— None remarkable Nisi Novogrod— Idem— Volodimir— Idem— Moscow— Idem— Astracan— Idem, at the Mouth of the Volga. Novogrod Weleki Idem— Between the Lake Ilmins and Peipus. Pleskow— Idem— Severia— Novogrod-Sewarski S. W. of Moscow.  

§. 2. MOSCOVIA.  
THIS Country (containing much of Sarmatia Europaea, and part of Sarmatia Asiatica, being also 
Name.  named Russia from the Ancient People of that Country, called Rossi or Russi) is termed by the Italians, Moscovia; by the Spaniards, Moscovia; by the French, Moscovie or Russie Blanch; by the Germans, Moscau; and by the English, Moscovia or Moscovy; so called from its chief Province of that Name, whose Denomination is derived from Moschi or Mosci, an Ancient People first inhabiting that Part of the Country.  
The Air of this Country is very Cold, particularly towards the North, where Snow and Ice are usual for 
Air.  three Quarters of the Year; but in the Southmost Provinces they have very scorching Heats in the Summer for the Space of six Weeks. The opposite Place of the Globe to Moscovia, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 220 and 290 Degrees of Longitude, with 45 and 71 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, etc. Northern Climate) is very different, 
Soil.  according to the different Situation of its Parts. Here are many Plains, but generally full of Marshes. Towards the North are vast Forests; and even where the Ground is cleared of Wood 'tis (for the most part) very Barren, and so extremely Cold, that what they sow doth seldom come to due Perfection. In the South-west parts towards Poland, the Soil is tolerably good, the Ground there producing several sorts of Grain in great abundance; and 'tis reported by many, that their Corn is ready for reaping about two Months after it is sown. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country is above two Months, the Sun not setting for that time when near the Summer Solstice; the shortest in the Southmost is about 9 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The Chief Commodities of this Country, are Furs, Sables, martin's, Wax, Honey, Tallow, train-oil, 
Commodities.  Caviere, Hemp, Flax, Slad, Iron, etc.  
As one of the Chief Rarities of this Country, we may reckon that strange sort of Melon, found in or 
Rarities.  near to Astracan, Casan and Samara. Some of the Natives term it Boranetz, (i. e. The Little Lamb) others Zoophyton, which signifies the Animal Plant. The first Title would seem most proper, because in Figure it resembles a Lamb, and such is its vegetable Heat, that (according to the vulgar manner of expression) it Consumes and Eats up all the Grass, or other Herbs, within its reach. As the Fruit doth ripen, the Stalk decays, and is covered with a downy Substance, which being carefully taken off and dressed, is used by some instead of Furs for Lining of Vests. To this we may add that Church in Moscow, called Jerusalem, which seemed to John Basilides 1. (then Czar) such a stately Pile of Building, that he caused put out the Eyes of the Architect, that he might never contrive, (at least) behold its fellow.  
ecclesiastics in Moscovia are, One Patriach, Four Metropolitans, Seven Archbishops, and several Bishops.  
The Patriarch is he of Moscow, residing in the same City.  
Metropolitans are those of Novogorodskoi and Welikoluskoi. Rostoufskoi and Harostauskoi. Casanskoi and Sunatskoi. Sarskoi and Pondoskoi. Archbishoprics are those of Wolodgskoi and Weliko Premskoi. 
Archbishoprics.  Resanskoi and Moromskoi. Susdalskoi and Turruskoi. Twerskoi and Cassinskoi. Sibirskoi and Tobolskoi. Astrachansckoi and Terskoi. Pleskouskoi and Sborskoi.  
As to the exact Number and Names of Bishoprics in this Country; the same is but uncertain at 
Bishoprics.  best.  
Here we can hardly expect the Seats of the Muses where the Liberal Arts and Sciences have been so long 
Universities.  banished, and the Studying of them inhibited by Public Authority.  
The Moscovites (Men of a vigorous and healthful Constitution) are generally reckoned a rude, deceitful 
Manners.  and ignorant sort of People; much addicted to excessive Drinking, as also unlawful and beastly Pleasures. And so fond of Ignorance have they hitherto been, that 'twas looked upon as (almost) a piacular Crime for any of them to apply himself to a search after Knowledge. But things are now mightily altered in this Point, and that by the Encouragement of his present Czarish Majesty, who gives leave to his Nobility to acquire the Liberal Arts and Sciences, particularly the Mathematics; and to acquaint themselves with Foreign Countries and Languages. And that the Learned Languages (Greek and Latin) may be no longer strangers in this Country, he hath already erected Public Schools in Moscow for the teaching of them. By which means it is to be hoped, That the Brutish Temper and Stupidity of this People, may be much reformed in some time. And whereas the present Emperor hath already visited some of the best Nations of Europe. purposely to improve himself in Warlike Affairs, both by Sea and Land, (especially the former) and since this Undertaking is so uncommon, that the Mascovitish Story can't afford a Parallel; 'tis also to be hoped, that the Effects thereof will be equally astonishing, and that in humbling (if not crushing) both Turks and Tertars his disturbing Neighbours, and professed Enemies to the Cross of Christ.  
The Language used in this Country, is a Dialect of the Sclavonian, but so corrupted and blended with 
Language.  other Languages, that 'tis hardly understood by those who speak the pure Sclavonian, which nevertheless is still used by the Russians in their Divine Service. Pater Noster (which I find only in a corrupt Dialect of their Tongue) runs thus, Aisameidhen joke oleah tainahissa; Pyhetta olkon siun wakakuta; si olkohon siun tharosi kwin● tainahissa ayn man palla. Meidhen jokopai wen leipa anna m●h●llen tanapaiw●na, ja anna meidem syndia: Kwin more annama meidin vostachan rickoillen; ja âle sata meita kin sauxen mutta paasta 〈◊〉 paasta.  
This great Body is under its own Prince, who assumeth the Title of Cear, (which in the Russian Language 
Government.  signifies Emperor) yet more commonly he's termed the Great Duke. He's an Hereditary Monarch, and his Government truly Desuotical. The Lives and Fortunes of his Subjects are wholly at his disposal; and the greatest Knez: or Lord within his Dominions, doth acknowledge himself his Galop or Slave. Yea, be not only exerciseth an uncontrollable Power over his slavish Subjects, but also pretends to a kind of Omniscience among them, and hath so succeeded in this bold Pretence, that the main Body of the People doth really believe that their Great Duke knoweth all things. To support which Opinion, The Moscovitish Emperors have industriously endeavoured to keep their People in gross Ignorance, and for that end have hitherto banished out of their Domions the Liberal Arts and Sciences, and forbid the studying of them under the severest Penalties. But the present Czar by his proceedings (already hinted at) would seem to rectify that gross Abuse. He suffers none of his Nobles to retire from Court without his Special Permission, and seldom, or never, to visit Foreign Countries, till these our own Days; no, nor so much as to talk with Foreigners at home. The Public Affairs are chiefly managed by his Great Council, (called Dumnoy Boyaren) consisting of the Principal Noblemen of the Empire. Here also are divers other Councils, or rather Chambers and Courts of Judicatory, to which belong their respective Business, and each of these hath its peculiar Precedent; they're in number Six, whereof the first is appointed for Ambassadors and Foreign Negotiations. The second for managing of Military Affairs. The third for the Public Revenues of the Empire. The fourth for encouraging of Trade and Merchandizing. And the two others for hearing and determining of all Causes, both Civil and Criminal.  
The Arms of Moscovia are, Or an Eagle displayed Sable, 〈◊〉 on its Breast a Shield Gules, charged with 
Arms.  a Cavalier A●●●t fight a Dragon; on and between the Heads of the Eagle are three Crowns for Moscovy, Cazan, and Astracan. According to others, the Arms are Sable, a Portel open of two Leaves, and ●s 〈◊〉 degrees Or.  
The Muscovia's 〈◊〉 that they profess Christianity, according to the Doctrine of the Greek Church in its 
Religion.  Ancient Purity; but indeed they have mixed with the same, a great 〈◊〉 ridiculous Ceremonies and foolish Superstitions of their own. They ●ender Divine Worship to the Virgin Mary, and other Saints as also to Crosses, and never Commerce any thing of Moment unless they first Sign themselves with the Sign of the Crossed. In Baptism they use Exorcism, and always Confession to the Priest before they receive the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper. All above seven Years of Age receive that Sacrament in both kinds, and they give it i● one kind to Children under that age. They usually Administer the same (as also Extreme Unction) to Persons past all hopes of Recovery; but they neither adore the Sacrament. nor believe the strange Doctrine of Transubstantiation. They observe fifteen great Festivals, besides a great many Days dedicated to particular Saints. Sermons they never use, but only read some Portions of Holy Scripture, with St. Basil's Liturgy, and divers Homilies of St. chrysostom. The Christian Faith was first planted in this Country towards the latter Part of the Tenth Century, and that by the Preaching of some Greeks, sent thither by the then Patriarch of Constantinople.    


FRANCE    

SECT. III Concerning France.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 12 10 of Long. its greatest Length is about 520 26 30 between 42 30 of Latit. Breadth is about 450 51 10  
Being divided into Three Classes, viz. 

North.  
Middle.  
South.    
North comprehends the Governments of Picardy— Chief Town Amiens, Northward. Normandy— Roven— from W. to E. The Isle of France Paris— Champagne— Troy— Middle comprehends the Governments of Bretaigne— Rennes.— W. to E. Orleanoise— Orleans— Bourgoigne— Dyon — Lionois— Lion South comprehends the Governments of Guienne & Gascony Bourdemix— W. to E. Languedoc— Tholouse— Dauphiny— Grenoble — Provence— Aix—  
Of all these in Order.  

§. 1. PICARDY.  
Divided into Higher, towards the East— Ch. Town Guise. Lower, towards the West— Abbeville.  
But more particularly,  
Higher contains Tierasche— Chief Town Guise— E. to W. Vermandois— S. Quinten— Santerre— Peronne— Amienois— Amiens— Lower contains Pais Reconquis- Calais— N. to S. Ardres— Idem— Boulognois— Boulogne— Ponthieu— Abbeville—  
To Picardy we subjoin the Archbishopric of Cambray, lying N. of Peronne. Chief Town Cambry.   

§. 2. NORMANDY.  
Divided into Higher, towards the East— Chief Town Roven. Lower, towards the West— Caen.  
More particularly,  
Higher contains Pais Caux— Chief Town Caudebeck— N. to S. E. Roven— Idem— guysor's— Idem— Eureux— Idem, S. of Roven. Lower contains Coutantine— Coutance— W. to E. Gaen— Idem— Alencon— Idem, S. E. of Caen.   

§. 2. Isle of FRANCE.  
Divided into North, the Seine— Chief Town Soissons. South, the Seine— Melun.  
More particularly,  
North the Seine contains Laonois— Chief Town Laon— E. to W. Soissonois— Soissons— Beauvoises— Beauvais— Vexin Francois Pont-Oyse— W. to E. D. of Valois— Senle●— Isle of France— Paris— W. to E. Brie— Meaux— South the Seine contains Hurepoix— Melun— N. to S. Gastenois— Montargi—   

§. 4. CHAMPAGNE.  
Divided into Higher, on the North— Chief Town Rheims. Lower, on the South— Troy.  
More particularly,  
Higher contains Rethelnois— Chief Town Rethel— N. to S. W. D. of Rheims— Rheims— High Champagne S. Dizier Challonois— Chalon on the River Marn●. Lower contains Sennois— Sens— W. to E. Low Champagne Troy's— Bassigny— Langres—   

§. 5. BRETAIGNE.  
Divided into Higher, Eastward— Chief Town Rennes. Lower, Westward— Breast.  
More particularly,  
Higher contains the Territories of Dole— Chief Town Idem— E. to W. S. Malc●— Idem— Brieux— Idem— Rennes— Idem— N. to S. Nantes— Idem— Lower contains St. Polled Leon Breast— W. to N. E. Trigvier— Idem— Cornoaile— Idem— W. to E. Vannet— Idem—   

§. 2. ORLEANOIS  
Divided into North the River Loir, chief Town Chartres. upon Orleans. South Poitiers.  
More particularly,  
North contains Maine— Chief Town Man's— W. to E. Perche— Nogent— Beauce— Chartres— Vendosmois— Vendosme— Middle, or upon the Loir. Anjou— Anger's— W. to E. Tourraine— Tours— Blais●●— Blois— Orleanois— Orleans— Nivernois— Nevers— South contains Aunis— Rochel— W. to E. Angoumois Angoulesme Poictou— Poitiers— Berry— Bourges—   

§. 7. BURGOINE.  
Divided into Higher, Northward Chief Town Dijon. Lower, Southward Bourge-en Bresse.  
More particularly,  
Higher, [viz. Burgoigne properly so called] contains the Towns of Auxerre— W. to S. E. Semur— Dijon— Challon— N. to S. Mascon— Autun— N. to S. Charolles— Lower, [viz. la Bresse] contains the Towns of Bourge-en-Bresse— N. to S. E. Belly— Trevoux— Westward.   

§. 8. LIONOIS.  
Divided into East— Chief Town Lions. West— Clermont.  
More particularly,  
East comprehends Lionois [properly so called— — Chief Town Lions— S. to N. Baujolois— Beaujeu— Forez— — Feurs— Westward. West comprehends Auvergue higher Clermont — S. to lower S. Flour Bourbonnoi— — Bourbon [or Moulins March— — Gueret— Westward.   

§. 9 GUIENNE and GASCOIGNE.  
Divided into Guienne [Northward] C. T. Bourdeaux. Gascoigne [Southward] Air, viz. the chief of Gascoigne, properly so called.  
More Particularly,  
Guienne in 8 Provinces. South Guienne [properly so called— Chief Town Bourdeaux— W. to E. Bazadois— Bazas— Agenois— Again— Revergue— Rhodes— 4 North Saintoigne— Saintes— W. to E. Pertgort— Perigueux— Limosin— Lymoges— Quercy— Cahors— Gascoigne into 3 parts North the Adour Les Landes— Dax— W. to E. Albert— Idem— Condomois— Condom— Armagnac— Aux— Gaure— Verdun— Uponthe Adour Labour— Bayonne— W to E. Gascoigne prop. Air— Estarac— Mirande— Comminges— Lombes— South the Adour Lower Navarr S. Palais— W. to E. C. of Soul— Maulleon— Bearn— Pau— Bigorre— Tarbe— Conserans— S. Bertrand   

§. 10. LANGUEDOC.  
Divided into Higher, towards the West Chief Town Tholouse. Lower, towards the East Nismes.  
More particularly,  
Higher contains the Territories of Foix— Chief Town Idem S. to N. on the Garonne. Rieux— Idem Tholonse Idem Alby— Idem 42 m. N. E. of Tholouse. S. Papoul Idem 36 m. S. E. Lower contains the Territories of Narl●ne Idem— W. to E. Beziers Idem— Mompelier Idem— Nismes— Idem— Country of Sevennes divided into Givaudan Mende Velay— Le Puy W. to E. Vivarez Viviers   

§. 11. DAUPHINY.  
Divided into Higher, towards the East— Chief Town Grenoble Lower, towards the West— Vienne.  
More particularly,  
Higher contains several Towns, the chief of which are Grenoble upon the Isere. Gap— Nigh unto or upon the Durance. Embrun— Briancon or Brianson— Pignerol, S. E. of Brianson. Lower contains several Towns, the chief of which are Vienne— N. to S. Valence— S. Paul de Tricasten— Dye, S. E. of Valence.   

§. 12. PROVENCE.  
Divided into Higher, Northward— Chief Town Sisteron. Middle part— Aix. Lower, Southward— Marseilles:  
More particularly,  
Higher, whose chief Towns are Orange— W. to E. on the North of Durance River. Avignion— Apt— Forcalquier— Sisteron— Middle part, whose chief Towns are Arles— W. to E. on the S. of the Durance. Salon— Aix— Riez— Senez— Glandeves— Lower, whose chief Towns are Marseilles— W. to E. nigh unto, or upon the Sea-Coast. Toulon— Hyeres— Frejuls— Grace— Vence— Antiae—  
After these Twelve Governments we may here subjoin two other Country's adjacent to the East part of France.  
Namely, 

Lorraine.  
French County.    

LORRAINE.  
Divided into Lorraine properly so called Ch. Town Nancy. Duchy of Barr [Westward] Bar le Duc.  
More particularly,  
Lorraine properly so called Chief Town Nancy towards the middle. D. of Bar— Bar le Duc, Westward. Principality of Phaltzbourge Idem, Eastward. The Territor. of Toll— Idem S. to N. Metz Idem Verdun Idem Also those of Clermont— Idem, 15 Miles W. of Verdun. Bitch— Idem— N. to S. upon the E. part of Lorraine. Sarward— Idem— Sarbruck— Idem— Salme— Idem— Vaudemont Idem, 18 Miles S. E. of Toul.   

FRENCH COUNTY.  
Divided into Higher, Northward— Chief Town Montbeliart. Middle part— Besanson. Lower, Southward— Salins.  
More particularly,  
Higher, its chief Towns are Montbeliart— E. to W. Vesoul— Middle, its chief Towns are Besancon or Besanson E. to W. upon the Doux. Dole— Lower, its chief Towns are Salins— N. to S. S. Claude—    

THis Country (formerly Gallia from its Ancient Inhabitants the Gauls, otherwise the Celta) is 
Name.  termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Francia; by its Natives, la France; by the Germans, Franckreich; and by the English, France, so called (as most Authors agree) from the Franks, a Germane Nation, inhabiting that Part of Germany still called Franconia; who invading Gaul, and by degrees subduing a great Part of it, gave it a New Name from its New Masters, who (in the Opinion of some Judicious Writers) had theirs from certain Franchises granted them by the Roman Emperors beyond what the Neighbouring Nations enjoyed; or (according to others) from the Germane words, Fra●n and Ausen, the former signifying Free, and the other an Hero.  
The Air of this Country is very Temperate, Pleasant, and Healthful, being in a good Medium between 
Air.  the great Excess of Heat and Cold, which ordinarily attend those Countries of a more Northern and Southern Situation; yea, so healthful is it, that this Kingdom is generally observed to be less subject to Plagues and Sickness, than most other Nations of Europe, and the Air about Mompelier, in particular, is universally esteemed Medicinal for Consumptions. The opposite Place of the Globe to France, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 190 and 207 Degrees of Longitude, with 42 and 51 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 6, 7, and 8. North Climate) is extraordinary fruitful, particularly 
Soil.  in Corn, Wine, Fruits, Hemp, etc. The Fields being here both large and open, are generally intermingled with Vines and Corn; as also bordered and interlined with variety of Fruits: Here are many and vasts Forests, and these well-stored with most sorts of wild Beasts fit for Hunting; several Mountains, and these covered over with numerous Flocks, and some of them lined with rich and valuable Mines. Here also are divers excellent Pits of Coals, and Quarries of Stones. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country, is about 16 Hours ¼. The shortest in the Southmost, is 9 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The Chief Commodities of this Country, are Salt, Fish, Corn, Wine, Almonds, Coral, Canvas, Oade, Linen, 
Commodities.  Paper, Wood, Skins, Alamodes, Lusting, and rich flowered Silks, Verdigris, Cremor Tartaris, etc.  
Among the chief Rarities of France, we may reckon some remarkable Remains of the Roman Antiquities as 
Rarities.  yet to be seen in that Country. And they are reducible to these following Heads, viz. (1.) Triumphal Arches, particularly that in the City of Rheims as yet entire, composed of Three Arches, and adorned with many Figures and Trophies, but uncertain for whom erected: There are also the Ruins of several others near Autun in Burgundy; one at Saints in Guienne; another almost entire at the City of Orange, erected by Caius Marius and Luctatius Catulus, upon their Victory obtained over the Cimbres and Teutones; (where are likewise the Ruins of a Roman Circus) To these we may add that stately. Bridge, twelve Miles off Nismes, consisting of three Stories of Arches one above another, the last of which was an Aqueduct. (2.) Amphitheatres; as the Ruins of a stately one at Chalons in Burgundy; another at Perigueux in Guienne; another at Tholouse in Langaedoc; another at Arles in Provence; another at Vienne in Dauphine; but the chief of all is that at Nismes of an extraordinary bigness, and as yet adorned with several Pillars, and divers Roman Eagles, as also the Fable of Romulus and Romus sucking the She-wolf. (3.) The Remains of some Heathen Temples; particularly those of Templum Jani (now called the Jenetoye) at Autun in Burgundy; those of the Goddess Venus at Perigueux in Guienne; and that of Diana near Nismes in Languedoc. (4.) The Ruins of some Ancient Aqueducts, as those near Coutance in Burgundy; those at Dole in Britaign; some at Autun in Burgundy; and those at Tholouse in Languedoc. (5.) Remarkable Pillars, particularly those Ancient Columes and Pyramids near Autun in Burgundy; but more especially is that famous Roman Obelisk of Oriental Granat at Arles in Provence, which is much admired by the Curious, being fifty two Foot high, seven Foot Diameter at the Base, and yet all but one Stone. Among the Monuments of Antiquity, we may mention that large Passage cut through the middle of a Rock about two Leagues from Brianson in Dauphine, which being a stupendious piece of Work, gives occasion to various Conjectures, some Persons imputing it to J. Caesar, and others rather to Hannjbal. To these we may add that large and round Buckler of Massy Silver fished out of the Rhone near Avignion, 1665. being twenty Inches in Diameter, and weighing twenty one pounds; 'tis 1900 Years old, and is charged with Scipio Africanus half Mantled grasping his Pike, and Roman Officers attending with the Spaniards supplicating for a fair Virgin; the same being consecrated to that Virtuous General upon his restoring a beautiful Captive to Allucius, Prince of Celtiberia, who had espoused her.  
These being the principal Remains of Reverend Antiquity observable in this Country; next to such Curiosities, we may subjoin some Rarities of Nature, the most noted of which are these following. (1) Waters of remarkable Qualities; particularly, Those nigh to Dax or D'Acque in Gascoign, so reputed of old for Bathing, that from them the whole Province of Aquitaine did derive its Name. As also the Mineral Waters of Bourbon much resorted unto, even in time of the Romans, together with that famous Fountain near to Grenoble, which appeareth as if covered with Flames, and boileth up in great Bubbles and yet is never hot. Likewise another boiling Fountain about a League from Montpellier, much observed by Travellers; and finally, that Oily-spring near Gabian, in the Road from Montpellier to Beziers. Add to these a Spring near Loches in Orleanois, and that at Clermont in Auvergne, whose Waters are of a Petrifying Nature; and likewise another nigh to the City of Man's, which maketh Silver look exactly like Gold. (2) Observable Mountains, particularly those nigh to Rhodes in Guienne, called the Mountains of Cansac, which burn whenever it Rains. (3.) Some hideous Subterranean Holes or Passages, as that in the Forest of S. Aubin du Cormier in Bretaign, through which flows a mighty Torrent of Water; and another near Nions in Dauphine, from which proceedeth a violent Wind. These are the chief Rarities in France, both Natural and Artificial, especially the latter. As for Artificial ones of a modern date, this Country affordeth several, particularly that famous Canal of Languedoc, and splendid Palace of Versailles, with divers magnificent Buildings, (especially Churches) but these are either too well known to need, or too numerous to admit of any particular Relation here.  
The Archbishoprics of France are these following, viz. 
Archbishoprics.   
Lions whose Archbishop is Count and Primate of France. Sens Primate of France and Germany. Paris Duke and Peer of the Realm. Reims Duke and Peer, and Legate of the Holy See. Roven Primate of Normandy.  
As also those, 

Yours,  
Bourdeaux,  
Narbonne,  
Vienne.  
Burges,  
Auch,  
Arles,  
Bezancon,  
Alby,  
Tholouse,  
Aix.  
Embrun.    
The respective Suffragans of these Archbishops, are as followeth, 
Bishoprics.  

Lions.  
Autun  
Langres  
Wacon  
Chasion   

Sens.  
Trois  
Auxerre  
Nevers   

Paris.  
Chartres  
Orleans  
Meaux   

Reims.  
Soissont  
Laon  
chaalon's  
Noijon  
Beauvais  
Amiens  
Senlis  
Boulogn   

Alby.  
Castres'  
Mende  
Rodez  
Cahors  
Vahors   

Narbonne  
Carcass●nr  
Ale●  
Beziers  
aged  
Lodove  
Montpellier  
Nismes  
Usetz  
S. Pons  
Perpignan   

Roven.  
Bayeux  
Eu●eux  
Auranchet  
Seez  
Lis●ux  
Coutances   

Bourdeauz  
Poitiers  
Saintes  
Angoulesm  
Perigueux  
Again  
Condom  
Sarlat  
Rochel  
Lucon   

Arles  
Marseilles  
Orange  
S. Paul de 3. Chateaux  
Toulon   

Tours.  
Man's  
Angers  
Rennes  
Nantes  
Cournovaille  
Vannes  
S. Malo  
S. Brieu  
Treguier  
S. Pol de Leon  
Dole   

Auch  
Acquis  
Aire  
Bazas  
Bayonne  
Comminges  
Conserans'  
Lectoure  
Mescar  
Oleron  
Tarbes   

Aix  
Apt  
Riez  
Frejus  
Gap  
Sisteron   

Vienne  
Valence  
Die  
Grenoble  
Viviers  
Maurienne   

Bourges.  
Clermont  
Lymoges  
S. Flour  
le Puy  
Tulle   

Tholouse  
Pamiers  
Mirepoix  
Montauban  
Lavour  
S. Papaul  
Lombez  
Rieux   

Bezanc.  
Belie  
Basil in Switz.  
Lausanne in Switz.   

Embrun  
Digne  
Glandeve  
Vence  
Senez  
Grace  
Nice in Savoy.    
Universities belonging to this Kingdom, are established at these Cities following, 
Universities.  

Paris,  
Angers,  
Reims,  
Perpignan,  
Bourdeaux,  
Caen,  
Valence,  
Dovay,  
Poitiers,  
Montpellier,  
Aix,  
Dole,  
Orleans,  
Cahors,  
Avignon,  
Friburge,  
Bourges,  
Nantes,  
Pont a'mauson,  
Orange,    
The French are generally a Civil, Quick and Active sort of People; but extremely given to Talking, especially 
Manners.  those of the Female Sex, who nevertheless are not only very pleasing in discourse, but also of a graceful and winning deportment. This People is thus characterised by some; That they are Airy, Amorous, full of Action, and above all things Contentious, being so universally given to Law-fuits, and that even among nearest Relations, that Lawyers, Judges, and other Officers of Justice, are observed to be the richest Body of the Kingdom, excepting the Churchmen. Many of this Country in matters of Learning, are blessed with a clear Conception, and ready Expression; and of late, they have advanced the Republic of Letters to a very considerable height; this Age having produced several of that Nation (and even some of the Female Sex) who are now famous through all the Learned World for their singular Parts.  
The French Language (composed chiefly of the Latin, together with several Germane and Gothick words intermixed) 
Language.  being lately much refined by the Royal Academy at Paris, is so admired for its elegancy and sweetness, that it hath wonderfully spread itself abroad in the world; and is now become the chief Tongue that's commonly used in most Prince's Courts of Europe. Paternoster in the same, runs thus, Nôtre pére qui es aux Cieux, Tun Nom soit sanctifié; Tun Regne vienne; Ta Volonté soit faite en Ia Terre, comme a● Ciel; Donne nous aujourdhuy nôtre pain quotidien; Pardonne nous nos offences, comme nous pardonnons o' ceux qui nous ont offencez; Et ne nous induit point en tentation; mais deliure nous du mal. Amen.  
This Kingdom, being formerly a part of the Roman Empire, was in process of time overrun by Franks, 
Government.  Goths and Burgundians, especially the first, by whom was raised a Monarchy, which continuing in the Succession of Kings of three several Races, (viz. the Morovignian, Carlovinian and Capetine) is now as great as any in Christendom; and at present subject to one Sovereign [entitled the Most Christian King, and eldest Son of the Church] whose Government is Monarchical, and Crown hereditary in his Heirs Male, all Females being excluded by the Salic Law. The whole Kingdom being divided into 12 Governments; over each of them is set a Governor, styled the King's Licutenant-General or Superintendent, having the like Power as the Lords Lieutenants of England formerly had in their several Counties. For the better management of the public Affairs and Administration of Justice in all parts of this Kingdom, here are established a great many Courts of Judicatory, particularly these following, viz. Parliaments; Chambers of Accounts; Courts of Aides; Presidial Courts; Generalities; Elections, etc. I. Parliaments (the highest and supreme Courts of the Nation) were Fifteen in number, reckoning the late Conquests, and held at the Cities of Paris, Tholouse, Roven, Grenoble, Bourdeaux, Dijon, Aix, Vannes, Pau, Mets, Besancon, Tourney, Perpignan, Arras and Brisac. These Parliaments (according to their respective business) are divided into several Chambers, especially that of Paris, which hath no less than Ten. viz. (1.) The Grand Chamber, where the Peers of the Realm being accused of any Crime, are usually Tried. (2.) The Tournelle civil; where they take cognizance of such Civil Causes as exceed a thousand Livres in value. (3.) The Tournelle Criminelle; where Appeals from Inferior Courts in Criminal Matters are heard and discussed. Besides these three, there are five Chambers of Inquest; where Depositions of Witnesses are set down, and Causes thereupon determined; being almost the same with our Bill and Answer in Chancery and Exchequer. And lastly, There are two Chambers of Request; where Causes of Privileged Persons are heard and discussed. II. Chambers of Accounts; where Accounts of the Treasury are examined, and Homage and Vassalage due from the Royal Feifs are received, Treaties of Peace, and Grants made by the King, and such like, are recorded. These Chambers are 12 in number, and held at the Cities of Paris, Roven, Dijon, Nantes, Montpelier, Grenoble, Aix, Pau, Blois, List, Aire, and Dole. III. Courts of Aides, where all Causes relating to the King's Revenue (particularly Aides, Tailles, Gabells) are determined, and that without any appeal to a higher Judicatory. These Courts are in number Eight, and held at these 8 Cities of Paris, Montpelier, Roven, Clermont, Montferrand, Bourdeaux, Aix, Grenoble and Dijon. IU. Presidial Courts (composed of several Judges) where Civil Causes in matters of smaller importance, as also Appeals made from Subaltern Justices in Villages, are heard and determined. V. Generalities, whose Office (they being the Treasurer's general of France) is to take care of assessing the Taxes proportionably in their respective Districts, according to the Sum proposed by the King and Council to be levied. These Courts are 23 in number (each consisting of twenty three Persons) and these conveniently situated in several parts of the Kingdom. They do also judge Matters relating to the Crown-Lands, the King's Revenue, and such like. Lastly, Elections; which are small Courts subordinate to the Generalities, and their Office is to cast up how much every Parish in their respective Division must raise of the Sum proposed by the Generality; and accordingly they issue out their Orders to every Parish; whereupon one of the Inhabitants being chosen Collector, he proportions every one's Quota; and collecting the same, returns it to the Generalities, and they again to the public Exchequer. Besides these, there is a vast number of inferior Courts for smaller Matters, whether Civil or Criminal: And a great many public Officers, as Provosts, Seneschals, Bailiffs, as also Intendants de la Justice, policy, and Finance, etc. But our intended brevity will not admit of a farther Relation.  
The King of France, for Arms bears Azure, three Flower de Luce's Or, two in chief, and one in base; 
Arms.  the Escutcheon is environed with the Collars of the Orders of S. Michael and the Holy Ghost. For Crest, an Helmet Or, entirely open, thereon a Crown closed, after the manner of an Imperial Crown, with eight inarched Rays, topped with a double Flower de Luce. The Supporters are, two Angels habited as Levites; the whole under a Pavilion Royal, semés of France, lined Ermines, with these words, Ex omnibus Floribus elegi mihi Lilium. Lilia neque laborant neque nent.  
The only Established Religion in France, is that of the Church of Rome; for all the Decisions of the Council 
Religion.  of Trent in Matters of Faith are there received; but those that relate to Points of Discipline, and infringe the Rights of the Crown, with the Liberties of the Gallican Church, are rejected. The Protestants (commonly called Hugonots) were formerly allowed the public profession of their Religion by several Edicts granted by the French Kings; particularly that of Nantes, An. 1598. by Henry IU. and confirmed by all his Successors ever since. But the present King, by his Declaration of October 1685. abolished the said Edict, and inhibited the Exercise of the Reformed Religion, enjoining the profession of the Roman, and that under the severest Penalties. Whereupon followed the Destruction of their Churches, and a violent Persecution which forced great Droves to leave the Kingdom, and seek for shelter in Foreign Countries. As to the Romanists themselves; There are great Divisions among them at present, notwithstanding of their so much boasted Unity: For besides the hot Disputes between the Molinists and Jansenists about Predestination and Grace (in which the pretended Infallible Judge at Rome dares not interpose his Decisive Authority for fear of disobliging one or the other Party) we find that the Sect of Quietism has lately crept in among them; as appears from the late Book of the Archbishop of Cambray concerning the Internal Life, which has been censured by the Archbishop of Paris, and the Bishops of Meaux and Chartres, and complained off by the French King in his Letter to the Pope, though the Author proffers to maintain his Doctrine before his Holiness, if permitted to go to Rome. The Christian Faith was first planted in this Country by some of St. Peter's Disciples (as is most probably thought) sent thither by him at his first coming to Rome.    


A New Map of GERMANY By Robt. Morden.    

SECT. IV. Concerning Germany.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 24 10 of Long. It's greatest Length is about 540. 37 12 between 45 30 of Lat. Breadth is about 510. 54 30 Being divided into three Classes, viz. North. Middle. South.  
North. The Circle of Belgium. Chief Towns are Amsterdam W. to E. Bruxelles The Circle of Westphalia Munster— The Circle of Lower Saxony. Hamburg— The Circle of Upper Saxony. Wittenburg— Middle. The Circle of the Lower Rhine Heidelberg— W. to E. The Circle of the Upper Rhine Francfort— The Circle of Franconio. Nurenburg— South. The Circle of Suabia. Ausburg— W. to E. The Circle of Bavaria. Munick— The Circle of Austria. Vienna—  
Of all these in Order.  

§. 1. The Circle of Belglum.  
Divided into North, viz. Holland— Chief Town Amsterdam. South, viz. Flanders— Bruxelles.  
Holland contains Seven Provinces.  
Viz. 4 towards the South Holland properly so called Chief Town Amsterdam. Zealand— Middleburgh Utretcht— Idem. Zutphen, and a part of Gelderland. Zutphen. 3 towards the North Over Issel— Deventer. Friesland— Levarden. Groningen— Idem.  
Flanders contains Ten Provinces.  
Viz. 4 Dutchies Gelderland— Chief Town Gelder's. Brabant— Bruxelles. Luxembourge— Idem. Limbourge— Idem. 4 Counties Flanders properly so called— Bruges. Artesia— Arras. Hannonia— Mons. Namur— Idem. The Marquisate of the Empire Antwerp. The signory of Malines. Idem.  
The Chief of these 〈…〉 Holland and Flanders properly 〈…〉 particularly consider them, 〈…〉 the most remarkable Towns in each of them. 〈…〉  
Holland properly so called, being divided into 

North.  
South.    
Chief Towns North are Goree in the Island Goree. 〈◊〉— Nigh unto, or upon the Mues from W. to E. 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— — In the Western part from S. W. to N. E. 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— South are Amsterdam upon the Channel Amstel. 〈◊〉— In the Western part from S. to N. 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— Upon the Zuyder-zee, or South-Sea, from N. to S. 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— Naerden—  
Flanders properly so called, being divided into 

East.  
West.    
Chief Towns in East are Dendermonde— Upon the Dendre, from N. to S. 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— Gramont— Ghaut— Upon the Soheld. all found from N. to S. W. O●denard— Tournay— St. Amand— Upon the Scarpe. Douai— Deynse— Nigh unto, or upon the Lys, all found from N. to S. W. Courtray— Armenthiers— Lisle— West are Gravelling— Five remarkable Ports from S. to N. E. Dunkirk— Neuport— Osiend— lanies— Bruges— found from W. to E. Axel— Hulst— Rupelmond upon the Scheld, 5 Miles S. of Antwerp. Farne— found from W. to E. Dixmude— Thyelt— Berge S. Winoc— from W. to E. Ypres— Cassel, farthest South.  
The Duchy of Brabant being divided into 

North.  
South.    
Chief Towns in North are Bosleduc— found from E. to W. Breda— Steenbergen— Bergenopzoom— Antwerp upon the Scheld. Mechelin upon the Dender. South are Aersschot— Upon the Demer from W. to E. Sichem— Diest— Brussels— found from W. to E. Louvain— Tilmont— Judoigne about 12 Miles S. E. of Louvain. Gemblours— found from E. to W. Genape— Nivelle—   

§. 2. The Circle of Westphalia.  
Divided into North-East, between the Weser and Elm Ch. T. Osnaburge. Middle, between the Elm and the Rhine Munster. South-West, betw. the Rhine and Cir. Belg. Liege.  
More particularly,  
North-East comprehends The County of Oldenburg— Chief Town Idem— On the Wefer from N. to S. Hoya— are Idem Diepholt— Idem Schomberg— Idem— The Principal of Minden Idem— The County of Embden or Emdent Nigh unto, or upon the Elm, from N. to S. E. ●●●●●seland Linge— Idem The Bishop of Osnaburg. Idem The County of Tecklenburg Idem Ravensburg Idem Middle comprehends The County of Ben●hem— Idem from N. W to S. E. The Bishopric of Munster Idem The County of Lip— Idem The Bishopric of Paderborne Idem The Durchy of Westphalia Arensberge from E. to W. The County of Mark— Ham— Berge— Dusseldorp. South West comprehends The Succession of the Dutchies of Cleves Cleves N. to S. Juliers Juliers The Bishopric of Liege— Liege W. of Juliers.   

§. 3. The Circle of Lower Saxony.  
Divided into North— Chief Town Hamburge. Middle— Lunenburge. South— Magdeburge.  
More particularly, North the D of Holstein comprehending the D of Ditmarsh— Chief Town Meldorp— Hamburg— From W. to E. Holstein prop Kiel— Stormaria Geluckstat Wagerland Lubeck— Lawenburg— are those of Lawenburg. Mecklenburg— Wismar Middle the D of Bremen— — are those of Eremen— W. to E. Ferden— Ferden— Lunenburg— Lunenburg South Hildersheim, a Bishopric Is that of Hildersheim— W. to E. Brunswick, a Duchy— Brunswick & Wolfenbuttle Halberstat, a Principality Is that of Halberstat— Megdeburg, an Archbish Is that of Megdeburg—  
Besides these are, The D. of Hanover— Chief Town Idem, 16 m. N. W. of Hildersheim. Gruppenhagen Idem, 37 m. S. Gottingen— Idem, 14 m. S. of Gruppenhagen. The C. of Reinstein— Blackenberg, 10 m. S. W. of Halberstat. Weringen— Elbingeroda, 12 m.   

§. 10. The Circle of Upper Saxony.  
Divided into South— Chief Town Wittenberg. North— Stetin.  
More particularly,  
South contains the D. of Saxony, properly so called— Ch. T. Wittenberg— N. to S. Marq of Misnia— Dresden— Lantgr. of Thuring— Erfurt, Westward North contains the Mar. of Brandenburg Alt-mark, West. Chief Town Stendal Berlin from S. to N. Middlemark— Berlin Newmark, East. Custrin D. of Pomerania Ducal, East. Camin Stetin Royal, West. Stetin  
Besides these, are many little Princes of the House of Saxony scattered up and down (or nigh unto) the Landtgrave of Thurin, particularly these following;  
The Princip. of Anhalt, [South to Magdeburg] Ch. Town Bernburg. The D. of Weimar— Chief Town Idem, 13 miles E. of Erfurd. Gotha— Idem, 14 miles W. Eisenach— Idem, 26 miles W. The E. of Schwartsberg— Idem, 24 miles S. Beichlingen— Idem, 20 mil. N. E. Mansfield— Idem, 55 m. S. W. of Wittenberg. The Bishopric of Hall— Idem, 36 m. S W.   

§. 5. The Circle of the Lower Rhine.  
Divided into East— Chief Town Heidelberg. West— Cologne.  
More particularly,  
It comprehends Bishopric of Cologne— Chief Town Cologne between Juliers. The Rhine. The Palat. of the Rhine- Heidelberg upon the Neckar. Archbishopric of Triers- Idem upon the Moselle. Mentz- Idem upon the Rhine. Bishopric of Worms— Idem upon the Rhine. D. of Simmeron— Idem 33 m. W. of Mentz. Rhinegrauc— Kirn ij m. S. of Simmeren. Counties of Meurs— Idem 28 m. S. E. of Cleves in Westp. Sponheim. Creutznach 20 m. S. W. of Mentz. Veldentz- Idem 17 m. N E. of Triers. Leyningen Idem 12 m. S. W. of Worms.   

§. 6. The Circle of the Upper Rhine.  
Divided into North— Chief Town Cassel. South— Francfort.  
More particularly,  
It contains D. of Zueybruck, or Deux Ponts— Chief Town Idem, 44 m. all W. of Worms. Landtgr. of Hesse Cassel— Cassel farthest North. Darmstat— Idem betw. the Rhine and Maine. Territories of Francfort— Idem upon the Matne. Counties of Waldeck— Idem from N. to S. on the W. of the Landtgr. Hesse Cassel. Solms— Idem Isenlurg— Idem from W. to S. E. on the North of the Rhine. Nassan— Idem Catzenclbogen Idem Hanan— Idem Erpacl:— Idem   

§. 7. The Circle of Franconia.  
Divided into South— Chief Town Nurenburg. North— Coburg.  
More particularly,  
It contains The Territ. of Nurenburg Chief Town Idem on a branch of the Main. Marq. of Onspach— Idem, 23 m. W. of Nurenburg. Culenbach— Idem from E. to W. Bishopr. of Bamberg— Idem Wartzburg Idem Aichstat— Idem, 34 m. S. of Nurenburg.  
Besides these are  
The State of the great Master of the Teutonick Order, chief Town Margentheim, 57 Miles W. of Nurenburg.  
As also several Counties, but chiefly those of  
Reineck— Chief Town Idem— from N. to S. in the W. part of this Circle. Wertheim— Idem— Holach— Oringen— Papenheim— Idem 12 m. W. of the Bishopric of Aichstat. Schwartzenberg— Idem 32 m. N. W. of Nurenberg. castle— Idem 23 m. S. W. of Bamberg.   

§. 8. The Circle of Suabia.  
Divided into East— Chief Town Ausburg. West— Stugart.  
More particularly, Suabia comprehends the D. of Wirtenberg— Chief Town are Stugart— Nigh or upon the Neckar. Tubingen— Bishopr. of Constance. Idem upon the Lake Constance. Ausburg— Idem upon the Lech. Marq. of Baden— Idem 38 m. W. from Stugart. Burg●●— Idem 10 m. W. from Ausburg. Ortnaw— Offenburg 20 m. S. from Baden. Princ. of Fu●stenberg Idem 36 m. N. W. from Constance. Hoenzolern— Idem ij m. S. from Tubingen. Count of Otting— Idem 38 m N. W. from Ausburg. Reckbery— Gemund 43 m. W. from Otting. Koniseck— Idem 18 m. N. from Constance. Baron of Waiburg— Idem, or Waldsee, 30m. N. E. fr. Consta. Limpurg— Idem 37 m. W. from Otting. Justingen— Idem 28 m. S. E. from Stugart. Territ. of Fuggers— Babenhausen 30 m. S. W. fr. Ausburg. Ulm— Idem 38 m. W. from Ausburg. Abacy of Kempten— Idem 50 m. S. W. from Ausburg.  
To the Circle of Suabia we add Alsatia, chief Town is Strasburg.  
It's divided into 

Higher, Southward.  
Lower, Northward.    
Higher contains the Towns of Freiburg— From E. to W. Brisach— Colmar— Lower contains the Towns of Strasburg— S. to N. Hageno●— Zabern, Westward.   

§. 9 The Circle of Bavaria.  
Divided into North— Chief Town Leutchenberge. South— Munick or Munchen.  
More particularly,  
North contains Nortgow, or the Palatinate of Bavaria,  
Comprehending Landtgr. of Leutchenberge Chief Town Idem N. to S. W. Territor. of Sultzbach— Idem Amberge— Idem Abacy of Walthausen— Idem N. to S. County of Chambe— Idem South contains D. and Elect. of Bavaria Higher, Southw. Ch. T. Munick or Munchen. Lower, Northw. Ratisb. or Regensp. Archbishopric of Saltzburge Idem, Southward.  
Besides these are several other Dominions, as particularly  
The Duchy of Neuburge, [Ch. Town, Idem] 10 miles' S. of the Bishopric of Aichstat in Franconia. The Bishopr. of Passaw— Ch. To. Idem 68 m. E. of Ratisbonne. Freisengen Idem 10 m. N. of Munick.   

§. 10. The Circle of Austria.  
Divided into Lower, Eastward— Chief Town Vienna. Higher, Westward— Inspruck.  
More particularly,  
Lower contains Arch D. of Austria East Chief Town Vienna Vienna, chief of the whole. West Lintz D. of Stiria higher, W. Judenburg Judenburg from N. to S. lower, E. Gratz— Carinthia higher, W. Willach— Clagenfurt lower, E. Clagenfurt  Carniola higher, N. Laubach— Laubach—  lower, S. Loes— Higher contains the County of Tyrol— Inspruck— from N. to S. Bishopr. of Brixen Idem—  
Besides these are some other petty Sovereignty's, especially these two following▪  
The D. of Goritia— in Carniola 40 miles W. of Laubech. Gilley— 36 miles E.  
Under this Circle is ordinarily comprehended Bohemia, containing  
The K. of Bohemia, prop. so called Chief Town Prague— S. to N. Lusatia higher, Northward— Soraw 〈◊〉 lower, Southward— Pantzen Moravia Eastern— Weiskirk Olmutz Western— Olmutz D. of Silesia higher, Southward Troppaw Breslaw lower, Northward Breslaw  
After the 10 Circles of Germany followeth Switzerland, comprehending 13 Cantons, with several Confederate Cities and Proefectures.  
(1.) The thirteen Cantons are those of 

Zurick,  
Switz,  
Glaris,  
Solothurn,  
Bern,  
Underwald,  
Basil,  
Schafhousen,  
Lucern,  
Zug,  
Friburg,  
Apenzel.    
These Cantons are set down according to their Votes in the general Diets; each of them hath a capital City of its own Name except Uri (chief Town Altorf) and Underwald (chief Town Stant) and are reduced to three Classes.  
Viz. West comprehending Basil— from N. to S. Soloturn— Bern— Freiburg— Middle comprehending Schafhouse— from N. to S. Zurich— Zug— Lucern— Switz— Underwald— Uri— East comprehending Apenzil— from N. to S. Glaris— (2.) The chief Confederates of the Swissers are the Grisons, ch. T. Coire W. of the County of Tirol. City of Geneva— Lake of Geneva. (3.) The chief Praefectures of the Swissers are Baden— on the W. N. W. of Zurick. Bremgarten Mellingen— Sargans▪ N. of the Grisons.  
To the Germane Empire we might here annex the Kingdom of Hungary, it being now almost entirely under the Emperor; But of it when we come to Turkey in Europe.   

THIS great Body being divided (as aforesaid) into Ten Circles; and the first of these (viz. Belgium or the Netherlands) being most observable upon several accounts; we shall take a particular View of the same, as it consists of Holland and Flanders, and then treat of all the rest conjunctly, under the general Title of Upper Germany. Therefore,   

§. 1. HOLLAND.  
THis Country (of old Batavia, a part of Ancient Belgium) is 〈◊〉 by the Italians and Spaniards, Holanda; by 
Name.  the French, Hollande; by the Germans and English, Holland; so called (as many imagine) from Haul and land, two Teutonic words, signifying a low or hollow sort of Land: But others choose rather to d●●ive the Name from Oeland (an Island in the Baltic Sea) whose Inhabitants, being great Pirates, and frequently ranging these Seas, at 〈◊〉 did seize upon, and settle themselves in this part of the 〈◊〉  
The Air of this Country is generally thick and moist, by reason of the frequent Fogs which arise from the many Lakes and Channels with which this Country abounds; And to Moistness of the Air it is, that we may impute the Cause of the mency of Agues, to which the Inhabitants are so subject. The osite Place of the Globe to Holland is that part of the vast Paci●●● Ocean, between 205 and 210 Degrees of Longitude, with 51 and 54 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country lying very low, and in the Tenth North Climate; Its Soil is Naturally wet and fenny, but the industrious 
Soil.  Inhabitants do so drain it by a vast Multitude of Artificial Channels, that the Ground is made very fit both for Pasture and Tillage especially the former, they employing the greatest part of their Land in Grazing vast Herds of Kine. The Length of the Days and Nights is the same as in England, South of the Humber.  
Although the Commodities of this Country, proceeding from its natural Growth, may (strictly speaking) 
Commodities.  be reckoned only Butter and Cheese; yet by reason of the many useful Manufactures which this People encourage at home, (the very Materials of which are brought from other Nations) and that wonderful Trade which they manage abroad in most Parts of the known World, we may reckon it as a Public Warehouse of the richest and best Commodities of all Nations.  
The chief Remarkables in Holland are these following; viz. (1.) The vast Multitude of Artificial 
Rarities.  Sluices and Canals, being a Work of prodigious Expense and great Convenience both for Traffic and Travelling. (2.) The Burg in Leyden (being reckoned a notable Piece of Antiquity) with the many rare Curiosities to be seen in the famous University there. (3.) The Curious Fountains (especially that called The Basin of Venus) and the two great Cascades or Water-falls in the pleasant Gardens belonging too Loo. (4.) The brazen Font in St. Peter's Church in Zutphen, Remarkable for its admirable Workmanship. (5.) The two brazen Dishes in the Village of Losdun, in which were Baptised (Anno 1276.) by Don William, Suffragan Bishop of Treves, 365 Children born at one Birth by the Countess of Heneberg, Daughter to Florent the 4th Earl of Holland. (6.) The Remarkable Stone Quarry near Maestricht, which looks like a vast Subterraneous Palace, it reaching under a large Hill, supported by some Thousands of square Pillars [commonly 20 Foot high] between which are spacious Walks and many private Retirements of great Use in time of War, they serving as a sure Refuge to the neighbouring Country People, who commonly resort thither with their Goods when alarmed by an approaching Enemy. (7.). The Room where the Synod of Dort was held Anno 1619, with the Seats as they then stood, is shown to Strangers as another Curiosity of this Country. To these we may add the stately brazen Statue of the famous Desid. Erasmus in the City of Rotterdam, as also the little obscure House where that Great and Eminent Man was born, which is likewise shown to Strangers, having this Distich over its Door.  
Aedibus his ortus, Mundum decor avit Erasmus  
Artibus ingenuis, Relligione, Fide.  
Here is but one Archbishopric in this Country, (viz. Utricht) and that only Titulary. 
Archbishoprics.   
Under the Archbishop of Utrecht are Five Titular Suffragans; viz. 
Bishoprics.   
Those of 

Deventer,  
Groningen,  
Harlem,  
Leuwarden,  
Middleburgh.    
Universities in this Country are those of 
Universities.  

Leyden,  
Utrecht,  
Franeker,  
Groningen,  
Harderwick.    
The Natives of this Country are reckoned none of the Politest sort of People either in Thought or Behaviour, 
Manners.  especially the latter, in which they so little endeavour to follow the various Modes and nice Punctilios of Ceremony in Use among their Neighbours the French, that they choose rather to run to the other extreme. The chief, if not only Quality of this People, (besides the singular Neatness of their Houses) is that wonderful Genius to a laudable Industry, wherewith they seem to be Universally inspired; Persons of all Ages, Sexes and Stations, being some way or other usefully employed. By which industrious Hand, in carrying on several profitable Manufactures at home, and managing a prodigious Trade abroad, they have of late advanced themselves to such a height of Power and Treasure, as to become even terrible to crowned Heads.  
The Language here spoken is the Low Dutch (a Dialect of the Germane) having several corrupted French and Latin 
Language.  words intermixed: a Language that hath nothing to recommend it to Strangers. How it differs from the High Germane, will best appear by their Pater Noster, which runs thus; Onse Vader die in de hemelen [Ziit] Uwen Naem werde geheylight. Uw ' koninckritche home. Uwen will geschiede geliick in den hemel [alsoo] oock op der atrden. On's ' dagelicks broot geef on's heden. End vergeeft on's onse schulden geliick oock wy vergeven onse schuldenaren. End en leapt on's niet in versoeckinge snaer verlost on's van den boosen. Amen.  
The seven Provinces of Holland, being under a Democratical Government, are (as it were) several Commonwealths, 
Government.  each Province being a distinct State, yea and every City, having an independent Power within itself to judge of all causes, whether Civil or Criminal, and to inflict even Capital Punishments: But all joining together, make up one Republic the most considerable in the World; which Republic is governed by the Assembly of the States-General, consisting of Seven Voices, each Province having One To this Assembly (whose place of Meeting is ordinarily at the Hague) belongeth the Power of making War or Peace; receiving and dispatching of Ambassadors; inspecting into the Condition of Frontier Towns, and Assigning what Sums of Money must be levied for the public Service. Matters are not determined here in this Assembly by Plurality of Voices, but all the Provinces must come to an unanimous Consent; and each Representative returning to his respective Province, must propose the Matter in a Provincial Assembly, consisting of Deputies from all Cities of that Province; which Deputies must also return, and receive the Consent of their Principals, otherways nothing can be concluded. In this Assembly of the States-General, the seven Provinces have still given their Voices in order following; viz. Gelder's and Zutphen first, (because Gelder's is the eldest, and her Plenipotentiaries did first propose the Union) than Holland; 3dly, Zealand; 4thly, Utrecht; 5thly, Friesland; 6thly, Overyssel, and lastly, Groningen. Assistant to this Assembly is the Council of State, composed of twelve Persons, (whereof Guelderland sends, 2; Holland, 3; Zealand, 2; Utrecht, 2; Friexland, 1; Overyssel, 1; and Groningen, 1;) whose business is to deliberate Previously upon those Matters which are to be brought before the States-General; as also to state the Expense for the succeeding Year, and to propose Ways and Means how to Levy the same. Subservient to this Council is the Chamber of Accounts (composed of two Deputies from each Province) whose Office it is to examine the public Accounts, and dispose of the Finances. And whensoever the States do Order the fitting out a Fleet, the Care of the same, and Ordering of all Marine Affairs do rely upon the Council of the Admiralty, to which are Subordinate five Colleges in the three Maritime Provinces, viz. Holland, Zealand, and Friezland, who take Care to execute all Orders of that Council according as they are sent to them from time to time.  
The Ensigns Armorial of the Seven United Provinces or States of Holland are Or, a Lion Gules, holding with 
Artns.  one Paw a Cutleas, and with the other a Bundle of seven Arrows closely bound together, in allusion to the seven Confederate Provinces, with the following Motto, Concordiâ res parvae crescunt.  
No Country in Europe can boast of more Religions, and yet perhaps no part of Christendom may be truly said to 
Religion.  be less Religious than this is. Here indeed we may see all Sects and Parties in the open Profession of their respective Tenets (all Professions being tolerated for Trade sake) and yet that which the Apostle St. James (chap. 1. v. 27.) calls the pure and undefiled Religion before God and the Father, is as little (if not less) known here than in any Christian Country whatsoever. That publicly professed and generally received is the Reformed Religion according to the Tenets of Judicious Calvin. Christianity was first planted in this Country about the same time with Upper Germany; of which afterwards.   

§. 2. FLANDERS.  
THis Country (the ancient Gallia Belgica) it termed by the Italians, Flandra; by the Spaniards, Flandes; by the 
Name.  French, Flanders; by the Germans, Flandern; and by the English Flanders, so called (as some imagine) from Flamdebert, Nephew to Clodion the 2d King of France, who flourished about the beginning of the fifth Century. But others are willing rather to derive it from Flandrina, Wife to Liderick the 2d, who was Prince of Bun, and Grand Forester of Flanders, and governed it according to the Orders of Charlemaigne and Lewis Debonnaire.  
The Air of these various Provinces is generally esteemed indifferent healthful, yet the Moistness of the Soil doth frequently 
Air.  occasion thick Fogs in the Winter, which would prove very prejudicial to the Inhabitants, did not dry Easterly Winds from the main Continent purify the Air, and occasion hard Frosts for several Months. The opposite Place of the Globe to Flanders, is that Part of the vast Pacifick Ocean between 205 and 210 Degrees of Longitude, with 49 and 51 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 9th Northern Climate) is not the same in all Parts, being in some considerably 
Soil.  better than others, but yet good in all; So fertile is it in Grain, Roots, and many sorts of Fruits, that 'tis hardly to be paralleled by any Spot of Ground in the same Climate. In the Counties of Hannonia and Namur, as likewise in the Bishopric of Liege, are found some Mines of Iron and Lead, with Quarties of Marble, and several Pits of excellent Coal. The Length of the Days and Nights is the same, as in the North of France and South of England.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, being the Product of their Manufactures, are Tapestries, 
Commodities.  Worsted-Stuffs, Linen Cloth, Wrought Silks, Camblets, Lace, etc.  
Near to St. Omers is a large Lake, in which are divers floating Islands, most of them inhabited, and movable 
Rarities.  by Ropes tied to strong Poles fixed fast in the Ground; and in one of them is a Church with a Monastery of the Order of St. Bernard. At Tongres (10 Miles North-West from Liege) are to be seen some Monuments of ancient Temples, and other Buildings, erected by the Romans. In the stately Cathedral of Antwerp (dedicated to the Blessed Virgin) are no less than 66 different Chapels. At Ghent is a Tower called Belfart, in which hangs a Bell named Roland, which weighs 11000 Pounds. Remarkable is the Sounding-Gallery in Brussels, which repeats an Echo 15 times; and Spaa or Spa (a Village in the B. of Liege) is famous, all the World over, for its curious Springs of Medicinal Waters.  
Archbishoprics in this Country are those of 
A. Bishoprics.  

Malines,  
Cambray.    
Bishoprics in this Country are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Liege,  
Antwerp,  
Gaunt,  
Bruges,  
Ypres,  
Ruremond,  
Bois le Duc.  
Arras,  
Tournay,  
S. Omers,  
Namur.    
Universities in this Country are those of 
Universities.  

Louvaine,  
Douai,  
Liege.    
The Inhabitants of these various Provinces being (for the most part) a mixture of Spanish, French and Dutch; 
Manners.  their Character in general will be best learned by considering the respective Characters of these three Nations (which may be seen in their proper places) and comparing them one with another.  
The Language vulgarly used in Flanders is that called the Waloon, (excepting those Provinces which border on 
Language.  Holland, where the Dutch prevails) which is a corrupt French, with an intermixture of several Dutch, and many Spanish words. How it differeth from the pure French, will best appear by their Pater Noster, which runs thus: Nos peer qui êt au Cieux; sanctify soi te Nom, Adveen ton Rejam; ta Volonté se fait en terre comme es Cieux; Donne noy ajord ' hue no pain quotidien: & pardonne no det come no pardonnon a nos detteux; & ne no indu en tentation; mais deliure nos des maux. Ansi soit il.  
This Country (viz. all those Provinces belonging to the Spaniard before the late War, and now restored) doth 
Government.  acknowledge his Catholic Majesty as Supreme Lord, who Rules the same by his Substitute, styled Governor-general of the Netherlands. Which Post is at present enjoyed by his Electoral Highness Duke of Bavaria, and now made Hereditary to him since Anno 1692. For his Assistance he is allowed three Councils, viz. (1.) The Council of State, in which are transacted the weightiest Affairs; such as relate to Peace and War; Leagues and Alliances, etc. (2.) The Privy-Council, which determineth the Limits of Provinces, publisheth Edicts, and decideth Matters brought thither by Appeal from other Courts of Judicature. (3.) The Council of Finances, to whom belongeth the Care and Management of the Royal Revenue and Taxes, supervising the Accounts of Receivers, and proportioning the Expense or Charge of the War. To Levy Money, and to Enact new Laws, is the Business of the Convention of the Estates, (consisting of the Nobility, principal Persons of the Clergy, and Deputies of the chief Cities) who ordinarily Assemble at Brussels when called by the Governor-general. For the better maintaining the Peace through all the Provinces, and taking due Care of the Standing Forces, each Province hath a particular Governor appointed in Subordination to the Governor-general. And for an Universal Administration of Justice, every Province hath its peculiar Provost, and over all is appointed one Grand Provost, whose Power in Criminal Matters is reckoned very great.  
See Spain. 
Arms.   
The Religion predominant in all the Provinces of the Netherlands, before the dawning of that happy day of our 
Religion.  Reformation, was entirely the Doctrine of the Roman Church: But the Errors and Absurdities of that Doctrine being openly exposed to the World by our wise Reformers; the King of Spain (to hinder a farther Progress in that matter) set up the most severe and barbarous Court of Inquisition, which occasioned no small Disturbance, and at last a bloody War, that ended in a total Alienation of the Seven United Provinces, the other Ten still remaining in the Profession of the Romish Religion (as at this day) and that in its grossest Errors. Christianity was planted in this Country about the same time with the United Provinces.   

§. 3. UPPER GERMANY.  
THis Country (containing only a part of Ancient 
Name.  Germany as also a little of Gaul, Illyricum, with some of Old Italy) is termed by the Italians Alta Allemagna; by the Spaniards, Ale●●nia al●a; by the French, Haute Allemagne; by the Germans, Overteutschland; and by the English, Germany: Why so called, is much Controverted by our Modern Critics, some Germane Authors being willing to derive its Etymology from words in their own Language as ●●or-mannen, i. e. very much Men. Others from Geren signifying to Gather, because the Germans seemed to be an 〈◊〉 of many Nations; others from Gar and Man, to denote that they were a Warlike People. Some (tho' with little ground) would fain allow it an Hebrew Derivation: But the most probable Opinion of all is, that the Inhabitants of this Country were called Germani by the Romans, either because they were a sincere and honest sort of People, or thereby to denote that they were Brothers to their Neighbours the Gauls.  
The Air of this Country differeth considerably according to the Situation of the various Parts of this large Continent. 
Air.  Towards the North, it's generally very Cold; but in the Southmost Provinces it's of the same Temper as in those places of France which lie under the same Parallels. The opposite Place of the Globe to Germany, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean between 215 and 225 Degrees of Longitude, with 45 and 55 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 8th, 9th, 10th, and 11th North Climate) is very different according 
Soil.  to the Situation of its different Parts. In the Southern Circles, as also those in the middle part of the Continent, particularly the Upper and Lower Rhine, there is hardly any Country in the World can excel them for plenty of Fruits, Corn and Wine: but towards the North, namely the two Saxonies and Westphalia, the Soil is not near so fertile, especially in Wine (Grapes never coming to full perfection there;) however as for Corn and Pasturage, they are abundantly furnished with them; and the whole Country in the main is tolerably pleasant, healthful and profitable, abounding not only with all things necessary, but also with many of the Comforts of human Life. The longest Day in the North-most Part is about 17 Hours ¼. The shortest in the South-most, 8 Hours ½, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country are Corn, Metals, Allom, Salt, Wine, Flesh, Linen, Quicksilver, 
Commodities.  Armours, and Iron Works, etc.  
What Things do mostly merit the Epithet of Rare and Curious in this vast Country, are reducible to these 
Rarities.  following Heads; viz. (1.) Some very observable Springs; as That near Geesbach in Alsace, whose Top is covered with a foul fat Oily substance, ordinarily used by the Peasants thereabouts, as common Wheel Grease; Another near Paterborn in Westphalia, called Methorn, which hath three Streams very different from one another, both in Colour, Taste, and Qualities; and a Third in the Diocese of Paterborn, observable in that it loseth itself twice every 24 Hours, returning always back at the Interval of 6 Hours, and that with such Violence as to drive three Mills not far from its Source. Here also are many Salt Springs; particularly That near Lunenburg, in the D. of Lunenburg; another at Hall in Upper Saxony, and a third at Saltzwedel in the Marquisate of Brandenburg. To these we may add a vast multitude of Springs, whose Waters are highly prized both for Purging and Bathing, especially the latter; as particularly Those at Stugart in Wirtenburg; Those at Aix le Chapelle in Westphalia; and those in the Marquisate of Baden, from whence the whole Country derives its Name. (2.) Some strange kind of Lakes; particularly that in Carniola, called the Zirchnitzer-Sea, in length about two Germane miles, and one broad; Observable for its many subterraneous Caves and Passages, into which both the Water and Fishes of the Lake do yearly retire in the month of June, and return again about September. As also another in Suabia; the Nature of whose Waters is such, that they actually sing Fishing-Nets, when sunk to the bottom. (3.) Remarkable Caves, particularly that near Blackenburg in Lower Saxony, commonly called Buman's Hole; of which none hath yet found the End, tho' many have travelled a vast way into it on purpose to come at the same. Another called Grotto-Popetschio, with many other subterraneous Caverns in Carniola, near the Zirchnitzer-Sea abovementioned And finally that near Hamelen (about 30 miles from Hanover) at whose mouth stands a Monument expressing the Loss of 130 Children, who were swallowed up alive in that very place above 400 Years ago. (4.) Stately Edifices, especially some famous Cathedrals, as particularly those of Strasburg and Magdeburg, (in the latter of which are 49 Altars) as also that of Ulm, Remarkable for its curious Organ so much talked off, it being 93 Foot high, and 28 broad; being likewise furnished with 16 pair of Bellows, and having Pipes of such a prodigious Bigness, that the largest of them is 13 Inches Diameter. (5.) Some Observable Rocks and Stones, particularly those two Rocks nigh to Blackenburg (abovementioned) which naturally represent two Monks in their proper Habits, and that as exactly as if designed for such; and near to Blackenburg, are several Stones dug out of the Ground, having on them the Representation of divers Animals, especially Fishes in a neighbouring Lake; and sometimes the Resemblance of a Man. In another Lake, in the Earldom of Mansfeild, are Stones exactly shaped like Frogs and various sorts of Fishes. Add to these the Remarkable Stones commonly found upon Count Calenberg (about two Germane miles from Vienna) having the lively Impression of Trees and Leaves of Trees upon them: As also a Quarry in those Parts, out of which are dug some Stones equally transparent with refined Sugar-Candy. (6.) Many choice Cabinets of Rarities, especially That in the Palace of Inspruck, with another at Dresden; but the chief of all is that in the Emperor's Palace at Vienna, whose Curiosities are so vastly numerous, that a bare Catalogue of them makes a complete Volume in Folio. To all these add that modern Curiosity kept at Mentz, and commonly shown to Strangers, viz. a Leaf of Parchment, on which are fairly written twelve different sorts of Hands, with variety of Minatures and Draughts, curiously done with a Pen, and that by one Thomas Schuveiker, who was Born without Hands, and performed the same with his Feet. As for the famous Tun of Heidelberg (being 31 Foot long and 21 high) 'tis so notoriously known, that we need say nothing of it.  
Archbishoprics in this Country are those of 
A. Bishoprics.  

Mentz,  
Magdeburg,  
Triers,  
Saltzburg,  
Cologn,  
Bremen.  
Prague.    
Bishoprics in this Country are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Metz,  
Brandenburg,  
Paderborn,  
Brixen,  
Toul,  
Havelberg,  
Constance  
Gurk,  
Verdun,  
Spire,  
Halberstadt  
Vienna,  
Liege,  
Worms,  
Bamburg  
Newstadt,  
Munster,  
Strasburg,  
Freisenghen  
Lubeck,  
Minden,  
Wirtzburg,  
Ratisbon  
Ratzburg,  
Osnaburg,  
Aichstat,  
Passaw  
Scheweirin,  
Meisen,  
Verden,  
Chiemse  
Olmutz,  
Maesburg,  
Ghur,  
Seckaw,  
Leutmeritz,  
Maumburg,  
Heldesheim,  
Lavant,  
Koningsgratz.    
Universities in this Country are those of 
Universities.  

Vienna,  
Leipsick,  
Francfort on Oder,  
Helmstadt,  
Prague,  
Erfurt,  
Marpurg,  
Sigen,  
Mentz,  
Friburg,  
Strasburg,  
Paderborn,  
Cologn,  
Ingoldstadt,  
Gipswald,  
Altorfe,  
Triers,  
Tubingen,  
Dillinghen,  
Olmutz,  
Liege,  
Rostock,  
Jena,  
Kiel,  
Heidelberg,  
Wittenberg,  
Lewenghen,  
Gratz.    
This People hath a mighty Genius for Mechanical sort of Learning; and several of them are famous for 
Manners.  some singular Inventions, particularly that of the fatal Instrument the Gun, accidentally discovered by one Bartholdus Swart a Friar, when making a Chemical Experiment with a Crucible set over the Fire, having Saltpetre and Sulphur, and other such like Ingredients, intermixed. They are also said to have found out that most useful Art of Printing; but the Hollanders do eagerly deny them the honour of that Invention, ascribing the same to one Laurence Coster of Harlem; and upon strict enquiry, it appears that the Germans had indeed the first hint of this Art from Holland, and that they only improved and perfected the same at Mentz. The most noted of the many mechanical Operations of this People of late, is that curious Watch of the Emperor Charles the Fifth, set in the Jewel of his Ring; as also that Clock of the Elector of Saxony's fixed in the Pommel of his Saddle. As for the Iron Fly and Wooden Eagle of Regiomontanus, they are so well known, that it's superfluous even to name them.  
The Language here used is that called the High Dutch; a Language very Ancient, and generally esteemed both 
Language.  Noble and Manly in the Pronunciation, more becoming a General than a Courtier. None of the Western European Tongues hath less Affinity with the Latin than it has. The Maternal Languages of several Kingdoms and different States in Europe, are Originally from the Germane. It's now divided into a great many Dialects, very different from one another; The purest of which is generally esteemed that spoken in Misuia. Paternoster in the High German runs thus: Unser Vatter der du bist in himmel, geheyliget werde dein Nahim. Zukomm uns dein Ritch; dein Will geschene of erden, wte in himmel. Unser taeglich brodt gibbuns' heut: und vergibuns' unser schuldt, als wir vergoben unsern schuldigern; und fuchr uns night in Versuchung; sunder erlaese uns vom ubel. Amen.  
This great Body comprehends above three hundred different Sovereignty's, but all (or most of them) are Homagers to one Head, owned as Supreme, viz. the 
Government.  Emperor of Germany. The Empire is Elective, and Governed by Diets, almost like the General Estates of France. The standing Law of the Empire (which bindeth all the several States as the various members of one Body) is the Civil or Roman mixed with the Canon; to which add the ancient Customs of the Germans, and the various Statutes of the Diets made from time to time. The several States have their peculiar Laws obligatory within themselves. The whole Empire being divided into Ten Circles, each of them (excepting Belgium, or the Circle of Burgundy, which now is allowed no Vote in the Diet) hath one or more Directors who preside at their Assemblies; viz. For Westphalia, the Bishop of Munster and Duke of Neuburg are Directors. For Lower Saxony, are the Marquis of Brandenburg and Duke of Brunswick by turns. For Upper Saxony is the Elector of Saxony. For the Lower Rhine are the Elector Palatine and Bishop of Worms. For Franconia, are the Bishop of Bamberg and Marquis of Gulemback. For Suabia, are the Duke of Wirtenberg, and Bishop of Constance. For Bavaria, are the Elector of Bavaria, and Archbishop of Saltzburg. And lastly Austria, its Director is the Archduke of Austria, or his Imperial Majesty. Two or three Circles may meet when one of them is attacked from without, or in any Confusion within. The General Diets consist of three Bodies, viz. Electoral Princes, other Princes, and Imperial Cities. But more particularly; In this great Body we may reduce all Sovereignty's to these Five; namely, 

The Emperor,  
The Ecclesiastic Princes,  
The Electors,  
The Secular Princes,  
The Free Cities.    
I. The Emperor, who (being of the House of Austria) doth claim three sorts of Dominion, viz. that of Austria as Hereditary; Bohemia, as his Right; and Hungary by Election. In his Life-time he causeth his own Son or Brother, or (failing of these) one of his nearest Kinsmen to be Crowned King of Hungary, afterwards King of Bohemia, and then (if the Electors are willing) he is also Chosen King of the Romans, whereby he is Successor Presumptive to the Empire. The Power of the Emperor is much impaired by several Capitulations betwixt him and the Princes of the Empire. It's true, that only he can confer Honours, create Princes, affranchize Cities, institute Universities, and suchlike: Yet as to the Legislative Power, and that of Levying Taxes upon the whole Empire, that is wholly lodged in the General Diet conjunctly with him; and by a late Capitulation, he is not to enter into Alliance, or make War with any Foreign Prince without Consent of the Electors. However, if we consider only his own Hereditary Dominions, he is a Powerful Prince; and to support the Grandeur of the Imperial Dignity, he is served by the greatest Princes of the Empire; is addressed unto by the August Title of Caesar, and the Ambassadors of all Crowned Heads and Free States in Europe, give place to those sent by him, at what Foreign Court soever it be.  
II. Electors, who are now Nine in Number, viz. these following: (1.) The Archbishop of Mentz, who is Great Chancellor of the Empire in Germany; sits on the emperor's right hand in the Diet, and did formerly Crown the King of Bohemia. (2.) The Archbishop of Triers or Treves, who is Great Chancellor of the Empire in France; claims the first Vote in Electing the Emperor; and sits over against him in the Diet. (3.) The Arch Bishop of Cologn, who is Great Chancellor of the Empire in Italy; claims the first Vote in choosing the King of the Romans; setting the Crown on his Head; and sits next the Emperor. (4.) The King of Bohemia (who hath only a Seat in the Election) is Cupbearer, and in the public Procession, walks next the Emperor or King of the Romans. (5.) The Duke of Bavaria, who is Great Steward, and in time of the public Procession carrieth the Globe before the Emperor. (6) The Duke of Saxony, who is Great Marshal of the Empire, and at the public Procession carrieth the naked Sword before the Emperor. (7.) The Marquis of Brandenburg, who is great Chamberlain, and at the public Procession, carrieth the Sceptre before the Emperor. (8) The Prince Palatine of the Rhine, who is Great Treasurer, and in the Procession at Coronations scattereth Medals among the People. (9) The Ninth Elector is Ernestus Augustus' Duke of Brunswick, Lunenburg, Hanover, who was added to the Electoral College in the Year 1693. These Princes have much greater Authority, and enjoy, more ample Privileges than the other Princes of the Empire. To them belongeth not only a Right of electing the Emperor and King of the Romans (as aforesaid) but also some allow them even a Deposing Power. When the Emperor calls a Diet, he is obliged to ask their advice; and during an Interreign, two of them (viz. the Elector of Saxony and Prince Palatine of the Rhine) have Power to govern the Empire; the Jurisdiction of the former extending over the Northern, and that of the others over the Southern Circles of the Empire: but this Right of the Count Palatins is now disputable by the Elector of Bavaria, who upon the Death of the last Emperor did actually undertake and exercise the same.  
III. Ecclesiastic Princes who (besides the first three Electors) are chiefly these following, viz. Archbishop of Saltzburagt [Great Master of the Teutonick Order] the Bishops of Liege, Munster, Spire, Worms, Wurtzburg, Strasburg, Osnaburg, Bamberg, Paderborn, etc. and many Abbots and Abesses who are Absolute over the Temporality of their Benefices; The Election to their various Dignities belong wholly to their several Chapters, and they govern the People in subjection to them as Sovereign Princes, without any cognizance of a higher Power.  
IU. Secular Princes, who are chiefly the Dukes of Lunenburg, Wurtemburg, Mechlenburg, Sax-lavenburg, etc. Marquis of Baden, Culembach, etc. The Landgrave of Hess, Princes of East-Friezland, Nassau, Anhalt, etc. Counts of Solms, Aversburg, etc. and many other Dukes, Marquesses and Landgraves; as also some Earls and Barons who exercise a Sovereign Power over those in their own Dominions.  
V. Free Cities, which are either Imperial or Hans-Towns. Imperial Cities are those who bear the Eagle of the Empire in their Arms, and have Right to send their Deputies to the Diet of the Empire. Hans-Towns are those which about the End of the 13th Century entered into a firm League of mutually assisting one another in time of Distress, as also in carrying on such a Regular Commerce as might universally tend to their advantage, and the public good of the Empire; which Society increased to the Number of eighty Cities, who enjoyed great Privileges, and exercised a peculiar Jurisdiction among themselves. For the better Administration of which, they were divided into four Circles, distinguished by the Names of four principal Cities, in which were established their Courts of Judicatory, viz. Lubeck, Cologn, Brunswick, and Dantzick. But this Society hath been on the declining hand almost two hundred Years, and is now become very inconsiderable.  
Chief Courts in Germany for hearing and determining the great Causes of the Empire, are two, viz. The Imperial Chamber, and Chamber of Vienna. (1.) The Imperial Chamber (consisting of fifty Judges, called Assessors, whereof the Emperor appointeth the Precedent, and four of the Principal Officers, each of the Electors choosing One, and the rest being nominated by the other Princes and States of the Empire) whose business is to determine all Disputes which arise from time to time between the Princes, as also other Causes brought thither by Appeal from Inferior Courts. The Seat of this Judicatory was formerly at Spires, but now at Wetslar in Hesse. (2.) The Chamber of Vienna, whose Office it is also to decide all Causes brought to it by Appeals from Inferior Courts, and claims the same Authority with the Chamber of Spires. The Seat of this Court is the Emperor's Palace, and either he himself, or his Deputy sits as Chief, being assisted by a competent number of Judges, whereof several are Professors of the Protestant Religion. In both those Courts the Emperor as Sovereign, Judge, and Precedent, pronounceth Sentence when there in Person; and in his Absence, those deputed by him, who representing himself are allowed to carry the Imperial Sceptre as a Mark of their Dignity. In particular Courts they follow the Laws of the Empire, which consist in many Ancient Constitutions; the Golden-Bull; the Pacification of Passaw; as also the Treaties of Westphalia in the Saxon-Law established by Charlemagne; and the Roman by the Emperor Justinian; which last they observe wheresoever the Saxon has not been received. All Princes, States, and Members of the Empire have (and actually exercise) a Sovereign Power within their own Territories, except in some particular Cases, wherein People may Appeal either to the Imperial Chamber of Spires, or that at Vienna, commonly called the Aulic Council.  
After the Government of Germany, we may add that of 

Switzerland.  
Geneva.    
I. Switzerland (a large Commonwealth, consisting of several little ones, viz. Thirteen Cantons, every one of them being absolute within their own Jurisdiction) is under a Popular Government in the main, yet not strictly so in respect of every particular Canton, those of Bern, Zurich, and Lucern, being more properly under an Aristocracy than any other, since the Authority of the Gentry doth most prevail in them. However, the whole Body of the State, considered as one Complex Republic, consisteth of three distinct Parts, viz. The Swissers themselves distributed (as aforesaid) into Thirteen Cantons. Secondly, Those States Confederate with them for their Common Liberty and Protection. And Thirdly, The Prefectures subject to them, whether by Gift, Purchase, or Chance. (1.) The Body of the Cantons, is governed by each Canton having its particular Magistrate of their own choosing; by whom (with a standing Council consisting of Persons elected out of the People) all particular Controversies of the Canton are heard and dertermined. But when any Public Cause occurs, which relates to all the Cantons, than each of them sends its Commissioner to the General Diet, (which ordinarily meets at Baden) where every Canton hath one Vote, and Matters are determined by the major part. (2.) Confederate States; The Chief of which (besides Geneva) are the Grisons, an adjacent Commonwealth, governed in like manner as the Swissers. Of all the Allies of the Swissers, there's none more Potent than these. They entered first into a League one with another, Anno 1471. and afterwards with the Swissers in 1491. Their Country lies among inaccessible Mountains, and hideous Precipices, and they divide themselves into six Parts, viz. The Grey League. The League of the House of God. The League of the Ten Jurisdictions. The Valteline. And lastly, the Countries of Chiavana and Bormio. Some believe they derived the Title of Grisons from the Custom of wearing Grey Scarves, when first they entered into the League together. (3.) Prefectures of the Swissers, particularly those Countries and Cities of Baden and Sargans, with many other Towns and Villages situated nigh unto, or among the Alps.  
II. Geneva being a Free Republic, is governed by its own Magistrates, and is in Confederacy with the Cantons of Switzerland, whom it resembles very much in the Constitution of its Government. The Sovereignty of the State is lodged in a Council of Two hundred, out of which a lesser Council consisting of Twenty five is chosen (both which being for Life, serve for Checks one to another) and finally out of these Twenty five, are elected four Principal Officers, whom they call the Syndicks, who have the sole Management of the Commonwealth, except it be in some great Matter, as making of Peace or War, Offensive or Defensive Leagues, hearing Appeals, and such like General Concerns, which is the Business of the Great Council to consider and determine.  
The Emperor of Germany for Armorial Ensigns bears Quarterly. 1. Barwise, Argent and Gules of eight 
Arms.  Pieces, for Hungary. 2. Argent, a Lion, Gules, the Tail noved, and passed in Saltier, Crowned, Langed, and Armed, Or, for Bohemia. 3. Gules, a Fez Argent, for Austria. Party and bendwise, Argent and Azure, a border Gules, for Ancient Burgundy. 4. Quarterly in the first and last Gules a Castle triple towered Or, pur●led Sable, for Castille. In the second and third Argent, a Lion purple, for Leon. The Shield crested with an Imperial Crown, closed and raised in shape of a Mitre, having betwixt the two Points a Diadem surmounted with a Globe and Cross, Or. This Shield environed with a Choler of the Order of the Golden Fleece, is placed on the Breast of an Eagle, displayed Sable in a Field, Or, Diademed, membered and becked Gules, holding a naked Sword in the right Talon, and a Sceptre in the left. The two Heads signify the Eastern and Western Empire; and for the Motto are these words, Uno avulso non deficit alter. But the Emperor's peculiar devise is, Pax & salus Europae.  
The Laws of the Empire give free Toleration to the public Exercise of three Religions, viz. the Lutheran, 
Religion.  Calvinist, and Popish; and in some Places all three Parties celebrate Divine Worship in one and the same Church, at different times of the Day, as among others, at Manheim in the Palatinate, before it was ruined by the French. The Reformation of Religion was begun here by Martin Luther about 1517. and embraced by the Electors of Saxony, Brandenburg, Prince Palatine of the Rhine, Landgrave of Hesse, the Duke of Brunswick, and most of the Free Cities. Whereupon followed continual Wars and Troubles about Religion, and the Lands of the Church, which the Protestants had possessed themselves of, till at last, by the Treaty of Westphalia in 1648. 'twas concluded, That they of the Confession of Ausburg should not be molested in any manner whatsoever; but to be secured from all Prosecutions of Law and Violence. In this Posture things continued, till of late, that the French King broke in upon the Empire, and took so many Towns and Cities of it: In all which he dispossessed the Protestants of their Rights, and established the Exercise of the Roman Religion. And this he hath endeavoured to confirm by the last Treaty at Reswick, where his Plenipotentiaries in Conjunction with the Emperor's, prevailed to insert into the said Treaty a Clause, whereby 'tis agreed, That the Roman Catholic Religion shall remain within the Places restored by France to the Emperor and Empire, in the same Condition as 'tis exercised at present. And though the Protestants long contested, and at last signed the Treaty, with a Protestation, that the Clause in dispute should not be drawn into precedent for the future; yet there's too great Reason to fear that the Popish Party hath gained a considerable Advantage in this Point. The various Parts of this Country received the Light of the blessed Gospel at various times, and that by the preaching of various Apostles, especially St. Thomas, Surnamed Didymus, one of the Twelve,    


POLAND by Robt. Morden▪    

SECT. V. Concerning Poland.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 34 30 of Long. its greatest Length is about 780. 53 30 between 48 00 of Latit. Breadth is about 600. 58 20 Being divided into Three Classes, viz. East. Middle. West. East Class comprehends Lithuania— Chief Town Vilna— N. to S. Volinia— Kiou— Podolia— Camenick— Middle Class comprehends Curland— Mittaw— N. to S. Samogitia— Ros●●ie— Polaquia— Bie●●ko— Little Russia Lemberge— West Class comprehends— Prussia— Dantzick— N. to S. 〈◊〉 〈◊〉— Polonia prop. Cracovia—  
Of all these in Order.  

§. 1. Lithuania, a Dukedom.  
 Palatinate of Troki— Chief Town Idem— W. to E. Wilna— Idem— Braslawen— Braslaw— Poloczkien— Poloczk— Contains the Witepskien— Witepsk— Novogrodeck Idem— W. to E. Minskien— Minski— Mscislawen Mscislaw— D. of Sluczk— Idem— W. to E Territory of Rohaczow— Idem— Rzeczica— Idem— Southward.   

§. 2. Volinia, a Province.  
Contains the Palatinate of Luck, W. Chief Town Idem W. to E. Territory of Kiow, E. Idem   

§. 3. Podolia, a Province.  
Contains the Palatinate of Kamienieck Chief Town Idem W. to E. Braclaw— Idem   

§. 4. Curland, a Dukedom.  
Contains D. of Curland— Chief Town Goldingen W. to E. Seineg●llen— Mittaw   

§. 5. Samogitia, a Dukedom.  
Contains the Territ of Ros●enne Chief Town Idem S. to N. Midnick Idem Schwnden Idem   

§. 6. Poloquia, a Province.  
Contains the Palatinate of Bressiti— Chief Town Bresste S. to N. Beilskien Bielsk   

§. 7. Little Russia, a Province.  
Contains the Palatinate of Chelm Ch. T. Idem— N. to S. Belz— Idem— Lemberg Idem, or Lwow, or Leopolis   

§. 8. Prussia, a Dukedom.  
Divided into Royal, Westward Chief Town Dantzick W. to E. Ducal, Eastward Koningsberg   

§. 9 Warsovia, a Dukedom not divided.  
It's Chief Town is Warsaw, upon the Weasel.   

§. 10. Polonia, properly so called.  
Divided into 

Lower, Northward.  
Upper, Southward.    
 Palat. of Posua— Chief Town Idem— W. to N. E. Kaliskic— Gnesna— Debrizin Idem— Lower conttains the Plokskein Ploczko— Siradia— Idem— W. to E. Lancicia Idem— Rava— Idem— Provin, of Cujava— Uladislaw N. of Lancicia. Upper contains the Palatinate of Lublin— Idem— N. to S. on the Weissel. Sandomiria Sandomirz Cracovia Cracow—   

THIS Country (being a considerable Part of the Ancient Sarmatia Europaea) is termed by the Italians 
Name.  and Spaniards, Polonia; by the French, Pologne; by the Germans, Polen; and by the English, Poland; so called (according to the best conjectures) from Polu or Pole, which in the Sclavonic Language, signify a Plain or Champagne Country fit for Hunting, there being none of old more esteemed for that than it was.  
The Air of this Country is of a different Nature, according to the Nature and Situation of the different 
Air.  Parts of that Kingdom; for in the Provinces towards the North-West it's very Cold, yet withal very pure and wholesome; but towards the North-East, particularly Lithuania, it's not only cold, but also very gross and unwholesome, which chiefly ariseth from the vast number of Lakes in that part of the Country, whose standing Waters send up Infectious Vapours, which intermixing with the Air, do easily corrupt the whole Mass thereof. The opposite Place of the Globe to Poland, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean lying between 215 and 234 Degrees of Longitude, with 48 and 58 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Nature of the Air having still a great Influence on the Soil: The North-West Provinces of this Kingdom 
Soil.  (it lying in the 9th, 10, and 11th North Climate) are abundantly fertile, affording many sorts of Grain and Fruits, not only enough for the Inhabitants, but also to supply the wants of their Neighbours. In the middle part of this Kingdom are some Mountains, and those well stored with several Mines of Silver, Copper, Iron, and Led. The Provinces towards the North and North-East are very barren i● Fruits and Corn, being full of Woods, Lakes, and Rivers. The longest Day in the North most Parts of this Kingdom is 17 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost is 8 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Wax, Linen, Board's, Masts for Ships, Pitch, rich Furs, 
Commodities.  Salt, Amber, Potashes, Soap, Corn, Butter, Cheese, Rozin, Flax, Cordage, Brimstone, etc.  
In the Cathedral of Gnesna is kept an inestimable Treasure of Gold, Silver, and enameled Vessels given 
Rarities.  by divers Kings of Poland, and Prelates of that See. Under the Mountains adjacent to Kiow are divers Grottoes, wherein are preserved, a great number of Humane Bodies, still entire, although buried many Years ago; ●●●ing neither so black, nor hard as the Egyptian Mummies; among these are two Princes arrayed in the same Habit they usually wore when alive, who are shown to Travellers by the Russian Monks. The place where those Bodies are preserved is a dry sandy Ground, much of the same Nature with the Catacombs at Rome. In the Southern parts of Poland are divers Mountains, out of which is dug Salt in large Masses as Stones out of a Quarry; and out of others they dig natural Earthen Cups, which being exposed for some time in th'open Air, become as hard as a Stone. In the Deserts of Podolia, is a Lake, whose Waters do condense into solid Salt, and that purely by the Heat of the Sun. Near to Cracovia are the Mines of Sal-Gemme, which being two hundred Fathoms deep, do constantly employ above a thousand Men, and yield a vast Revenue to the King. Near to Culm, in D. of Prussia is a Fountain which constantly sends forth a mighty Sulphureous Steem, and yet its Waters are never hot.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom are two, viz. those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Gnesna,  
Leopol.    
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are these following, 
Bishoprics.  

Cracow,  
Colmensee,  
Camieniec,  
Kranostaw,  
Posna,  
Vilna,  
Window,  
Mednick.  
Ploczkow,  
Culm,  
Lutzko,  
Faussemberg,  
Premislaw,  
Kiow,    
Universities in this Kingdom, are those of 
Universities.  

Cracow,  
Koninsberg,  
Posna,  
Vilna.    
The Polanders are generally Men of handsome, tall, and well-proportioned Bodies: Men of a good and 
Manners.  durable Complexion, and of so strong and vigorous Constitutions, that many of them prove the best of Soldiers, being able to endure all the Fatigues of a Military Life. The Nobility and Gentry do mightily affect the greatest Pomp and Grandeur they can, whether in Diet, Apparel, or Equipage. They are generally reckoned very Affable and Courteous to Strangers, extremely Jealous of their Liberties and Privileges, but most Tyrannical towards the meaner sort of their own People, treating the Peasants no better than mere Slaves; and in some Places they exercise a Power of Life and Death upon their Domestic Servants: Which absolute Power and severe Usage of the Nobles towards the Commonality, together with the many Feuds between one another, have produced not only many lamentable Disorders in this Kingdom, but also occasioned the final Revolt of the Cossacks. One remarkable Quality of this People, is their singular Care in Instructing of Youth in the Latin Tongue, which Persons of most Ranks do usually speak very fluently; yea, and even many of the Female Sex are also good Proficients therein.  
The Poles being Originally descended from the Sclavi, do still speak a Dialect of the Sclavonian 
Language.  Tongue; but the Poverty and Barrenness of their Language has obliged them to borrow many Words from the Germans, especially Terms of Art. It is hard for Strangers to learn the same to perfection, the Pronounciation being extremely harsh by reason of the vast multitude of Consonants they use. The Lithuanians have a particular Language of their own, which mightily abounds with corrupted Latin words. In Livonia they have a Language peculiar to themselves, which is a Dialect of the Lithuanian, however the Germane Tongue doth mostly prevail in several Cities, and the Russian in others. Paternoster in the Polish Tongue, runs thus: Oyeza nasz ktory testes w niebissich swieczszie imie twoie: Przydz krolistwo twoie, badz wola twa jake w nibie, taken y waziemi. Chleba naszego pows reduie day nam dzisziay. Vodpusc name nasze winy, jackoymy odpuszezamy naszym winowayzem. Ynie wwodz nas na pokuszenie: a le nas zabw ode zlego. Amen.  
The large Body of Poland is subject unto, and governed by its own King, who is Elective, and that by 
Government.  the Clergy and Nobility alone, the Commons having no hand in it. His Government is termed Monarchical, but (if rightly considered) we may reckon it rather a Real Aristocracy, the Nobility in their Elections having so limited the King's Power, that without the Consent of the States-General, he may neither make War nor Peace, nor do any thing of Importance that concerns the Public. Considering the true Nature and Constitution of this Government, we may easily imagine that 'tis frequently liable to Interreigns, whether by Death, Deposition, or Resignation, as also Intestine Broils and Commotions (witness the late Election) when the Parties electing do jar in their choice. During an Inter-reign, or when the King is absent from his Kingdom, (as sometimes in the Field against the Turks) the Archbishop of Gnesna doth ordinarily officiate as King; but if no Archbishop of Gnesna, than the Bishop of Ploczko exerciseth that Power; and in case that that See be also Vacant, than the Bishop of Posna undertakes the same. The whole State is commonly considered, as divided into two principal Parts, viz. the Kingdom of Poland, and Grand Duchy of Lithuanta. The Great Wheels of Government in both of these, are the Senate and General Diets. The Senate is composed of Archbishops, Bishpos, Palatines, Principal Castellans, and Chief Officers of the Kingdom. The General Dyer consists of the same Members, together with Delegates from each Province and City, both of the Kingdom and Duchy; which Diet is either Ordinary, as when summoned (according to Law) once every two Years; or Extraordinary, as when called by the King upon some emergent Occasion. The Calling of this Diet is always performed by the Chancellor's Letters, termed Literae Instructionis to the Palatines, acquainting them with what the King designs to propose to them, and the time he would have them come to Court. Having received the King's Proposal, each of them hath full Liberty to examine the same in its own Nature and Consequences, and to return their Thoughts about it with all the freedom they can desire. The King's Letters are likeways sent to the Gentry of each Palatinate to choose a Nuncio to be their Representative in the Diet; in which Election the Candidate must be unanimously pitched upon, for if the Suffrage of only one private Gentleman be wanting, the Election is void, and the Province is deprived of its Vote in the approaching Diet. The Elections being over, and the various Senators and Nuncio's come to Court, the King arrayed in his Royal Robes, and attended by the Chancellor, renews the Proposal in their Public Assembly. The Proposal having been duly weighed by each of them aforehand, they come to a speedy Resolution in the Matter, either Pro or Con. As the aforesaid Election of the various Nuncio's requires an unanimous Assent in all Persons electing, or else the Election is void; even so the thing proposed by the King in the General Diet must be assented unto by all, otherways the Proposal was made in vain; for if they differ, (which frequently happens) than the Diet breaks up without doing any thing, and each Member returns to his own Home. Subordinate to the Senate and Diet, are a great many Courts of Judicatory, whether Ecclesiastical, Civil, or Military, for determining all Causes in the various Parts of the Kingdom; which Courts are much the same with the like Subordinate Judicatories in other civilised Countries of Europe, particularly those here in England.  
The Arms of the Crown of Poland, are Quarterly, in the first and fourth Gules, an Eagle Argent, crowned 
Arms.  and armed, Or, for Poland. In the second and third Gules, a Cavalier armed Cap-a-pe Argent, in the Dexter, a naked Sword of the same; in the Sinister, a Shield Azure, charged with a double barred Cross Or, mounted on a Courser of the second, barbed of the third, and nailed of the fourth, for Lithuania. For the Crest, a Crown, heightened with eight Fleurets, and closed with four Demy-Circles, ending in a Monde, Or, which is the Crest of Poland. For the Motto are these Words, Habent sua sidera Reges.  
The Inhabitants of this Country are (for the most part) Professors of the Doctrine of the Church of Rome; 
Religion.  yet all Religions being tolerated, here are many of the Greek Church, as also Armenians, Lutherans, Socinians, Calvinists, Jews, Quakers, etc. Those of the Church of Rome are dispersed over all Parts of the Kingdom but most numerous in the Provinces of Cujavia and Warsovia: The Lutherans are mostly to be found in Prussia; The Armenians in Russia, and all the rest appear in greatest Droves through the various Parts of Lithuania. Besides, in Samogitia is a sort of People, who differ little or nothing from mere Heathens The Reformation of Religion began in this Country, Anno 1535 but did not meet with due encouragement. The Christian Faith was planted in the various Parts of Poland at several times, and by several Persons; it being established in Poland, properly so called, Anno 963. in the time of their Prince Miecislaus, Son of Memomislus. In Livonia, Anno 1200. by the Preaching of one Meinardu●●● In Lithuania, not until the Year 1386. at the Admission of 〈◊〉 to the Crown of Poland, and then done (as some affirm) by Thomas Waldensis, an Englishman. In Samogitia and Volhinia, at the same time with Livonia. In the rest, at other times, and upon other occasions.    

SECT. VI Concerning Spain with Portugal.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 08 05 of Long. its greatest Length is about 620. 21 30 between 36 15 of Latit. Breadth is about 480. 44 30  
It being divided into 3 Classes, viz. 

1. Towards the N. and W. Ocean.  
2. Towards the Mediterran Sea.  
3. Towards the middle part.    
1. Class comprehends Biscay Chief Town Bilbo, or Bilboa E. to W. Asturia Oviedo Gallicia Compostella N. to S. Portugal Lisbon Andalousia Sevilla W. to E. 2. Class comprehends Grenada Idem Mur●●● Idem 〈◊〉 Idem Catalonia Barcelona E. to N. W. 3. Class comprehends Arragon Caragoca Navarre Pamplona Old Castille Burg● N. to S. New Castille Madrid Leon Idem S. of Asturia.  
Of all these in Order▪  

§. 1. Biscay, a Lordship.  
Contains Ipusco Ch. T. Tholoss E. to W. Biscay properly so called Bilbo ●●lava Vitoria, Southward.   

§. 2. Asturia, a Principality.  
Contains Asturia 〈◊〉 viedo Chief Town Oviedo, Westward. Asturia de Santillana Santillana, Eastward.   

§. 3. Gallicia, a Kingdom.  
Contains the Archbishopr. of Compostella Chief Town Idem S. W. to N. E. Bishopr. of Mondonedo— Idem Lugo— Idem N. E. to S. W. upon the Minho. Orense— Idem Territory of Tuy— Idem   

§. 4. Portugal, a Kingdom  
Contains The Provin. of Eutre Minho Douro Chief Town Braga— W. to E. Tralos Montes— Miranda Beira— Coimbra N. to S. Estrema dura— Lisbon Entre Ta●o Gu●●ian● Evora The Kingdom of Alg●ave— Tavira   

§ 5. Andalousia, a Province.  
Contains the Bishopric of Jaen— Chief Town Idem— E. to S. W. upon the Guadalquivir, or nigh to it. Cordova— Idem— Archbishopric of Sevilla— Idem— Bishopric of Cadiz— Idem— D. of Medina Sidonia— Idem, Southward.   

§. 6. Granada, a Kingdom.  
Cont. the Bishopric of Almeria— Ch. Town Idem, Southward upon the (Sea-Coast. Guadix— Idem E. to S. W. Archbishopric of Granada Idem Bishopric of Malaga— Idem   

§. 7. Murcia, a Kingdom.  
Contain Murcia, properly so called Ch. T. Murcia E. to W. Territory of Lorca— Idem Cartagena Idem, Southward upon the Sea-Coast.   

§. 8. Valencia, a Kingdom.  
Contains the Provinces of Millares Chief Town Villa Hermosa. N. to S. Xucar Valencia— Segura 〈◊〉—   

§. 9 Catalonia, a Principality.  
Contains the Territ. of Puigcerda— Chief Town Idem— N. E. to S. W. upon the Ebro. La seu d' Urgel— Idem— Balaguer— Idem— Lerida— Idem— Tortosa— Idem— Girona— Idem— E. to W. nigh unto, or upon the Sea-coast. Barcelona— Idem— Villa Franca de Panades Idem— Terragona— Idem—  
To these add the Country of Rousillon (Chief Town Perpignan) S. of Narbone in Lower Languedoc.   

§. 10. Arragon, a Kingdom.  
Contains the Bishoprics of Jaca— Chief Town Idem— N. W. to S. E. Huesca— Idem— Balbastro Idem— Archbishopr. of Saragosa or Caragoca— Idem, upon the Ebro. Bishoprics of Taracona Idem— N. to S. Alborazin Idem— Tervel Idem—   

§. 11. Navarr, a Kingdom.  
Contains the Majorships of Pampelona Chief Town Idem N. to S. Olita— Idem Tudela— Idem Estella— Idem W. to E. Sanguesa Idem   

§. 12. Old Castille, a Province.  
Contains the Territories of ●●rgos— Chief Town Idem— W. to S. E. Rioja— Logronno Calahorra Idem— Soria— Idem E. to W. on the Douro. Osma— Idem Valladolid Idem Segovia— Idem, 56 m. S. E. of Valladolid. Avila— Idem, 63 m. S.   

§. 13. New Castille, comprehending Extrema Dura.  
Being divided into 

North, the Tago.  
Middle, between the Tago and Guadiana,  
South, of Guadiana.    
North contains the Towns of Coria— W. to E. Placentia— Toledo— Madrid— All 3 N. E. of Toledo. Alcala de Henares Guadalaxara— Middle contains the Towns of Alcantara upon the Tago. Merida upon the Guadiana. Truxille, 36 miles N. E. of Merida. Cuensa upon the Xucar. South contains the Towns of Badajos.— From W. to E. Ellenera.— Cividad Rea— Alcaraz—   

§. 14. Leon, a Kingdom.  
Being divided into North the Douro C. T. in N. are Palencia— E. to S. W. on the Douro. Toro— Zamora— Leon— N. to S. W. Astorga— South C. T. in S. are Salamanca— N. to S. E. S. W. of Alva— Cividad Rodrigo, S. W. of Salamanca.   

THIS large Continent being now Subject to two distinct Sovereigns, viz His Catholic Majesty, and the King of Portugal, I shall separately consider these two Sovereignities. Therefore   

SPAIN.  
THIS Country (formerly Iberia, Hesperia, and by some Spania) is termed by the Italians, Spagna; 
Name.  by its Natives, Espamna; by the French, Espagne; by the Germans, Spamen; and by the English, Spain; so called (as some fancy) from a certain King named Hispanus; others from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, (raritas, vel penuria) because of its scarcity of Inhabitants. But the most received Opinion is, That it came from Hispalis (now Sevill) the chief City of the whole Country in former times.  
The Air of this Country is generally very pure and calm, being seldom infested with Mists and Vapours; 
Air.  but in the Summer so extremely hot, especially in the Southmost Provinces, that 'tis both dangerous ' and inconvenient for the Inhabitants to stir abroad about Noon, from the middle of May to the last of August. The opposite Place of the Globe to Spain, is that part of Zelandia nova, (or some of the ill known Continent) lying between 190 and 202 Degrees of Longitude, with 36 and 44 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 6th and 7th North Climate) is in many places very Dry and Barren, 
Soil.  several of the Inland Provinces being either overgrown with Woods, or cumbered with Sandy and Rocky Mountains, and others (whose Soil is naturally fertile) are for the most part wholly neglected, lying waste and uncultivated for many Years, and that by reason of the fewness, (or rather) the detestable Laziness of its Inhabitants. But this defect of Corn, and other Grain, (which ariseth partly from the Nature of the Country, but more from the Temper of the People) is sufficiently supplied by various sorts of excellent Fruits and Wines, which with little Art and Labour are here produced in great plenty. The longest Day in the Northmost part of this Country, is about 15 Hours ¼; the shortest in the South, is 9 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Wines, Oils, Sugar, Metals, Rice, Silk, Liquorish, Honey, 
Commodities.  Flax, Saffron, Annifeed, Raisins, Almonds, Oranges, Lemons, Cork, Soap, Anchovies, Sumack, Wool, Lambskins, and Tobacco, etc.  
Nigh to the City of Cadiz, is an old ruinous Building (now converted into a Watch-Tower) which some 
Rarities.  would fain persuade themselves to be the Remains of Hercules his Pillars, so much talked off by the Ancients. In the City Granada is the large Sumptuous Palace of the Moorish Kings, whose inside is beautified with Jasper and Porphery, and adorned with divers Arabic and Mosaic Inscriptions. At Terragona in Catalonia, are to be seen the Ruins of an Ancient Circus in the Street, called la Placa de la Fuente; and at Segovia in Old Castille, are the Remains of a Noble Aqueduct, built by the Emperor Trajan, and supported by an Hundred and Seventy seven Arches in double Rows, reaching from one Hill to another. Without the Walls of Toledo was an ancient large Theatre, some part whereof is yet standing. Here also is an admirable Modern Aqueduct, contrived by Joanniltus Turrianus (a Frenchman) according to the Order of Philip II. At Orense in Gallicia, are several Springs of Medicinal hot Waters, wonderfully esteemed off by the ablest Physicians. At the City of Toledo is a Fountain, whose Waters near the Bottom are of an Acid Taste, but towards the Surface extremely Sweet. Near Guadalaxara in New Castille, is a Lake which never fails to send forth dreadful Howl before a Storm. The Cathedral Church of Murcia (containing above four hundred Chapels) is remarkable for its curious Steeple, which is so built that a Chariot may easily ascend to the Top thereof. Many talk of a Ship of Stone, with Masts, Sails, and Tackling, to be seen in the Port of Mongia in Gallicia. As to the River Guadiana, its diving under Ground, (from whence 'twas formerly called Anas) the same i● so notorious, that we need say nothing of it.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Compostella,  
Granada,  
Tarragona,  
Burgos,  
Sevil,  
Valentia,  
Saragossa,  
Toledo.    
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Oviedo,  
Malaga,  
Jacca,  
Segovia,  
Lugo,  
Cartagena,  
Balbatro,  
Cuenza,  
Mondonedo,  
Segorve,  
Terver,  
Cividad Real  
Corunna,  
Origuella,  
Albarazin,  
Siguenza,  
Tuy,  
Barcelona,  
Pamplona,  
Leon,  
Orense,  
Tortosa,  
Valladolid,  
Salamanca,  
Cordova,  
Lerida,  
Calahorra,  
Toro,  
Cadiz,  
Solsona,  
Placentia,  
Astorga,  
Jaen,  
Vich,  
Coria,  
Palencia,  
Guadix,  
Tarazona,  
Avila,  
Zamora.  
Almeria,  
Huesca,    
Universities in this Kingdom, are those of 
Universities.  

Sevil,  
Alcala de Henares.  
Huesca,  
Gaudia,  
Granada,  
Saragossa,  
Barcelona,  
Compostella,  
Siguenza,  
Tudela,  
Murcia,  
Toledo,  
Valencia,  
Ossuna,  
Tarragona,  
Valladolid,  
Lerida,  
Ona,  
Baeza.  
Salamanca,    
The truest Character of the Spaniard, I any where find, is that of Dr. Heylin's, which in the main, runs 
Manners.  thus: The Spaniards are a sort of People of a swarthy Complexion, black Hair, and of good Proportion, of a Majestic Gate and Deportment, grave and serious in their Carriages in Offices of Piety very Devout, not to say Superstitious; Obedient and Faithful to their King, Patient in Adversity, not prone to alter their Resolutions nor Apparel, in War too deliberate; Arts they esteem dishonourable, universally given to Laziness, much addicted to Women, unreasonably Jealous of their Wives, and by Nature extremely Proud.  
Of all the living Tongues that are derived from the Latin, the Spanish comes nearest to the Original, though 
Language.  no Country has been more harassed by the Irruption of Barbarous Nations. Yet they have borrowed several Words from the Goths and Moors, especially the latter. The best Spanish is generally esteemed that spoken in New-Castile; and in Valentia and Catalonia 'tis most corrupted. Their Pater Noster runs thus; Padre nuestro, que estas en los Gielos, Santificado sea tu Nembre; Venza a nos tu Regno; hagase tu Volantad, assi en la tierra, como en el Cielo. El pan nuestro de cadadia da nos lo oy; y perdona nos nuestras deudas, assi common nos otros perdonamos à nuestros deudores; y no nos dexes caer en tentation; mas libra nos del mal. Amen.  
This great Body did formerly comprehend no less than fourteen different Kingdoms which being at 
Government.  length reduced to three; viz. Those of Arragon, Castille, and Portugal; the two former were united. Anno 1474. by Marriage of Ferdinand of Arragon with Isabel Heiress of Castille; and Portugal afterwards added by Conquest, Anno 1578. But it Revolting, (of which afterwards) the whole Continent of Spain, excluding Portugal, is at present subjected to one Sovereign, termed his Catholic Majesty, whose Government is Monarchical and Crown Hereditary. The Dominions of which Prince are so far extended, that the Sun never sets upon them all; and as his Territories are very numerous, so also are the Titles which he commonly assumeth, being styled, King of Castille, Leon, Arragen, Sicily, Naples, Jerusalem, Portugal, Navarr, Granada, Toledo, Valle●ia Gall●ia, Majorca, Sevill, Sardignia, Gordova, Corsica, Murcia, Jaen, Algarve, Alg●●ire. Gibraltar. The Canaries, East and West Indies; Arch Duke of Austria; Duke of Burgundy, Brabant, and Milan; Count of Flanders, Tirol, and Barcelona; Lord of Biscay and Mechelin etc. The numerous Cities and Provinces of Spain are ruled by particular Governors appointed by his Catholic Majesty, as also the Duchy of Milan, the Kingdoms of Naples, Sicily, Sardignia, &c and the various Parts of his vast Possessions in the East and West Indies, are governed by their respective Vice Roys, who are generally very severe in exacting of the Subject what possibly they can during their short Regency, which is commonly limited to three Years; the King appointing others in their room, that he may gratify as many of his Grandees, as may be with all conveniency, there being still a great number of them at Court, as Candidates for a Government. For the better management of Public Affairs in all the Spanish Dominions, there are established in this Kingdom, no less than fifteen different Councils, viz. that called The Council of State. (2) The Council Royal, or that of Castille. (3) That of War. (4.) The Council of Arragon. (5) That of Italy (6) The Council of the Indies. (7.) That of the Orders. (8) The Council of the Treasury. (9) That of the Chamber. (10) The Council of the Crosade. (11) That of Discharges. (12) The Council of Inquisition. (13.) That of Navarr. (14) The Council of Conscience. And lastly, that called, The Council of Policy.  
The King of Spain bears Quarterly; The first Quarter Counter-quartered; in the first and fourth Gules, a Castle 
Arms.  tripple-towered, Azure, each with three Battlements Or pur●led Sable, for Castille. In the second and third Argent, a Lion passant Gules, Crowned, Languid, and Armed Or, for Leon. In the second great Quarter Or four Pallets, Gules, for Arragon. Party Or, four Pallets also Gules, betwixt two Flanches Argent, charged with as many Eagles Sable, membered, beaked, and crowned Azure, for Sicily. These two great Quarters grafted in Base Argent, a Pomegranete Verte, stalked and leaved of the same, open d and seeded Gules, for Granada. Over all Argent, five Escutcheons Azure, placed crosswise, each charged with as many Baeants in Saltier, of the first for Portugal. The Shield bordered, Gules, with seven Towers Or, for Algarve. In the third Quarter, Gules, a Fez Argent, for Austria, Coupie and supported by Ancient Burgundy, which is Bendy of six Pieces Or and Azure, bordered Gules. In the fourth great Quarter Azure, Semè of Flower de Luce's Or, with a border Compony Argent and Gules, for Modern Burgundy; coupè Or, supported Sable a Lion Or, for Brabant. These two great Quarters charged with an Escutcheon Or, a Lion Sable and languid Gules, for Flanders. Partly Or an Eagle Sable, for Antwerp, the Capital City of the Marquisate of the Holy Empire. For Crest, a Crown Or raised with eight Diadems, or Semicircles terminating in a Mond Or. The Collar of the Order of the Golden Fleece encompasses the Shield, on the sides of which stand the two Pillars of Hercules, on each side one with this Morto, Plus ultra.  
The Spaniards are very punctual followers of, and close adherers to the Church of Rome, and that in her 
Religion.  grossest Errors and Corruptions, ●●●ing up their Religion on the Pope's Authority; and are therein so tenacious, that the King suffers none to live in his Dominions, who profess not their belief of the Doctrine of the Roman Church. For whose Care (or rather Bigotry) in this matter, the Pope hath conferred upon him, the Title of his Catholic Majesty. All other Professions are expelled by that Antichristian Tyranny of the Bloody Inquisition, at first devised, and set up by P●d●e Goasales de Mendeza. Archbishop of Toledo, and that against such Converted Jews and Moors, as returned again to their Superstition; but of late it hath been chiefly turned upon those (and others) of the Protestant Communion. So industrious are the ecclesiastics in this Country to keep up the whole Body of the People in the thickest Mist of Ignorance, and so little is this Nation inclined of themselves to make any inquiries after Knowledge; that considering these things upon one hand, and the Terror of the Inquisition on the other, in case of such Inquiries, (especially if they have the least tendency to Innovation in Points of Faith) we cannot reasonably expect a Reformation of Religion in this Country, unless the Hand of Providence shall interpose in a wonderful manner. Christianity was planted here (according to the old Spanish Tradition) by St. James the Apostle, within four Years after the Crucifixon of our Blessed Redeemer.   

PORTUGAL.  
THIS Country (containing a great part of Old Lusitania, with some of Ancient Galleria and Boetica) 
Name.  is termed by the Italians, Porto Gallo; by the Spaniards, French, Germans, and English, Portugal; so called by some from Porto and Cale, (the first a Haven Town, and the other a small Village at the Mouth of the Douro) but by others from Portus Gallorum, that Haven (now O Porto) being the Place where the Gauls usually landed, when most of the Seaport Towns in Spain were in the Hands of the Moors.  
The Air of this Country is much more temperate, especially in the Maritime Places, than in those Provinces 
Air.  of Spain, which lie under the same Parallel, it being frequently qualified by Westerly Winds, and cool Breezes from the Sea. The opposite Place of the Globe to Portugal, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 188 and 194 Degrees of Longitude, with 36 and 42 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 5th and 6th North Climate) is none of the best for Grain, it being 
Soil.  very Dry and Mountainous, but yet very plentiful of Grapes, Oranges, Citrons, Almonds, Pomegranates, Olives, and such like. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts of this Kingdom is about 15 Hours, the shortest in the Southmost is about 9 Hours ¾, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Wine, Honey, Oil, Allom, White Marble, Salt, as also 
Commodities.  variety of Fruits, as Oranges, Almonds, Citrons, Pomegranates, etc.  
In a Lake on the Top of the Hill Stella, in Portugal, are found pieces of Ships, though it be distant from 
Rarities.  the Sea more than twelve Leagues. Near to Reja, is a Lake observable for its hideous rumbling Noise, which is ordinarily heard before a Storm, and that at the distance of five or six Leagues. About eight Leagues from Coimbra, is a remarkable Fountain which swallows up, or draws in whatsoever thing only toucheth the Surface of its Waters; an Experiment of which is frequently made with Trunks of Trees. The Town of Bethlem (nigh to Lisbon) is noted for the Sumptuous Tombs of the Kings of Portugal.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Archbishoprics,  

Lisbon,  
Braga,  
Evora.    
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Miranda,  
Leiria,  
O Porto,  
Coimbra,  
Lamego,  
Viseu;  
Elvas,  
Portalegre,  
Faro.    
Universities in this Kingdom, are those of 
Universities.  

Lisbon,  
Evora,  
Coimbra.    
The Portuguese (formerly much noted for their Skill in Navigation, and vast Discoveries which the World 
Manners.  owes to them) are wonderfully degenerated from their Forefathers, being now a People, whom some are pleased to characterise thus; That take one of their own Neighbours (a Native Spaniard) and strip of him of all his good Qualities, (which may be quickly done) that Person then remaining will make a complete Portugese. They are generally esteemed a People very Treacherous to one another, but more especially to Strangers; extraordinary Cunning in their Dealings, and the meaner sort are universally given to Thieving.  
The Language used in this Kingdom is a Compound of French and Spanish, especially the latter. The difference 
Language.  between it and the true Spanish, will best appear by the Pater Noster in that Tongue, which runs thus: Padre nosso que estas nos Ceos, Sanoifioado seia oh teu nome: venha a nos ò teu reyno: seia felta a tua vontade, assi nos ceos, como na terra. O paonosso de cada●ia 〈…〉 n'estodia. E perdoa nos fenhor as nossas di●●das, assi common nos pendoamos a os nossos devedores. E nao nos dexes cahir 'em tentacio, mas libra nos do mal. Amen.  
This Kingdom after many Revolutions of Fortune, was unjustly seized upon by Philip II. of Spain, and detained 
Government.  by him and his two Successors from the Dukes of Braganza the lawful Heir, till the Year 1640. that the Portuguezes being unable to bear up any longer under the Tyrannical Sovereignty of the Spaniards, threw off that intolerable Yoke; and set the Crown upon the Head of John VI Duke of Braganza (afterwards John IV. Surnamed the Fortunate) notwithstanding of all that Philip IU. could do to the contrary Which Enterprise of theirs was happily brought about by the Assistance of some French Forces sent into this Country: and 'tis very remarkable how closely this their Design of Revolting was carried on, though known to above three hundred ●●rsons at once, and in Agitation for the space of a whole Year. Ever since which Revolt of Portugal, it hath continued an Independent Kingdom, subject unto, and governed by its own King (being of the Family of Braganza) whose Government is truly Monarchical and Crown Hereditary.  
He bears Argent, five Escutcheons Azure, placed cross wise, each charged with as many Besants of the 
Arms.  first, placed in Saltier, and pointed Sable, for Portugal. The Shield bordered Gules, charged with Seven Towers Or, three in chief, and two in each Flanch. The Crest is a Crown Or. Under the two Flanches, and the Base of the Shield appear at the ends of two Crosses, the first Flower-de-luced Verte, which is for the Order of Avis, and the second Pats Gules, which is for the Order of Christ. The Motto is very changeable, each King assuming a new one, but frequently these Words, Pro Rege & Grege.  
What was said of Religion in Spain, the same almost may be affirmed of that in this Kingdom; the Tenets 
Religion.  of the Church of Rome being here universally embraced by the Portugucze, only with this difference, that they tolerate Jews, and allow several Strangers the public Exercise of their Religion, particularly the English Factory at Lisbon. This Country received the Blessed Gospel much about the same time with Spain.    


ITALY by Rob. Mordon    

SECT. VI. Concerning Italy.  
 d. m. Situated between 25 30 of Long. its greatest Length from N. W. to S. E. is about 760 Miles. 39 00 between 38 15 of Latit. Breadth from S. W. to N. E. is about 134 Miles. 46 30  
Being divided into three Classes, viz. 

Upper.  
Middle.  
Lower.    
The Upper [or Lombardy] contains the Dukedom of Savoy Chief Town Chambery W. to E. Princip. of Piedmont Turin— D. of Montferrat Casal— Milan— Idem— Parma— Idem— Modena— Idem— Mantua— Idem, N. to Modena. Rep. of Venice— Idem, on the bot. of the Adriatic Gulf. Genova— Idem, S. to Milan. Bishopric of Trent Id. S. to Tyrol in Austria. The Middle contains the Land of the Church Rome— S. to N. Duked. of Tuscany Florence— Rep. of Luca— Idem, S. to Modena. S. Marino Idem. The Lower contains the Kingdom of Naples Idem, Southward.  
Of all these in Order.  

§. 1. In the Upper-part, or Lombardy.  

SAVOY.  
Containing several remarkable Towns situated upon, or nigh unto four small Rivers that water this Country.  
Viz. The Isere— running Westward in the main. The Arc— W. turning N. W. The Seran— N. W. in the main. The Arve— N. W. Nigh unto, or upon the Isere are those of S. Maurice— from E. to W. Monstiers— Beaufort— Constans— M. Melian— Chambery— Arc are those of S. Michael— from E. to W. S. Jaen de Maurienne Seran are those of Rumilly— from S. to N. Annacy— Arve are those of Salanches— from E. to W. Cluse— Bonne Ville— lafoy Roche—   

PIEDMONT.  
Comprehends the Dukedom of Aouste Chief Town Aouste 44 m. N. of Turin. Marquisate of Jurea Jurea 22 m. N. Susa Susa 24 m. N. W. County of Asti Asti 26 m. E. signory of Vercelli Idem 12 m. N. of ●●sal. Territories of Nizza. Idem upon the Sea-Coast. Princip of Piedinont properly so called Turin upon the River Po.  
Piedmont, properly so called.  
Comprehends the Territories of Turino— Chief Town Idem— N. to S. upon the Po Chieri— Idem— Carignan— Idem— Carmagnola— Idem— Salutzo— Idem— Cauîgliano— Idem— Lucerna— Idem 5 m. S. of Pignerol. Cherasco— Idem— N. to S. upon the Tanaro. Mindovi— Idem— Ceva— Idem— Tossano— Idem— N. to S. upon the Stura. Coni— Idem—   

MONTFERRAT.  
Comprehends the Territories of Trino— Chief Town Idem— N. to S. Casal— Idem— Alba— Idem— Acqui— Idem— Spin— Idem 8 m. S. W. of Acqui.   

MILAN.  
Comprehends the Territories of Angiera— Chief Town Idem— from W. to S. E. Novarese— Novara— Vigevanasco— Vigevano— Pavese— Pavia— Lodegiano— Lodi— Cremonese— Cremona— Milaneze— Milan— S. to N. Comese— Como— Allessandrinese— Allessandria— W. to E. Laumelline— Valenza— Tortonese— Tortona— Bobbiese— Bobbio—   

PARMA.  
Comprehends the D. of 〈…〉 so called 〈…〉 Idem 〈◊〉 E to W. 〈…〉— Idem 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. of 〈…〉— 〈…〉.— N. to S. 〈…〉— 〈…〉   

MODENA.  
Comprehends the D. of Modena prop. so called Chief Town Idem Eastward. Regto— Idem Westward. Mirandula— Idem Northward. Corregie— Idem 11 m. N. E. of Regio. Principality of Carpi— Idem 14 m.   

MANTOVA.  
Comprehends the D. of Montova prop. so called Chief Town Mantova, Northward. Sabionetta— Id. 18 m. S. W. of Mantova. 〈…〉— Idem 18 m. S. Principality of Bozzolo— Id. 18 m. S. W. Marquisate of Castiglon— Castillan-de-Silver, 6m. (N. E. of Mantua.   

VENICE.  
Comprehends the Territories of Dogado— Chief Town Venice— from E. to W. Paduano— Milan— Vicentino— Vicenza— Veronese— Verona— Bresc●ano— Brescia— Bergamasco— Bergamo— Frluli— Uddine— W. to E. Istria— Cabo d'Istria Aquileija— Idem in Friuli 22 m. S E. of (Uddin. Cremasco— Crema 24 m. S. of Bergamo. Pol●sin-de-Rovigo Rovigo 22 m. S. of Milan. Marca Trevigiano Trevigio 17 m. N. W. of Venice. Trevigiano contains the Territories of Trevigiano prop. Trevigie— S. to N. Feltrino— Feltri— Bellunese— Belluno— Cadrino— Codore—   

GENOVA.  
Comprehends the Principality of 〈◊〉— Chief Town Idem— W. to E. Territory of 〈◊〉— Idem— Principality of 〈◊〉— Idem— Marquisate of 〈◊〉— Idem— Territory of 〈…〉 Idem— 〈…〉 Idem—  〈…〉 Idem— 〈…〉 Idem—   

TRENT.  
Comprehends only the Bishopric of Trent Chief Town Idem upon the A. dige.    

§. 2. In the Middle Part.  
The Land of the Church of Papacy.  
Comprehends the D. of Ferrara— Chief Town Ferrara— N. W. to S. E. Bolognese— Bologna— Prov. of Romagna— Ravenn 〈…〉 D. of Urbine— Urbino— Marq. of Ancona— Ancona— C. of Citta de Castello— Citta de Castello. N. to S. Terr. of Perugiano— Perugia— Orvietano— Orvieto— D. of Castro— Castro— St. Peter's Patrimony— Viterbo 14 m. S. E. of Orvieto. Campagnia 〈…〉— Rome— S. to N. Sabino— Magliano 20 m. N. of Rome D. of Spoleto— Spoleto—  

TUSCANY.  
Comprehends the Terr. of Florence— Chief Town Idem— N. E. to S. W. Pisa— Idem— Sienna— Idem— N. E. to S. W. Princip of Piombino— Idem— Isle of Elbai— Cosmopoli— D. of Carrara and Massa Massa 24 m. N. W. of Pisa. State of Presidii— Orbitello 55 m. E. of Cosmopoli  
The Republics of 

Luca,  
S. Marino.    
Comprehend only the Territories of these two free Cities of. Luca— Sltuated 8 m. N. E. of Pisa. S. Marino 17 m. N. W. of Urbine.    

§. 3. In the Lower Part.  

The Kingdom of NAPLES.  
Comprehends the Provinces of Abruzzo the 〈◊〉— Chief Town Aquila— From N. W. to S. E. upon the Adriatic Gulf. Abruzzo the nigher— Civitta di Chie Molissa— Bojano— Capitinate or Puglia— Mandfredonia— Terra di Bari— Bari— Terra di Otranto— Otranto— Terra di Lavoro— Naples— From N. W. to S. E. upon the Tyrrhenean Sea. Further Principate— Benevento— Nigher Principate— Salerno— Basilicate— Cirenza— Calabria the nigher— Cosenze— Calabria the farther— Regie—    

THIS Country (known of old by the Names of Hesperia, Saturnia, Latium, Ausonia, Oenotria, and 
Name.  Janicula) is termed by its Natives and Spaniards, Italia; by the French, Italy; by the Germans, Italien; and by the English, Italy; so called (as most Authors conjecture) from Italus, an Ancient King of the Siculi, who leaving their Island came into this Country, and possessing themselves of the middle part thereof, called the whole Italia, from the Name of their Prince.  
The Air of this Country is generally Pure, Temperate, and Healthful to breathe in, except the Land of 
Air.  the Church, where 'tis ordinarily reckoned more gross and unwholesome, as also the Southern Parts of Naples, where for several Months in the Summer 'tis scorching Hot, being of the like Quality with the Air of those Provinces in Spain which lie under the same Parallels of Latitude. The opposite Place of the Globe to Italy, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, lying between 205 and 220 Degrees of Longitude, with 38 and 48 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 6th and 7th North Climate) is very fertile, generally yielding in 
Soil.  great abundance the choicest of Corn, Wines, and Fruit. Its Woods are (for the most part) continually green, and well-stored with the best of wild and tame Beasts. Its Mountains do afford several kinds of Metal, particularly those in Tuscany and Naples, which are said to yield some rich Mines of Silver and Gold. Here is also a great quantity of true Albaster, and the purest of Marble. In short, this Country is generally esteemed the Garden of Europe; and so stately and magnificent are its numerous Cities, that I cannot omit the following Epithets commonly bestowed on divers of them; as Rome, the Sacred; Naples, the Noble; Florence, the Fair; Venice, the Rich; Genoa, the Stately; Milan, the Great; Ravenna, the Ancient; Milan, the Learned; Bononia, the Fat; Leghorn, the Merchandizing; Verona, the Charming; Luca, the Jolly; and Casal, the Strong.  
The chief Commodities of this Country are Wines, Corn, Rice, Silks, Velvets, Taffetas, Satins, Grograins, 
Commodities.  Fustians, Gold-wire, Allom, Armour, Glasses, and such like.  
To reckon up all those things in Italy, that truly deserve the Epithet of Rare and Curious, would far surpass 
Rarities.  our designed brevity; I shall therefore confine myself to one sort of Rarities, namely, The most noted Remains or Monuments of Reverend Antiquity, which in effect are most worthy of our regard, they being very useful in giving some Light to several parts of the Roman History. In viewing of which Antiquities, I shall reduce them all to Three Classes; viz. Those that are to be seen in the City of Rome itself. Secondly, In the Kingdom of Naples. And lastly, In all other Parts of Italy besides.  
The most remarkable Monuments of Antiquity in Rome itself, are these following. (1.) Amphitheatres, particularly that, called the Old Amphitheatre, (now termed the Coliseo, because of a Colossean Statue that stood therein) begun by Vespasian, and finished by Domitian. (2.) Triumphal Arches, as that of Constantine the Great (nigh to the old Amphitheatre) erected to him in Memory of his Victory obtained over the Tyrant Maxentius, with this Inscription, Liberatori Urbis, Fundatori Pacis. That of T. Vespasian (the ancientest of all the Triumphal Arches in Rome) erected to him upon his taking the City, and spoiling the Temple of Jerusalem. That of Septimius Severus, to be seen nigh the Church of St. Martinas. Add to these, the Triumphal Bridge, (whose Ruins are still visible nigh Pont Angelo) so much reputed of old, that by a Decree of the Senate, none of the meaner sort of People were suffered to tread upon the same. (3.) Thermae or Baths; as those of the Emperor Antoninus Pius, which where of a prodigious bigness, according to that of Ammianus Marcellinus, who (speaking of 'em) says, Lavacra in modum Provinciarum exstructa. Those of Alexander Severus, the goodly Ruins whereof are to be seen nigh the Church of St. Eustachio●t and lastly, the Ruins of Thermae Constantinianae, still visible in Monte Cavallo, formerly Mons Quirinalis. (4.) Several remarkable Pillars, particularly, that called Colonna d' Antonino, erected by M. Aurelius Antoninus, the Emperor, in Honour of his Father, Antoninus Pius, and still to be seen in the Corso, being as yet 175 Foot high. That called Colonna Trajana, set up in Honour of Trajan, and now to be found in Monte Cavallo. That called Colonna Rostrata, (still extant in the Capitol) erected in Honour of Dulius, and decked with Stems of Ships, upon his Victory over the Carthaginians, the same being the first Naval Victory obtained by the Romans. To these we may add the two great Obelisks (one before Porta del Populo, and the other before the Church of S. John de Lateran) formerly belonging to, and now the chief Remainders of the famous Circus Maximus, which was begun by Tarqvinius Priscus, augmented by J. Caesar and Augustus, and at last adorned with Pillars and Statues by Trajan and Heliogabalus. We may also add those Three Pillars of admirable Structure (now to be seen in Campo Vaccino) which formerly belonged to the Temple of Jupiter Stator, built by Romulus, upon his Victory over the Sabines; together with Six others on the side of the Hill mounting up to the Capitol, three of which belonged once to the Temple of Concord, built by Camillus; and the other three to the Temple of Jupiter Tonans, built by Augustus upon a narrow escape from a Thunderbolt. And finally, In the rank of Pillars we may place the famous Milliarium, (still reserved in the Capitol) which is a little Pillar of Stone with a round Brazen Ball on its top, erected at first by Augustus Caesar in Foro Romano, from whence the Romans reckoned their Miles to all parts of Italy. Other no●ed Pieces of Antiquity in Rome, and not reducible to any of the former Classes, are chiefly these, (1.) The stately Ruins of Pal●●● Magiore, or the great Palace of the Roman Emperors once 〈…〉 over the greatest part of the Palatine Hill. (2.) The Ruins o● Templum Pacis (which are nigh the Church of St. 〈…〉 in Campo Vaccino) built by T. Vespasian, who adorned the same with some of the Spoils of the Temple of Jerusalem. (3.) The Ro●unda or Pantheon, built by Agrippa, and dedicated to all Gods; many of whose Statues are still extant in the Palace of Justiniani, reserved there as a Palladium of that Family. (4.) The Mausoleum Augusti, near S. Rock's Church, but nowextreamly decayed. And lastly, The very Plate of Brass on which the Laws of the Ten Tables were written, ●● still to be seen in the Capitol.  
Remarkable Monuments of Antiquity in the Kingdom of Naples, are these following, (1) The Grotte of Pausilipus, being a large Cart-way about a Mile long, cut under ground, quite thro●● Mountain, near the City of Naples, made (as some imagine) by Lucullus; but according to others, Cocceius Nerva. (2.) Some Remains of a fair Amphitheatre, and Cicero's Academy, nigh Puzzuolo; as also the Arches and Ruins of that prodigious Bridge, (being three Miles long) built by Caligula between Puzzuolo and Baiae; to which Building Suetonius, the Historian, seems to allude when he taxeth that Emperor with his Substructiones insan●. (3.) The Foundation of Baiae itself, and some Arches with the Pavement of the very Streets, all visible under Water in a clear Sun shine day. (4.) The Elysian Fields, so famous among the Poets, and extremely beholden to them for their Fame, being only an ordinary Plate of Ground still to be seen nigh the place where the City of Baiae stood. (5.) The Piscina Mirabilis, which is a vast Subterranean Building nigh the Elesian Fields, designed to keep fresh Water for the Roman Galleys, who used to harbour thereabouts. (6) The Ruins of Nero's Palace, with the Tomb of Agrippa, his Mother, nigh to the aforesaid Piscina; as also the Baths of Cicero and Tritola, and the Lacus Avernus, so noted of old for its infectious Air. (7.) The Grotte of the famous Stbylla Cumaea, nigh to the place where Cumoe stood; as also the Sulphureous Grotta de'l Cane, nigh to the Grotte of Pausilipus abovementioned. Lastly, The obscure Tomb of that well known Poet, P. Virg●itus Maro, in the Gardens of S. Severino, nigh to the entrance of the Grotte of Paustlipus. To all these we may here subjoin that noted and most remarkable Prodigy of Nature, the terrible Vulcano Vesuvius about seven Miles from the City of Naples.  
Remarkable Monuments of Antiquity in all other Parts of Italy, are chiefly these, (1.) The Via Appia, a prodigious long Causeway of five days Journey reaching from Rome to Brundisium, and made at the sole Charges of Appius Claudius during his Consulate. (2.) Via Flaminia, another Causeway of the same length, reaching from Rome to Rimini, and made by the Consul Flaminius, who employed the Soldiers therein during the time of Peace. (3.) Via Aemilia, reaching from Rimini to Bologna, and paved by Aemilius Lepidus, Colleague of Flaminius. (4.) The old Temple and House of Sibylla Tyburtina, to be seen at Tivoli, a Town about fifteen Miles from Rome. (5.) An Ancient Triumphal Arch yet standing near Fano, a Town in the Duchy of Urbine. (6.) The very Stone upon which Julius Caesar stood when he made an Oration to his Men, persuading 'em to pass the Rub●con, and advance straight to Rome: The same is to be seen upon a Pedestal in the Marketplace of Rimini. (7.) A rare Amphitheatre in Verona, erected at first by the Consul Flaminius, and repaired since by the Citizens, and now the intirest of any in Europe; as also another entire at Pola in Istria, being of two Orders of Tuscan Pillars placed one above another. (8) The Ruins of an Amphitheatre in Milan, part of whose Court (being of an Oval Form) doth still retain the Name of Arena. (9) Many stately Tombs of famous Men, particularly That of Antenor's in Milan; St. Peter's in Rome; St. Augustin's and Severinus Boetius, both in Pavia, with that of St. Ambrose in Milan, and many others, together with vast multitudes of Statues both of Brass and Marble in most parts of Italy.  
These are the most remarkable Remains of the Roman Antiquities that are now extant throughout all this Country. As for Modern Curiosities, and other sorts of Rarities (which are obvious to the Eye of every ordinary Traveller) a bare Catalogue of 'em would swell up to a considerable Volume. It were endless to Discourse of magnificent Buildings, (particularly Churches) Ancient Inscriptions, rare Waterworks, and many bold Pieces of Painting and Statuary, to be seen almost in every Corner of Italy. Every one is apt to talk of the bending Tower of Pisa, the Whispering Chamber of Caprarola, the renowned House of Loretto, with the rich Treasury of S. Mark in Venice; not to mention the famous Vatican Palace and Library, with the glorious and splendid Furniture of the Roman Churches. To these I may add the several Magazines, or large Collections of all sorts of Rarities kept in several Parts of Italy; particularly those in Villa Ludovisia, belonging to Prince Ludovisio: As also those in the famous Gallery of Canonico Setali in Milan; but above all, are divers Rooms and Cabinets of exotic Curiosities and precious Stones, (among which is the famous Diamond that weigheth 138 Carats) all belonging to the Great Duke of Tuscany, and much admired and talked off in all Parts of the Civilised World.  
ecclesiastics of the higest Order in this Country, are his Holiness the Pope, and the Patriarches of 

Venice,  
Aquileia.    
Next to these are the Archbishops of 
Archbishoprics.  

Milan,  
Fermo,  
Benevento,  
Frani,  
Turin,  
Ravenna,  
Thieti,  
Tarento,  
Tarentaise,  
Naples,  
Lanciano,  
Brindisi,  
Bologne,  
Capua,  
Manfredonia,  
Otranto,  
Genoa,  
Salerno,  
Bari,  
Rossano,  
Florence,  
Amalfi,  
Cirenza,  
Consenza,  
Pisa,  
Sorento,  
Nazareth or Barletta.  
Sanseverino,  
Urbino,  
Conza,  
Reggio.    
The respective Suffragans of these ecclesiastics, are as followeth,  
§. 1. Immediately subject to the Pope, are the Bishops of 
Bishoprics.  

Ostia,  
Alatro,  
Perusa,  
Foligni.  
Porto,  
Ferentino,  
Citta di Castello,  
Assisi.  
Sabius,  
Velitri,  
Citta di Sieve,  
Ancona  
Palestrina,  
Sutri,  
Castro,  
Humana,  
Frascati,  
Nepi,  
Arezzo,  
Loretto,  
Albano,  
Citta Castellana,  
Spoleto,  
Recanali,  
Tivoli,  
Horta,  
Norcia,  
Ascoli,  
Anagni,  
Viterbi,  
Ferni,  
Jesi,  
Veroli,  
Tuscanella,  
Narni,  
Osmo,  
Terracina,  
Civita-Vecchia,  
Amelia,  
Camerin,  
Sezza,  
Bagnarea,  
Todi.  
Cometo,  
Segni,  
Orvieto,  
Rieti.  
Monte Fiascone.    
As also these following being exempt from the Jurisdiction of their respective Metropolitans. 

Mantua,  
Cortona,  
Atella,  
Rapolla,  
Trent,  
Sarzana,  
Cava,  
Monte-Pelozo,  
Pavia,  
Fano,  
Scala and Ravello,  
Trivento,  
Salusses,  
Ferrara,  
Aquila,  
Mon-Pulician,  
Aversa,  
Melfi,  
Marsico,  
Faramo,  
Cassano,  
San-Marco,  
Montellone.  
Bisiguano,    
§ 2. Suffragans to the Patriarch of Venice, are only those of 

Torzello,  
Chioza.    
§. 3. To the Patriarch of Aquileia, are those of, 

Terviso,  
Trieste,  
Petin,  
Vicenza,  
Feltri,  
Cabo d' Istria,  
Citta Nuova,  
Verona,  
Belluno.  
Pola,  
Milan,  
Como.  
Concord.  
Parenzo,    
§. 4. To the Archbishop of Milan, are those of, 

Cremona,  
Tortona,  
VerITEMes,  
Acqui,  
Novara,  
Vighenano,  
Alba,  
Savona,  
Lodi,  
Bergamo,  
Ast,  
Vintemiglia.  
Alexandria,  
Brescia,  
Casal,    
§. 5. To the Archbishop of Turin, are those of 

Yorée,  
Mondovi,  
Fossano,    
§ 6. To the Archbishop of Tarentaise, are those of 

Aoste,  
Zion.    
§. 7. To the Archbishop of Bologne, are those of 

Parma,  
Rheggio,  
Carpi,  
Borgo,  
Placenza,  
Modena,  
Crema,  
S. Domino.    
§. 8. To the Archbishop of Genoa, are those of 

Albegna,  
Brugnato,  
Mariana,  
Nebio.  
Noli,  
Bobio,  
Accia,    
§. 9 To the Archbishop of Florence, are those of 

Pistoya,  
Colle,  
Borgo san Sepulchro;  
Fiesoli,  
Volterra,  
Citta di Sole.    
§. 10. To the Archbishop of Pisa, are those of 

Soana,  
Piombino,  
Mont-Alcino,  
Aiazzo,  
Chiusi,  
Massa,  
Livorno,  
Sagona,  
Grossete,  
Pienza,  
Luca,  
Alerta.    
§. 11. To the Archbishop of Urbine, are those of 

Senigaglia,  
Engubio,  
Pesaro,  
Fossombrona,  
Cagli,  
S. Leon.    
§. 12. To the Archbishop of Fermo, are those of 

San-Severino,  
Macerati,  
Montalt,  
Tolentin,  
Ripa Transona.    
§. 13. To the Archbishop of Ravenna, are those of 

Rovigo,  
Britinoro,  
Sarsina,  
Cervia,  
Comachio,  
Forli,  
Rimini,  
●●nestria.  
Faenza,  
Cosena,  
Imola,    
§. 14. To the Archbishop of Naples, are those of 

Nola,  
Pozzuolo,  
Cerra,  
Ischia.    
§. 15. To the Archbishop of Capua, are those of 

Tiano,  
Caiazzo,  
Sessa,  
Mont-cassin,  
Calvi,  
Carniola,  
Venafro,  
Fondi,  
Caserta,  
Isernia,  
Aquin,  
Gaieta.    
§. 16. To the Archbishop of Salerno, are those of 

Campagna,  
Policastro,  
Sarno,  
Nocera di pagni.  
Capaccio,  
Nusco,  
Marsico nuovo,  
Acerno.    
§. 17. To the Archbishop of Amalfi, are those of 

Letter,  
Capri,  
Minori.    
§. 18. To the Archbishop of Sorento, are those of 

Vico,  
Massa,  
castle à Mare di Stabbia.    
§. 19 To the Archbishop of Conza, are those of 

Muro,  
Satriano,  
Cedogna,  
Cangiano,  
Bisaccia.    
§. 20. To the Archbishop of Benevento, are those of 

Ascol,  
Monte Marano,  
Bovino,  
Tremoli,  
Fiorenzuola,  
Avellino,  
Toribolenza,  
Lesnia,  
Telezi,  
Fricenti,  
Dragonara,  
Guardia,  
S. Agatha di Gothi,  
Ariano,  
Volturata,  
D'alsieres.  
Boiano,  
Larina,    
§. 21. To the Archbishop of Thieti, are those of 

Ortona di Mare,  
Civita di Penna,  
Sermona,  
Campti,  
Cali.    
§. 22. To the Archbishop of Lanciano, are none.  
§. 23. To the Archbishop of Manfredonia, are those of 

Troia,  
Vieste,  
San-Severa.    
§. 24. To the Archbishop of Bari, are those of 

Canosa,  
Conversano,  
Bitteta,  
Giovenazzo,  
Poligano,  
Labiello,  
Bitonto,  
Monervino,  
Ravo,  
Molfetta.    
§. 25. To the Archbishop of Cirenza, are those of 

Malerano,  
Turfi,  
Gravina,  
Venosa,  
Potenza,  
Tricarico.    
§. 26. To the Archbishop of Nazareth, none:  
§. 27. To the Archbishop of Frani, are those of 

Salpi,  
Andria,  
Biseglia.    
§. 28. To the Archbishop of Tarento, are those of 

Montula,  
Castellanetta.    
§. 29. To the Archbishop of Brindisi, are those of 

Ostuni,  
Oria.    
§. 30. To the Archbishop of Otranto, are those of 

Gallipoli,  
Castro.  
Alessano,  
leech,  
Nardo,  
S. Maria di Leuca.  
Ugento,    
§. 31. To the Archbishop of Rossano, none.  
§. 32. To the Archbishop of Consenza, are those of 

Montallo,  
Mortorano.    
§. 33. To the Archbishop of Sanseverino, are those of 

Belcastro,  
Strongoli,  
Cariati,  
Umbriatico,  
Isola,  
Cerenza.    
§. 34. To the Archbishop of Reggio, are those of 

Amantea,  
Cortona,  
Squillace,  
Bova,  
Nicastro,  
Oppido,  
Nicotera,  
Taverna,  
Tropea,  
Gieraci,    
Universities in this Country, are those established at the Cities following, 
Universities.  

Rome,  
Florence,  
Mantua,  
Venice,  
Bononia,  
Pisa,  
Pavia,  
Milan,  
Ferrara,  
Sienna,  
Naples,  
Verona,  
Perusia,  
Milan,  
Salerno,  
Parma.    
The Natives of this Country (once the Triumphant Lords and Conquerors of the World) are now less given 
Manners.  to the Art of War, and Military Exploits, than most other Nations of Europe. However the Modern Italians are generally reputed a Grave, Respectful, and Ingenious sort of People; especially in those things to which they chiefly apply themselves nowadays, viz. Statuary Works, Architecture, and the Art of Painting. They're also reckoned Obedient to their Superiors, Courteous to Inferiors, Civil to Equals, and very Affable to Strangers. They're likewaies in Apparel very modest, in Furniture of Houses, sumptuous; and at their Tables extraordinary neat and decent. But these good Qualities of this People are mightily stained by many notorious Vices which reign among them, particularly those of Revenge and Lust, Jealousy and Swearing, to all of which they're so excessively given, that even a modest Narrative would seem incredible. As for the Female Sex, a vulgar Saying goes of them, that they're Magpies at the Doors, Saints in the Church, Goats in the Garden, Devils in the House, Angels in the Streets, and sirens at the Windows.  
The present Language of Italy is a Dialect of the Latin, which was the Ancient Language of this Country: 
Language.  Almost every Province and City hath its peculiar Idiom, but that of Tuscany is reckoned the purest and best polished of all others, and is that which Persons of Quality and Learning usually speak. Paternoster in Italian runs thus; Padre nostro, che sci ne Cielo, sia sanctificato il tuo nome: venga il tuo Regno: sia fatta la tua volonta, st come in ciclo, cosi encora in terra. Dacci hogli il nostro pane cotidiano; é rimetti●i i nostri debiti, si come encor noigli remettiano a i nostri d●bitori. E non ci indurre in tentatione ma liberaci dal male. Amen.  
The Government of Italy can't be duly considered without looking back unto the Chief Divisions of 
Government.  that Country abovementioned; there being so many different Sovereignties therein, independent on one another, and not subjected to one Head. The whole being therefore divided into Upper, Middle, and Lower, according to the aforesaid Analysis.  
I. The Upper (or Lombardy) being again divided into one Principality, five Dutchies, two Republics, and one Bishopric. That one Principality, viz Piedmont, is under the Duke of Savoy. The five Dutchies, viz. those of Montferrat, Milan, Parma, Modena, and Mantua, are under several Sovereigns: For Montferrat is partly under the Duke of Savoy, and partly under the French King. Milan is under the King of Spain, for which he is dependent on the Emperor. Parma is mostly under its own Duke, who is feudatary to the Pope, paying yearly ten thousand Crowns. Modena is under its own Duke, who is dependent on the Emperor. And Mantua is mostly under its own Duke, who is feudatary to the Emperor. The two Republics being those of Venice and Genoa, (of whom particularly afterwards) are governed by their Senare and Magigistrates. The one Bishopric being that of Trent, is subject to the House of Austria.  
II. The Middle Part being divided into the Land of the Church, the Dukedom of Tuscany, and the Republics of Luca and St. Marino. The Land of the Church (or St. Peter's Patrimony) is for the most part in the Hands of the Pope, and ruled by several Governors set over its various Divisions, who are generally not a little severe upon the Subject. His Holiness, the Pope, (by Virtue of the Jurisdiction of the Roman See) is both Temporal and Spiritual Sovereign thereof, and is commonly styled by Roman Catholics, the Chief Ecclesiastic of all Christendom; the Patriarch of Rome, and the West; the Primate and Supreme Governor of Italy; the Metrapolitan of those Bishops Suffragan to the See of Rome, and Bishop of the most famous St. John of Lateran. The Dukedom of Tuscany is, for the most part, under its own Duke, except the Towns of Sienna, (for which he is Tributary to Spain) and Orbitellio, which belongeth also to the Spaniard. This Duke is esteemed the Richest and most Powerful of all the Italian Princes, but his manner of Government is generally reckoned too pressing and uneasy to the Subject. The Towns and Republics of Luca and St. Marino, are governed by their own Magistrates as free States. But of them afterwards.  
III. The Lower Part of Italy being the Kingdom of Naples, is subject to the Spaniard, for which he is Homager to the Pope, and accordingly sends his Holiness yearly, a White Horse and 7000 Ducats by way of acknowledgement. It is governed by a Viceroy, appointed and sent thither by his Catholic Majesty, who is usually one of the Chief Grandees of Spain, and is commonly renewed every third Year. These Vice-Roys (as in most other of the Spanish Governments) during their short Regency, do industriously endeavour to lose no time in filling their own Coffers, and that by most grievous Exactions on the poor Subject. So severe indeed are the Spaniards upon the Neapolitans, that the King's Officers are commonly said to suck in the Duchy of Milan, and to Fleece in the Island of Sicily, but to Flay off the very Skin in the Kingdom of Naples; so that the People of this Country (which is one of the best in Europe) are most miserably harassed by these hungry and rapacious Vultures. Besides these Princes in Italy abovementioned, there are several others who are under the Protection of some higher Power, particular that of the Emperor, the Pope, or the King of Spain.  
To the Government of Italy, we may add the four following Republics, viz. those of 

Venice.  
Genova.  
Luca.  
St. Marino.    
I. Venice, This Republic is under an Aristocratical Government, the Sovereignty of the State being lodged in the Nobility, or certain number of Families enroled in the Golden Book, called the Register of the Venetian Nobles. Their Chief Officer is the Duke, or Doge, whose Authority is a mere Chimaera, and he no better than a Sovereign Shadow, Precedency being all he can justly claim above the other Magistrates. Here are established Five Principal Councils, viz. (1) That termed the Grand Council, comprehending the whole Body of the Nobility, by whom are elected all Magistrates, and enacted all Laws which they judge convenient for the Public Good. (2) That termed the Pregadi, (commonly called the Senate of Venice) consisting of above an hundred Persons, who determine Matters of the highest Importance, as those relating to Peace or War, Leagues and Alliances. (3) The College consisting of Twenty four Lords, whose Office is to give Audience to Ambassadors, and to report their Demands to the Senate, which alone hath Power to return Answers. (4) The Council of Ten, (consisting of Ten Noblemen) whose Office it is to hear and decide all Criminal Matters: This Court (whose Jurisdiction is extraordinary great) is yearly renewed, and Three of these Noblemen, called the Capi, or Inquisitors of State, are chosen Monthly; to which Triumvirate is assigned such a Power in judging of Criminals, that their definitive Sentence teacheth the chiefest Nobleman of the State, as well as the meanest Artificer, if they are unanimous in their Voices, otherways all the Ten are consulted with.  
TWO Genova is under an Aristocratical Government, very like to that of Venice; for its Principal Magistrate hath the Name or Title of Duke. (but continueth only for two Years) to whom there are Assistant, eight Principal Officers, who with the Duke, are called the Seignory, which in Matters of the greatest Importance, is also subordinate to the Grand Council consisting of Four hundred Persons, all Gentlemen of the City; which Council, with the Seignory do constitute the whole Body of the Commonwealth. This State is much more famous for what it hath been, than for what it is being now on the decaying hand. At present its subject unto several Sovereigns, various Places within its Territories belonging to the Dukes of Savoy and Tuscany, some free, and others lately taken by the French.  
III. Luca (being a small Free Commonwealth, enclosed within the Territories of the Grand Duke of Tuscany) is under the Government of one Principal Magistrate, called the Gonfalonier, changeable every second Month, assisted by nine Counsellors, named Anziani, whom they also change every six Months, during which time they live in the Palace or Common-Hall; and Superior to them is the Grand Council, which consisteth of about Two hundred and forty Noblemen, who being equally divided into two Bodies, take their turns every half Year. This State is under the Protection of the Emperor of Germany, and payeth him yearly Homage accordingly.  
IV. St. Marino, a little (but flourishing) Republic in the Dukedom of Urbine, which still maintains its Previleges, and is governed by its own Magistrates, who are under the Protection of the Pope, The whole Territory of this small Commonwealth, is but one Mountain about three Miles long, and ten round, consisting of about five thousand Inhabitants, who boast of their State being a Free Republic about a thousand Years.  
It being too tedious to express the Ensigns Armorial of all the Sovereign Princes and States in this Country 
Arms.  and too superficial to mention those of one only; we shall therefore (as a ●he Medium) nominate the Chief Sovereignties of Italy, [viz. the Pop●●●om, the Dukedom of Tuscany, and the Republics of Venice and Genova] and affix to each of these their peculiar Arms. Therefore (1.) His Holiness the Pope, (as Sovereign Prince over the Land of the Church or Papal Dominions) bears for his Escutcheon, Gules, consisting of a long Cape, or Head-piece Or, surmounted with a Cross pearled and garnished with three Royal Crowns, together with the two Keys of St. Peter placed in Saltier. (2.) The Arms of Tuscany are, Or, five Roundles, Gules, two, two, and one, and one in Chief Azure, charged with three Flower-de-luces' Or. (3.) Those of Venice are, Azure, a Lion winged, Sejant Or, holding under one of his Paws, a Book covered, Argent. Lastly, Those of Genova are, Argent, a Cross Gules, with a Crown closed by reason of the Island of Corsica belonging to it which bears the Title of Kingdom, and for Supporters are two Griffins Or.  
My unavoidable Prolixity in handling the various Heads contained in the foregoing Paragraphs, doth call 
Religion.  upon me to atone for the same by a desirable Brevity in treating of this Head now before us. All therefore I shall say upon it, is, That the Italians (as to their Religion) are Zealous Professors of the Doctrine of the Roman Church, even in her grossest Errors and Superstitions; and that either out of Fear of the Barbarous Inquisition: or in Reference to their Ghostly Father, the Pope: or chiefly, by being industriously kept in woeful Ignorance of the Protestant Doctrine, of which they are taught many false and monstivous things. The Jews are here tolerated the Public Exercise of their Religion, and at Rome there's a Weekly Sermon for their Conversion, at which one of each Family is bound to be present. The Christian Faith was first preached here by St. Peter, who went thither in, or about the beginning of the Reign of the Emperor Claudius, as is generally testified by some Ancient Writers of good Account.    


TURKEY in EUROPE by R. Morden    

SECT. VIII. Concerning Turkey in Europe.  
 d. m.  Miles. Situated between 36 00 of Long. its greatest Length is about 770. 53 00 between 36 30 of Latit. Breadth is about 660. 49 20 Turkey in Europe being divided into two Classes North the Danuube. South North comprehends Hungary— Chief Town Buda— W. to E. Transilvania— Hermanstat— Valachia— Tergowick— Moldavia— Saczow— Little Tartary— Crim— South comprehends Romania— Constantinople E. to W. Bulgaria— Sophia— Servia— Belgrade— Bosnia— Bosna Seraio Sclavonia— Possega— Croatia— Wihitz— W. to S. E. Dalmatia— Spalatro— Greece— Saloniki—  
Of all these in Order.  

Hungary divided into  
Upper North Chief Towns in Upper are Praesburge— W. to S. E. upon the Danuube. Newhawsel— Pest— Colocza— Esperies— N. to S. upon the Teyssa. Caschaw.— Tokay— Agria— Zolnock— Segedin— Zatmar— N. to S. on the E. of Teyssa. Debreczen— Great Waradin— Gyulla— Timesware— Lower South in Lower are Raab— W. to S. E. on the Danuube. Gran— Buda— Kanischa— W. to E. upon the Drove. Siget— Quinque Ecclesiae Stul Weissenburge, aliter Alba Regalis upon Zarwiza.   

In Transilvania.  
The Chief Towns are Clausenburge— S. to N. upon the Samos. Burgles— Newmark— N. to S. upon the Maresh. Wissenburge.— Hermanstat upon the Alauta.   

In Valachia.  
The Chief Towns are Tergvoick— From N. to S. Buchorest—   

In Moldavia.  
The Chief Towns are Soczow— From W. to E. Jazy— Romani Wiwar, Southward.   

In Little Tartary.  
The Chief Towns are Nigropoli— From N. to S. Kaffa—   

In Romania.  
The Chief Towns are Constantinople— From E. to W. Adrinople— Philippipoli, aliter Philiba—   

In Bulgaria.  
The Chief Towns are Sophia— From S. to N. Silistria— Nigopoli—   

In Servia.  
The Chief Towns are Scopia— From S. to N. Guistandil— Viddin— Nissa— From S. to N. W. upon the Mar●wa. Jagodna— Belgrade.— From N. to S. Bracco— Prisrens—   

In Bosnia.  
The Chief Towns are Bosna-Seraio— From E. to W. Jaycza— Bomiahich, Southward.   

In Sclavonia.  
The Chief Towns are Possega— From W. to E. Peter-Waradin— Esseck upon the Drove.   

In Croatia.  
The Chief Towns are Wihitsch— From S. to N. Dubiza— Car●lstat, Westward.   

In Dalmatia.  
The Chief Towns are Nona— From W. to S. E. Zara— Sebenico— Spalatro— Narenza— Ragusi— Scodrant— Cattaro—   

Lastly, Greece [by the Turks Rumelia] comprehends the following Divisions.  
Viz. Macedonia— By the Moderns Idem— Northward. Albania— Arnaut— Thessalia— Janna— In the Middle. Epirus— Idem— Achaia— Livadia— Peloponesus— Morea lying Southward of all.  
The Chief Towns of Macedonia are Contessa— N. E. to S. W. Saloniki— Zeucria— Florina— Cogni— Albania are Scutari— N. to S. Alessio— Croia— Durazzo— Vallona— Thessalia are Larissa— E. to W. Tricala— ●anna— Epirus are— Canina— N. to S. Chimaera— Butrinto— Prevesa— Larta— Achaia are Lepanto— W. to E. Castri [olim Delphi]— Att●es [olim Athenae] Maraton— Stives [olim Thebae] Morea are— Corinto— Nigh the Sea-Coast, all round the Peninsula. Napoli-di-Romania— Maluasia— Colochina— Coron— Navarino— Chiarenza— Patrasso—  
THIS vast Complex Body comprehending these various Country's abovementioned, and the most remarkable of 'em being Hungary, Greece, and Little Tartary. We shall first treat of these Three separately, and then conjunctly of all the rest under the General Title of the The Danubian Provinces. Therefore   

§. 1. HUNGARY.  
THIS Country (containing a Part of Pannonia, with some of Ancient Germany and Dacia) is 
Name.  termed by the Italians, Ungharia; by the Spaniards, Hungria; by the French, Hungry; by the Germans, Ungern; and by the English, Hungary; so called from the Ancient Inhabitants, the Hunni or Huns.  
The Air of this Country is generally esteemed very unwholesome to Breath in; which is chiefly occasioned 
Air.  from much Marish Ground and many Lakes, wherewith this Country abounds. The opposite Place of the Globe to Hungary, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 218 and 233 Degrees of Longitude, with 43 and 49 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 7th and 8th North Climate) is very fruitful in Corn and Roots, and 
Soil.  various sorts of pleasant Fruit, affording also excellent Pasturage; and several of its Mountains produce some valuable Mines of Copper, Iron, Quicksilver, Antimony, and Salt. Yea, so noted is this Country for Mines, that no less than Seven Remarkable Towns go by the Name of Mine Towns, the Chief of which is Chremnuz, whose Mine hath been wrought in about 900 Years. The Length of the Days and Nights in Hungary, is much the same as in the Southern Circles of Germany.  
This being an Inland Country, and thereby having no settled Trade with Foreign Parts, we may reckon 
Commodities.  the Product of the Soil the Chief Commodities, with which the Inhabitants deal with their Neighbours.  
Here are many Natural Baths, especially those at Buda, which are reckoned the noblest in Europe, not 
Rarities.  only for their variety of Hot Springs, but also the magnificency of their Buildings. There are likeways two Hot Bagnio's near Transchin, upon the Confines of Moravia; and others at Schemnitz in Upper Hungary. Besides which, there are Waters in several Parts of this Country of a pettifying Nature, and others that corrode Iron to such a degree, that they'll consume a Horse-shoe in twenty four Hours. Near Esperies in Upper Hungary, are two deadly Fountains, whose Waters send forth such an infectious Steam, that it kills either Beast or Bird approaching the same; for the preventing of which, they're walled round, and kept always covered.  
Archbishoprics in this Country, are those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Gran,  
Colocza.    
Bishoprics in this Country, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Angria,  
Quinque Ecclesiae,  
Vesprin,  
Neytracht,  
Raab,  
Great Waradin.    
What Universities are established in this Country, since the retaking of it from the Infidels, is uncertain. 
Universities.   
The Hungarians (more addicted to Mars than Minerva) are generally looked upon as good Soldiers; being 
Manners.  Men, for the most part, of a strong and well proportioned Body, valiant and daring in their Undertake, but reputed Cruel and Insulting when Conquerors.  
The Hungarians have a peculiar Language of their own, which hath little or no Affinity with those of 
Languages  the Neighbouring Nations, save only the Sclavonic, from which it hath borrowed several Words, and which is also spoken in some Parts of this Country, as the Germane is in others. Paternoster in the Hungarian Tongue, runs thus: My atyanc ki vagy az mennyekben, szenteltessec mega te neved: jojon el az te orszagod; légven megâ te akaratod, mint az menyben, ugy itt ez foldonois; az mimindennapi kenyirunket add meg nekunc ma: es boczasd meg miné cunc az mi vet keinket, miképpem miis megboczatunc azoknac, az kic mi ellenunc vet keztenec: es ne vigi minket az kisertetbe, de szabadits' meg minket az gonosztol. Amen.  
This Kingdom at present is Elective; and being almost wholly recovered from the Ottoman Slavery by 
Government  the late successful Progress of the Imperial Arms, is now dependent on the Jurisdiction of the Emperor, who is styled King thereof. The Assembly of the States consists of the Clergy, Barons, Noblemen, and Free Cities, who usually meet once every three Years; which Assembly hath Power to elect a Palatin, who (by the Constitutions of the Realm) ought to be a Native of Hungary; and to him belongs the management of all Military Concerns, as also the Administration of Justice in Affairs both Civil and Criminal.  
See Germany. 
Arms.   
The prevailing Religion in this Country, is that of the Church of Rome, especially since the late Conquests 
Religion.  made by the Imperial Arms Next to it is the Doctrine of Luther and Calvin, which is zealously maintained by great Multitudes of People, and many of 'em are Persons of considerable Note. Besides these, are to be found most Sorts and Sects of Christians, as also many Jews; and Mahometans, not a few. This Kingdom received the Knowledge of the Blessed Gospel in the beginning of the Eleventh Century, and that by the Industrious Preaching of Albert, Archbishop of Prague.   

§. 2. GREECE.  
THIS Country (formerly Graecia and Hellis) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Grecia; by 
Name.  the French, la Grece; by the Germans, Griechenland; and by the English, Greece; why so called, is variously conjectured of all, by our Modern Critics; but the most received Opinion is, that the Name derives its Original from an Ancient Prince of that Country, called Graecus.  
The Air of this Country being generally Pure and Temperate, is reckoned by all to be very pleasant and 
Air.  healthful to ●●eathe in The opposite Place of the Globe to Greece, is that Part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 225 and 232 Degrees of Longitude, with 36 and 42 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying under the 6th North Climate) is not only very fit for Pasture, (there 
Scil.  being much fertile Champaign Ground) but also it affords good slo● of Grain, where duly Manured; and abounds with excellent 〈◊〉, and other delicious Fruits. The longest Day in the No●● most part of Greece is about 15 Hours; the shortest in the Southmost, 9 Hours ½, and the Nights proportionably.  
〈…〉 Commodities of this Country, are reckoned 〈…〉, Oil, Turkey-Leather, Coke. 
Commodities.  Soap. Honey, Wax, etc.  
At 〈◊〉 (a little Village on the South of M. 〈◊〉 now 〈◊〉, by the 〈◊〉) are some Inscriptions, 
〈◊〉  which evince it to have been the Ancient Delphi, so famous all the World over for the Oracle of Apollo. (2) On the aforesaid Mountain is a pleasant Spring, which having several Marble Seeps descending ●o it, and many Niches made in the Rock for Statues, give 〈◊〉 to think that this was the renowned ●ons Castchue, or Caballinus, which inspired (as People then imagined) the Ancient Poets. (3.) In Livadia (the Ancient Achaia) is a hideous Cavern in a Hill which was very famous of old for the Oracles of Trophonius. (4.) Between the large Lake of Livadia and the Euboean Sea, (whose shortest distance is four Miles) are upwards of forty wonderful Subterraneous Passages hewn out of the firm Rock, and that quite under a huge Mountain, to let the Water have a Vent, otherways the Lake being surrounded with Hills, and constantly supplied by several Rivulets from these Hills, would still overflow the Adjacent Country. (5.) On M. Oneius, in the Isthmus of Corinth, are the Remains of the Isthmian Theatre, being the Place where the Isthmian Games were formerly celebrated. (6.) Here are also some Vestigia of that Wall built by the Lacedæmonians, from one Sea to the other, for securing the Peninsula from the Incursions of the Enemy. (7.) Through most Parts of Greece, are still extant the Ruins of many Heathen Temples, especially that of the Goddess Ceres, at Eleusis (about four Hours from Athens) a part of whose Statue is yet to be seen. And at Salonichi are several stately Christian Churches, (particularly those of S. Sophia, Gabriel, and the Virgin Mary) now converted into Mahometan Mosques, the last of which is a Noble Structure, environed on each side with Twelve Pillars of Jasper Stone, and as many Crosses upon their Chapiters' remaining as yet undefaced by the Turks. But the Chief Rarities of Greece may be reckoned those various Monuments of Antiquity to be seen at Athens: The Chief of which are these following, (1.) The Acropolis or Citadel, the most Ancient and Eminent Part of the City. (2.) The Foundations of the Walls round the City, supposed to be those erected by Theseus, who enlarged the same. (3.) The Temple of Minerva (now a Turkish Mosque) as entire as yet as the Rotonda at Rome, and is one of the most beautiful Pieces of Antiquity that's extent this Day in the World. (4) The Panagia Spiliotissa, or Church of our Lady of the Grotto. (5.) Some magnificent Pillars, particularly those commonly reckoned the Remains of Adrian's Palace, of which there were formerly six Rows, and twenty in each Row, but now only seventeen stand upright, and are fifty two Foot high, and seventeen in Circumference at the Base. Here likeways is a Gate and an Aqueduct of the said Emperor. (6.) The Stadium, or Place where the Citizens used to run Races. encounter Wild Beasts, and celebrated the famous Games, termed 〈◊〉. (7.) The Hill, Musaeum, (now called To Seggio by the Inhabitants) so 〈◊〉 from the Poet, Musaeus, the Disciple of orphans, who was wont there to recite his Verses. (8.) Some Remains conjectured to be those of the Ar●opagus and Od●um, or Theatre of Music. (9) The Ruins of many Temples, especially that of Augustus, whose Front is still entire, consisting of four Doric Pillars; as also those of Theseus, Hercules, Jupiter Olympius, Castor and Pollux, etc. (10.) The Tower of Andronicus Cyrrhastes, or Temple of the Eight Winds still entire. (11.) The Phanari, or Lantern of Demosthenes, being a little Edifice of White Marble, in Form of a Lantern, which is also entire. For a particular Description of all these Rarities, both at Athens, and other Parts of Greece, with many remarkable Inscriptions, both in Greek and Latin. Vid. Wheeler's Travels.  
Archbishoprics in this Country, are chiefly those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Amphipoli,  
Malvasia,  
Saloniki,  
Larissa,  
Patras,  
Adrianople.  
Tarsa,  
Napoli di Romania,  
Janna.  
Athens,  
Corinth,    
Bishoprics in this Country, are chiefly those of 
Bishoprics.  

Scotusa,  
Misitra,  
Glykaeon,  
Granitza,  
Modon,  
Argiro Castro,  
Salona,  
Thalanta,  
Caminitza,  
Delvino,  
Livadia,  
Amphissa.  
Argos,  
Butrinto,    
No Universities in this Country, though once the Seat of the Muses; but in lieu of them are Twenty 
Universities.  four Monastries of Caloyers or Greek Monks, of the Order of St. Basil, who live in a Collegiate manner on the famous M. Athos, (now termed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or the Holy Mountain) where the younger Sort are instructed in the Holy Scriptures, and the various Rites of the Greek Church; and out of these Colleges are usually chosen those Bishops who are subject to the Patriarch of Constantinople.  
The Greeks (most famous of old, both for Arms and Arts, and every thing else that's truly valuable) are so 
Manners.  wonderfully degenerated from their Forefathers, that instead of those excellent Qualities which did shine in them, particularly Knowledge, Prudence, and Valour, There's nothing now to be seen among them, but the very Reverse or Contrary of these, and that in the highest degree. Such is the Pressure of the Ottoman Yoke, under which they groan at present, that their Spirits are quite sunk within 'em, and their very Aspect doth plainly declare a disconsolate and dejected Mind. However, the unthinking Part of them do so little consider their present Slavish Subjection, that there's no People more Jovial and merrily disposed, being so much given to Singing and Dancing, that 'tis now become a Proverbial Saying, As merry as a Greek. The Trading Part of them are generally very Cunning, and so inclined to overreach (if they can) in their Dealings, that Strangers do not only meet with much more Candour among the Turks; but if one Turk seem in the least to discredit another's Word or Promise, his Reply is still at hand, I hope you don't take me for a Christian: Such is that Blot, which these Imprudent Professors of Christianity have cast upon our most Holy Religion, in the Eyes of its Numerous and Implacable Adversaries.  
The Languages here in use, are the Turkish and Vulgar Greek, (the first being peculiar to the Turks, and the 
Language.  other to the Christians) a Specimen of the former shall be given in the last Paragraph of this Section. As for the other, I can't omit to mention the mighty difference there is betwixt it and the Ancient Greek, not only in respect of the many Turkish Words now intermixed, but also in the very Pronounciation of those which yet remain unalter'd, as I particularly observed by conversing with several of the Greek Clergy, and being present at some of their Public Prayers. Yea, the knowledge of the Ancient Greek in its former Purity, is not only lost among the Vulgar Sort of People, but also almost extinguished even among those of the highest Rank, few or none of their ecclesiastics themselves pretending to be Masters of it. Paternoster in the best Dialect of the modern Greek, runs thus: Pater hemas, opios i se ces tos Ouranous hagiasthito to Onoma sou; na erti he basilia sou; to thelema sou na ginetez itzon en te Ge, os is tun Ouranon: To psomi hemas dose hemas simeron. Kae-sichorase hemos ta crimata hemon itzon, kae hemas sichorasomen ekinous opou, mas adikounkae men ternes hemas is to pirasmo, alla soson hemas apo to kako. Amen.  
So many brave and valiant Generals did Greece formerly breed, that Strangers usually resorted thither to 
Government  learn the Art of War; and such were the Military Achievements of this People, both at home and abroad, and so far did the force of their Arms extend, that under their Great Alexander was erected the third Potent Monarchy of the World. But alas! such hath been the sad Catastrophe of Affairs in this Country, and so low and lamentable is its Condition at present, that nothing of its former Glory and Grandeur is now to be seen. For its poor and miserable Natives, are now strangely cowed and dispirited; its (once) numerous and flourishing Cities, are now depopulated and mere heaps of Ruins; its large and fertile Provinces are now laid waste, and lie uncultivated. And lately, the whole, and still a great Part of the Country, doth now groan under the heavy Burden of the Turkish Yoke; and its various Divisions are ruled by their respective Sangiacs in Subordination to the Grand Signier.  
See the last Paragraph of this Section. 
Arms.   
The established Religion in this Country, is that of Mahometanism; but Christianity (for its number of Professors) 
Religion.  doth far more prevail. The chief Tenets of the Mahometan Religion may be seen §. 4. of this Section (to which I remit the Reader) As for Christianity, 'tis professed in this Country, according to the Doctrine of the Greek Church, the Principal Points of which, as it differs from the Western Christian Churches (whether Protestant or Roman) are these following, viz (1.) The Greeks deny the Procession of the Holy Ghost from the Son, asserting that it proceedeth only from the Father through the Son. (2.) They also deny the Doctrine of Purgatory, yet usually pray for the Dead. (3.) They believe that the Souls of the Faithful departed this Life, are not admitted unto the Beatific Vision till after the Resurrection. (4.) They celebrate the Blessed Sacrament of the Eucharist in both Kind's, but make the Communicant take three Morsels of leavened Bread, and three Sips of Wine, in Honour of the Three Persons of the Adorable Trinity. (5.) They admit Children to participate of the Sacrament of the Lord's Supper, when only seven Years of Age, because than it is (say they) that they begin to Sin. (6.) They allow not of Extreme Unction and Confirmation, and disapprove of fourth Marriages. (7) They admit none into Holy Orders but such as are married, and inhibit all second Marriages, being once in Orders. (8.) They reject all Carved Images, but admit of Pictures, wherewith they adorn their Churches. Lastly, They observe four Lents in the Year, and esteem it unlawful to Fast upon Saturdays. In their Public Worship they use four Liturgies, viz. That commonly called, St. James', St. Chrysostom's, St. Basil's, and St. Gregory the Great's, together with Lessons out of the Lives of their Saints, which makes their Service to be of such a tedious and indiscreet length, that it commonly lasts five or six Hours together. The Fasts and Festivals that are yearly observed in the Greek Church are very numerous; and were it not for them, 'tis probable that Christianity had been quite extirpated out of this Country ere now: For by means of these Solemnities (which yet are celebrated with a multitude of Ridiculous and Superstitious Ceremonies) they still preserve a Face of Religion under a Patriarch, [who resides at Constantinople] and several Archbishops and Bishops, particularly those abovementioned. But did we view those ecclesiastics in their Intellectuals, as also the lamentable State of all Persons committed to their Charge, we should find both Priest and People labouring under such gross and woeful Ignorance, that we could not refrain from wishing, that the Western Churches of Christendom [by their Divisions, Impieties, and Abuse of Knowledge] may not provoke the Almighty at last to plague them likeways with the same Darkness and Desolation. This Country was watered with the Blessed Gospel in the very Infancy of Christianity, and that by the powerful Preaching of St. Paul, the Apostle of the Gentiles.   

§. 3. Little Tartary.  
THIS Country (anciently Taurica Chersonesus, or Tartary Procopensis, being the Lesser Scythia, and 
Name.  a Part of old Sarmatia) is termed by the Italians, Tartary Minor; by the Spaniards, Tartary Menor; by the French, La Petite Tartary; by the Germans, Kleine Tartarey; and by the English, Little Tartary; so called to distinguish it from Great Tartary in Asia; as also Crim-Tartary from Crim, the principal City of the Country.  
The Air of this Country is generally granted to be of a very temperate Nature, but yet unhealthful to 
Air.  breath in. The opposite Place of the Globe to Little Tartary, is that part of Terra Australis incognita, between 240 and 250 Degrees of Longitude, with 48 and 52 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 8th North Climate) is very different in different Parts, some 
Soil.  Places abounding with Grain and Fruits, and others pestered with undrainable Marshes, and barren Mountains. The Length of the Days and Nights here, is the same as in the Northern Parts of France.  
The Commodities of this Country are reckoned Slaves, Leather, Chalcal-Skins, and several sorts of Furs, 
Commodities.  which they exchange with the Adjacent Turks for other Commodities they want.  
Some Travellers relate of this wild and barbarous Part of the World, that few, or no, ravenous Beasts 
Rarities.  are found therein: And others tell us, That many of its Fens and Marshes abound mightily with Salt, which is naturally there produced in prodigious Quantities.  
Archbishoprics in this Country. None. 
Archbishoprics.   
Bishoprics in this Country, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Caffa,  
Gothia,    
Universities in this Country. None. 
Universities.   
The Crim-Tartars are generally Men of vigorous and robust Bodies, able to endure all the Hardships of 
Manners.  a Military Life; and many of them (being endued with Courage and Vigour of Mind, conform to their Strength of Body) prove the best of Soldiers. They are reputed to be very just in their Dealings with one another, but far otherways with Strangers. Many of 'em are much addicted to Pillage, and they usually feed upon Horse flesh.  
The Language of the Crim-Tartars is the Scythian, or pure Tartaresque, which hath such a resemblance to the 
Language.  Turkish, as the Spanish to the Italian; these Tartars and Turks understanding one another, as those of Italy and Spain. The Arabic is here learned at School, as in most Parts of Turkey. Paternoster in the Tartaresque, runs thus; Atscha wyzom Chy hokta sen algusch, ludor senug adougkel suom, chauluchong bell sun senung arkchneg aleigier da ukarhtaver visum gundoluch ot make chu musen vougou kai visum jasuchen, den bisdacha hajelberin bisum jasoch namasin, datcha koima visu sumanacha, illa gar●a visenu, gemandam. Amen.  
This Country is governed by its own Prince, commonly termed the Cham of Tartary, who is under the 
Government.  Protection of the Great Turk, whose Sovereignty he acknowledgeth by the usual Ceremony of receiving a Standard. The Grana Signior actually possesseth some Part of this Country, and maintains one Beglierbeg, and two Sangiacks, in the Places of greatest Importance: As also, he detains as Hostage, the apparent Successor of the Cham, who is ordinarily either his Son or Brother. To all which, the Tartars readily yield, upon the Account of an Ancient Compact, whereby the Turkish Empire is said to descend to them, whenever the Heirs Male of the Ottoman Line shall fail.  
The Cham of Tartary bears for his Ensigns Armorial, Or, three Griffins Sable, armed Gules. 
Arms.   
The Crim Tartar's (for the most part) are zealous Professors of the Mahometan Doctrine, except some 
Religion.  who continue still Pagan; and intermixed with them are many Christians, especially Greeks and Armenians, besides a considerable number of Roman Catholics. When this Country was first watered with the Blessed Gospel, is not very certain.   

§. 4. Danubian Provinces.  
THE remaining Part of Turkey here considered under 
Name.  the Title of Danubian Provinces, is so called from the Situation of these Provinces, they being near unto, or upon the Banks of the Danuube. But since each of 'em requires a peculiar Etymology, take the same as followeth: (1) Transilvania (the Ancient Dacia Mediterranea) so called by the Romans, Quasi trans sylvas, it being encompassed with vast mighty Forests. (2) Valachia, (part of Old Dacia) corruptedly so called for Flaccia ' which Title came from one Flaccus, an Ancient General, who made that part of the Country a Roman Colony. (3.) Moldavia, (the Seat of the Ancient Getae) so called from a Little River of the same Name. (4.) Romania, (the chiefest Part of Old Thrace) so called from Roma Nova, viz. Constantinople. (5.) Bulgaria, or rather Wolgaria, (the Old Moesia Inferior) so called from Volga, it being formerly subdued and possessed by a People which came from the Banks of that River. (6.) Servia, (of Old Moesia Superior) why so called, is not very certain. (7.) Bosnia, (Part of the Ancient Pannonia) so called from a River of the same Name. (8.) Sclavonia, (another Part of Pannonia) so called from its Ancient Inhabitants, the Sclavi. (9) Croatia, (heretofore known by the Name of Liburnia) so called from its Inhabitants, the Creates. Lastly, Dalmatia, (much of the Ancient Illyricum) but as for the Etymology of that Name, it's not yet agreed upon among Critics.  
The Air of these various Provinces doth mightily vary according to their Situation and Nature of the Soil. 
Air.  The opposite Place of the Globe to them, is that Part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 220 and 235 Degrees of Longitude, with 42 and 48 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of these various Provinces (they lying in the 7th and 8th North Climate) cannot reasonably be 
Soil.  expected to be the same in all. Croatia is Cold and Mountainous, yet producing all Necessaries for the Life of Man, Servia much more Pleasant and Fertile. Bulgaria Unpleasant and Barren, being full of Deserts, and ill inhabited. Moldavia more Temperate and Fertile, but the greatest Fate of it uncultivated. Romania affords great Quantity of Corn and Fruits, and several of its Mountains produce some Mines of Silver, Led, and Alum. The longest Day in the Northmost Part is about 16 Hours; the shortest in the Southmost is 9 Hours, and the Nights proportionably.  
Most of these Provinces being Inland 〈◊〉 Countries, (except Romania) and therefore little frequented 
Commodities.  by Strangers; the Number of their Commodities can't be very great; save only those ●●ported from Stamboul which are chiefly Grograins, Camblets, 〈◊〉, Carpets, ●uni●eeds, Cottons, Galls, and most other rich Turkish Commodities.  
In one of the Mines of 〈◊〉, viz. that at Rimili Dominurdiz, are found sometimes large Lumps 
Rarities.  of Virgin Gold, fit for the Miat without any purifying. Other Parts of this Country afford such vast Quantities of Stone-Salt, as to supply all the Neighbouring Nations with that useful Mineral. Near to Enguedine, in the same Principality, (the Ancient Annium) are several Monuments of Antiquity, especially the Remains of a large Military Way, or long Cawsway made by one Annius, a Captain of a Roman Cohort. At Spalatro in Dalmatia, are the Ruins of Dioclesian's Palace, in which he took up his Residence when he retired from the Empire. Here is also an entire Temple consecrated to Jupiter, which is of an Octogonal Form, and adorned with several stately Pillars of Porphyry. At Zara in the same Province are many Ruins of Roman Architecture, and several Heathen Altars, still to be seen. But what mostly deserves our regard, are those Monuments of Antiquity, as yet extant, in or near to Constantinople, the chief of which are these following, viz. (1.) The Hippodrome (now called Atmidan, a word of like signification) in which remain some stately Hietoglyphical Pillars, particularly one of Egyptian Granite, fifty Foot long, and yet but one Stone; and another of Brass, only fourteen Foot high, and in form of three Serpents wreathed together up to the Top, where their heads separate, and look three different ways. (2.) South of the Hippodrome, is that Column commonly called the Historical Pillar, curiously carved from Top to Bottom, expressing variety of warlike Actions (3.) West of the Hippodrome, is another Column of Porphyry, brought hither from Rome by Constantine the Great, which having suffered much Damage by Fire, is now called the Burnt Pillar. (4.) Nigh the Mouth of the Black-Sea, is a Pillar of the Corinthian Order, about ten Foot high, with an imperfect Inscription on its Base, vulgarly called Pompy's Pillar, which hath been probably erected for a seamark by Day, as the Lantern at Fanari is by Night. (5.) From the Black-Sea to the City of Constantinople, reacheth that Noble Aqueduct, made by the Emperor Valentinian, (whose Name it retaineth) and repaired by Solyman the Great. To these we may add, that noble Pile of Building, Sancta Sophia, formerly a Christian Temple, but now a Mahometan Mosque; for a particular Description of which, with the other Remarkables above mentioned, see Sandy's, Wheeler, Spon, with other Modern Travellers.  
Here is one Patriarchate, viz. that of Constantinople, as also several Archbishoprics, especially those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Chalcedon,  
Sophia,  
Trasanopoli,  
Antivari,  
Rugusa or Ragusi.    
Chief Bishoprics in these Provinces, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Posega,  
Zagrabe,  
Narenza,  
Belgrade,  
Scardona,  
Cattaro.    
Universities in these Provinces. None. 
Universities.   
These various Provinces are inhabited by various sorts of People, particularly the Sclavonians, who are 
Manners.  generally Men of a robust and strong Constitution, and very fit to be Soldiers. Next, the Croats, who are esteemed to be Persons so Valiant and Faithful, that they are entertained by many Germane Princes as their Guards. Lastly, The Servians and Bulgarians, who are reckoned very Cruel, and universally given to Robbery. But as for the Natural Turks, they are thus Characterised, viz. Men of a swarthy Complexion, robust Bodies, of a good Stature, and proportionably compacted: Men who (though generally addicted to some horrid Vices not to be named among Christians) are yet Persons of great Integrity in their Dealings, strict Observers of their Word; abundantly Civil to Strangers, extraordinary Charitable after their own way, and so zealous Observers of the various Duties enjoined by their Religion (especially that of Prayer) that their frequency in the same may justly reproach the general Practice of Christians now a-days. In their ordinary Salutations they lay their Hands on their Bosoms, and a little incline their Bodies, but accosting a Person of Quality, they how almost to the Ground, and kiss the Him of his Garment. They account it an opprobrious thing to uncover their Heads; and as they walk in the Streets, they prefer the Lefthand before the Right, as being thereby Master of his Scimitar, with whom they walk. Walking up and down they never use, and much wonder at that Custom of Christians. Their chief Recreations are Shooting with the Bow, and throwing of Lances, at both of which they're very dexterous.  
The Sclavonian Language (being of a vast Extent) is used not only in all these Provinces, though with 
Language.  some variation of Dialect but also in a great Part of Europe besides; The purest Dialect of which Tongue is generally esteemed, that peculiar to Dalmatia. As for the Turkish (which is originally Sclavonian, and now the prevailing Language of these Provinces) Paternoster in the same, runs thus; Babamuz hanghe guiglesson: chuduss olssum ssenungh adun; Gelson ssenung memlechetun. Olsum ssenung istegunh nyesse gugthaule gird, cchame gumozi hergunon vere bise bugun, hem bassa bise borslygomozi, nyese bizde baslaruz borsetigleremosi, him yedm● bize ge heneme, de churtule bizy jaramazdan. Amen.  
These various Countries considered under the Title of Danubian Provinces do acknowledge Subjection to 
Government.  several Sovereigns, particularly as followeth; Transilvania is subject to its own Prince or Waywode, formerly Tributary to the Turks, but now under the Protection of the Emperor since the Year 1690. Valachia being subject to its Waywode, (sometimes styled Hospadar, signifying Chief General of the Militia) is Tributary to the Turk. Moldavia is subject to its Waywode, who is under the Protection of the Emperor since Anno 1688. Romania, Bulgaria, and Servia, are wholly under the Turk, and governed by their respective Beglierbegs. Sclavonia and Bosnia do own the Emperor. And lastly, Dalmatia, is partly under the Venetians, and partly under the Turk. To the Government of these Provinces we may subjoin the Republic of Ragusi, whose Inhabitants are so afraid of losing their Rights and Liberty, that every Month they change their Rector or Supreme Magistrate, and every Night the Governor of their Castle, who entereth into his Command blindfolded, and all Military Officers whatsoever are not to keep the same Posts above six Weeks, lest if long continued they should either gradually or tracherously bereave them of their Privileges, or make the Republic itself a Prey, either to the Turks or Venetians, whom they equally dread; however it payeth Tribute to both of 'em at present, as also a certain Acknowledment to the Emperor, his Catholic Magisty, and the Pope, by Virtue of a mutual Compact ratified between them.  
The Grand Signior (as Supreme Sovereign over all the Turkish Dominions, and Absolute Emperor of the 
Arms.  Ottoman Empire) bears Verte, a Crescent Argent, Crested with a Turban, charged with three Black Plumes of Herons Quills, with this Morto, Donec totum impleat Orbem. As for the Ancient Arms of the Eastern Emperors before the rise of the Ottoman Family, They were, Mars, a Cross Sol betwixt four Greek Beta's, of the second: The four Beta's signifying, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Rex Regum, Regnans Regibus.  
The Inhabitants of these different Provinces, are very different in Point of Religion, but reducible to 
Religion.  Three Classes, viz. Christians, Jews, and Mahometans. The Christians, for the greatest part, adhere to the Tenets of the Greek Church, (already mentioned §. 2.) some to the Church of Rome, and others profess the Reformed Religion, both according to the Doctrine of Luther and Calvin. The Jews (as in all other Countries) are Zealous Maintainers of the Mosaic Law; and the Mahometans stick close to their Alcoran; by which they are taught the acknowledgement of One God, and that Mahomet is his Great Prophet. It also commandeth Children to be Obedient to their Parents, and approveth of Love to our Neighbour. It enjoins Abstinence from Swine's Flesh and Blood, and such Animals as die of themselves. It promiseth to Mussulmen (or True Believers) all manner of sensual Pleasures in a Future State. It allows of an unavoidable Fatality in every Thing, and favours the Opinion of Tutelary Angels. But to be more particular, The Followers of Mahomet do readily grant, That the Writings both of the Prophets and Apostles were divinely Inspired, but allege that they're so corrupted by Jews and Christians, that they can't be admitted for the Rule of Faith. They further believe and assert, That of all Revealed Institutions in the World, those in the Alcoran are only Divine and Perfect. That God is both Essentially and Personally One; and that the Son of God was a mere Creature, yet without Sin, and miraculously Born of a Virgin. That Jesus Christ was a Great Prophet, and that having ended his Prophetical Office upon Earth, he acquainted his Followers of the coming of Mahomet. That Christ ascended into Heaven without suffering Death, another being substituted in his place to Die. That Man is not justified by Faith in Christ, but by Works enjoined in the Mosaic Law and the Alcoran. That Polygamy (according to the Example of the Ancient Patriarches) is still to be allowed of; as also to Divorce the Wife upon any occasion. In short, Mahometanism is a Medley of Paganism, Judaisme, and Christianity; by which means, the Grand Imposture (its Founder) did cunningly imagine to gain Proselytes of all Professions. But whereas the Alcoran is the Turkish Rule of Faith and Manners, let us more particularly consider its Precepts, and that chiefly as they relate to the Principal Heads thereof, viz. Circumcision, Fasting, Prayer, Alms, Pilgrimage, and Abstinence from Wine. (1.) Circumcision, Of the various Sacraments in the Old and New Testament, they admit only of Circumcision. This they reckon absolutely necessary to every Mussulman, esteeming it impossible to obtain Salvation without it; whereupon they are very careful to perform the same, and do celebrate the performance thereof with great Solemnity. (2.) Fasting, particularly that extraordinary Fast, or yearly Lent, called Ramadan, observed every ninth Month, and of a whole Month's continuance; during which time, they neither Eat nor Drink till the Sun goes down; they also abstain from all worldly Business, and from smoking their beloved Tobacco, yea, even from Innocent Recreations; and living reserved austere Lives, do spend most of the time in their Mosques, frequenting them both Day and Night. They believe that during this Month, the Gates of Heaven stand open, and that those of Hell are shut. (3.) Prayer, This Duty is of mighty request among them, their Prophet having termed the same the Key of Paradise, and the very Pillar of Religion; whereupon they are frequent and servant at their Devotions. They're obliged to pray five times every Day, and never fail of that number, let their worldly Business be never so urgent. (4) Alms, Every Turk is bound to contribute the hundredth Part of his Wealth towards the Zagat or Alms, for maintenance of the Poor. Besides which, they frequently make large voluntary Contributions; yea, their Charity doth not only extend itself towards their Fellow-Rational Creatures, but even the Irrational, as Dogs, Horses, Camels, etc. whom they carefully maintain in kind of Public Hospitals, when through Age they become useless to their Masters. (5.) Pilgrimage, viz. That to Mecca, which every Mussulman is bound to perform once in his Life-time, or, at least, to send Deputies for him. Thither they resort in vast Multitudes, being commonly 40 or 50000 in Number, over whom the Sultan appoints a Commander in Chief to redress Disorders that may happen on the Road. This Officer is followed by a Camel carrying the Alcoran covered with Cloth of Gold, which sanctified Animal upon its return, is adorned with Garlands of Flowers, and exempt from any farther Labour during the remaining part of its Life. The Turks do likeways visit the City of Jerusalem, but that more out of Curiosity than Devotion: They have also a great Veneration for the Valley of Jehosaphat, believing it shall be the particular Place of the General Judgement. Lastly, Abstinence from Wine is likewise a Precept of the Alcoran. But of this they are less observant than of any of the former, for many of the richest sort of Turks are great Admirers of the Juice of the Grape, and will liberally taste of the same in their private Cabals. These various Provinces were at first instructed in the Christian Faith at different Times, and upon different Occasions.    

SECT. IX. Concerning the European Islands.  
HAving hitherto Travelled through the various Countries on the Continent of Europe; let us now leave the Continent, and set Sail for its Islands. And whereas the Chief of such Islands, are those termed the Britannic; let us first take a Particular Survey of them, and then a more General View of all the rest. Therefore,  

I. Of the Britannic Islands.  
THESE Islands being always considered as divided into Greater [viz. those of Great Britain and Ireland] and Lesser (namely those many little ones surrounding Britain) I shall begin with the former comprehending in them. Three distinct Kingdoms, and One Principality. And since our manner of Travelling through the various Countries on the Continent of Europe, hath been still to proceed from North to South, I shall therefore continue the afore said Method in Surveying the Isle of Great Britain, having no other Regard to the Two Grand Sovereignties therein, than the bare Situation of them: Begin we therefore with the Northern Part of the Island, viz.  


SCOTIAE Nova Descriptiorer. Robert Morden▪    

SCOTLAND.  
 d. m. Situated between 10 00 of Long. its greatest Length from N. to S. is about 240 Miles. 17 30 between 55 00 of Latit. Breadth from E to W. is about 180 Miles. 59 00 Being divided into two Classes, viz. South, the Frith C T. Edinburgh. North, the Frith Aberdeen. South Class comprehends Gatloway— Chief Town Kirkudbright— W. to E. Nithisdale.— Dumfreis— Anandale— Annand— Eshdale with Eusdale— — Lidisdale— Hermitage— Tiviotdale— Jedburgh— The Mers— Duns— E. to W. Lawderdale— Lauder— Tweedale— Peeblis— Clydisdale— Glascow.— Kyle— Air— Garrick— Bargenny— Lothian— Edinburgh— E. to W. Sterling— Idem— Renfrew— Idem— Cunningham— Irvin— Isles of Boot— Rothesay— Arren.— — Peninsula of Cantyre— Kilkeran— North Class comprehends Fife.— St. Andrews— E. to W. Menteith— Dumblain— Lennox— 〈◊〉— Argile— Innerara— Perth— Idem— E. to W. Strath●●●— 〈◊〉— 〈◊〉— — Lorn— 〈◊〉.— Merns— Bervey— E. to W. Angus— Dundee— Gaury— — Athol— Blair— Marr— Aberdeen— E. to W. Badenech— Riven— I●chabar— Innerlochy— Buchan— Peterhead— E. to W. 〈◊〉— Idem— 〈◊〉— Elgin— 〈◊〉— Taine— S. to N. S●th●rland— D●rnock— Strathnaver— Strathy— Catchness— Wick lying N. E. of Strathnaver.  
These are the various Divisions of Scotland, according to the best Maps, and the manner how they are found. But since that Kingdom is ordinarily divided into Sheriffdoms. Stewarties, Balliaries, and one Constabulary, we shall also consider it in that respect; and seeing each of those Sheriffdoms and Stewarties, etc. comprehend either a part, or one, or more of the aforesaid Divisions, we shall here subjoin all the Sheriffdoms and Stewarties, etc. of the whole Kingdom, and annex to each of them their whole Content, whether more or less. Therefore,  
Sheriffdoms of Scotland, are those of Edinburgh— Containing Middle Lothian. Barwick— The Mers and Bailliary of Lauderdale. Peeblis— Tw●edale. Shelkirk— The Forest of Etterick. Wig●on— The N. and W. Parts of Galloway. Renfrew— The Barony of Renfrew. Lanerick— Clidisdale. Dumbritton— Lenox. Bute— Isles of Bute. Arren. Striveling— Striveling, on both sides the River Forth. Linlithgow— West Lothian. Glackmannan— A little of the E. parts of Strivelingshire Kinross— A little of the W. parts of Fife. Couper— The rest of Fife. Forfar— Anguis, with its Pertinents. Kinkardin— Mernis. Elgin— The Eastern parts of Murray. Nairn— The Western parts Weik— Caithness. Orkney— Isles of Orkney. Schetland.  
Sheriffdoms of Scotland, are those of Aberdcen containing Marr with its Pertinents. Buchan comprehending Forumart●n. Strathbogie. Perth containing Perth— as also Gleushee. Athol— Strathandel. Gawry— Ramach. Broad-Albin Balhider. Menteith— Glenurghay. Strathyern Strormont. Innerara containing Argile. Lorn. Kantire. Isles W. of Lorn. Kantire. Bamfe containing Bamfe. Strathdovern. Beyn. Enzy. Strathawin. Balveny. Inverness containing Bad●noch. Lochabyr. The South Part of Ross. A Part of Murray beyond Nairn, Westw. Ta'en containing Southerland. Strathnaver. Roxburgh containing Tiviotdale. Lidisdale. Eshdale with Eus●ale. Aire containing Kyle. Carrick. Cunningham. Dumfreis' containing all Nithisdale. Cromarty a little of Ross, S. of Cormarty.  
Besides these Sheriffdoms, there are 

Stewarties.  
Bayliaries.  
one Constabulary.    
Stewarties are Strathern — contain. Strathern. Menteith — Menteith. Annandale — Annandale. Kirkudbright. — E. and S. parts of Galloway. As also S Andrews in Fife. Killemure Anguis. Abernethy Perth. Bayliaries are Kyle— contain. Kyle. Carrick— Carrick. Cunningham— Cunningham. Lauderdale— Lauderdale.  
The One Constabulaty is that of Haddington, containing East-Lothian.  
THIS Country (the famous Ancient Caledonia) is termed by the Italians, Scotia; by the Spaniards, 
Name.  Escocia; by the French, Escosse; by the Germans, Schotland; by the English and its own Natives, Scotland; so called, as some fond imagine, from Scota, (Daughter to an Egyptian Pharaoh) but more probably from Scoti, Schytti, or Scythi, a People of Germany, (over the Northern Parts of which the Name of Scythia did once prevail) who seized on a Part of Spain, next on Ireland, and from thence came into the Western Parts of this Country.  
The Air of this Country is generally very pure, and so extraordinary wholesome to breath in, that several 
Air.  Persons in the Northmost Parts of that Kingdom do frequently arrive to greater Ages, than is usual in other Nations of Europe. The opposite Place of the Globe to Scotland, is that Part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 190 and 196 Degrees of Longitude, with 56 and 60 Degrees of South Latitude.  
Notwithstanding this Country is of a Situation considerably Northern, (it lying in the 11th, 12th, and 
Soil.  beginning of the 13th North Climate) yet it produceth all Necessaries, and many of the Comforts of Humane Life. Its Seas are wonderfully stored with most kinds of excellent Fish; Its Rivers do mightily abound with the choicest of Salmon; Its Plains do sufficiently produce most kinds of Grain, Herbs, and Fruits; and many of its Mountains are not only lined with valuable Mines, and the best of Coals, but also several of them are so covered over with numerous Flocks, that great Droves of Cattle do yearly pass into the North of England. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country is about 18 Hours ½, the shortest in the Southmost 6 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The Chief Commodities of this Country, are most sorts of Fish in great abundance, much Linen-cloth 
Commodities.  and Tallow, vast numbers of Cattle and Hides; as also excellent Honey, Lead-Oar, Iron, train-oil, Course clothes, Frizes, etc.  
In Clydsdale are yet to be seen, for several Miles, the Remains of a large Roman Cawsway, or Military-way, 
Rarities.  which commonly goes now by the Name of Watling-street. And in Teviotdale, are some Vestigia of Roman Encampments, and another Military-way, vulgarly termed the Rugged Cawsway. (2.) In the Stewarty of Strathern, are visible Tracts of several Roman Camps, especially that at Ardoch. (3) In Sterlingshire are divers Marks of the famous Roman Wall, (now commonly called Graham's Dyke) which was extended over the Isthmus, between the Rivers of Forth and Clyde: Its Form and Manner of Building will best appear by a Draught thereof; for which, Vid. Camden's Britainnia late Edition, page 959. (4.) In Sterlingshire, were likeways found some Inscriptions upon Stones relating to the Roman Wall; particularly Two; one whereof is now at Calder, and informs us that the Legio secunda Augusta, built the said Wall upwards of three Miles; and another in the E. Marshal's House at Dunnotyr, which hints that a Party of the Legio vicesima victrix, continued it for three Miles more. As for the Inscriptions themselves, Vid. Cambd. page 920, and 1101. (5.) Hard by the Tract of the aforesaid Wall in Sterlingshire, are yet to be seen two pretty Mounts, termed by the Ancients, Duni pacis; as also the Remains of an Ancient Building in form of a Pyramid (now called by the Vulgar Arthur's Oven) which many reckon to have been a Temple of the God Terminus. (6.) Near Pasley and Renfrew, are the Vestigia of a large Roman Camp; the Fosses and Dykes about the Praetorium, being still visible. Here is also to be seen a remarkable Spring which regularly Ebbs and Flows with the Sea. (7.) Nigh to the City of Edinburgh, is a noted Spring, commonly called the Oily-Well, the Surface of its Waters being covered with a kind of Oil or Bitumen, which is frequently used, with good Success, in curing Scabs and Pains proceeding from Cold. (8.) Near the same City is another Fountain, which goes by the Name of the Routing-Well, because it usually makes a Noise before a Storm. (9) Near Brechin in Aagus, (where the Danes received a mighty overthrow) is a high Stone erected over their General's Grave, called Camus-Cross; with another about ten Miles distance, both of 'em having antique Letters and Figures upon them. (10.) At Slains in Aberdeenshire, is a remarkable petrifying Cave, commonly called the Dropping Cave, where Water ouzing through a spongy porous Rock on the Top, doth quickly consolidate after it falls in drops to the bottom. (11.) Near Kilross in Murray, is to be seen an Obelisk of one Stone, set up as a Monument of a Fight between King Malcolm, Son of Keneth, and Sueno the Dane. (12.) On the Lord Lovet's Lands in Straherrich, is a Lake which never freezeth all over before the Month of February; but after that time, one Night's Frost will do it. There's also another, called Lough-Monar, (belonging to the late Sir George Mackenzy) just of the same Nature with the former; and a third at Glencanigh in Strathglash, which never wants Ice upon the middle Part of it, even in the hottest Day of Summer. (13.) Towards the Northwest Part of Murray, is the famous Lough-Ness which never freezeth; but retaineth its natural Heat, even in the extremest Cold of Winter. (14.) In Lennox is Lough Lomond, which is every whit as famous among the Vulgar, not only for its Floating-Island, but also as having Fish without Fins, and being frequenly Tempestuous in a Calm. (15.) In divers Parts of Scotland are some noted Mineral Springs, particularly those at Kinghorn and Balgrigy in Fife: as also Aberdeen and Peterhead in Aberdeenshire; several of which come little short of the famous Spaw-Water in the Bishopric of Liege. Lastly, In most Counties of this Kingdom, are many Circular Stone Monuments, (being a company of prodigious long Stones set on end in the Ground, and that commonly in form of a Circle) which are probably conjectured to have been either Funeral Monuments, or Places of Public Worship in times of the Ancient Druids, or both.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, are Two, viz. those of 
Archbishoprics.  

St. Andrews,  
Glascow.    
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are Twelve, viz. those of 
Bishoprics.  

Edinburgh,  
Murray,  
Ross,  
Galloway,  
Dunkeld,  
Brichen,  
Cathness,  
Argile,  
Aberdeen,  
Dumblain,  
Orkney,  
The Isles.    
Universities of this Kingdom, are Four, viz. those of 
Universities.  

St. Adrews,  
Edinburgh,  
Aberdeen,  
Glascow.    
The Scots (for the most part) are an Active, Prudent, and Religious sort of People. Many abominable 
Manners.  Vices, too common in other Countries, are not so much as speculatively known among them. They generally abhor all kinds of Excess in Drinking, and effeminate Delicacy in Diet, choosing rather to improve the Mind, than pamper the Body. Many of them make as great Advances in all Parts of ingenious and solid Learning, as any Nation in Europe. And as for their singular Fidelity (although slanderously spoken of by some) 'tis abundantly well-known, and experienced abroad; for an undoubted Demonstration thereof, is publicly given to the whole World, in that a Neighbouring Prince, and his Predecessors (for almost three hundred Years) have committed the immediate Care of their Royal Persons to them, without ever having the least Cause to repent, or real Ground to change.  
The Language commonly spoken in the North and North-West of this Country, is a Dialect of the Irish, 
Language.  corruptedly called Erse (a Specimen of which shall be given when we come to Ireland). In all other Parts of the Kingdom they use the English Tongue; but that with considerable difference of Pronounciation in different Counties, and all disagreeing with that in England, except the Town of Inverness, whose Inhabitants are the only People who come nearest to the true English; however the Gentry and Persons of good Education, usually speak English, (though not with the same Accent as in England) yet according to its true Propriety, and their manner of Writing is much the same. The vulgar Language (commonly called Broad Scotch) is indeed a very corrupt sort of English, and hath a great Tincture of several Foreign Tongues, particularly the High Germane, Low Dutch, and French, especially the last, a great many words still in use among the Commonality, being Originally from that Language. For a Specimen of which Tongue, Paternoster in it runs thus: Ure Fader whilk art in Heaven; hallued be thy Neme; thy Kingdoom cumm, thy Will be done inn Earth az it's done inn Heaven. Geé uss this day ure daily Breed, an forgee uss, ure Sins, az we forgee them that Sinn against uss; and lead uss nae intoo temptation, bat delyver uss frae evil. Ameen.  
This Kingdom hath hitherto had the good fortune to enjoy an Hereditary limited Monarchy; though 
Government.  many times the immediate Heir, or next in Blood, hath been set a side, and another more remote hath mounted the Throne. Since its Union with England, both Kingdoms are under one King, who is styled the Monarch of Great Britain. The Government of this Kingdom is chiefly managed by a Council of State, or Privy Council, consisting of those called properly Officers of State, and others of the Nobility and Gentry, whom the King pleaseth to appoint. The Officers of State are eight in number, viz. the Lord High-Chancellor, Lord High-Treasurer, Lord-President of the Council, Lord Secretary of State, Lord Treasurer-Deputy, Lord Register, Lord-Advocate, and Lord Justice Clerk. The Administration of Justice in Civil Affairs is lodged in the Lords of the Session, who are Fifteen in number, whereof One is Precedent, and to those are joined some Noblemen, under the Name of extraordinary Lords of the Session. This Court is esteemed one of the most August and Learned Judicatories in Europe: From it there lies no Appeal but to the Parliament, which is now made up of the Peers, the Commissioners of Counties, and those of Free Burroughs. The King's Person is always represented in Parliament by some Nobleman, who bears the Title of Lord High-Commissioner. The Distribution of Justice in Criminal Matters is committed to the Court of Justice, which is composed of the Lord Justice General, the Lord Justice Clerk, and five or six other Lords of the Session, who in this Bench are called Commissioners of Justiciary. Over and above these two Supreme Courts of Justice, there are a great many Subordinate Judicatories, both for Civil and Criminal Affairs through the Kingdom, as Sheriff Courts, Courts of Regality, and the like.  
The Royal Arms of this Kingdom, together with those of England and Ireland, (as they compose the Ensigns 
Arms.  Armorial of the Monarch of Great Britain) shall be particularly expressed when we come to England.  
The Inhabitants of this Country (excepting a few, who still adhere to the Church of Rome, and an inconsiderable 
Religion.  number of Quakers) are all of the Reformed Religion, yet with considerable Variation among themselves in some private Opinions and various Points of Church Discipline: However the numerous Professors thereof are very sincere in their Principles, and do generally practise conformable to their Professions. No Christian Society in the World doth excel them for their exact Observation of the Sabbath day, and few can equal them for their singular Strictness and Impartiality in punishing Scandals: But lamentable are their Distractions of late in Matters relating to Ecclesiastical Polity, and how fatal such Heats and Divisions, both in this and the Neighbouring Kingdom may prove at last, is alas! but too well known to all thinking Persons among us. The smallest Privateer belonging either to Breast or S. Malo's may easily Attack, Board, and Sink the Royal Britannia herself, if she chance only to Spring a Leak under Water, when her whole Crew are at Blows between Decks. The Christian Faith (according to the best Accounts) was planted in this Country, during the Reign of Dioclesian; for by reason of that violent Persecution he raised in the Church, many Christians are said to have fled from the Continent into the Isle of Great Britain, and particularly (as an Ancient Author expressly testifieth) into that Part thereof, In quam Romana Arma nunquam penetrârunt; which (without all doubt) is Scotland; especially the Northern Parts of that Country, they being still possessed by the Scots, and never subject to the Roman Power. St Rule, or Regulus, is said to have brought over with him the Arm, or (as some affirm) the Ligones of St. Andrew the Apostle, and to have buried it in that place where now the City of St. Andrews stands. These first Propagators of Christianity seem to have been a kind of Monks, who afterwards, by the beneficence of the first Christian Kings of Scotland, came into the Seats and Possessions of the Pagan Druids, (a sort of Religious Votaries to the Heathen Gods) and had their principal Residence, or rather Monasteries, in the Islands of Man and Jona, and passed under the Name of Culdees.   


ENGLAND but Robt. Morden.    

ENGLAND.  
 d. m. Situated between 12 00 of Long. its greatest Length from N. to S. is about 320 Miles. 20 00 between 50 00 of Latit. Breadth from E. to W. is about 290 Miles. 55 50 Being divided into Six Circuits, viz. Western Circuit Chief Town Salisbury. Oxford Circuit Oxford. Home Circuit Canterbury. Northfolk Circuit Norwich. Midland Circuit Lincoln. North Circuit York. Western-Circuit contains Cornwall— Chief Town Launceston— W. to E. Devonshire— Exeter— Dorsetshire— Dorchester— Hampshire— Winchester— Somm●rsetshire Bristol— N. of Dorsetshire. Wiltshire— Salisbury— Oxford. Circuit contains Berkshire— Redding N. of Hampshire. Oxfordshire— Oxford— E. to W. Glocestershire— Gloucester— Monmouthshire Monmouth— Herefordshire— Hereford— S. to N. E. Worcestershire— Worcester— Staffordshire— Stafford— Shropshire— Shrewsbury W. of Staffordshire. Home-Circuit contains Essex— Colchester— E. to W. Hartfordshire— Hartford— Kent— Canterbury— E. to W. Surry— Southwark— Sussex— Chichester South of Surry. 〈◊〉. Norfolk-Circuit contains Norfolk— Norwich— E. to S. W. Suffolk— Ipswich— Cambridgeshire— Cambridge— Huntingtonshire Huntingdon— Bedfordshire— Bedford— Buckinghamshire Buckingham—  
Midland Circuit contains Lincolnshire— Chief Town Lincoln— E. to W. Nottinghamshire Nottingham— Derbyshire— Derby— Rutlandshire— Okeham— E. to W. Leicestershire— Leicester— Warwickshire— Warwick— Northamptonshire Northampton S. of Leicestershire. Warwickshire. North. Circuit contains Yorkshire— York— S. to N. Durham— Idem— Northumberland. Newcastle— Lancashire— Lancaster— S. to N. Westmoreland— Appleby— Cumberland— Carlisle—  
To England we here subjoin the Principality of Wales, divided into Four Circuits; each Circuit comprehending Three Counties, vix.  
1. Those of Denbighshire— Chief Town Denbigh N. to S. Flintshire— St. Asaph Montgomeryshire Montgomery— 2. Those of Anglesey— Beaumaris— N. to S. E. Carnarvenshire Carnarven— M●rionethshire Harlech— 3. Those of Cardiganshire Cardigan— N. to S. Carmarthènshire Carmarthen Pembrokeshire Pembroke— 4. Those of Radnorshire— Radnor— N. to S. W. Brecknokshire— Brecknock— Glamorganshire Cardiff—  
Besides the Six Circuits of England, (containing Thirty eight Counties) and these Four of Wales, comprehending Twelve; there remain as yet two Counties unmentioned, and which are not ordinarily reduced to any of these Circuits, viz. Middlesex and Cheshire; the first because of its Vicinity to London, and the other as being a County-Palatine, having its own Judges and Counsellors peculiar to itself. These Two Counties, with the Thirty eight abovementioned in England, and Twelve in Wales, make Fifty two in all. But since England and Wales are Two distinct Sovereignties [one being a Kingdom, and the other a Principality] we shall separately Treat of them both. Therefore,   

ENGLAND.  
THIS Country (the Ancient Anglia, which with the rest of the Island, made up the Renowned 
Name.  Britannia or Albion) is termed by the Italians, Inghilterra; by the Spaniards, Inglatierra; by the French, Angleterre; by the Germans, Engel-land; and by the Natives, England; which Name is derived from the Angles, a People of Lower Saxony, who Conquered the greatest Part of this Country, and divided the same into Seven different Kingdoms: But Egbert (descended from the Angles) having united this divided Nation, and being the first Monarch of England after the Saxon Heptarchy, ordered (by special Edict, above 800 Years after the Incarnation) that the whole Kingdom should be termed Engle-lond, which Title in process of time, hath turned into the present Name of England.  
The Air of this Country is far more Mild, Sweet, and Temperate, than in any Part of the Continent under 
Air.  the same Parallel. The Cold during the Winter is not so piercing; nor the Heat in the Summer so scorching, as to recommend (much less to enforce) the use of Stoves in the one, or Grottoes in the other. The opposite Place of the Globe to England, is that part of the Pacifick Ocean, between 200 and 210 Degrees of Longitude, with 50 and 56 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country (lying in the 9th, 10th, and 11th North Climate) is generally so Fertile, and produceth 
Soil.  such plenty of Grain, Fruits, Roots, Herbs, etc. that the excellency of its Soil, is best declared by those Transcendent Eulogies deservedly bestowed on her, both by Ancient and Modern Writers, who call England the Granary of the Western World, the Seat of Ceres, etc. that her Valleys are like Eden, her Hills like Lebanon, her Springs as Pisgah, and her Rivers as Jordan; that she's a Paradise of Pleasure, and the Garden of God. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts is about 17 Hours ½, the shortest in the Southmost is almost 8 Hours; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Corn, Cattle, Tyn, Copper, Led, Iron, Timber, Coals, 
Commodities.  abundance of Wool, Cloth, Stufts, Linen, Hides, Tallow, Butter, Cheese, Beer, etc.  
In most Counties of this Kingdom are still extant, some noted Circular Stone Monuments, (like those in 
Rarities.  Scotland abovementioned, page 193) particularly, The Seventy seven Stones at Saleeds in Cumberland, commonly termed Long Meg, and her Daughters; Those called Rolle-rich Stones in Oxfordshire; Those near Enisham in Northumberland; Those upon the River Loder in Westmoreland; Those near Burrowbridge in Yorkshire; Those near Exmore in Devonshire; and finally the Hurlers, and those at Biscaw-woun in Cornwall, etc. But most observable of all, is Stonehenge (the Chorea Gigantum of the Ancients) on Salisbury-Plain. Which Monuments are thought by some to consist of Natural Stones; by others, of Stones artificially compounded of pure Sand, Lime, Vitriol, and other unctuous Matter. But if the Reader desires to see the various Conjectures of the Curious, concerning the Nature and Design of all such Monuments, together with the Draught of stonehenge in particular, let him consult the late Edition of Camden's Britannia, page 23, 95, 108, 269. (2.) In many Parts of England are yet to be seen the Vestigia, and Remains of divers Roman Military Ways; the principal of which is that mentioned in Leland's M. S. beginning at Dover, and passing through Kent to London, from thence to St. Alban, Dunstable, Stratford, Toucester, Littlebourn, St. Gilberts Hill near Shrewsbury, then by Stratton, and so through the middle of Wales to Cardigan. (3.) In this Country are abundance of Medicinal Waters; whether for Bathing, as those especially in Somersetshire, (called the Baths, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉) or Purging; particularly those of the Spaws in Yorkshire; Tunbridge in Kent; Ebisham and Dulledge in Surry; North-hall, Acton, and Islington in Middlesex. Here also are many other very remarkable Springs; whereof some are mightily impregnorated either with Salt, as that at Durtwich in Worcestershire; or Sulphur, as the famous Well at Wiggin in Lancashire, (of which afterwards) or Bituminous Matter, as that at Pitchford in Shropshire. Others have a Petrifying Quality, as particularly that near Lutterworth in Leicestershire; and the remarkable Droping-Well in the West-Riding of Yorkshire. And finally some Ebb and Flow, but that generally in a very irregular manner, as those of Peak-Forrest in Derbyshire, and Lay-Well near Torbuy, whose Waters rise and fall several times in one Hour. To these we may add that remarkable Fountain near Richard's Castle in Herefordshire, commonly called Bone-Well, which is always full of small Fish-bones, (or such resemblances) though frequently emptied and cleared of them. (4) Many are the Roman Altars, which from time to time are dug up in this Kingdom, especially the Northern Parts thereof. As for their particular Shapes, and remarkable Inscriptions, with the places where now to be seen, Vid. Cambden, (late Edition) page 568, 570, 734, 782, 783, 826, 836, 844. and from 848 to 852. inclusively. (5.) In several places between Carlisle and Newcastle, are some Remains of the famous Picts Wall, (so much talked off by our English Historians) which did run through Cumberland and Northumberland, beginning at Tinmouth Bar, and ending at Solway-Frith, (6) In Cambridgeshire are Tracts of those large Ditches thrown up by the East-Angles, to prevent the Incursions of the Mercians, who frequently ruin'd all before them. And nigh to the Town of Cambridge, are some Vestigia of two spacious Camps; one Roman at Arborough, (a mile North of Cambridge) and the other at Gogmagog-Hills, on the other side of the Town. (7.) Near Wiggin in Lancashire, is the remarkable Well abovementioned, which being emptied, there presently breaks out a sulphurous Vapour, which makes the Water bubble up as if it boiled; and a Candle being put thereto, it instantly takes Fire and burns like Brandy. During a Calm, the Flame will continue a whole Day, and by its Heat they can boil Eggs, Meat, etc. and yet the Water itself is cold. (8.) In Whin●ield Park in Westmoreland, is the Three-Brother-Tree, (so called because there were Three of 'em, the least whereof is this) which a good way from the Root is thirteen Yards and a half in Circumference. (9) At Brosely, Bently, and Pitchford, with other Places adjacent in Shropshire, is found over most of the Coal-pits, a Stratum of blackish porous Stone, much impregnorated with bituminous Matter; which Stone being pulverised and boiled in Water, the bituminous Substance riseth to the top, and being gathered off, it comes to the Consistency of Pitch, and is used for such with good Effect. (10.) In Derbyshire is the famous Peak, and some hideous Cavities, as those called Pool's - Hole, Elden Hole, and another, which goes by the indecent Name of the Devil's Arse. In the first of these is dropping Water of a petrifying Nature; and at a small distance from it, a little clear Brook remarkable for consisting both of hot and cold Water, so joined in the same Stream, that a Man may at once put the Finger and Thumb of the same Hand, one into hot, and the other into cold. (11.) Near Whitby in the North-Riding of Yorkshire, are found certain Stones resembling the Folds and Wreaths of a Serpent. And at Huntly-Nabb in the same Riding, are other Stones of several sizes, and so exactly round, as if artificially made for Cannon Balls, which being broken, do commonly contain divers stony Serpents wreathed up in Circles, but generally without Heads. (12) Near Alderly in Glocestcrshire, and on the tops of Mountains not far from Richmond, with several other parts of England, are Stones resembling Cokles, Oysters, and divers other Water Animals; which if once living Creatures, or the ludicrous Fancy of Nature, is not now my business to inquire. (13.) In Mendippe-hills in Somersetshire, is a prodigious Cave, called Ochy-Hole, which being of a considerable length, in it are discovered some Wells and Rivulets. (14.) At Glassenbury in Somersetshire, are several ancient Pyramids, mentioned by William of Malmsbury, with imperfect Inscriptions; but why, when, and by whom erected, is merely conjectural. (15.) In the Cathedral of Exeter is an Organ, which is reckoned the largest of any in England, the greatest Pipe belonging to it being fifteen Inches Diameter, which is more by two, than the celebrated Organ of Ulm. (16.) In Dover-Castle is an old Table hung up, which imports that Julius Caesar landed upon that Part of the English Coast. Lastly, In the County of Surry is the English Anas, or the River Mole, which loseth itself under Ground, and ariseth again at some considerable distance; as doth also Recall in the North-Riding of Yorkshire. Cambden, page 155 and 754. To these Rarities abovementioned, I might here add some Stupendious Fabrics in this Kingdom, which may be fitly termed Art's Masterpieces: But to descend to particulars, would swell this Paragraph to a disproportionable bigness.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, are Two, viz. those of 
Archbishoprics.   
Canterbury and York.  
The Archbishop of Canterbury hath the Precedency of York, and is styled Primate of all England, the other being also Primate of England, but not of all England. A Controversy hotly debated between these two Archiepiscopal Sees, but at last determined in favour of the former.  
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, (including Wales) are those of 
Bishoprics.  

London,  
Chichester,  
Carlisle,  
Durham,  
Salisbury,  
Exeter,  
Winchester,  
Worcester,  
Chester,  
Bath and Wells,  
Lincoln,  
Bristol,  
Oxford,  
St. Asaph,  
Norwich,  
Bangor,  
St. david's,  
Gloucester,  
Rochester,  
Peterborough,  
Hereford,  
Eli,  
Landaff,  
Litchfield and Coventry.    
In point of Place, after the two Archbishops, followeth the Bishop of London; next to him, the Bishop of Durham; 3dly, the Bishop of Winchester, and then all the rest according to the Seniority of their Consecration.  
Universities of this Kingdom, are those famous Seats of the Muses, or two Eyes of England, termed Oxford 
Universities.  and Cambridge; which for magnificent Buildings, rich Endowments ample Privileges, as also number of Students, Libraries, and learned Men are inferior to none, or rather not to be paralleled by any in the World. The Names of the respective Colleges and Halls in each of these Universities, (the most of which do surpass many of our Foreign Universities) are as followeth, 

In Oxford are  
In Cambridge are  
University,  
Magdalen,  
Peterhouse,  
Balliol,  
Brazen-Nose,  
Clare-Hall,  
Merton,  
Corpus Christi,  
Bennet, or Corpus Christi,  
Oriel,  
Christ-Church,  
Pembroke-Hall,  
Exeter,  
Trinity,  
Trinity-Hall,  
Queen's,  
St. John's,  
Gonvil and Caius,  
New-College,  
Jesus,  
King's College,  
Lincoln,  
Wadham,  
Queen's College,  
All-Souls,  
Pembroke.  
Catherine-Hall,  
Jesus-College,  
Halls are Seven, viz.  
Christ-College,  
St. John's College,  
Gloucester,  
Alban,  
Magdalen-College,  
St. Edmund,  
St. Marry,  
Trinity-College.  
Magdalen,  
New-Inn.  
Emanuel-College,  
Hart,  
Sidney-Sussex.    
The English being originally a mixture of divers Northern and Southern Nations, do still retain in their 
Manners.  Humour, a just Mean, betwixt those two Extremes; for the dull Saturnine Genius of the one, and the hot Mercurial Temper of the other, meeting in their Constitutions, render them Ingenious and Active, yet Solid and Persovering; which nourished under a suitable Liberty, inspires a Courage both generous and lasting. This happy temperament of Spirit, wherewith this People is endued, doth eminently appear to the World, by that mighty Inclination they always had and still have, both to Arms and Arts, and that wonderful Progress they have hitherto made in each of them: For the matchless Valour and Bravery, the singular Prudence and Conduct of the English Nation both by Sea and Land, is so universally known, and hath been so frequently manifested in most Parts of the World, that many Potent States and Kingdoms have felt the Dint of their Sword, and been constrained to yield to the Force of their Arms. They have also so effectually applied themselves to all sorts of Ingenious Literature since the happy Days of our Reformation, and are advanced to such a Pitch of True and Solid Learning; that they may justly claim a true Title to the Empire of Human Knowledge. Finally, their manner of Writing (whether for Solidity of Matter, Force of Argument, or Elegancy of Style) is indeed so transcendently Excellent, that no Nation hath yet surpassed the English, and none can justly pretend to equal them.  
The English Language being a mixture of the old Saxon and Norman, (one a Dialect of the Teutonic, and 
Language.  the other of the French) having also some Tincture of the Ancient British, Roman, and Danish Tongues, is much refined of late and now deservedly reckoned as Copious, Expressive, and Manly a Tongue as any in Europe. Harangues in this Language are capable of all the delightful Flowers of Rhetoric, and lively Strains of the truest Eloquence, nothing inferior to the most fluent Orations pronounced of old by the best of the Roman Orators: In a word, 'tis a Language that's rightly calculated for the Masculine Genius of those who own it. Paternoster in the English Tongue, runs thus: Our Father, which art in Heaven, etc.  
The Kingdom of England is a famous Ancient and Hereditary Monarchy; a Monarchy which can seldom 
Government.  admit of any Inter-regnum, and therefore is free from many Misfortunes, to which Elective Kingdoms are subject; yea, such a Monarchy (in the Words of that Worthy Gentlemen, Dr. Chamberlain, Author of the Present State of England) as that by the necessary subordinate Concurrence of the Lords and Commons in making and repealing of Statutes or Acts of Parliament, it hath the main Advantages of an Aristocracy and Democracy, and yet free from the Disadvantages and Evils of either. In short, 'tis a Monarchy (continues the aforesaid Author) as by most admirable Temperament, affords very much to the Industry, Liberty, and Happiness of the Subject, and reserves enough for the Majesty and Prerogative of any King, who will own his People as Subjects, not as Slaves. Chief Persons of this Realm, after the King and Princes of the Blood, are the Great Officers of the Crown, who are commonly reckoned Nine in number, viz. (1.) Lord High-Steward of England, an Officer indeed so great, or whose Power was esteemed so exorbitant, that it hath been discontinued ever since the Days of John of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster, (his Son Henry of Bullingbrook, being the last who had a State of Inheritance in that High Office) and is now conferted by the King upon some of the Chief Peers only, pro illa vice, as upon occasion of the Crowning of a New King, or the Arraignment of a Peer of the Realm for Treason, Felony, or such like. (2) The Lord High-Chancellor, whose Office is to keep the King's Great Seal, to moderate the Rigour of the Law in judging according to Equity and not according to the Common Law. He also disposeth of all Ecclesiastical Benesices in the King's Gift, if valued under 20 l. a Year in the King's Book. In case there be no Chancellor, than the Lord Keeper is the same in Authority, Power, Precedence, only different in Patent. (3) The Lord High Treasurer, whose Office (as being Praefectus Aerarii) is to take charge of all the King's Revenue kept in the Exchequer; as also to check all Officers employed in collecting the same, and such like. This Office is frequently executed by several Persons conjunctly in Commission, (termed Lords of the Treasury) as at present. (4.) The Lord Precedent of the Council, whose Office is to attend upon the King, and Summons the Council, to propose business at Council-Table, and Report the several Transactions of the Board. (5.) The Lord Privy-Seal, whose Office is to pass all Charters and Grants of the King, and Pardons signed by the King before they come to the Great Seal of England; as also divers other Matters of smaller moment which do not pass the Great Seal. But this Seal is never to be affixed to any Grant without good warrant under the King's Privy-Signet, nor even with such Warrant, if the thing granted be against Law or Custom, until the King be first acquinted therewith. (6.) The Lord Great Chamberlain of England, whose Office is to bring the King's Shirt, Coif, and Wearing clothes, on the Coronation-day; to put on the King's Apparel that Morning, to carry at the Coronation the Coif, Gloves, and Linen, which are to be used by the King on that Occasion; likeways the Sword and Scabbard, as also the Gold (to be offered by the King) together with the Robe Royal and Crown; to Undress and Attire the King with his Royal Robes; to serve the King that Day with Water for to wash his Hands before and after Dinner. (7.) The Lord High Constable of England, an Officer, whose Power is so great, that 'twas thought inconvenient to lodge the same in any Subject since the Year 1521. and is now conferred on some of the chiefest Peers, pro re nata; as upon occasion of Coronations, or Solemn Trials by Combat. (8.) The Earl Marshal of England, whose Office is to take cognizance of all Matters of War and Arms; to determine Contracts concerning Deeds of Arms out of the Realm upon Land, and Matters touching Wars within the Realm, which the Common Law cannot determine. (9) The Lord High admiral of England, whose Trust and Honour is so great, that this Office hath been usually given either to some of the King's younger Sons, near Kinsmen, or one of the chiefest Peers of the Realm: To him is committed the Management of all Maritime Affairs, the Government of the King's Navy; a decisive Power in all Causes Maritime, as well Civil as Criminal. He also Commissionates Vice-admirals', Reer-admirals', Sea-Captains, etc. and enjoys a number of Privileges, too many here to be mentioned. This Office is commonly executed by several Persons conjunctly in Commission, (termed Lords of the Admiralty) as at present.  
After the Officers of the Crown, we might here subjoin the various Courts of Judicatory established in this Kingdom, especially the High Court of Parliament, which is Supreme to all others, and to whom all last Appeals are made. I might here likeways mention all the Subordinate Courts of this Realm, particularly that of the King's-bench, the Court of Common Pleas, the High Court of Chancery, the Exchequer, and the Court of the Duchy of Lancaster, etc. as also the Ecclesiastical Courts in Subordination to the Archbishop of Canterbury; as the Court of Arches, the Court of Audience, the Prerogative Court, the Court of Faculties, and that of Peculiars. But to declare the Nature and Constitution, the ample Privileges and manner of Procedure in each of them, would far exceed the narrow Bounds of an Abstract. I shall not therefore descend to particulars, only adding to this Paragraph, that besides these various Courts abovementioned, the King consulting the ease and welfare of the Subject, Administers Justice by his Itinerate Judges, and that in their yearly Circuits through the Kingdom; and for the better governing of, and keeping the King's Peace in particular Counties, Hundreds, Cities, Burroughs, and Villiages of this Realm. Counties have their respective Lord Lieutenants, Sheriffs, and Justices of the Peace; Hundreds, their Bailiffs, High-Constables, and Petty-Constables. Cities, their Mayor, aldermans, Sheriffs, etc. Burroughs and Towns incorporate, have either a Mayor, or two Bailiffs, or a Portrive, who in Power are the same with Mayor and Sheriffs; and during their Offices, are Justices of the Peace within their own Liberties. And lastly, Villiages are in Subjection to the Lord of the Manor, under whom is the Constable or Headborough to keep the Peace, apprehend Offenders, and bring them before the Justice. Of such an admirable Constitution is the English Government, that no Nation whatsoever can justly pretend to such a Model, and no People in the World may live more happy if they please; so that it may be justly affirmed of them, what the Poet saith in another Case, only with change of Persons,  
O fortunatos nimium sua si bona norint  
Anglicanos!—  
The Ensigns Imperial of the Monarch of Great Britain, are in the first place Azure, Three Flower-de-luces', 
Arms.  Or; the Royal Arms of France quartered with the Imperial Ensings of England, which are Gules, Three Lions passant Gardant in Pale, Or. In the second place, within a double tressure Counter flowered de lys Or, a Lion Rampant, Gules, for the Royal Arms of Scotland. In the third place Azure, and Irish Harp, Or, stringed, Argent, for the Royal Ensigns of Ireland. In the fourth place as in the first. These Ensigns Armoral are quartered after a new manner since the late Revolution, the English Arms being put before the French, and the whole charged with an Escutcheon of the House of Nassau, which is Azure Semi-billets, a Lion Rampant, Or, Languid and Armed, Gules; all within the Garter, the chief Ensign of that most Noble Order; above the same, an Helmet answerable to King William's Sovereign Jurisdiction; upon the same, a rich Mantle of Cloth of Gold, doubled Ermine, adorned with an Imperial Crown, and surmounted for a Crest by a Lion passant Gardent, Or, Crowned, as the former, and an Unicorn Argent Gorged with a Crown, thereto a Chain affixed, passing between his Forelegs, and reflexed over his Back, Or; both standing upon a Compartment placed underneath; and in the Table of that Compartment is expressed the King of England's Motto, which is, Dieu & mon Droit; but of late, J● Maintiendray.  
The Inhabitants of this Country are (for the most part) of the true) Reformed Religion publicly professed, 
Religion.  and carefully taught in its choicest Purity. In Reforming of which, they were not so hurried by popular Fury and Faction, (as in other Nations) but proceeded in a more Prudent, Regular, and Christian Method; resolving to separate no farther from the Church of Rome, than she had separated from the Truth, embracing that excellent Advice of the Prophet, (Jer. 6. 16.) Stand ye in the ways and see, and ask for the old paths, where is the good way, and walk therein. So that the Reformed Church of England, is a true Mean or middle Way betwixt those two Extremes of Supperstition and Phanaticism, both equally to be avoided. The Doctrine of which Church thus refined, is briefly summed up in the 39 Articles, and Book of Homilies; and her Discipline and Worship are to be seen in the Liturgy, and Book of Canons. All which being seriously weighed and considered by a judicious and impartial Mind, it may be found that this National Church is for certain, the exactest of all the Reformed Churches, and comes nearest to the Primitive Pattern of any in Christendom. For her Doctrine is entirely built upon the Prophets and Apostles, according to the Explication of the Ancient Fathers; her Government (rightly considered) is truly Apostolical; her Liturgy is a notable extract of the best of the Primitive Forms; her Ceremonies are few in number, but such as tend to Decency and true Devotion. In a word, The Church of England doth firmly hold and maintain the whole Body of the truly Catholic Faith, (and none other) according to Holy Scripture, and the Four first General Councils, so that her Sons may truly say, (in the Words of an Eminent Luminary of the Ancient Church) In ea Regula incedimus quam Ecclesia ab Apostolis, Apostoli à Christo, & Christus à Deo accepit. At present all Sects and Parties are tolerated; and it's truly as Melancholy to consider, as 'tis hard to determine, whether our Heats and Divisions on one hand, or Open Profaneness and Irreligion on the other, be most predominant. In the mean time this is most certain, that they're both equally to be lamented; the necessary Consequence of them both, being most dismal and dangerous in the end. But that it may please the Almighty to grant to all Nations, Unity, Peace, and Concord, is the daily and fervent Prayer of the Church of Christ; and the hearty wish and desire of every true Son thereof The Christian Faith is thought to have been planted in England, tempore (ut scimus) summo Tiberii Caesaris, according to Ancient Gildas; but afterwards more universally received, Anno 180. it being then openly professed by Public Authority, under King Lucius, who is said to have been the first Christian King in the World; yet several doubt whether there was ever such a Man in the World. In general, this is certain that Christianity was propagated here in the earliest Ages of the Church.   

WALES.  
THIS Country, (the Seat of the Ancient Britain's) termed by the Italians, Wallia; by the Spaniards, 
Name.  Gales; by the French, Galls; by the Germans, Walls; and by the English, Wales; so called (as some imagine) from Idwallo Son to Cadwallader, who retired into this Country with the remaining Britain's. But others do rather think that as the Britain's derive their Pedigree from the Gauls, so they also retain the Name, this Country being still termed by the French, Galls, which using W for G, (according to the Saxon Custom) agrees pretty well with the present Title.  
The Air of this Country is much the same as in those Counties of England, which lie under the same 
Air.  Parallel of Latitude. The opposite Place of the Globe to Wales, is that Part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 190 and 200 Degrees of Longitude, with 56 and 60 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 9th North Climate) is generally very Mountainous, yet some of 
Soil.  its Valleys are abundantly fertile, producing great plenty of Corn, and others are very fit for Pasturage. It's likeways well stored with large Quarries of Free Stone, as also several Mines of Lead-Oar and Coals. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 16 Hours ½, the shortest in the Southmost 7 Hours ¾, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Cattle, Butter, Cheese, Welsh Friezes, Cottons, Bays, Herrings, 
Commodities.  Hides, Calve-Skins, Honey, Wax, and such like.  
In several Parts of this Principality, especially Denbighshire, are still to be seen the Remains of that famous 
Rarities.  Wall, commonly called King Offa's D●ke, made by Offa the Mercian, as a Boundary between the Saxons and Britain's. (2.) At a small Village, called Newton in Glamorganshire, is a remarkable Spring nigh the Sea, which Ebbs and Flows contrary to the Sea. (3.) In the same County, as also C●ermard●nshire are several Ancient Sepulchral Monuments, and divers noted Stone Pillars, with observable Inscriptions upon them. (3.) In Brecknockshire are some other remarkable Pillars; particularly that called Maen y Morynui●n, (or the Maiden-stone) near the Town of Brecknock: Another at Pentre Yskythrog in Lhan St. Ae●ed Parish: And a third in Form of a Cross, in Vaenor Parish. (4.) In Glamorganshire are the Remains of Kaer Phyli Castle, (taken by some for the Buliaeum Silurum) which are generally reckoned the noblest Ruins of Ancient Architecture of any in Britain. (5) In Monmouthshire are many Roman Aitars dug up with variety of Inscriptions upon 'em. For all these Inscripons abovementiond, Vid. Camden 's Britannia, late Edition, from page 613 to 620. as also from 623 to 628 with page 593, 594, 600, 601, 605. But if the curious Reader would see the chief Rarities of Wales at one view, let him consult the aforesaid Author, (page 697.) where he will find the Remarkables of this Principality represented in Sculpture; particularly these following, viz. a curious carved Pillar, called Maen-y-Chwyan, on Mostyn Mountain in Flintshire. Two remarkable Pillars at Kaer Phyli Castle in Glamorganshire. An Alabaster Statue found near Porth-Shini-Kran in Mon●●outhshire. And finally, some Roman Armour and Medals, with variety of Coins, both Roman and British, dug up at several times in several Parts of Wales  
Archbishoprics in this Principality. None. 
Archbishoprics.   
Bishoprics, 4. viz. those of 

Bangor,  
Landaff,  
S. Asaph,  
S. david's,   already mentioned. 
Bishoprics, etc.   
Universities. None. 
Universities.   
The Welsh are a People generally reputed very faithful and loving to one another in a strange Country, 
Manners.  as also to Strangers in their own. The Commons (for the most part) are extraordinary Simple and Ignorant, but their Gentry are esteemed both Brave and Hospitable. They're universally inclined to a Choleric Temper, and extravagantly value themselves on their Pedigrees and Families.  
The Welsh (being the Offspring of the Ancient Britain's) do still retain their Primitive Language, which 
Language.  yet remains freer from a mixture of exotic Words than any Modern Tongue in Europe; a Language which hath nothing to recommend it to Strangers, it being both hard to pronounce, and unpleasant to the Ear, by reason of its vast multitude of Consonants. Their Paternoster runs thus: Ein tad your hwn wit yn y nefoedd, sancteidier dy enw: Deved die deyrmas; bid die ewyll s are ydd●iar megis y mac yn y nefoedd dyro i ni heddyw ein bara beunyddiol: a maddeu i ni ein dyledion, fell y maddewn ni i'n dyledwyr: ac nar arwain mi brofe diageth, eithr gwared in rhag drwg. Amen.  
This Principality was anciently governed by its own King or Kings (there being frequently one for 
Government.  South, and another for North Wales, and sometimes no less than five did claim a Regal Power) but was fully Conquered, Anno 1282. by Edward I. who having then a Son brought forth by his Queen at Caernarven Castle in Wales, and finding the Welsh extremely averse against a Foreign Governor, proffered them the young Child (a Native of their own) to be their Lord and Master, to which they readily yielded, and accordingly swore Obedience to him; since which time, the King of England's Eldest Son is styled Prince of Wales, and all Writs in that Principality are issued out in his Name.  
The Arms of the Prince of Wales differ from those of England, only by the Addition of a Label of three 
Arms.  Points. But the proper and peculiar Device, commonly (though corruptedly) call d, the Prince's Arms; is a Coronet beautified with three Ostrich Feathers, with this Inscription round, Ich dien, i. e. I serve; alluding to that of the Apostle, The Heir while he is a Child, differeth not from a Servant.  
The Inhabitans of this Country (at least the most Intelligent of 'em) are of the Reformed Religion, according 
Religion.  to the Platform of the Church of England; but many of the meaner sort are so grossly ignorant in Religious Matters, that they differ nothing from mere Heathens. For the remedying of which, the late incomparable Mr Gouge was at no small Pains and Charge, in Preaching the Blessed Gospel to them, and procuring and distributing among them some considerable number of Bibles, and Books of Devotion in their Language; which noble Design was afterwards revived and furthered by the famous Robert boil, Esq;, and several other well dispossed Persons, (particularly that much lamented Eminent Divine, Dr. Anthony Horneck) and we are willing to hope that the same will be kept still on foot, and happily promoted by the Aid and Encouragement of some serious Christians amongst us. The Christian Faith is said to have been planted in this Country towards the end of the Second Century.   


IRELAND. By Rob. Morden.    

IRELAND.  
 d. m. Situated between ●● ●0 of Long. its greatest Length from S. to N. is about 265 Miles. 12 10 between 51 00 of Latit. Breadth from E. to W. is about 150 Miles. 55 25 Divided into the Provinces of Leinster— Ch. Town Dublin. Ulster— Londonderry. Connaught— Galloway. Munster— Limerick. Leinster contains Louth County— Chief Town Drogheda— from N. to S. Dublin— Idem— Wicklow— Idem— Wexford— Idem— Longford— Idem— from N. to S. Meath County— Molingar— King's County— Philipstone— Queen's County— Mari-burrow— Kilkenny— Idem— Kildare— Idem— E. of K. County. Caterlagh— Idem— Kilkenny. Ulster contains Down-County— Down— from E. to S. W. Armagh— Armagh— Monogon— Idem— Caven— Idem— Antrim— Carrickfergus from E. to S. W. Londonderry— Idem— Tirone County— Duagannon Fermanath— Inniskilling Dunnagal— Idem, W. of Londonderry. Conn. cont. Letrim— Idem— from N. to S. Roscomon— Athlon— Galloway— Idem— Maio County— Maio— Westward. Slego— Idem—  
Munster cont. Tipperary— Clonmel— N. to S. Waterford— Idem—  Clare County— Idem— N. to S. Limerick— Idem—  Cork County— Idem—  Kerry— Dingle, Westward.   
THIS Country (the Britannia Parva of Ptolemy, mentioned by other Ancient Writers under the 
Name.  Names of Jertia, Juverna, Iris, &c and by Modern Authors, Hibernia) is termed by the Italians, Irlanda; by the Spaniards, Irlanda; by the French, Irlande; by the Germans, Yrland; and by the English, Ireland; so called, (as some imagine) ab hiberno aere, from the Winter-like Air: but rather (according to others) from Erinland, which in the Irish Tongue signifieth a Western Land.  
The Air of this Country is almost of the same Nature with that of those Parts of Britain, which lie 
Air.  under the same Parallel, only different in this, that in several places of this Kingdom 'tis of a more gross and impure Temper, by reason of the many Lakes and Marshes which send up such a quantity of Vapours, and thereby so corrupt the whole Mass of Air, as to occasion Fluxes, Rheums, and such like Distempers, to which the Inhabitants are frequently subject. The opposite Place of the Globe to Ireland is that part of the Pacifick Ocean lying between 180 and 200 Degrees of Longitude, with 53 and 56 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 9th and 10th North Climate) is abundantly fertile, but naturally 
Soil.  more fit for Grass and Pasturage, than Tillage. Much of this Kingdom is still overgrown with Woods, or encumbered with vast Bogs and unwholesome Marshes, yielding neither Profit nor Pleasure to the Inhabitants, but not near so much as formerly, there being a great deal of Wood cut down, and many large Marshes drained in this Age, and the Ground employed for various sorts of Grain, which it produceth in great plenty. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country is about 17 Hours ●/4, ●he 〈◊〉 in the Southmost 7 Hours ¾, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Cattle, Hides, Tallow, Butter, Cheese, Honey, Wax, Salt, 
〈…〉  Hem●, Linen Cloth, Pipe-Staves, Wool, Friezes, etc.  
About eight Miles North-East from Colrain, in the County of Antrim, is that Miracle, (whether of Art 
Rarities.  or Nature, I shall not dispute) commonly called the Giants Cawsway, which runs from the bottom of a high Hill into the Sea, none can tell how far. It's length, at Low Water, is about 600 Feet; the breadth, where broadest, 240, and 120 in the narrowest; 'tis very unequal in height, being in some places 36 Feet from the level of the Strand, and in others only 15. It consists of many thousands of Pillars perpendicular to the Plain of the Horizon, and all of different Shapes and Sizes, but most of 'em Pentagonal or Hexagonal, yet all irregularly placed. A particular Draught and Description of this wonderful Cawsway, with an Essay proving the same to be rather the Work of Nature than Art, Vid. Philosoph. Transact. N. 212 and 222. (2) In the Province of Ulster is the famous Lough Neagh, hitherto noted for its rare petrifying Quality; but upon due Examination, 'tis found that the said Quality ought to be ascribed to the Soil of the Ground adjacent to that Lake, rather than to the Water of the Lake itself. (3) In several Parts of this Kingdom are sometimes dug up Horns of a prodigious bigness, (one Pair lately found being ten Feet and ten Inches from the Tip of the right Horn to the Tip of the left) which gives occasion to apprehend that the great American Deer, (called the Moose) was formerly common in this Island. As for that excellent Quality of Ireland in nourishing no Venomous Creature, the same is so notoriously known, that I need say nothing of it.  
Archbishoprics in this Kingdom, are Four, viz those of Armagh, Dublin, Cassil, and Tuam. The 
Archbishoprics.  Archbishop of Armagh being Primate of all Ireland.  
Bishoprics in this Kingdom, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Meath,  
Limerick, Ardfert, and Aghado,  
Clonfert,  
Kildare,  
Elphin,  
Ossory,  
Waterford,  
Rapho,  
Leighlin and Ferns,  
Cork and Ross,  
Derry,  
Kilaloe.  
Cloyne,  
Kilmore and Ardagh,  
Killala,  
Clogher,  
Drommore.  
Down and Conner,    
Here is only one University, viz. That of Dublin. 
Universities.   
The Irish (according to the best Character I find of 'em, viz. that of Dr. Heylin's) are a People that's generally 
Manners.  strong and nimble of Body, haughty of Spirit, careless of their Lives, patient in Cold and Hunger, implacable in Enmity, constant in Love, light of Belief, greedy of Glory. In a word, if they are bad, you shall no where find worse; if they be good, you can hardly meet with better.  
The Language here used by the Natives being the Irish seems to be of a British Extraction, by comparing 
Language.  the same with the Welsh. The English and Scots here residing retain their own. Paternoster in the Irish Tongue runs thus: Air nathir ataigh air nin, nabz far haminiti; tigiuh da riatiatche: deantur da hoilam hicoil air nimh agis air thalamhi. Air naran laidhthuil tabhair dhuin of niomh; agis math duin dair shiaca ammil agis mathum viddar fentchunnim; agis na trilaic astoch say anausen; ac sarsino owl Amen.  
The Government of this Country is by one Supreme Officer, who is commonly termed the Lord Lieutenant 
Government.  or Lord Deputy of Ireland. No Viceroy in Europe is invested with greater Power, nor cometh nearer the Majesty of a King in his Train and State than he. For his Assistance he's allowed a Privy-Council to advise with upon all Occasions. As for the Laws of the Kingdom, (which are the standing Rule of all Civil Government) they owe their Beginning and Original to the English Parliament and Council, and must first pass the Great Seal of England. In absence of the Lieutenant, the Supreme Power is lodged in Lords Justices, who have the same Authority with a Lieutenant. The various Courts of Judicatory, both for Civil and Criminal Affairs, and their manner of proceeding in each of 'em, are much the same as here in England.  
See England, page 206. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of this Country are partly Protestants, partly Papists. The best civilised Parts of the 
Religion.  Kingdom are of the Reformed Religion, according to the Platform of the Church of England. But the far greater Part of the old Native Irish do still adhere to Popish Superstitions, and are as credulous of many Ridiculous Legends as in former times. The Christian Faith was first preached in this Country by St. Patrick, (Anno 435.) who is generally affirmed to be the Nephew of St. Martin of Thurs.   

And thus having travelled through Britain and Ireland, [the Greater of the Britannic Islands] proceed we next to the Lesser, which in respect of Great Britain, are situated on the East, West, North, and South.  
On the East are The Holy Island— Remarkable Places are The Old Fort All E of Northumberland. Fearn Islands— The Old Tower Coket Island— — Sheppy Island— Quinborough On the Kentish Coast. Thanet Island— — On the West are The Lewes— Sowardil— found from N. to S. Wiist— Kilfadrick Sky— Kilvorie Mu●— Dowart-Castle Jura— Kilardil— Ila— Kilconan Arren— Arren Man— Russin— Anglesey— Newburgh— Scilly Islands— Castle Hugh— On the North are The Orkneys of which the chief are Hoy— None— from S. to N. N. E. Mainland Kirkwall— Sapinsha Elwick— Westra— Periwa— The Shetland of which the chief are Mainland Ylesburg— Yell— Gravelland— On the South are Portland Island— Portland Castle S. of Dorsetshire. Isle of Wight— Newport— S. of Hampshire. Port-Sea Island— Portsmouth— Isles of Jersey— St. Hillary— W. of Normandy. Garnsey— St. Peter's Town Alderney— Alderney—  
The chief of which Lesser Islands being these following, viz.  
The Oreades, The Isle of Man, The Isles of Jersey, The Schetland, Anglesey, Garnsey, The Hebrides, Wight, Alderney.  
Somewhat of all these, and in their Order. Therefore,  

§. 1. The Orcadeses or Orknay Islands.  
THE number of these Islands is indeed very great, and of 'em Twenty six are actually inhabited; the rest being called Holms, are used only for Pasturage. Most of 'em are blessed with a very pure and healthful Air to breath in, but their Soil is very different, being in some extremely Dry and Sandy, in others Wet and Marish; however they're indifferently fruitful in Oats and Barley, but destitute of Wheat, Rye, and Pease. Many useful Commodities are yearly exported from them to divers Foreign Parts. South-West of Swinna (one of those Islands) are two dreadful Whirlpools in the Sea, [commonly termed the Wells of Swinna] very terrible to Passengers, and probably occasioned by some Subterranean Hiatus. In these Islands are several Footsteps of the Pictish Nation, from whom Pictland-Frith is commonly thought to derive its Name. The Inhabitants do still retain many Gothick and Teutonick Terms in their Language; and some Ancient Germane Surnames (as yet in use) do plainly evince their Extraction. These Islands have been visited by the Romans, possessed by the Picts, and subject to the Danes; but Christiern IV. of Denmark having quitted all his Pretensions to them in favour of King James VI upon the Marriage of that Prince with his Sister, they have ever since acknowledged Allegiance to the Scottish Crown, and are immediately governed by the Stewart of Orknay, or his Deputy.   

§. 2. The Shetland.  
UNDER the Name of Shetland, are commonly comprehended no less than Forty six Islands, with Forty Holms, besides many Rocks. Of these Islands, about Twenty six are inhabited, the rest being used only for feeding of Cattle. They enjoy a very healthful Air, and the Inhabitants do generally arrive to a great Age. In several of them are some Obelisks still standing, with divers old Fabrics, made (as is commonly believed) by the Picts. The Gentry, who removed hither from the Continent, usually speak as in the North of Scotland; but the Common Sort of People (who are descended from the Norvegians) do still retain a corrupt Norse Tongue, called Norn. All these Islands belong now to the Crown of Scotland, and are reckoned a part of the Stewarty of Orknay.   

§. 3. The Hebrides.  
THIS mighty Cluster of Islands (the Ebudes of Ptolemy, Solinus, and Pliny,) are commonly termed the Western Isles from their Situation in respect of Scotland, to which Crown they belong. In Soil they're very different, but generally blest with a pure and healthful Air. They surpass Three hundred in number, though reckoned by some but Forty four. Their Inhabitants use the Irish Tongue, yet with difference of Dialect from that in Ireland; and are much the same with the Highlanders on the Continent of Scotland, both in Habit, Customs, and Manner of Living. The most remarkable of all these Islands, are Two, viz. Jona and St. Kilda. The former (now called Columbkill, nigh the Isle of Mull) is noted for being of old the burying Place of the Kings of Scotland, and the chief Residence of the Ancient Culdees. The other (termed by the Islanders, Hirt; by Buchanan, Hirta; and afterwards St. Kilda or Kildir) is the remotest of all the Hebrides, and so observable for some Remarkables therein, and several uncommon Customs peculiar to its Inhabitants, that a Description thereof was of late thought worthy of a particular Treatise, entitled, A Voyage to St. Kilda, to which I remit the Reader,   

§. 4. The Isle of Man.  
THIS Island (called Monoeda, by Ptolemy; and by Pliny, Mondbia.) enjoys a very cold and sharp Air, being exposed on every side to the bleak piercing Winds from the Sea. Its Soil oweth much of its Fertility to the Care and Industry of the Husbandman. The Inhabitants (a mixture of English, Scots, and Irish, commonly called Mank●-men,) have in general a very good Character. The ordinary sort of People retain much of the Irish in their Language and way of Living; but those of better Rank strive to imitate the English. In this they're peculiarly happy, that all litigious Proceedings are banished from among 'em, all Differences being speedily determined by certain Judges, called Deemsters, and that without Writings or Fees: If the Case be found very intricate, then 'tis referred to twelve Men, whom they term the Keys of the Island. This Island with the Advowson of the Bishopric, belongs to the Earls of Derby, who are commonly styled Lords of Man, though Kings in effect, they having all kind of Civil Power and Jurisdiction over the Inhabitants, but still under the Fief and Sovereignty of the Crown of England.   

§. 5. Anglesey.  
THIS Island (the celebrated Mona of the Romans, and Ancient Seat of the Druids) is blessed with a very fruitful Soil, producing most sorts of Grain (especially Wheat) in such abundance, that the Welsh commonly term it, Môn mam Gymry, i. e. Môn, the Nursery of Wales, because that Principality is frequently supplied from thence in unseasonable Years. 'Tis commonly reckoned as one of the Counties of North-Wales, and acknowledgeth Subjection to the Crown of England.   

§. 6. The Isle of Wight.  
THIS Island (termed by Ptolemy, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; and by the Romans, Vecta, Vectis, or Victesis;) enjoys a pure healthful Air; and is generally reckoned a very pleasant and fruitful Spot of Ground. 'Twas once honoured (as the Isle of Man) with the Title of Kingdom, for Henry Beauchamp, Earl of Warwick, was Crowned King of Wight by Henry VI. Anno 1445. but that Title died with himself about two Years after; and 'tis now reckoned only a Part of Hampshire, and is governed in like manner, as other of the Lesser Islands.   

§. 7. Jersey, Garnsey, and Alderney.  
THESE Islands are all of William the Conqueror's Inheritance, and Dukedom of Normandy, that now remains in Possession of the English Crown. Their Soil is sufficiently rich, producing in great abundance both Corn and Fruits, especially Apples, of which they make plenty of Cider; and the Air is so healthful to breath in, that the Inhabitants have little or no use for Physicians among 'em. They chiefly employ themselves in Agriculture, and Knitting of Stockings; and during War with France, they're much given to Privateering. It's observable of Garnsey, that no venomous Creature can live in it; and that the Natives generally look younger by ten Years than they really are. These Islands being annexed to the English Crown, Anno 1108. by Henry I have (to their great Honour) continued firm in their Allegiance to England ever since that time; notwithstanding of several attempts made upon them by the French. And so much for the Lesser Britannic Islands: But if the Reader desires a larger Account of 'em, let him consult the late Edition of Cambden's Britannia, from page 1049 to 1116. inclusively.  
Having thus particularly surveyed the Britannic Islands, both Greater and Lesser, proceed we now (according to our proposed Method) to the Second Part of this Section, which is to take a View of all other Islands belonging to Europe, whether they lie on the North, West, or South of the main Continent. Therefore,     

II. Of all other European Islands.  
European Islands being situated on the North of Europe. West South On the North, are the Scandinavian Islands. West are The Isle of Ice-land. The Britannic, [of which already.] The Azores. South are those in the Mediterranean Sea.  
Of which in their Order.  

§. 1. The Scandinavian Islands.  
Such Islands are those belonging to 

Sweden.  
Denmark.  
Norway.    
To Sweden are chiefly those of Rugen— Chief Town Bergen— W: to N. E. Bornholn— Rottomby— Oeland— Borkholm— Gothland— Wishby— Oesal— Arnsberg— Dago— Dageroot— Aland— Castleholm, Northward.  
To Denmark are chiefly those of Zealand— Chief Town Copenhagen Capital of all. Funen— Odensee— W. to E. Langland— Ruthkoping Laland— Naxkow— Falster— Nykoping Mina— Steg●— F●meren— Borge— S. W. of Laland. Ais●n— Sonderborg Funen. To Norway are chiefly those of Carmen— Lying W. of S●avanger— S. to N. Hiterens— W. of Dronthem— Sanien— Adjacent to Wardhus— Suroy— Adjacent  
Of all these Islands, Zealand is the most remarkable, and that only for the City of Copenhagen, as being the Seat Royal of the Kings of Denmark.   

§ 2. The Isle of Ice-land.  
THIS Island (taken by some for the much controverted Thule of the Ancients) is termed by the 
Name.  Italians, Islanda; by the Spaniards, Tierra elada; by the French, Island; by the Germans, Island; and by the English, Ice-land, so called from the abundance of Ice, wherewith 'tis environed for the greatest part of the Year.  
By reason of the frozen Ocean surrounding this Island, and the great quantity of Snow wherewith 'tis 
Air.  mostly covered, the Air must of necessity be very sharp and piercing, yet abundantly healthful to breath in, especially to those who are accustomed with that cold Climate. The opposite Place of the Globe to Ice-land, is that part of the vast Antarctick Ocean, lying between 180 and 190 Degrees of Longitude, with 60 and 70 Degrees of South Latitude.  
Considering only the Situation of Ice-land, (it lying in the 18th, 19th, 20th, and 21st North Climate) we 
Soil.  may easily imagine the Soil is none of the best. In some Parts where the Ground is level, there are indeed several Meadows very good for Pasture, but elsewhere the Island is encumbered either with vast Deserts, barren Mountains, or formidable Rocks. So destitute of Grain is it, that the poor Inhabitants grind and make Bread of dried Fish-bones. In the Northern Parts they have the Sun for one Month without Setting, and want him entirely another, according as he approacheth the Two Tropics.  
From this cold and barren Island, are yearly exported Fish, whale-oil, Tallow, Hides, Brimstone, and 
Commodities.  White Foxes Skins, which the Natives barter with Strangers for Necessaries of Humane Life.  
Notwithstanding this Island do●● lie in so cold a Climate, yet in it are divers hot and scalding Fountains, 
Rarities.  with Hecla a terrible Valcano, which (though always covered with Snow up to the very Top) doth frequently Vomit forth Fire and Sulphurous Matter in great abundance; and that sometimes with such a terrible roaring, that the loudest Claps of Thunder are hardly so formidable. In the Western Parts of the Island is a Lake of a petrifying Nature, and towards the middle, another which commonly sends up such a pestilentious Vapour, as frequently kills Birds that endeavour to fly over it. Some also write of Lakes on the Tops of Mountains, and those well-stored with Salmon.  
In this Island are two Danish Bishoprics, viz. 
Archbishoprics, etc.  those of Schalholt and Hola. Archbishoprics and Universities, none.  
The Ice-landers (being Persons of a middle Stature, but of great Strength) are generally reckoned a very 
Manners.  ignorant and superstitious Sort of People. They commonly live to a great Age, and many value themselves not a little for their Strength of Body. Both Sexes are much the same in Habit, and their chief Employment is Fishing.  
The Danes here residing, do usually speak as in Denmark. As for the Natives, they still retain the old 
Language.  Gothick Tongue.  
This Island being subject to the Danish Crown, is governed by a particular Viceroy, sent thither by the 
Government  King of Denmark, whose place of Residence is ordinarily in Bestode-Castle.  
For Arms. Vid. Denmark, page 69. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of this Island, who own Allegiance to the Danish Crown, are generally the same in Religion 
Religion.  with that professed in Denmark; as for the uncivilized Natives, who commonly abscond in Dens and Caves, they still adhere to their Ancient Idolatry as in former times. When Christianity was first introduced into this Island, is not very certain.   

§. 3. The Azores.  
They are in Number 9 viz. St. Michael— — Found from E. to W. Chief Town of all, is Angra in Tercera. St. Maria— Tercera— Gratiosa— St. George— — Pico— Fyal— Flores— — Cuervo—  
THESE Islands (taken by some for the Cathiterides of Ptolemy) are termed by the Italians, Flandrice 
Name.  Isola; by the Spaniards, Los Azores; by the French, Les Azores; by the Germans, Flandersche Insuln; and by the English, The Azores; so called by their Discoverers, (the Portugueze) from the abundance of Hawks found in them. By others, they're termed the Terceres from the Island Tercera, being chief of all the rest.  
The Air of these Islands inclining much to Heat, is tolerably good, and very agreeable to the Portugueze. 
Air.  The oposite Place of the Globe to the Azores, is that Part of Terra Australis Incognita, lying between the 165 and 175 Degrees of Longitude, with 35 and 41 Degrees of South Latitude.  
These Islands are blessed with a very fertile Soil, producing abundance of Grain, Wine, and Fruit, besides 
Soil.  great plenty of Wood The length of the Days and Nights in the Azores, is the same as in the middle Provinces of Spain, lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief thing exported from these Islands, is Oad for Dyer's, and that in great abundance, together 
Commodities.  with variety of choice Singing Birds.  
Here are several Fountains of hot Water, and one in Tercera of a petrifying Nature. The Island Tercera 
Rarities.  is also remarkable for being the place of the first Meridian, according to some Modern Geographers.  
Here is one Bishopric, viz. That of Angra, under 
Archbishoprics, etc.  the Archbishop of Lisbon.  
The Inhabitants of these Islands being Portugueze, are much the same in Manners with those on the 
Manners.  Contient.  
The Portugueze here residing, do still retain and 
Language.  speak their own Language.  
These Islands being inhabited and possessed by the Portugueze, are subject to the Crown of Portugal, and 
Government.  ruled by a particular Governor sent thither from that Court, who ordinarily refides at Angra in Tercera. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of these Islands being Portugueze, (as aforesaid) stick close to the Roman Religion, and 
Religion.  that in its grossest Errors, as universally professed, and by Law established in the Kingdom of Portugal.   

§. 4. Mediterranean Islands.  
ON the South of Europe are the Islands of the Mediterranean Sea: The chief of which are these following,  
Viz. Majorca— Chief Town Idem— Lying E. of Valencia. Minorca— Citadella— Yvica— Idem— Corsica— Bastia— Lying S. of Genova. Sardignia— Cagliari— Sicily— Palermo— Lying S. W. of Naples. Malta— Idem— Candia— Idem— lying S. of The Archipelago. Cyprus— Nicosia— Anatolia.  
Of all which in Order, beginning with  

Majorca, Minorca, and Yvica.  
EACH of these Islands hath almost the same Modern Appellation among the Italians, Spaniards, 
Name.  French, Germans, and English; and were all known of old by the Name of Baleares, which is derived from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifying to Dart or Throw, because their Inhabitants were famous for their Dexterity in throwing the Dart.  
The Air of these Islands is much more temperate to breath in, than any where on the Adjacent Continent, 
Air.  being daily fanned by cool Breezes from the Sea. The opposite Place of the Globe to the Baleares, is that part of the Pacifick Ocean, between 200 and 205 Degrees of Longitude, with 35 and 40 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The two former of these Islands are somewhat Mountainous and Woody, but the last is more plain, 
Soil.  and extremely fertile, both in Corn, Wine, and divers sort of Fruits: It likeways so aboundeth with Salt, that divers Neighbouring Countries are supplied from thence.  
From these Islands are exported to several Parts of Europe, Salt, Wine, Brandy, Coral, with variety of 
Commodities.  Fruits, etc.  
On the Coasts of Majorca is found abundance of excellent Coral, for which the Inhabitants frequently 
Rarities.  fish with good success. Yvica is said to nourish no noxious Animal, and yet Formentera (an Adjacent Island, and one of the Baleares) is so infested with Serpents, that the same is uninhabited.  
In these Islands is one Bishoptick, viz. that of Majorca, (under the Archbishop of Terragon) where is 
Archbishopric,  also a famous University.  
The Inhabitants of these Islands being Spaniards, are much the same in Manners with those on the Continent. 
Manners.   
What was just now said of the Spaniards on these Islands, in respect of Manners, the same may be affirmed 
Language.  of 'em in Point of Language.  
These Islands being annexed to the Crown of Spain, are ruled by one or more Governors, sent thither by 
Government.  his Catholic Majesty, and generally renewed every third Year. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of these Islands being Spaniards, are all of the Roman Communion, and as bigoted 
Religion.  Zealots for the Popish Doctrine, as elsewhere on the Continent. They received the Light of the Blessed Gospel much about the same time with Spain.   

Corsica and Sardignia.  
THE former of these Islands (called first by the Greeks Tercepne, and afterwards Cyrne from Cyrnus, 
Name.  reckoned by some a Son of Hercules) is now termed Corsica from Corsa Bubulca, a certain Woman of Liguria, who is said to have led a Colony out of that Country hither. And the other (according to the Opinion of its Inhabitants) is called Sardignia from Sardus, another Son of Hercules, who they say was the first that settled a Colony therein, and gave it this Name in Memory of himself.  
The Air of these Islands is universally reckoned to be very unhealthful, especially that of Corsica, which is 
Air.  the reason of its being so thinly inhabited. The opposite Place of the Globe to them, is that part of Nova Zelandia, or Adjcent Ocean, between 210 and 215 Degrees of Longitude, with 37 and 43 Degrees of South Latitude.  
These Islands differ mightily in Soil, the former being (for the most part) very Stony, full of Woods, 
Soil.  and lying uncultivated; but the other very fertile, affording abundance of Corn, Wine, and Oil, etc. The length of the Days and Nights in these Islands, is the same as in the Middle and Southern Parts of Spain.  
The chief Commodities exported from these Islands, are Corn, Wine, Oil, Salt, Iron, and several sorts of 
Commodities.  Fruits, especially Figs, Almonds, Chestnuts, etc.  
In several Parts of Corsica is found a Stone, (commonly called Catochite) which being handled sticks to 
Rarities.  the Fingers like Glue. Sardignia is said to harbour no venomous Creature, no, nor any noxious Animal, save Foxes, and a little Creature, (named Solifuga) which resembles a Frog. Those Animals, called Mafrones, or Mastriones, are peculiar to this Island.  
Archbishoprics, are Cagliari, Gassari, and Oristagni, all in Sardignia. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
Bishoprics are those of Nebbio, Ajazzo, Mariana, Alteria, Sagona, and Accia, all in Corsica, (whereof the 
Bishoprics.  four last are now ruined) together with Villa d'Iglesia, Bosa, and Algheri, in Sardignia.  
Here is only one University, viz. that of Cagliart. 
Universities.   
The Inhabitants of Corsica are reputed (for the generality of 'em) a cruel, rude, and revengeful Sort 
Manners.  of People; a People so given to Piracy in former times, that many think the Name of Corsaires is derived from them. As for the Inhabitants of Sardignia, they being mostly Spaniards, are much the same with those in Spain.  
Languages here in use are the Spanish and Italian, the former in Sardignia, and the latter in Corsica, but 
Language.  mightily blended one with another.  
The Isle of Corsica, being subject to the Genoeses, is ruled by a particular Governor, (who hath for his 
Government.  Assistance, one Lieutenant, and several Commissaries) sent thither by the Republic of Genova, and renewed once in two Years; and Sardignia (being in the Possession of the Spaniard) is governed by a Viceroy appointed by his Catholic Majesty, and renewed every third Year.  
The Inhabitants of both these Islands adhere to the 
Arms.  Roman Church in her grossest Errors, and receive 
Riligion.  with an implicit Faith whatever she teaches; and correspondent to their Principles is their Practice, especially in Sardignia; where the People are so grossly Immoral, as usually to dance and sing profane Songs in their Churches immediately after Divine Worship. The Christian Faith was planted here much about the same time with the Northern Parts of Italy.   

SICILY.  
THIS Island (of old Sicania, Trinacria, and Triquetra) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, 
Name.  Sicilia; by the French, Sicily; by the Germans, Sicilien; and by the English, Sicily. It's Name is derived from Siculi, (an Ancient People in Latium) who being driven from their Country by the Aborigines, were forced to seek for new Habitations, and accordingly came over to Sicania, (headed, as some allege, by one Siculus) which from them acquired a new Name, viz. that of Sicily.  
No Island in these Parts of the World enjoys a purer and more healthful Air than this does. The opposite 
Air.  Place of the Globe to Sicily, is that Part of Nova Zelandia, between 215 and 220 Degrees of Longitude, with 34 and 38 Degrees of South Latitude.  
Fully answerable to the healthfulness of the Air, is the Fertility of the Soil, several of its Mountains 
Soil.  being incredibly fruitful, even to the very Tops. The length of the Days and Nights here is the same; as in the Southern Provinces of Spain, they both lying under the same parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Silks, Wine, Honey, Sugar, Wax, Oil, Saffron, and many Medicinal 
Commodities.  Drugs, etc.  
Near to Ancient Syracuse, are some Subterranean Cavities, where Dionysius the Tyrant, shut up his Slaves. 
Rarities.  Over these Cavities was his Palace, and being anxious to overhear what his Slaves spoke among themselves, here is still to be seen a Communication between the aforesaid Cavities and his Palace, cut out of the firm Rock, and resembling the interior Frame of a Man's Ear, which makes such a curious Echo, that the least Noise, yea, articulate Words and Sentences, when only whispered, are clearly heard. Here also is a large Theatre of the same Tyrant, cut out of the firm Rock. Known all the World over, is that hideous Vulcano of this Island, the famous Mount Aetna, (now Gibell) whose sudden Conflagrations and sulphurous Eruptions are sometimes most terrible and destructive; witness those which happened in the Year 1669. and more lately. Anno 1693. For a particular Description of this remarkable Mountain, and all other noted Vulcano's in the World. Vid. Bottoni Leontini, his Pyrologia Typographica.  
In this Island are Three Archbishoprics, viz. those of 
Archbishoprics.  

Palermo,  
Messina,  
Mont-Real.    
Here likeways are Seven Bishoprics, viz those of 
Bishoprics.  

Syracuse,  
Cefaledi,  
St. Marco,  
Mazara.  
Catana,  
Pati,  
Gergenti,    
Here is only one University, viz. that of Catana. 
Universities.   
The Sicilians being mostly Spaniards, are much the same in Manners with those in Spain, only with this 
Manners.  difference, that they merit (according to some) a blacker Character than a Native Spaniard.  
The ordinary Language of the Sicilians is Spanish, which is commonly used, not only by the Native opaniards, 
Language.  but also Persons of all other Nations, residing in the Island.  
This Island belonging to the Spaniard, (for which he does homage to the Pope) is ruled by a particular 
Government.  Viceroy, appointed and sent thither by his Catholic Majesty, whose Government (as are most other of the Spanish Vice-Roys) is Triennial, and place of Residence, Palermo.  
For Arms. Vid. Spain, page 141 
Arms.   
The Religion here established and publicly professed, is the same as in Italy and Spain. This Island received the 
Religion.  Light of the Blessed Gospel in the earliest Ages of the Church.   

MALTA.  
THIS Island (known formerly by the same Name, or Melita) is termed by the French, Malt; by 
Name.  the High Germans, Maltha; by the Italians, Spaniards; and English, Malta; why so called, is not fully agreed upon among Critics; yet most affirm, that its Name of Melita came from the plenty of Honey in this Island.  
The Air of this Island is extremely hot and stifling, the many high Rocks towards the Sea obstructing the 
Air.  benefit of cool Breezes from the surrounding Ocean. The opposite Place of the Globe to Malta, is that part of Nova Zelandia, between 215 and 220 Degrees of Longitude, with 32 and 34 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Island can lay no just Claim to an Excellency of Soil, it being extremely Dry and Barren, and 
Soil.  much encumbered with Rocks. It affordeth little Corn or Wine, but is supplied from Sicily of both. The length of Days and Nights in Malta, is the same as in the Southmost Part of Spain.  
Malta being a place no ways remarkable for Trade, its Commodities are very few; the chief Product of 
Commodities.  the Island being only Cuminseed, Aniseed, and Cottonwooll.  
Worthy of Obervation, is St. John's Church, with its rich and magnificent Vestry, as also the Observatory, 
Rarities.  Treasury, and Palace of the Grand Master. The Inhabitants pretend that Malta hath entertained no venomous Creature since the Days of St. Paul, who (they say) blessed this Island upon the shaking off the Viper from his Hand into the Fire.  
Here are Two Bishoprics, viz those of Malta and Citta, or Civitta Vecchia. Archbishoprics and 
Archbishoprics,  Universities, none.  
The Inhabitants of this Island (not reckoning the Slaves) are for the most part very Civil and Courteous 
Manners.  to Strangers; and follow the Mode of the Sicilians in Habit. They also resemble the Sicilians in some of their worst Qualities, being extremely Jealous, Treacherous, and Cruel.  
A corrupt Arabic doth here mightily prevail, being hitherto preserved by the frequent Supplies of Turks taken 
Language.  and brought in from time to time. But the Knights and People of any Note, understand and speak several European Languages, particularly the Italian, which is authorised by the Government, and used in public Writings.  
This Island after many turns of Fortune, was presented by the Emperor, Charles V. to the Order of 
Government.  the Knights of St. John of Jerusalem, whose place of Residence it hath hitherto been since the loss of Rhodes, and is now governed by the Patron of that Order, styled the Grand Master of the Hospital of St. John of Jerusalem, and Prince of Malta, Gauls, and Goza. The Knights did formerly consist of eight different Languages or Nations, (whereof the English was the sixth) but now they're only seven.  
For Arms, the Grand Master beareth a White Cross (commonly called the Cross of Jerusalem) with four 
Arms.  Points.  
The established Religion in Malta, is that of the Church of Rome, which is made essential to the Order, 
Religion.  no Person of a different Persuasion being capable to enter therein. This Island received the Blessed Gospel in the Apostolic Times.   

CANDIA.  
THIS Island (the famous Crete of the Ancients) is termed by the French, Candie; by the Germans, 
Name.  Candien; by the Italians, Spaniards, and English, Candia; so called from its chief Town Candie, built by the Saracens, who from their new Town, gave the Island a new Name.  
The Air of this Island is generally reckoned to be very Temperate and Healthful to breathe in; but the 
Air.  South-winds are sometimes so boisterous, that they much annoy the Inhabitants. The opposite Place of the Globe to Candia, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 231 and 236 Degrees of Longitude, with 34 and 37 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Island is blessed with a very rich and fertile Soil, producing in great abundance, both Corn, Wine, 
Soil.  Oil, and most sorts of excellent Fruits. The length of the Days and Nights in Candia, is the same as in the Northmost Parts of Barbary. Of which afterwards.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Muscadel-Wine, Malmsey, Sugar, Sugar-Candy, Honey, Wax, 
Commodities.  Gum, Olives, Dates, Rasins, etc.  
North of Mount Psilorili, (the famous M. Ida) is a remarkable Grotto dug out of the firm Rock, which divers 
Rarities.  of our Modern Travellers would fain persuade 'emselves to be some Remains of King Minos' Labyrinth, so much talked off by the Ancients.  
Before the Turkish Conquest of this Island, there was one Archbishop, who had Nine Suffragans; but since 
Bishoprics, etc.  they changed their Masters, the number of such ecclesiastics is neither sixth nor certain.  
The Inhabitants of this Island were formerly given to Piracy, Debauchery, and Lying, especially the 
Manners.  last; and so noted were they for the same, that a notorious Lie was commonly termed Mendacium Cretense. For this detestable Vice were they reproached by one of their own Poets, Epimenides, out of whose Writings the Apostle citeth these words, K 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Tit. 1. 12. Their Experience in Maritime Affairs was indeed very great, and they're represented as a very considerable People among the Ancients for their Skill in Navigation. The present Inhabitants being Turks and Greeks, their respective Characters are already given, page 174, 181.  
Languages here in use, are the Vulgar Greek and Turkish, especially the former, the number of Greeks on 
Language.  the Island, being far greater than that of the Turks. For a Specimen of which Languages. Vid. page 175 and 181.  
This Island, after a bloody and tedious War of Twenty four Years, between the Turks and Venetians, 
Government.  was at last constrained to submit to the Ottoman Yoke, Anno 1669. under which it hath ever since groaned, and is now governed by a Turkish Sangiack, whose place of Residence is usually at Candie, the Capital City of the whole Island.  
See the Danuubian Provinces, page 182. 
Arms.   
Christianity according to the Greek Church, is here professed by Toleration, but Mahometanism is the 
Religion.  Religion established by Authority. This Island received the Light of the Blessed Gospel in the Apostolic Age.   

CYPRUS.  
THIS Island (known anciently by divers Names, besides the present, particular those of Acamantis, 
Name.  Amathusa, Aspelia, Cryptos, Cerastis, Macaria, and Aerosa) is termed by the Italians, Isola di Cypro; by the Spaniards, Chypre; by the French, Cypre; and by the Germans and English, Cyprus; so called (as most imagine) from K 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, [i. e. Cypress] wherewith this Island did mightily abound in former times.  
There being several Lakes, and some Natural Salt-pits in Cyprus, from which abundance of noxious 
Air.  Vapours daily arise; these intermixing 'emselves with the Body of the Atmosphere, do render the Air very gross and unhealthful to breathe in, especially during the sultry Heat of Summer. The opposite Place of the Globe to this Island, is that part of the Pacifick Ocean, between 235 and 240 Degrees of Longitu with 33 and 35 Degrees of South Latitude.  
Cyprus was formerly blessed with so rich and fruitful a Soil, that from its Fertility, and several Mines 
Soil.  found therein, the Greeks bestowed upon this Island the desirable Epithet of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Beata. But now 'tis remarkable for neither of these, especially the former, being in most Parts extremely Barren, though commonly represented otherways. The length of the Days and Nights in Cyprus, is the same as in the Northmost Parts of Barbary, (of which afterwards) they both lying under the same Parallel of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island are Silk, Cotton, Oil, Honey, Saffron, Rhubarb, Colliquintida, 
Commodities.  Scammony, Turpentine, Black and White Alum, etc.  
On the Eastern Part of this Island stands the famous Famagousta, remarkable at present for its Mordern Fortifications; 
Rarities.  and Eternised in Fame for the unfortunate Valour of the Venetians, Anno 1571. under the Command of Signior Bragadino, against the furious Assaults of Selimus the Second, with his numerous Army, conducted by Piuli and Mustapha. (2.) Not far from the present Famagousta, are the Ruins of an Ancient City, generally esteemed to have been that called formerly Salamina, and afterwards Constantia; which was ransacked by the Jews, in the time of the Emperor Trajan, and finally destroyed by the Saracens, in the Reign of Heraclius. (3.) Nigh that Promontory, commonly called, The Cape of Cats (but formerly Curias) are the Ruins of a Monastery of Greek Caloyers, which gave the Cape its Name from a remarkable Custom to which these Monks were obliged, viz. Their keeping a certain number of Cats, for the hunting and destroying of many Serpents that infested those Parts of the Island; to which Exercise those Creatures are said to have been so nicely bred, that at the first Sound of the Bell they would give over their Game, and immediately return to the Convent. (4.) In the Maritime Village of Salines, is a ruinous Greek Church, where Strangers are led into a little obscure Tomb, which the Modern Greeks affirm to be the place of Lazarus' second Interment. (5.) Adjacent to Salines is a remarkable Lake, or Natural Salt-pit of a considerable extent, whose Water congeals into solid white Salt by the Power of the Sunbeams. Lastly, In this Island is a high Hill, (the Ancient Olympus of Cyprus) called by the Franks, The Mountain of the Holy Cross, remarkable for nothing at present save several Monastries of Greek Caloyers, of the Order of St. Basil.  
Here is one Greek Archbishop, who commonly resideth nigh to Nicosia; and three Bishops, 
Archbishoprics, etc.  whose places of Residence, are Paphos, Larnica, and Cerines'.  
This Island being inhabited by Greeks and Mahometans, especially the former, (they being far superior 
Manners.  in number to the Turks) their respective Characters are already given, [page 174 and 181.] to which I remit the Reader.  
Languages here in use, are the Turkish and Vulgar Greek, especially the latter; but Lingua Franca is the 
Language.  Tongue they commonly speak with Strangers, it being understood and used by all trading People in the Levant.  
This Island hath been subject at different times to a great many different Sovereigns, particularly the 
Government.  Grecians, Egyptians, Romans, once the English, (when Conquered by Richard I.) and last, the Venetians, from whom 'twas wrested by the Turks, Anno 1571. under whose heavy Yoke it now groaneth, and is ruled by its particular Bassa, who ordinarily resideth at Nicosia.  
See the Danuubian Provinces, page 182. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of this Island being Greeks and Turks, (as aforesaid) the former profess Christianity 
Religion.  according to the Tenets of the Greek Church, [which may be seen, page 176.] and the latter Mahometanism according to their Alcoran; for the principal Articles of which, Vid. page 182. As for the Franks here residing, they make Profession of the respective Religions of the Country from whence they came. This Island received the Light of the Blessed Gospel in the Apostolic Age.    

Other observable Islands in the Mediterranean Sea, are Those of Negropont— Chief Town Idem, Adjacent to the E. of Greece. Stalimene Idem— In the Archipelago, from N. to S. Tenedo — Metelino— Idem— Scio— Idem— Sdelle— — Samo— Idem— Lango— — Rhodes— Idem— Cerigo— Idem, lying between Candia and the Morea, Zant— Idem— In the Ionian Sea, from S. to N. W. Cephalonia— Argostoli— Corfu— Idem—  
Somewhat of each of these, and in their Order. Therefore,  
I. Negropont (formerly Eubaea and Chalcis) is generally thought to have been annexed to the main Continent, and separated therefrom by an Earthquake. It's Soil is very fruitful, and M. Caristo is noted for excellent Morble, and the famous Stone Amianios or Asbestos. The whole Island is subject at present to the Turks, and ruled by a particular Bassa, who has also the Command of Achaia, and is Admiral of the Turkish Fleet.  
II. Stalimene (the Ancient Lemnos, so famous among the Poets) is also subject to the Great Turk; and observable only for a kind of Medicinal Earth, called formerly Terra Lemnia, but now Terra Sigillata, because yearly gathered, and put up in little Sacks, which are sealed with the Grand Signior's Seal, otherways not vendible to the Merchant.  
III. Tenedo or Tenedos, an Island much noted of old, as being dedicated to Apollo, and the place where the Grecians hide themselves when they feigned to have lost all hopes of taking Troy. It's now in Possession of the Turks, and remarkable for nothing at present, except its excellent Muscadine Wine.  
IV. Metellino, [now scarcely observable for any thing, save its Ancient Name of Lesbos,] which was the Birth place of Sapph, the Inventress of Sapphick Verse. 'Twas for some time under the Venetians, but now the Turks, to whom it pays yearly the Sum of 18000 Piastres.  
V. Scio (alias Chios) is an Island of much request among the Turks, for its great plenty of Mastic, which is yearly gathered by the Sultan's Bostangi's, or Gardeners, for the use of the Seraglio; 'twas lately taken by the Venetians, who possessed it but a short time.  
VI Sdelle is also in the Hands of the Turk, and famous for nothing at present, save only its ancient (now corrupted) Name of Delos, and some stately Ruins of Apollo's Temple still visible, with those of a large Theatre, and a Marble Portico.  
VII. Samo. There's scarce any Island in the Archipelago more frequently mentioned by the Ancients, than this of Samo, formerly Samos. It went also by the Names of Parthenia, Anthemosa, Melamphylos, Dryusa, Cyparissa, and several others. 'Tis now subject to the Turk, and hath reason to boast of nothing so much, as having been the Birth-place of that famous Philosopher, Pythagoras.  
VIII. Lango, formerly known by the Name of Co, Coa, or Cos, and remarkable of old for the Temple of Aesculapius, and being the Birth-place of the renowned Hypocrates and Ap●lles. It belonged to the Knights of Rhodes, but now to the Turks.  
IX Rhodes. This Island is famous all the World over, for that huge brazen Colossus of the Sun, formerly here erected, and deservedly reckoned one of the World's Wonders. The Inhabitants were likways so famous for their skill in Navigation, that for some Ages they were Sovereigns of these Seas, and made so just and excellent Laws in Maritime Affairs, as were afterwards esteemed worthy of being incorporated in the Roman Pandects. This Island (after the loss of Jerusalem and St. John d' Acre) was taken from the Saracans by the Hospitallers, or Knights of St. John, Anno 1309. who continued Masters of it till 1522. when Solyman II. Conquered it by the Treachery of Amurath, a Portugese. Since which time it hath owned the Grand Signior for its Sovereign, and is now ruled by a particular Bassa, sent thither from the Ottoman Port.  
X. Cerigo (the Cythera of the Ancients) being a considerable Island, inhabited by Greeks, and subject to the Republic of Venice, is governed by a Noble Venetian, in Quality of a Providitor, who is renewed every two Years. This Isle produceth some exceilent Wine, but in no great Quantity. It's also stocked with store of good Venison, and a competency of Corn and Oil, sufficient for its number of Inhabitants. The Greeks here residing, have the greater Veneration for this place, upon the account of a Vulgar Opinion now current among 'em, which is, that St. John the Divine began here to write his Apocalypse.  
XI. Zant (formerly Zacynthus) is another Island belonging to the Venetians, and one of the richest in the straits, abounding with Wine and Oil, but mostly noted for Currant, of which there is such plenty that many Ships are yearly fraughted with them for divers Ports of Europe. And such Advantage is that Currant-Trade to the Republic of Venice, that the Profits redounding from thence, do serve (according to the Testimony of a late Traveller) to defray the Charges of the Venetian Fleet. In this Island are several remarkable Fountains, out of which there bubbles up a pitchy Substance in great quantities. In the Monastery of Sancta Maria de la Croce, is the Tomb of M. T. Cicero and Terentia, his Wise, with two several Inscriptions (one for him, and the other for her) found upon a Stone, which, some time ago, was dug out of the Ground, nigh the place of the aforesaid Tomb. The Inhabitants (reckoning both Greeks and Jews) amount to about 20 or 25000, and are governed by a Noble Venetian, sent thither with full Power from the Senate.  
XII. Cephalonia (or old Melaena, Taphos, or Teleboa,) is likeways under the State of Venice, and chiefly abounds in dry Raisins, (which the Venetians turn to good Advantage) and excellent Wines, especially Red Muscadels, which many call by the Name of Luke Sherry. It hath its particular Providitor, whose Government lasteth Thirty two Months. This Island was bestowed upon the Republic of Venice, Anno 1224. by Gaio, than Lord thereof, but mastered by the Turks in 1479. and possessed by them till 1499 when driven thence by the Venetians, who re-peopled it with Christians, and afterwards fortifying the same against future Invasions, have hitherto continued Masters thereof.  
Lastly, Corfu (formerly Corcyra) is blessed with a very healthful Air, and fruitful Soil for Wine and Oil, but not for Corn, of which the Inhabitants are supplied from the Continent. It belongs to the Republic of Venice, and is deservedly termed, The Port of the Gulf, and Barrier of Italy. The Government thereof is lodged in six Noble Venetians, whose Power lasteth for the space of two Years. The first of these Noble Men hath the Title of Baily. The second, of Providitor and Captain. The third and fourth, of Counsellors. The fifth, of Great Captain. And the sixth, of Castelan, or Governor of the Castle de la Campana in the old Town. The Greeks are very numerous in this Island, and have a Vicar-General whom they style Proto-papa. In the time of Solyman II. no less than 25000 Turks did Land in Corfu, under the Command of the Famous Barbarossa; yet such was the Conduct of the wise Venetians, that they forced him to make a shameful Retreat  
To speak more particularly of each of these Islands, and many others, reducible to the two Classes of Cyclades and Sporades, would far surpass our designed Brevity. Conclude we therefore this tedious Section with the following Advertisement. That, whereas in treating of Islands, (after we took leave of the Continent of Europe) I esteemed it most methodical, to bring all those in the Mediterranean Sea, under the Title of European Islands; yet the Reader is hereby desired to take notice, that all of 'em are not usually reckoned as such; the Isle of Malta being generally accounted an African; and Cyprus with Rhodes among the Asiatic; as are also several others on the Coast of Anatolia.  
And so much for Europe and the European Islands. Now followeth,      


ASIA a New Description by Robt. Morden    

CHAP. II. Of ASIA.  
Divided (page 43.) into Tartary Capital City Chambalu. China Pekin or Xuntien. India Agra. Persia Ispahan. Turkey in Asia Aleppo.  
To these add the Asiatic Islands.  
Of all which in Order. Therefore,  

SECT. I. Concerning Tartary.  
 d. m. Situated between 77 10 of Long. its greatest Length from E to W. is about 3000 Miles. 163 00 between 37 00 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 2250 Miles. 75 04  
Tartary comprehends five great Parts.  
Viz. 3 South Kathay— Chief Town Chambalu— From E. to W. Turkhestan— Ihibet— Zagathay— Samarchand- 2 North Tartary propria Mongul, or Tenduc From E. to W. Tartary the Desert Cumbalich—  
THIS Country (the greatest Part thereof being reckoned the Scythia Asiatica of the Ancients) is 
Name.  termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Tartary; by the French, la Tartary; by the Germans, Tartarijen; and by the English, Tartary; so called from Tartar or Tatar, a River of that Country, which is said to empty itself into the vast Northern Ocean. But others choose rather to derive the Name from Tatar or Totar, which in the Syriack Language signifieth a Remnant, imagining that the Tartars are the remainders of those Israelites, who where carried by Salmanasser into Media. It's termed Tartary the Great, to distinguish it from the Lesser in Europe.  
The Air of this Country is very different, by reason of its vast Extent from South to North; the Southmost 
Air.  Parts thereof having the same Latitude with the middle Provinces of Spain, and the Northmost reaching beyond the Arctic Polar Circle. What its real Extent from East to West may be, is not certainly known as yet; only this we will affirm in general, that 'tis much less than commonly supposed, if the Relations of some late Travellers in these Parts of the World be found afterwards to hold true. The opposite Place of the Globe to Tartary, is part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, as also the Countries of Chili, Paraguay, and Terra Magellanica.  
This vast Country towards the North (it lying in the 6th, 7th, 8th 9th, 10th, 11th, 12th, etc. North Climate) 
Soil.  is extremely Barren, being every where encumbered with unwholesome Marshes, and uninhabited Mountains; but in the Southern Parts, the Soil is indifferently good for Tillage and Grazing, especially the latter; and towards the East 'tis reported to be abundantly fertile in Corn, (where duly manured) and several sorts of Herbs, especially Rhubarb. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about two Months (the Sun not Setting for that time when near the Summer Solstice) the shortest in the Southmost, is about 9 Hours ¼, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Sable, martin's, Silks, Comlets, Flax, Musk, Cinnamon, and 
Commodities.  vast Quantities of Rhubarb, etc.  
In lieu of the Rarities of this barbarous and little frequented Country, we may mention that prodigious 
Rarities.  Wall dividing Tartary from China, erected by the Chinese, to hinder the frequent Incursions of their unwelcome Neighbours, the Tartars; 'twas commonly reckoned Three hundred Germane Leagues in length, Thirty Cubits high in most places, and Twelve in breadth. The time of its building is computed to be about Two hundred Years before the Incarnation of our Blessed Saviour. By our latest Relations of the State and Nature of this Country, we find that some remarkable Vulcano's are to be seen in the North and Eastern Parts thereof.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities, in this 
Archbishoprics, etc.  Country; none.  
The Tartars are a People of a swarthy Complexion, strong Bodies, and middle Stature. The generality of 
Manners.  'em are Persons of broad Faces, hollow Eyes, thin Beards, thick Lips, slat Noses, and ugly Countenances. In Behaviour they're very Rude and Barbarous, commonly devouring the Flesh of their Enemies, and drinking their Blood, so soon as they are in their Power. Their ordinary Food is Horseflesh, which they greedily tear and eat up like so many Ravenous Vultures. Their manner of Living, is commonly in Tents in the open Fields, which they remove from place to place, according to the time of the Year, and conveniency of Grazing. Many of 'em make excellent Soldiers, being not only willing and able to endure great Fatigues, but also very dexterous and daring in time of Engagement. When they seem many times to fly before their Enemies, they'll unexpectedly send back a dreadful Shower of Arrows in the Faces of their Pursuers, and frequently turning about, do give them a violent Charge, and all without the least disorder. When their great Cham dies, 'tis reportd, That many of his chief Officers are immediately killed, and interred with him, that they may also attend him (as they imagine) in the other World, according to their respective Posts here.  
The Language used by the Asiatic Tartars, is not much different from the Tartaresque, spoken by those of 
Language.  Crim Tartary, (a Specimen of which is already given in Europe) and both have a great Affinity with the Turkish.  
The vast Body of Tartary is said to be subject to several Princes, who are wholly accountable (in their 
Government.  Government) to one Sovereign, who is commonly termed the Great Cham, whose Government is most Tyrannical, and Crown hereditary. The Lives and Goods of his People are altogether in his Power. His Subjects style him the Sun and Shadow of the Immortal God, and render him a kind of Adoration, never speaking unto him Face to Face, but falling down upon their Knees with their Faces towards the Ground. He looks upon himself as the Monarch of the whole World; and from that vain Opinion, is reported to cause his Trumpets to sound every Day after Dinner, pretending thereby to give leave to all other Kings and Princes of the Earth to Dine. For the better management of Public Affairs, he's said to appoint two Councils, each consisting of twelve Persons, (the wisest and best experienced of any that he can pitch upon) of which one doth constantly attend the Affairs of State, and the other those which relate to the War. Yet after all, this mighty Cham is looked upon by some Judicious Persons, as a mere Chimaera; and those strange Relations concerning him (though hitherto current) are thought to have a near Affinity unto the Legenda Aurea of the Roman Church.  
The most received Opinion about the Arms of the Great Cham, is, that (as Emperor of Tartary) he bears, 
Arms.  Or, an Owl Sable. But what as King of China, see the following Section.  
The Inhabitants of this Country are partly Pagan, partly Mahometan, and partly Christian. Paganism doth 
Religion.  chiefly prevail in the Northmost Parts, the People being generally gross Idolaters in those places. In the Southern Provinces they're (for the most part) followers of Mahomet's Doctrine, especially since the Year 1246. And towards the Caspian Sea are found a considerable number of Jews, thought by some to be the Offspring of the ten Tribes, led away Captive by Salmanasser. Those of the Christian Religion (overgrown of late by Nestorianism) are scattered up and down in several Parts of this vast Country, but most numerous in Cathay, and the City of Cambalu. The Christian Faith was first planted in this Country, (as is generally believed) by the Labours of St. Andrew and St. Philip, two of the Apostles.   

SECT. II. Concerning China.  
 d. m. Situated between 118 00 of Long. It's greatest Length from N. E. to S. W is about 1380 Miles. 141 00 between 20 30 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 1260 Miles. 41 10  
China contains Sixteen Provinces.  
Viz. 6 North Leaotung— Chief Town Leaoyang— — E. to W. Xantung— Chinan— Peking— Idem aliter Xuntien Xansi— Taiyven— — Honau— Kaijung— Xensi— Sigan— 10 South Nanking— Id. alit. Kiangnan E. to W Chekiang— Haugchew— Kiangsi— Nanchang— — Fokien— Focheu— Huquang— Unchang— — Quantung Quancheu— Suchuen— Chingtu— — Queicheu— Queiyang— Quansi— Quilin— Junnan— Idem—  
THIS Country (thought by most Geographers to be the Ancient Sinae, mentioned by Ptolemy) is 
Name.  termed by the French, la Chine; and by the Italians, Spaniards, Germans, and English, China; so called (according to the best Conjecture) from one of its Ancient Monarches, named Cina, who is said to have lived about fifty Years before the Nativity of our Blessed Saviour. Many other Names it hath had since that time; for when the Government falls from one Family to another, the first Prince of that Name is said to give a new Name to the whole Country; the latest of which Modern Names, are Tamin, signifying the Kingdom of Brightness; and Chuinque, i. e. The Kingdom of the Middle; the Chineses imagining that the Earth is Square, and that their Country is situated exactly in the middle of it.  
The Air of this Country is generally very Temperate, save only towards the North, where 'tis sometimes 
Air.  intolerably Cold, and that because of several Mountains of a prodigious height, whose Tops are ordinarily covered with Snow. The opposite Place to China, is the South part of Brasil, together with the East of Paraguay  
This Country (it lying in the 4th, 5th, 6th North Climate) is for the most part of a very rich and fertile 
Soil.  Soil, insomuch that its Inhabitants in several places, are said to have two, and sometimes three Harvests in a Year. It abounds with Corn, Wine, and all kinds of Fruits. Its Lakes and Rivers are very well furnished with Fish, and some afford various kinds of Pearls and Bezoar of great value. Its Mountains are richly lined with several Mines of Gold and Silver. Its Plains are extraordinary fit for Pasturage. And its pleasant Forests are every where stored with all sorts of Venison. In a word, the whole Country in general, is esteemed one of the best in the World. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 14 Hours ¾; the shortest in the Southmost, is about 10 Hours ¾, and the Night's proportionable.  
The Commodities of this Country, are Gold, Silver, Precious Stone, Quicksilver, porcelain Dishes, Silks, 
Commodities.  Cottons, Rhubarb, Sugar, Camphire, Musk, Ginger, China-Wood, etc.  
Peculiar to this Country, is a short Tree, with a round Head, and very thick, which in respect of its Fruit, 
Rarities.  may bear the Name of the Tallow Tree; for at a certain Season of the Year 'tis full of Fruit containing divers Kernels about the bigness of a small Nut, which Kernels have all the Qualities of Tallow, (being the very same, both as to Colour, Smell, and Consistency) and by mixing a little Oil with them, do make as good burning Candles, as Europeans usually make of pure Tallow itself. (2) Here is a large Mountain full of terrible Caverns, in one of which is a Lake of such a nature, that if a Stone be thrown into it, presently there's heard a hideous noise as of a frightful Clip of Thunder, and sometimes there ariseth a gross Mist which immediately dissolves into Water. (3.) In the City of Peking is a prodigious big Bell, weighing 120000 Pounds, surpassing the noted Bell of Erfurd in Upper Saxony, by 94600 Pounds: In Dimension 'tis eleven foot Diameter, forty in Circuit, and twelve High. (4) In Nanking is another of eleven foot High, and seven in Diameter, and weighing 50000 Pounds, which also surpasseth the Bell of Erfurd, (weighing only 25400 Pounds, yet hitherto supposed the greatest in the World) by almost double its weight. (5.) In China are several Vulcano's (particularly that Mountain called Lincsung) which vomits out Fire and Ashes so furiously, as frequently to raise some hideous Tempests in the Air. (6.) Here are some Rivers, whose Waters are cold at the top, but warm beneath; as also several remarkable Fountains which send forth so hot a Steam, that People usually boil Meat over them. (7.) In this Country are several Lakes, remarkable for changing Copper into Iron, or making it just of the like resemblance; as also for causing Storms when any thing is thrown into them. (8.) In the Island Haman, there is said to be Water (uncertain whether in Lake, River, or Fountain) of such a strange quality, that it petrifies some sort of Fishes when they unfortunately chance to enter into it. (9) Many are those Triumphal Arches (to be seen in most of the noted Cities of this Empire) erected in Honour of such Persons as have either done some signal pieces of Service to the State, or have been conspicuous in their times for their singular Knowledge. (10.) In this Country are several remarkable Bridges, particularly that over a a River, called S●ffruny, which reaches from one Mountain to another, being Four hundred Cubits long, and Five hundred high, and all but one Arch; whence 'tis called by Travellers Pons volans. Here likewise is another of Six hundred and sixty Perches in length, and one and a half broad, standing upon Three hundred Pillars without any Arches. Lastly, In China are many very observable Plants, Animals, and Fossils', especially the last, among which is the Asbestos. But for a particular Account of 'em. Vid. Kircherus' China Illustrata.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities, are hardly to be expected her; however this Country (according 
Archbishoprics.  to the Testimony of Popish Missionaries) is furnished with some of these, Pekin, Nanquin and Macao, having each of 'em a particular Bishop nominated by the King of Portugal, and the other Provinces are under the Jurisdiction of three Apostolical Vicars. Under which Ecclesiastical Superiors, there are (by their Relations) above Two hundred Churches or Private Chapels dedicated to the True God.  
The Chinois [Persons for the most part of a fair Complexion, short Nosed, black Eyed, and of very 
Manners.  thin Beards] are great Lovers of Sciences, and generally esteemed a very ingenious sort of People. They're said to have had the use of Printing and Guns long before either of 'em was known in Europe. Many of 'em are great Proficients in several Parts of the Mathematics, especially Arithmetic, Geometry, and Astronomy; and so conceited are they of their own Knowledge in these things; and so mean are their Thoughts of others, that 'tis generally reported of 'em, that (speaking of themselves) they commonly say, That they have two Eyes, the Europeans one, and the rest of the World none at all. They who wholly apply themselves to the study of Sciences, and make such proficiency in them, as to become Doctors to others, are distinguished by their long Nails, suffering 'em sometimes to grow as long as their Fingers, that being esteemed a singular Characteristick of a profound Scholar, and a differencing mark between them and Mechanics.  
The Language of the Chinois is extremely difficult to be acquired by Strangers, and differeth from all 
Language.  others, both as to its Nature, Pronunciation, and way of Writing. (1.) It's Nature. They use no Alphabet, as Europeans do, and are astonished to hear that by Twenty four Letters we can express our Thoughts, and fill Libraries with Books. In lieu of an Alphabet they formerly used Hieroglyphics, setting down the Images of things for the things themselves; but this being extremely tedious, and likeways defective, (there being no such Resemblances of pure Abstracts) they then made Characters to signify Words, numbering them according to the number of Words they needed to express their Ideas; which Characters arise to such a prodigious multitude, that not only Strangers, but even the Natives themselves, find it a very difficult matter to acquire an intimate acquaintance with them all. (2.) It's Pronounciation. Although all the Original Terms of this Tongue are Three hundred and thirty three, yet such is their peculiar way of pronouncing them, that the same Term admits of various, and even contrary Significations, according to the various Accent in pronouncing of it. And of these Accenrs, there are five applicable to every Term, which extremely augments the difficulty of either speaking or understanding this Tongue to perfection; besides, the Pronunciation thereof is accompanied with such variety of Motions of the Hand, that a mute Person can speak almost intelligibly by his Fingers. And as to the Manner of Writing, they differ from all other Nations; for whereas Christians write from the Left hand to the Right; and the Jews from the Right to the Left, they usually make their Lines from the top of the Page down to the bottom.  
This Great Kingdom was formerly under its own particular King or Emperor, but of late overrun and 
Government.  conquered by the Tartars, to whom it's at present subject, acknowledging due Allegiance to the Great Cham, whose Government is as Despotical as any of the Oriental Monarches; for he hath full Power over the Lives of his Subjects, the Princes of the Blood not excepted. His bare Word is the Law, and his Commands admit of no delay nor neglect. He is seldom seen, and never spoke with, but upon the Knees. Upon his Deathbed he may choose his Successor out of what Family he pleaseth. For the better managing the great Affairs of this mighty Empire, he's assisted by two Sovereign Councils; one Extraordinary, composed of Princes of the Blood only; and the other Ordinary, which besides the Princes, doth consist of several Ministers of State, called Colaos. But over and above these two Councils, there are at Pekin six Sovereign Courts, whose Authority extend over all the Empire, and to each of 'em belong different Matters; viz. (1.) Is that Court called Lupou, which presides over all the Mandarins, and confers upon, or takes from them their Offices. (2.) Ho●pou, which looks after the Public Treasury, and takes care of raising the Taxes. (3.) Lipou, which inspects into Ancient Customs; and to it is committed the care of Religion, Sciences, and Foreign Affairs. (4.) Pimpou, which hath charge of the Soldiery, and other Officers. (5.) Himpou, which inquires and passes Sentence in all Criminal Matters. Lastly, Compou, which looks after all Public Buildings, as the Emperor's Palaces, and such like. In each of these Courts, the Emperor hath one, who may be termed a Private Censor; it being his business to observe all that passeth, and to acquaint him faithfully therewith, which makes all Persons very cautious in their Actions. Over each Province is appointed a Vice Roy, and under him a great many Public Officers. To shun Oppression of the Subject by these various Ministers, the Emperor before the Tartarian Conquest, had a certain number of secret Spies in every Province, to have a watchful Eye upon the Actions of every Public Officer, and upon any visible Act of Injustice in discharge of his Office, they were to produce their Commission, and by virtue thereof did seize such an Officer, though of the highest Station: but this is laid aside, those Persons having mightily abused their Power. Yet in lieu thereof, they still retain one Custom which is certainly very singular, viz. That every Vice Roy and Public Officer, is bound to take a Note of his own Miscarriages in the Management of Public Affairs from time to time, and humbly acknowledging the same, is bound to find them in writing to Court. Which Task is undoubtedly very irksome on one hand, if duly performed; but yet more dangerous on the other, if wholly neglected. Very remarkable are three Maxims of State carefully observed by the Chinesian Emperors, viz. (1) Never to give any Mandarin a Public Office in his Native Province, lest being of a mean Descent, it might contribute to his Disparagement, or being well Descended, and beloved, he should thereby grow too powerful. (2.) To retain at Court the Children of the Mandarins employed in Public Offices, and that under pretence of giving them good Education, but 'tis in effect as Hostages, lest their Fathers should chance to forget their Duty to the Emperor. Lastly, Never to sell any Public Office, but to confer the same according to Person's Merits.  
The Great Cham, as King of China, is said to bear for Ensigns Armorial, Argent, three Black-a-moor's 
Arms.  Heads placed in the Front, their bust vested Gules, but (according to others) two Dragons.  
The prevailing Religion in China, is Paganism or gross Idolatry; and in some Parts, the Doctrine of Mahomet 
Religion.  is entertained. Of the several Idols to whom the Chineses pay their Devotions, there are two of chief Note, viz. One in form of a Dragon, whom the Emperor, with his Mandarins do religiously Worship, prostrating themselves frequently before it, and burning Incense unto it. The other is called Foe or Foë, set up (as is conjectured) in favour of one of their own Nation, who is thought to have flourished about a thousand Years before our Blessed Saviour, and for his wonderful Parts and Actions was esteemed worthy of being Deified at his Death. They look upon him as the Saviour of the World, and that he was sent to teach the Way of Salvation, and make an Atonement for the Sins of Men. They mightily prise some Moral Precepts which they pretend he left, and which the Bonzes (or Priests) do frequently inculcate upon the Minds of the People. To this God are erected many Temples, and he's worshipped not only under the Shape of a Man, but in the Person of a Real Man, who, they say, never dies, being upheld in that vain Opinion by the Lamas, (or Tartaran Priests) who upon the Death of that Immortal Man, take due care [as the Egyptian Priests did their Apis] to put one of their own number in his room, and that of the same Features and Proportion, or as near as possibly they can. The Chineses have a mighty Spur to be cautious in all their Actions from an Opinion universally received among them, viz. That the Souls of their deceased Friends are always (at least frequently) present with them, and narrowly viewing their Deportment. If we may believe the Writings of some late French Missionaries, Christianity hath obtained considerable footing of late in this Country, especially in the Province of Nankin, and that the present Emperor hath allowed of the same by a Public Edict throughout all the Empire. The first Plantation of Christianity in this part of the World, was undertaken (according to common belief) by St. Thomas, or some of his Disciples. Which Opinion is confirmed by an Ancient Breviary of the Indian Churches, containing these Words. Per D. Thomam Regnum Caelorum volavit & ascendit ad Sinas.   

SECT. III. Concerning India.  
 d. m. Situated between 92 00 of Long. its greatest Length from N. W. to S. E. is about 1680 Miles. 131 06 between 08 12 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 1690 Miles. 40 00  
India [viz. all between China and Persia] comprehends  
The Great Mogul's Empire containing many little Kingdoms, but chiefly those of Delli— Chief Town Idem in the main Land. Agra— Idem Cambaia— Idem on the Sea-Coast. Bengala— Idem Peninsula Indiae intra Gangem, containing the Kingdoms of Decan— Goa Northward. Golcond— Idem Bisnagar— Idem in the middle. Malabar— Calicute Southward. Peninsula Indiae extra Gangem, containing the Kingdoms of Pegu— Idem from N. to S. Tunqum— Idem Cochinchin— Idem Siam Martaban Idem Siam— Idem Malacca Idem  
THIS vast Complex Body, considered here under the Title of India, [viz. all between Persia and China] comprehends (as aforesaid) many distinct and considerable Kingdoms; but all reducible to Three great Divisions abovementioned, to wit, the Mogul's Empire, and the two Peninsula's of India, one within, and the other without the Ganges. Of all which separately, and in their Order. Therefore,  

§. 1. The Mogul 's Empire.  
THIS Country is a great Part of the Modern and Ancient India, remarkable in the History of 
Name.  Alexander the Great, and termed India from the River Indus, but now the Mogul's Empire, as being subject unto that mighty Eastern Monarch, commonly known by the Name of the Great Mogul.  
In the Northern parts of this Empire, the Air is said to be extremely cold and piercing about the time 
Air.  of the Sun's greatest Southern Declination; but in the Southern Provinces much more temperate. The opposite Place of the Globe to the Mogul's Empire, is that part of the ●ast Pacifick Ocean, between 270 and 310 Degrees of Longitude, with 25 and 39 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this vast Country (it lying in the 3d and 4th North Climate) is extraordinary barren in several 
Soil.  Parts, being encumbered with formidable dry sandy Mountains, but elsewhere very plentiful, especially in Cotton, Millet, Rice, and most sorts of Fruits. The length of the Days and Nights in this Country, is the same as in the Kingdom of China, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Aloes, Musk, Rhubarb, Wormseeds, Civits', Indigo, Laique, 
Commodities.  Bor●x, Ogium, Amber, Myrabolans, Salarmoniac, Silk, Cottons, Calicoes, Satins, Taffetas, Carpets, Metals, porcelain Earth, and most sorts of Spices. etc.  
In several Parts of the Mogul's Empire, particularly the Kingdom of Cambaia are divers noted Vulcano's, 
Rarities.  which usually Smoke, and sometimes break out in terrible Eruptions of Fire and Sulphurous Matter. In and about the Imperial City of Agra, are the splendid Sepulchers of the Royal Family of the Moguls; particularly that glorious Monument of the Empress to Ch●-G●han, erected nigh to the Grand Bazar, which is reported to be a very stately Structure, and of so vast a bigness, that Twenty thousand Artificers were employed in erecting of it for the space of Twenty two Years. But what mostly deserves our regard, in the whole Kingdom of Indosian, is that Rich and Glorious Throne in the Palace of Agra, on which the Great Mogul doth usually appear during the Festival of his Birth Day, where he receives the Compliments and Presents of the Grandees, after the yearly Ceremony of weighing his Person is over. This stately Throne (so noted among Travellers in these Parts) is said to stand upon Feet and Bars, overlaid with enameled Gold, and adorned with several large Diamonds, Rubies and other precious Stones. The Canopy over the Throne is set thick with curious Diamonds, and surrounded with a Fringe of Pearl. Above the Canopy is the lively Effigies of a Peacock, whose Tail sparkles with blue Saphires, and other Stones of different Colours; his Body is of enameled Gold set with Jewels, and on his Breast is a large Ruby, from which hangs a Pearl as big as an ordinary Pear. On both sides of the Throne are two Umbrellas of curious Red Velvet, richly embroidered with Gold, and encompassed with a Fringe of Pearl; ●he very Sticks whereof are also covered with Pearls, Rubies, and Diamonds. Over against the Emperor's Seat is a choice Jewel with a hole bored through it, at which hangs a prodigious big Diamond, with many Rubies and Emeralds round about it. These and several others not here mentioned, are the costly Ornaments of this Indian Throne, which (if all related of it be true) cannot be matched by any other Monarch upon the Face of the whole Earth.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of the various Parts of this vast Empire, are Persons of various Tempers and Customs. 
Manners.  What those of the Inland Provinces are, is not very certain, (our Intelligence of 'em being yet very slender) but the People of the Southern or Maritime places of the Mogul's Dominions, are Persons (for the most part) very tall of Stature, strong of Body, and in Complexion inclining some what to that of the Negroes. In Behaviour, Civil; in their Dealings pretty just; and many of the Mechanical sort prove wonderful Ingenious.  
Both here, and in the two Peninsula's hereafter mentioned, are various Languages, and these again divided 
Language.  into different Dialects; but the Arabic is still used in their Religious Offices. Among the several Languages spoken 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the Mogul's Dominions, the Gazarate Tongue is reckoned the chief, and is mostly used in the Kingdoms of Cambaya and Bengala; but the Persian is said to be the Language of the Court.  
This vast Body comprehends a great many Kingdoms, some of which are free, some subject to 
Government.  others, and most of 'em Tributary to one Sovereign, namely the Great Mogul, whose Government is most Tyrannical, for he hath both the Purses and Persons of his Subjects wholly at his disposal, and is Lord of all, being Heir to every Man's Estate. His Imperial Seat is ordinarily at Agra, which is a very Rich and Populous City, lying in the Province of the same Name, and the Metropolis of the whole Empire. If he allows paternal Inheritance any where, the same is revokable at his pleasure. His bare Will is the Law, and his Word a final Decision of all Controversies. The Indian Diadem is not entailed by Primogeniture on the Sons, but is either ravished by force, or carried by craft, of such who stand in Competition for it: he generally succeeding to the Throne, who hath mostly gained the Favour and Assistance of the Omrahs' and Nabobs, with other Grandees at Court; and upon his Instalment therein, he commonly sacrificeth all his Rivals and nearest Relations, reckoning his Throne to be but tottering, unless its Foundations be laid in the Blood of such Persons. His Revenue is indeed so vast that a bare Relation would seem incredible, but proportionably to the same, are his necessary ways of employing it; for to a we the prodigious multitude of People within the vast Extent of his Dominions, he's obliged to keep in daily pay many Legions of Soldiers, otherways 'twere impossible to Command the turbulent Rajahs, who (as it is) do frequently make Insurrections, and disturb his Government.  
The Ensigns Armorial of the Great Mogul, are said to be Argent, Semé with Besants, Or. As for particular 
Arms.  Coats of Arms, peculiar to private Persons, as in Europe, here are none, no Man within the Mogul's Dominions being Hereditary, either to his Estate or Honours.  
The Inhabitants of this Country are mostly Pagan, and next to Paganism the Religion of Mahomet prevails, 
Religion.  it being chiefly embraced according to the Commentaries of Mortis Haly. Of the Pagans, here are various Sects and Orders among them, particularly the Banians, the Persees, and Faquirs. (1.) The Bantans, who believe a 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Transmigration of Souls, and thereupon do usually build Hospitals for Beasts, and will upon no account deprive any Creature of Life, lest thereby they dislodge (as they imagine) the Soul of some departed Friend. But of all living Creatures they have the greatest Veneration for the Cow, to whom they pay a Solemn Address every Morning, and at a certain time of the Year they drink the Stale of that worshipful Animal, believing it hath a singular Quality to purify all their Desilements. Besides their constant Abstinence from the Food of any Animal, they frequently refrain from all eatables till Night. Of these Bantans there are reckoned in India about Twenty four different Casts or Sects. (2.) Persees, (the Posterity of the Ancient Persians) who worship the Element of Fire, for which reason they're also called Gaures, i. e. Worshippers of Fire. Besides the Fire, they have a great Veneration for the Cock. To kill the one, or extinguish the other, is esteemed by them a Crime unpardonable. Their High Priest is called Destoor, and their Ordinary Priests Darcos or Harboods. Lastly, The Faquirs, (a kind of Religious Monks) who live very austere Lives, being much given to Fasting, and several Acts of Mortification, and some (as a voluntary Penance) make solemn Vows of keeping their Hands clasped about their Heads; others hold one (and some both Arms) stretched out in the Air, and a thousand such ridiculous Postures, and all during Life. Which Vows once made, they sacredly observe, notwithstanding the Observation of 'em is attended with exquisite Pain. Most of the Indians believe that the River Ganges hath a sanctifying Quality; whereupon they flock thither at certain Seasons in vast multitudes, to plunge themselves therein. Dispersed through the Mogul's Dominions, is a considerable number of Jews, and upon the Seacoasts are many European Christians, all upon the account of Traffic. Those Parts of India which received the Blessed Gospel in former times, were instructed therein (as is generally believed) by the Apostle, St. Thomas.   

§. 2. The Peninsula of India within the Ganges.  
THIS large Country (comprehending several Kingdoms abovementioned) was termed Peninsula 
Name.  Indiae intra Gangem by the Ancients, particularly the Romans, and that upon the account of its Situation. being within, or on this side the River Ganges, in respect of the Empire of Persia, or Western Parts of Asia.  
The Air of this Country is generally very hot, yet in most of the Maritime Places, 'tis frequently qualified 
Air.  by cold Breezes from the Sea. The opposite Place of the Globe to this Peninsula, is that part of the Pacifick Ocean, between 230 and 245 Degrees of Longitude, with 17 and 25 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Peninsula is (for the most part) extraordinary Fertile, producing all desirable Fruits, 
Soil.  Roots, and Grain, besides vast quantities of Medicinal Herbs. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts of this Country, is about 13 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost is 11 Hours ½, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Metals, Silks, Cottons, Pearls, Drugs, Dates, Cocoes, Rice, 
Commodities.  Ginger, Cinnamon, Pepper, Cassia, etc.  
In several places of the Kingdom of Decan, is a noted Tree, called by Travellers the Nure-Tree, whose Nature 
Rarities.  is such, that every Morning 'tis full of stringy Red Flowers, which in the heat of the Day fall down in Showers to the Ground; and blossoming again in the Night, it daily appears in a new Livery. (2.) In the Island Salsete, adjacent to Goa, are vast Recept●●les cut out of the main Rock, one above another some of ●em being equal in bigness to a Village of Four hundred 〈◊〉 and adorned throughout with strange frightful Statues of 〈◊〉 representing Elephants, Tigers, Lions, Amazons, etc. (3) In the Island Conorein, near Bombay, (belonging to the 〈◊〉) is a City of the same Name, having divers large Heathen Temples and many other Apartments, all cut out of the firm Rock; Which stupendious Work is attributed by some to Alexander the Great, but that without any show of probability. (4.) In another adjacent Island, (belonging also to the Portuguese, and called Elephanco from a huge Artisicial Elephant of Stone, bearing a young one upon its Back) is another Idolatrous Temple of a prodigious bigness cut out of the firm Rock. 'Tis supported by forty two Pillars, and open on all sides, except the East, where stands an Image with three Heads, adorned with strange Hieroglyphics, and the Walls are set round with monstrous Giants, whereof some have no less than eight Heads. (5.) At a City in the Kingdom of Decan, known to Travellers by the Name of Dungeness, is another Heathen Temple, much the same with that abovementioned.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universittes. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of the various Provinces of this Peninsula are much the same in Manners with those in the 
Manners.  Southern Parts of the Mogul's Dominions already mentioned.  
The chief of the Indian Tongues in this Peninsula, are Two, viz. the Carabine mostly in use about Goa, 
Language.  and the Gazarate which is spoken in Bisnagar, and the Coasts of Coromandel.  
In this Peninsula are a great many Princes, who assume to themselves the Title of Kings; the chief of 
Government.  them being those of Calicut, Cochin, Cananor, Crang●ner, Travancor, and Taner; besides which, are several sorts of People in various parts of this Country, who acknowledge Subjection to none of these, nor to any other; nor can they accord among themselves, being commonly divided into various Parties, who pitisully harass one another; and those on the Coast of Malabar, are much addicted to Piracy.  
What are the true Ensigns Armotial of these Indian Princes, [or if any] is mostly conjectural; all we find 
Arms.  of 'em, is, that some in Decan and Cambaia bear Verte, encompassed with a Coilar of large precious Stones.  
The Inhabitants of this Peninsula are generally Mahometans, especially those who live near the Seacoasts, 
Religion.  but People residing in the Inland Parts are gross Idolaters, worshipping not only the Sun and Moon, but also many Idols of most ugly and horrible Aspects; and in some Parts of Decan they look upon the first Creature they meet with in the Morning, as the proper Object of their Worship for that Day, except it be a Crow, the very sight of which will confine them to their Houses the whole Day. In most of the Seaport Towns and Places of Trade, are Jews in considerable numbers, and many European Christians, especially those of our English Factories. Christianity was first planted in this Country much about the same time with the Mogul's Empire. Of which already.   

§. 3. The Peninsula of India beyond the Ganges.  
THIS last Division of India is termed the Peninsula beyond the Ganges, because of its Situation, 
Name.  it lying beyond that famous River, in respect of the other Peninsula, or the Western Parts of Asia in general.  
The Air of this Peninsula is somewhat different, according to the Situation and Nature of the various 
Air.  Parts of that Country, yet generally esteemed indifferent healthful, and temperate enough, considering the Latitude of those places. The opposite Place of the Globe to this Peninsula, is that part of Nova Zelandia, between 210 and 230 Degrees of Longitude, with 1 to 24 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying under the 1st, 2d, and 3d North Climate) is extraordinary Fertile, 
Soil.  producing in great plenty all sorts of desirable Fruits and Grain; besides 'tis well stocked with invaluable Mines, and great quantity of precious Stones; yea, so vastly Rich is this Country, that the Southmost part thereof (viz. Chersonese d'or) is esteemed by many to be the Land of Ophir, to which King Solomon sent his Ships for Gold. The longest Day in the Northmost parts is about 13 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost, near about 12 Hours, and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold, Silver, precious Stones, Silks, porcelain Earth, Aloes, 
Commodities.  Musk, Rhubarb, Alabaster, etc.  
Among the Rarities of this Country, we may reckon the Golden House in the City of Arracan, being 
Rarities.  a large Hall in the King's Palace, whose inside is entirely overlaid with Gold, having a stately Canopy of Massy Gold, from the Edges of which hang above an hundred Combalenghe, or large Wedges of Gold in form of Sugar-Loaves. Here also are seven Idols of Massy Gold, of the height of an ordinary Man, whose Foreheads, Breasts, and Arms are adorned with variety of precious Stones, as Rubies, Emeralds, Saphires, and Diamonds. In this Hall are also kept the two famous Caneques, i. e. two Rubies of prodigious Value, about which the Neighbouring Princes frequently contending, have drawn Seas of Blood from each others Subjects, and all from a vain Opinion. That the Possession of those Jewels carry along with them a just Claim of Dominion over the Neighbouring Princes.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
What was said of the Natives of the other Peninsula in point of Manners, the same may be affirmed of 
Manners.  those inhabiting this. The various Europeans here residing, are much the same in Manners with the respective People of Europe, from whence they came.  
The chief of the Indian Tongues in this Peninsula, is that called the Malaye, mostly used in Malacca; but 
Language.  besides the various Indian Tongues, both in the Mogul's Empire, and the two Peninsula's, the Portugueze Language is commonly understood and spoken in all Maritime Towns of Trade, it being the chief Language that's used in daily Commerce between the Franks and Natives of that Country.  
In this Peninsula are a great many different States and Kingdoms, particularly that of Pegu, (a very 
Government.  rich Kingdom) subject to its own Monarch, whose Sovereignty is acknowledged by divers other considerable ●ates, as Asem, Aracan, and Tipra, besides the Ancient brahmin's, and other People living on the West of China, as the Lays, Timocoves, Gue●es, and Ciocangaes, all Tributary to him. Here also are the rich and flourishing Kingdoms of Tunquin and Cochinchin, especially the former, whose King is esteemed a mighty Potent Prince, able to bring into the Field vast multitudes of Men upon all occasions. And lastly, The King of Siam (to whom a great many Princes are Tributary) is esteemed one of the richest and most Potent Monarches of all the East, and assumes (as some allege) the Title of the King of Heaven and Earth; and yet notwithstanding of his mighty Force and Treasure, he is said to be Tributary to the Tartars, and to pay them yearly a certain kind of Homage.  
We find no satisfactory Account of what Ensigns Armorial are born by these Eastern Princes; or if any 
Arms.  at all.  
The Inhabitants of this Peninsula are generally great Idolaters. Those of Siam are said to maintain Pythagoras' 
Religion.  Metempsychosis, and commonly adore the four Elements. Wheresoever Mahometanism prevails, 'tis generally intermixed with many Pagan Rites and Ceremonies, as particularly in Cambodia, on the River Menan, in which City are almost three hundred stately Mosques, not only well furnished with excellent Bells (contrary to the Turkish Custom elsewhere) but also with a great many Idols of all sorts. In the Kingdom of Pegu, they have a great Opinion of the Sanctity of Apes and Crocodiles, believing those Persons very happy who are devoured by them. They observe yearly five Solemn Festivals, (called in their Language Sapans) and distinguished by the Names of Giachie, Cateano-Giaimo, Segienou, Daiche, and Donon. Their Priests are called Raulini, and are divided into three Orders, distinguished by the Names of Pungrini, Pangiani, and Xoxom. They have also many Hermits, whom they divided into Grepi, Manigrepi, and Taligrepi, who are all in great esteem among the People. Christianity was planted here much about the same time with the other Peninsula already mentioned.    

SECT. IV. Concerning Persia.  
 d. m. Situated between 70 30 of Long. It's greatest Length from E. to W is about 1440 Miles. 97 00 between 25 40 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 1260 Miles. 44 30 It's divided into many Provinces, but chiefly those towards the North, viz. Scirvant— Chief Town Derbent— W. to E. Giland— Gilan— Cherassan— Heret— Middle, viz. Erach— Ispahan— W. to E. Sablestan— Bost— Sigistan— Sitzistan South, viz. Cusistan— Susa— W. to E. Fars— Schiras— Kirman— Gombroon Macran— Titz—  
THIS Country (known to the Ancients by the same Name, and some others, but of a much 
Name.  larger Extent than at present) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Persia; by the French, Perseus; by the Germans, Persien; and by the English, Persia; so called (as many allege) from one of its Ancient Provinces, named Persis, or (according to others) from Perses, an Illustrious Lord in the Country of Elam, who for his Merit is said to have obtained the Government of the People, and to have called both Country and Inhabitants after his Name. But finally others do eagerly plead for an Hebrew Etymology, deriving the Name from the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Equites. For 'tis reported of the Inhabitants of this Country, that before the Reign of Cyrus the Great, they seldom used to Ride, or knew very little how to manage a Horse; and that such was their Dexterity afterwards in managing Horses, that this Country is said to assume its Name from that Animal. For the strengthening of which Opinion they farther observe that the Title of Persia is not found in those Books of Holy Scripture, which were written before the time of Cyrus.  
The Air of this Country is very temperate, especially towards the North, beyond the vast Mountain of 
Air.  Taurus; but in the Southern Provinces 'tis scorching hot for several Months. The opposite Place of the Globe to Persia, is part of Mare deal Zur, between 250 and 280 Degrees of Longitude, with 25 and 40 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 3d and 4th North Climate) is very different; for in the Northern 
Soil.  Parts adjacent to Tartary, and the Caspian Sea, the Ground is very barren, producing but little Corn, and few Fruits. But South of Mount Taurus, the Soil is said to be extraordinary fertile, the Country pleasant, and plentiful of Corn, Fruits, Wines, etc. affording also some rich Mines of Gold and Silver. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts is about 14 Hours ¾; the shortest in the Southmost is 13 Hours ¼; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are curious Silks, Carpets, Tissues, Manufactures of Gold, Silk, 
Commodities.  and Silver, Seal-Skins, Goatskins, Alabaster, and all sorts of Metals, Myrrh, Fruits, etc.  
This Country (among its chief Rarities) doth yet boast of the very Ruins of the once proud Palace of 
Rarities.  Persepolis, so famous of old, and now called by the Inhabitants Chil-manor, signifying forty Pillars: which imports that so many were standing some Ages ago, but at present there's only nineteen remaining, together with the Ruins of above eighty more. Those Pillars yet standing are of excellent Marble, and about fifteen Foot high; for a particular Draught of 'em, with the Copy of several Inscriptions in unknown Characters, Vid. Philos. Trans. N. 201, and 210. (2.) In the City of Ispahan is a large Pillar sixty Feet high, consisting purely of the Skulls of Beasts, erected by Shaw Abas the Great, (upon a Sedition of his Nobles) who vowed to rear up a Column of their Heads, as a Monument of their Obloquy to after Ages, if they persisted in Disobedience; but they surrendering upon Discretion, he ordered each of 'em to bring the decollated Head of some Beast, and lay at his Feet; which was accordingly done, and of them he made the aforesaid Pillar in lieu of a Column of their own Heads. (3.) One of the Emperor's Gardens at Ispahan is so sweet and delicate a place, that it commonly goes by the Name of Hest Behest, i e. Paradise upon Earth; and the Royal Sepulchers of the Persian Monarches, are indeed so stately, that they deserve to be mentioned here. (4.) About thirty Miles North East of Gombroon, is a most hideous Cave, which for its formidable Aspect, is termed Hell's Gate by our English Travellers, who have passed that way. (5.) At Genoe, about twelve or fourteen Miles North of Gombroon, are some excellent Baths, esteemed very good against most Chronical Distempers, and much frequented for all inveterate Ulcers, Aches, and such like. (6.) Within five Leagues of Da●●an is a prodigious high Pike of the same Name, from whose top (covered all over with Sulphur, which Sparkles in the Nighttime like Fire) one may clearly see the Caspian Sea, though an hundred and eighty Miles distant; and nigh to this Sulphurous Pike are some famous Baths, where there's a great resort of People at certain times of the Year. Lastly, In several Parts of Persia, are Mountains of curious black Marble, and Springs of the famous Naphtha, with variety of other Minerals.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics. etc.   
The Persians are a People [both of old, and as yet] much given to Astrology, many of them making it 
Manners.  their chief Business to search after future Events by Astrological Calculations. They are naturally great Dissemblers, Flatterers, and Swearers; as also very Proud, Passionate, and Revengful; excessive in their Luxury, Pastimes, and Expenses; much addicted to Tobacco, Opium, and Coffee; yet with all, they are said to be (for the most part) very respective to their Superiors; Just and Honest in their Dealings, and abundantly Civil to Strangers. And most of those, who betake themselves to Trades, prove very Ingenious in making curious Silks, Cloth of Gold, and such like.  
The Persian Language (having a great Tincture of the Arabic) is reckoned not only much more polite 
Language.  than the Turkish, but is also esteemed the modish Language of Asia. It's divided into many particular Dialects, and the Characters they use are mostly Arabic. As for pure Arabic, that's the School-Language of the Persians, in which not only the Mysteries of the Alcoran; but also all their Sciences are written, and is learned by Grammar, as Europeans do Latin.  
This large Country is wholly subjected to one Sovereign, namely it's own Emperor, commonly styled, 
Government.  The Great Sophi of Persia, whose Government is truly Despotical, and Crown Hereditary, the Will of the King being a Law to the People, and he Master of all their Lives and Estates; his numerous Subjects render him a kind of Adoration, and never speak of him, but with the greatest Respect. As most of the Asiatic Princes affect very vain and exorbitant Titles, so does the Persian Monarch in particular, he being generally styled— King of Persia, P●●thia, Media, Bactria, Chorazon, Condahor, and Herl, of the 〈◊〉 Tartar, of the Kingdoms of Hyrcania, Draconia, Evergeta, Pa●●●nia, Hydaspia and Sogdiana, of Aria, Paropaniza, Dra●g●●ta, Arachosia, Mergiana and Carmania, as far as stately Indus. Sultan of Ormus, Larr, Arabia, Susiana, Chaldea, Mesopotamia, Georgia, Armenia, Sarcashia, and Uan. Lord of the Imperial Mountains of Ararat, Taurus, Cancasus, and Periardo. Commander of all Creatures from the Sea of Chorazan to the Gulf of Persia. Of true Descent from Mortis-Ally. Prince of the four Rivers, Euphrates, Tigris, Araxis, and Indus. Governor of all the Sultan's. Emperor of Mussulmen. Bud of Honour. Mirror of Virtue. And Rose of Delight.  
Many and various are the Opinions concerning the King of Persia's Arms: It being affirmed by some, that 
Arms.  he beareth the Sun Or in a Field Azure. By others, a Crescent (as the Turkish Emperors) with this difference, that it hath a Hand added to it. By others, Or with a Dragon Gules. By others, Or with a Buffalo's Head Sable. But the most received Opinion is that he beareth the Rising Sun on the Back of a Lion with a Crescent.  
The Inhabitants of this Country are (for the most part) exact observers of Mahomet's Doctrine, according 
Religion.  to the Explication and Commentaries made by Mortis Hali. They differ in many considerable Points from the Turks, and both Parties are subdivided into various Sects, between whom are tossed many Controversies with flaming Zeal on either side. The main Point in debate between them, is concerning the immediate Successors of Mahomet. The Turks reckoning them thus, Mahomet, Aboubekir, Omar, Osman, and Mortis Hali. But the Persians will have their Hali to be the immediate Successor, and some esteem him equally with Mahomet himself, and call the People to Prayers with these words, Llala-y-lala Mortis. Aly vellilula; for which the Turks abhor them, call them Rafadi and Cassars, i. e. Schismatics, and themselves Sonni and Musselmen, which is, true Believers. They differ also in their Explication of the Alcoran; besides, the Persians have contracted it into a lesser Volumn than the Arabians after Gunet's Reformation, preferring the Immaman Sect before the Melchian, Anesian, Benefian, or Xefagans, broached by Aboubekir, Omar, and Osman; from which four are sprung above seventy several sorts of Religious Orders, as Morabites, Abdals, Dervishes, Papasi, Rafadi, etc. Here are many Nestorian Christians, as also several Jesuits, and many Jews. The Christian Religion was first planted in this Country by the Apostle, St. Thomas.   

SECT. V. Concerning Turkey in Asia.  
 d. m. Situated between 48 00 of Long. its greatest Length from S. E. to N. W. is about 2100 Miles. 82 00 between 13 30 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 1740 Miles. 45 30 Comprehending six great parts, viz. Anatolia— Chief Town Bursa lying Westward. Arabia— Medina— found from S. to N. Syria— Aleppo— Diarbeck— Bagdat— Turkomania— Arzerum— Georgia— Teflis—  
Each of the foregoing Parts comprehends several Provinces; as,  
Anatolia Anatolia propria— Chief Town Bursa— Northward, W. to E. Amasia— Idem— Caramania— Cogni— Southward, W. to E. Aladuli— Maraz— Arabia B●ria●a or Arabia Deserta Anna— N. to S. Barraab or Arabia Petrea Herat— Ayman or Arabia Faelix Medina— Syria Syria propria— Aleppo— N. to S. Phoenicia— Demask— Palestinc— Jerusalem— Diarbeck Diarbeck— Diarbekir— N. to S. Arzerum— Mosul— Yerack— Bagdat— Turcomania Turcomania propria— Arzerum— W. to E. Curds— Van— Georgia Mengralia— Fasso— W. to E. Gurgestan— Teflis—  
THIS vastly extended Body being divided (as aforesaid) into six great Parts, viz. Anatolia, Arabia, Syria, Diabereck, Turcomania, and Georgia; we shall particularly Treat of the first three, and that separately (they being most remarkable); and then take a General View of all the rest conjunctly, and that under the Title of the Euphratian Provinces. Therefore,  

§. 1. ANATOLIA.  
THIS Country (formerly Asia Minor, in contradistinction from Asia the Greater) is termed by the 
Name.  Italians and Spaniards, Anatolia; by the French, Natolie; by the Germans, Natolien; and by the English, Anatolia or Anatolia; so called at first by the Grecians, because of its Eastern Situation in respect of Greece, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  
The Air of this Country is very different, being in some Provinces very pure and healthful; in others extremely 
Air.  gross and pestilentious. The opposite Place of the Globe to Anatolia, is that part of the Pacisick Ocean, between 235 and 250 Degrees of Longitude, with 34 and 38 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 5th and 6th North Climate) is extraordinary fertile, abounding 
Soil.  with Oil and Wine, and most sorts of Grain and Fruits: But much of the Inland Provinces lie uncultivated, a thing too common in most Countries subject to the Mahometan Yoke. The length of the Days and Nights is the same here as in Greece, they both lying-under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Raw Silks, Goatshair, Twisted Cotten, Cordovants of 
Commodities.  several Colours, Calicuts' white and blue, Wool for Matrisses, Tapestries, Quilted Coverlets, Soap, Rhubarb, Galls, Valleneed, Scommony, Opium, etc.  
Not far from Smyrna, (by the Turks Ismyr) is a certain kind of Earth, commonly called by the Franks, 
Rarities.  Soap-Earth, which boileth up out of the Ground, and is always gathered before Sunrising, and that in such prodigious Quantity, that many Camels are daily employed in carrying Loads of it to divers Soap-Houses at some distance, where being mixed with Oil, and both boiled together for several Days, it becomes at last an excellent sort of Soap. (2.) Nigh to Smyrna, are the Vestigia of a Roman Circus and Theatre; and thereabouts is frequently found variety of Roman Medals. (3.) About two easy days Journey, East from Smyrna, are some Remains of the Ancient Thyatira, as appears from ten or twelve remarkable Inscriptions still to be seen, (for which, Vid. Wheeler 's Travels, from Page 230 to 236.) and therefore Tyreth (a small Village twenty Miles Southeast of Ephesus) is falsely taken for it by the Ignorant Greeks. (4.) At Mylasa, (formerly Melasso in Caria) are noble Remains of Antiquity; particularly a magnificent Temple of Maible, built in Honour of Augustus Caesar, and the Goddess of Rome, as appears from an Inscription upon the Front which is still entire. Here also is a stately Column, called the Pillar of Menander, with a little curious Temple, but uncertain for what, or by whom erected. (5.) At Ephesus, (now called Aj● Salove by the Turks) are yet to be seen some Ancient Christian Churches, particularly that of St. John, the intirest of 'em all, and now converted into a Mahometan Mosque; as also the Vestigia of a Roman Amphitheatre, Circus, and Aqueduct, together with a large heap of stately Ruins, generally reckoned those of the (once) magnificent Temple of Diana, the great Goddess of the Ephesians. (6) At Laodicea (by the Turks Eske-hissar, which is utterly forsaken of Men, and now the Habitation of wild Beasts) are still extant three Theatres of white Marble, and a stately Circus, all so entire as yet, that they would seem to be only of a Modern date. (7.) At Sardis (by the Turks, Sart or Sards, now a little nasty beggarly Village, though once the Royal Seat of rich King Croesus) are the Remains of some stately Ancient Architecture, with several imperfect Inscriptions. (8.) At Pergamos (which still retains the Name of Pargamo, and is observable for being the place where Parchment was first invented) are the Ruins of the Palace of the Atalick Kings. Here is also the Ancient Christian Church of Sancta Sophia, now converted into a Mahometan Mosque. As for Philadelphia, the last of the famous Seven Churches of Asia (now called by the Turks, Allach Scheyr, i. e. The City of God) 'tis remarkable at present for nothing so much as the considerable number of Christians dwelling in it, they amounting to two thousand, and upwards.  
The State of Christianity being very deplorable through most Parts of the Ottoman Dominions, 
Archbishoprics, etc.  and not only the chief ecclesiastics of the Christian Churches, (viz. Patriarches, Archbishops, and Bishops,) but also their very Sees being frequently altered, according as their Tyrannical Master, the Turk, proposeth advantage by such Alterations; and whereas a great many Titular Bishops, yea, Archbishops, and some Patriarches are often created; it is equally vain to expect, as impossible to give, an exact List of all the Ecclesiastical Dignities in those Parts, whether Real or Nominal. Let it therefore suffice (once for all) to subjoin in this place the most remarkable of the Christian ecclesiastics through all Parts of the Asiatic and African Turkey; still referring the Reader to the same as he traveleth through the various Parts of this vast Empire. These ecclesiastics being Patriarches, Archbishops, and Bishops. The chief Patriarches (besides him of Constantinople, already mentioned in Europe) are those of Jerusalem, Alexandria, and Antioch; as also two Armerian (one of which resideth at Ecmeasin, a Monastery in Georgia; and the other at Sister in Aladuha); and lastly, one Nestorian, whose place of Residence is commonly at Mosul in Diarbeck.  
The chief Archbishoprics (together with the European) are those of 

Heraclea,  
Adrianople,  
Patras,  
Saloniki,  
Corinth,  
Proconesus,  
Athens,  
Nicosia,  
Amasia,  
Malvasia,  
Janna,  
Scutari,  
Amphipoli,  
Monembasia,  
Tyana,  
Napoli di Romania,  
Methynna,  
Tyre.  
Larissa,  
Phanarion,  
Berytus.    
The chief of the many Bishoprics (besides the European) are those of 

Ephesus,  
Trebisonde,  
Amasia,  
Ancyra,  
Drama,  
Nova Caesarea,  
Cyzicus,  
Smyrna,  
Cogni,  
Nicomedia,  
Metylene,  
Rhodes,  
Nice,  
Serra,  
Chio,  
Chalcedon,  
Christianepeli,  
S. John D'Acre.    
As for Universities in this Country, the Turks are such Enemies to Letters in general, that they not only despise 
Universities.  all Humane Literature, or acquired Knowledge; but the very Art of Printing (the most effectual means of communicating Knowledge) is expressly inhibited by their Law; so that the Reader must not expect to find the Seats of the Muses among them. It's true, the Jesuits, and some other Orders of the Roman Church, (where established in these Countries) do usually instruct the Children of Christian Parents in some public Halls erected for that purpose; but these small Nurseries of Learning are so inconsiderable, that they deserve not the Name of Colleges, much less the Title of Universities.  
The Inhabitants of this large Country being chiefly Turks and Greeks, a particular Character of 'em both is 
Manners.  already given in Europe, when treating of Greece and the Danubian Provinces, to which I refer the Reader.  
The prevailing Languages in this Country, are the Turkish and Vulgar Greek, a Specimen of which is already 
Language.  given when treating of Turkey in Europe.  
This large Country being entirely subject to the heavy burden of the Ottoman Yoke, is governed by 
Government.  four Beglerbegs in Subordination to the Grand Signior; the first of 'em resideth at Cotyaeum, about thirty Leagues from Byrsa; the second at Cogni, formerly Iconium; the third at Amasia, in the Province of the same Name; and the last at Marat, the principal City of Aladulia.  
See Turkey in Europe, page 182. 
Arms.   
The established Religion of this Country, is that of Mahometanism; but Persons of all Professions being 
Religion.  tolerated in these Parts, as elsewhere through the Turkish Dominions, here are great multitudes of Christians (particularly Greeks) and those of all sorts, as Armenians, Jacobites, Maronites, Nestorians, Melchites, etc. and intermixed with these is a considerable number of Jews. Christianity was planted betimes in this Part of the World, and that by the Preaching and Writings of the Inspired Apostles, especially St. John the Divine, here being the Seven famous Churches to which he wrote, viz. those of Ephesus, Smyrna, Thyatira, Laodicea, Pergamus, Philadelphia, and Sardis.   

§. 2. ARABIA.  
THIS Country (known formerly by the same Name) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, 
Name.  Arabia; by the French, Arabia; by the Germans, Arabien; and by the English, Arabia; why so called, is not fully agreed upon among Authors; but the reason of the various Appellations of its three Parts, [viz. Deserta, Petraea, and Faelix] is most evident, they being so termed from the Nature of their respective Soil.  
The Air of the two Northern Arabia's is very hot during the Summer, (the Heavens being seldom or never 
Air.  overcast with Clouds) but in that towards the South 'tis much more temperate, being mightily qualified by refreshing Dews which fall almost every Night in great abundance. The opposite Place of the Globe to those Countries, is that part of the Pacifick Ocean between 245 and 275 Degrees of Longitude, with 12 and 31 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The very Names of these three Arabia's (they lying in the 2d, 3d, and 4th North Climate) do sufficiently 
Soil.  declare the Nature of their Soil; the Northern being extremely barren, one encumbered with formidable Rocks, and the other overspread with vast Mountains of Sand; but the Southern (deservedly termed Foelix) is of an excellent Soil, being extraordinary fertile in many places. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of these Countries, is about 14 Hours; the shortest in the Southmost, 11 Hours ¼; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of these Countries, especially Arabia Foelix, are Coral, Pearl, Onyx-Stones, Balm 
Commodities,  Myrrh, Incense, Gums, Cassia, Manna, and several other Drugs and Spices.  
In Arabia Petraea, is the noted Mountain of Sinai, (now called by the Arabians, Gibol Mousa, i. e. The 
Ráritics.  Mountain of Moses) on which were many Chapels and Cells; possessed by the Greek and Latin Monks; several of which are still remaining with a Garden adjoining to each of 'em. At the foot of the Mountain is a pleasant Convent, from whence there was formely a way up to the top by one thousand four hundred Steps, cut out of the firm Rock, at the Charge and Direction of the Virtuous Helena, (Mother of Constantine the Great) the Marks of which Steps are visible to this very Day. The Religious here residing, pretend to show Pilgrims the very place where Moses stayed for forty Days, during his abode on the Mount; and where he received the Tables of the Law, and desired to see the Face of God. (2.) At Medina in Arabia Foelix, is a stately Mosque, supported by four hundred Pillars, and furnished with three hundred Silver Lamps, and called by the Turks, Mos a kiba, or Most Holy: because in it lies the Coffin of their Great Prophet (its hangging in the Air by two Loadstones, being a mere Fable) covered over with Cloth of Gold, under a Canopy of Cloth of Silver curiously embroidered, which the Bassa of Egypt is bound to renew yearly by the Grand Signior's Order. (3.) At Mecca in the same Arabia, (the Birth place of Mahomet) is a Turkish Mosque, so glorious, that 'tis accounted by many, the stateliest of any in the World. It's lofty Roof being raised in fashion of a Dome, with two beautiful Towers of extraordinary Height and Architecture, make a splendid show at the first appearance, and are all conspicuous at a great distance. The Mosque is said to have above an hundred Gates, with a Window over each of 'em; and within 'tis adorned with Tapstery and Guildings extraordinary rich. The number of Pilgrims who yearly visit this place is almost incredible; every Musselman being obliged by his Religion to come hither once in his Life-time, or to send a Deputy for him. (4) The Country about Zibit in Arabia Foelix, (which many reckon to be the same with the Ancient Saba or Sabaea, Seba or Sheba, mentioned in 1 Kings 10. and Matth. 12.) is still famous for the best Frankincense in the World, which grows hereabouts in great abundance; besides good plenty of Balsam, Myrrh, Cassia, and Manna, with several other Drugs and Spices.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. See Anatolia. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Arabs (great Proficients of old in Mathematical Sciences) are now an ignorant, treacherous, and 
Manners.  barbarous kind of People. The better, and more innocent sort of 'em live in Tents, and employ their time in feeding their Flocks, removing from place to place, according to the conveniency of Grazing; but the greater part of 'em are idle Vagabonds, and so extremely given to Robbing, that most of the Public Roads in the Asiatic Turkey are pitifully pestered with 'em, they travelling commonly in considerable Troops, (headed by one of their number, whom they own as Captain) and assaulting the Caravans as they pass and repass the Mountains. Those near Muscat in Arabia Faelix, are absolutely the best of the whole Country, being generally characterised a People of a very civil and honest Deportment towards all sorts of Persons.  
The Vulgar Language in the three Arabia's, is the Arabesque, or corrupt Arabian, which is not only used 
Language.  here, but (with Variation of Dialect) is spoken over a great part of the Eastern Countries. As for the Ancient, Pure, and Grammatical Arabian, 'tis now learned at School (as Europeans do Greek and Latin) and is chiefly used by the Mahometans in their Religious Service.  
The various Parts of this vast and spacious Country, acknowledge Subjection to various Sovereigns, 
Government.  and some to none at all. Divers sorts of People in these Countries are willingly subject unto, and ruled by several Beglerbegs residing among them by the special Appointment of the Grand Signior; others are governed by their own independent Kings or Princes, the chief of whom are those of Fartach, Massa, and Amanzirisdin; and some others do yield Obedience to certain Xeriffs or Chief Governors, (who are only Tributary to the Great Turk) the most Honourable of them is he of Mecca, who is of the Posterity of Mahomet, but lately in Rebellion against his Master. Besides these, here are several sorts of People who live altogether free, denying Subjection to any; the chief of whom are, the Bengebres, Beduins, and Gordins, who reside mostly in Mountains, and are much employed in Robbing, especially the Beduins, they usually travelling in great numbers near Mecca, on purpose to assault the Pilgrims in their way thither, who are always necessitated to send valuable Presents to the Xeriff of that Place, that he may order some of his Troops to meet the various Caravans, and defend them against all Attempts.  
For Arms. See the Ensigns Armorial of the Grand Signior, page 182. 
Arms.   
Many of the Wild Arabs know nothing of Religion, living like so many Savage Beasts hunting after their 
Religion.  Prey, and frequently devouring one another. But the more sober sort of 'em profess the Doctrine of Mahomet, that Grand Imposture, and Native of their own Country. The principal Points of which Doctrine may be seen, page 183. to which I remit the Reader. This Country was formerly illuminated with the Light of the Blessed Gospel, having received the same in the Apostolic Age.   

§. 3. Syria, [by the Turks] Suristan.  
MOdern Syria comprehends Syria, properly so called. (2) Phoenicia or Phoenicia. (3.) Palestine or Judaea. These Divisions of Syria (especially the first and last) being remarkable Countries; somewhat of each of 'em distinctly, and in their order. Therefore,  

Syria, properly so called.  
THIS Country (known formerly by the same Name of Syria, but different in Bounds) is 
Name.  termed by the Italians, Syria; by the Spaniards, Syria; by the French, Sourie; by the Germans, Syrien; and by the English, Syria; but why so called, is much controverted among our Modern Critics, with little show of probability for the truth of their various Opinions on either hand.  
The Air of this Country is pure and serene, (the Sky being seldom overcast with Clouds) and in most parts 
Air.  very healthful to breath in; only in the Months of June, July, and August, 'tis extraordinary hot, if it prove either Calm, or a gentle Wind from the Desert; but (as a repeated Miracle of Providence) these Months are generally attended with cool Westerly Breezes from the Mediterranean. The opposite Place of the Globe to Syria, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 250 and 254 Degrees of Longitude, with 33 and 38 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in part of the 5th and 6th North Climate) is extraordinary fertile, 
Soil.  where duly manured, producing most sorts of Grain and Fruits in great abundance. Here are indeed several rocky and barren Mountains, yet no Country in the World can boast of more pleasant, large, and fertile Plains than this; Plains of such a f●t and tender Soil, that the Peasants, in many places, do Till 'em up with Wooden Culters, and that commonly by the assistance of one Horse or two Bullocks, to draw the Plough. But the Beauty and Excellency of this Country is mightily eclipsed by various sad and melancholy Objects, that present themselves to the Eye of the Traveller, viz. many Cities, Towns, and Villages, which were formerly well-stockt with Inhabitants, and compactly Built; but now quite depopulated and laid in Ruins; as also many Ancient Christian Churches, once very splendid, and magnificent Structures, but now mere heaps of Rubbish, and the ordinary Residence of Wild Beasts.  
— Quaeque ipse miserrima vidi.  
The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country, is about 14 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost is 9 Hours ¾, and the Nights proportionably. Here it may not be improper to rectify a gross mistake of our Modern Geographers, who treating of Syria, make the River of Aleppo (as they call it) to fall into the Euphrates, and assert it to be Navigable up to the City; whereas it hath no Communication with Euphrates at all, but is (almost) of a quite contrary Course to that in the Maps, and so far from being a Navigable River, that 'tis little better than a mere Brook; or at best, but a small inconsiderable Rivulet, having its rise a little way Southeast from Aleppo, and gliding gently along by the City, loseth itself under Ground at a few Miles distance on the other side.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, especially those of Aleppo, (which is the second City of the 
Commodities.  Turkish Empire, and one of the greatest Trade of any in the Levant, being the Centre of Commerce between the Mediterranean and East-Indies, as also the Seat of one of the most flourishing of all our English Factories abroad) are Silks, Chamlets, Valaneed, Galnuts, Cotton, Mohairs, Soap, Galls, Jewels, Spices, and Drugs of all sorts, etc.  
About six days Journey, S. S. E. from Aleppa, is the famous Pabnyr a or Tadmor, now wholly in Ruins; 
Rarities.  yet such Remains of many Porphyry Pillars and remarkable Inscriptions, are still extant, as sufficiently evince its former State and Magnificence. For a particular Draught and Description of it. Vid. Phil. Transact. N. 217, 218. (2.) About on● hours Riding from the aforesaid Tadmor, is a large Valley of Salt, which is more probably thought to be that mentioned 2 Sam. 8. 13. (where King David smote the Syrians) than the other about four hours from Aleppo, though commonly taken for such. (3.) On the side of a Hill, nigh to Aleppo, is a Cave or Grotto, remarkable among the Turks, for being (as they say) the Residence of Mortis Ali for some Days; where is also the rough Impression of a Hand in the hard Rock, which they believe was made by him. (4.) Under one of the Gates of Aleppo, is a place for which the Turks have a great Veneration, keeping Lamps continually burning in it, because (according to a received Tradition among 'em) the Prophet Elisha did live there for some time. (5.) In the Wall of a Mosque in the Suburbs of Aleppo, is a Stone of two or three Foot square, which is wonderfully regarded by the more superstitious sort of Christians; because in it is a natural (but obscure) Resemblance of a Chalice, environed (as 'twere) with some faint Rays of Light. Such strange Apprehensions do the Romanists in these Parts entertain concerning this Stone, that for the purchase of it, vast Sums of Money have been proffered by them to the Turks; but as gross Superstition in the former did hatch the Proposal, so the same in the latter produced the refusal, the Turks being inexorable when requested to sell or give that, which was once so Sacred as to become the constituent Part of a Mosque. (6.) Belonging to the Jacobite Patriarch in Aleppo, are two fair M. S. of the Gospels, written on large Parchment-sheets in Syrian Characters, (and these either Gold or Silver) with variety of curious Miniature. (7.) Between Aleppo and Alexandretta, (or Scanderoon) are the goodly Ruins of several stately Christian Churches, with variety of Stone-Coffins lying above ground in divers places, and many Repositories for the Dead hewn out of the firm Rock. (8.) In the large Plain of Antioch, (being fifteen Leagues long, and three broad) is a stately Causeway crossing almost the breadth of the Plain, and passing over several Arches, [under which some pleasant Rivulets do gently glide] all which was begun and finished in six months' time, by the Grand Visier, in the Reign of Achmet, and that for a speedy Passage of the Grand Signior's Forces to suppress the frequent Revolts in the Eastern Parts of his Empire. (9) Nigh to the Factory Marine at Scanderoon is a large (but unfinished) Building, commonly called Scanderbeg's Castle, being vulgarly supposed to have been erected by that Valiant Prince of Albania, in the career of his Fortune against the Turks; but 'tis more probably thought to be of an ancienter Date, having thereon the Arms of Godfrey of Bulloign. Lastly, In the Eastmost part of Scanderoon-Bay, is a ruinous old Building, known commonly by the Name of Jonah's Pillar, erected (as the Modern Greeks allege) in that very place where the Whale did vomit him forth. It's indeed much (and not undeservedly) doubted, whether that Monument was erected there upon such an Occasion; but 'tis highly probable that this individual Part of the Bay was the very place of the Whale's delivery, it being the nearest to Nineveh of any in the Levant. Which conjecture, I humbly suppose, is somewhat more reasonable than that of some dreaming Ancients, who vainly imagined that the monstrous Fish did almost surround one fourth part of the World in seventy two hours, and that when big with Child.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. See Anatolia. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of this Country are mostly Turks and Greeks, [whose respective Characters are already 
Manners.  given in Turkey of Europe, pages 174 and 181.] as also many Jews and Armenians, with other sorts of Christians intermixed, of whom the Reader may find some Account towards the latter part of this Section, when we come to treat of Palestine, and the Euphratian Provinces.  
The chief Language of this Country, is the Turkish, (for a Specimen of which, Vid. page 181.) the Ancient 
Language.  Syriac being lost among 'em. The various Europeans here residing do commonly use the Lingua Franca.  
This Country being subject unto, and successively ruled by the Seleucidae, the Romans, the Saracens, the 
Government.  Christians, and Sultan's of Egypt, was at last conquered by the Turks in the time of Selimus I. Anno 1517. under whose heavy Yoke it hath ever since groaned, and is at present governed by its particular Bassa, appointed by the Grand Signior, whose place of Residence is ordinarily at Aleppo, the principal City of this Province, and thought to be the Aram Sobah mentioned in Holy Scripture. But the whole Country of Syria [according to its Modern Extant] is subject to three Bassa's; the first commonly residing (as aforesaid) at Aleppo; the second at Damascus in Phaenice; and the third at Tripoli of Syria. Subordinate to each of these Bassa's, both here and in other Parts of the Ottoman Dominions, are various Cadi's or Judges, who hear and determine the several Causes, whether Civil or Criminal, which at any time happen between Man and Man. And here I can't omit one particular, (which as 'tis a mighty disparagement to this People, so I wish 'twere peculiar to them) viz. their Mercenary Distribution of Justice; for not always the Equity of the Cause, but the Liberality of the Party does ordinarily determine the Matter: As some of our English Factories in these Parts of the World, have experienced more than once.  
See the Ensigns Armorial of the Grand Signior, page 182. 
Arms.   
The established Religion of this Country, is that of Mahometanism; the Essential Tenets of which are already 
Religion.  set down, (page 182.) to which I remit the Reader. But since one thing enjoined by that Religion is the most excellent and necessary Duty of Prayer; I can't omit one laudable Practice of this People in that Point; I mean not only their imitable frequency in performing this Duty, but also their most commendable fervency and seriousness in the performance of it. For whenever they set about the same, they Address themselves to the Almighty with all profound Respect and Reverence imaginable, and in the humblest Posture they can, sometimes standing, often kneeling, and frequently prostrating themselves on the Ground, and kissing the same; and during the whole performance, their very Countenance doth plainly declare the inward Fervour and Devotion of their Mind. Yea, so exact and punctual are they in observing the various Hours appointed for Prayer, and so serious and devout in performing that Duty; that the generality of us Christians have too good Reason (in both these Respects) to say with the Poet, Pudet haec opprobria nobis, etc. The Muezans or Marabounds, (being those Persons who call the People to Prayers, use commonly these words) Allah ekber, allah ekber, allah ekber; eschadou in la illah, illallah; high allc salla, high alle salla, allah ekber, allah ekber, allah ekber, la illa, illalah, i. e. God is great, God is great, God is great; give Testimony that there is but one God: Come, yield yourselves up to his Mercy, and pray him to forgive you your Sins. God is great, God is great, God is great, there is no other God but God. Dispersed over all this Country, and intermixed with the Turks, are many Jews, and various sorts of Christians, particularly Greeks, Armenians, Maronites, etc. but most lamentable is the State of those Christians at present, not only in respect of that woeful Ignorance under which they universally labour, and the Turkish Slavery and Insolence to which they're exposed; but also in point of those dismal Heats and Divisions, those numerous Factions and Parties now among 'em: For so bitterly inveterate are they against one another, and to such a height do their Animosities frequently come, as to give fresh Occasion to the Common Enemy to harass them more and more. Christianity was planted very early in these parts of the World; most of this Country being watered with the Blessed Gospel in the Apostolic Age.   

Phoenicia or Phaenice.  
THIS Country (very famous of old, but now of a very sad and melancholy Aspect, and groaning under the Turkish Yoke) hath undergone such dismal Devastations by the destroying Arabs, that there's nothing now remarkable in it, save a few Ancient Maritime Cities, (mostly in Ruins) which yet maintain something of Trade with Strangers, as particularly Damascus, (called by the Turks, Scham) St. John d'Acre, (formerly Ptolemais) and last Sure and Said, which were the Ancient Tyre and Sydon. Leaving therefore this desolate Country, we pass on to   

Palestine or Judaea.  
THIS Country (most memorable in Holy Scripture, and sometimes styled Canaan from Canaan, 
Name.  the Son of Cham; sometimes the Land of Promise, because promised to Abraham and his Seed; and sometimes Judaea, from the Nation of the Jews, or People of the Tribe of Juda) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Palestina; by the French, Palestine; by the Germans, Palestinen or das Gelobte-land; by the English, Palestine, or The Holy Land. It's called Palestine quasi Philistim, from the Philistines, once a mighty Nation therein; and Holy Land, because 'twas the Scene of the Life and Sufferings of the ever Blessed and most Holy Jesus, the glorious Redeemer of Men.  
The Air of this Country, excepting those Parts adjacent to the Lake of Sodom, (of which afterwards) is 
Air.  so extraordinary pleasant, serene, and healthful to breathe in, that many of its present Inhabitants do frequently arrive to a considerable Age. The opposite Place of the Globe to Palestine, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, between 245 and 250 Degrees of Longitude, with 29 and 32 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country (situated partly in the 4th and 5th North Climate, and not exceeding seventy Leagues 
Soil.  in length from North to South, and thirty in breadth from East to West) was blessed with an extraordinary rich and fertile Soil, producing all things in such abundance that the Scripture terms it a Land flowing with Milk and Honey; yea, so wonderful was the fertility thereof, and such vast multitudes of People did it maintain, that King David numbered in his time, no less than 1300000 fight Men, besides the Tribes of Levi and Benjamin. But alas! such were the crying Sins of its Inhabitants, that it not only spewed them out, as it had done those who dwelled before them. But the Almighty being highly provoked by their many and repeated Abominations, hath turned that fruitful Land into barrenness, for the wickedness of them who dwelled therein. For such is the dismal State of this Country at present, that (besides the Turkish Yoke, under which it groans) the greatest part thereof is not only laid waste, but even where duly manured, 'tis generally observed, that the Soil is not near so fertile as formerly. The longest Day in the Northmost part of this Country, is about 14 Hours ¼; the shortest in the Southmost, is about 10 Hours; and the Nights proportionably.  
Such is the mean and depauperated State of this Country at present, that we may now reckon it destitute 
Commodities.  of all Commodities for the Merchant; its Inhabitants, nowadays, being mere Strangers to all manner of Commerce. In its flourishing Condition, under the Kings of Judah and Israel, the People thereof did indeed manage a very considerable Trade abroad, and that chiefly by the two famous Emporiums of Tyre and Sydon abovementioned, besides the Ships of Tarshish which Solomon sent yearly to the Land of Ophir; and so noted were these two Maritime Cities of old for Merchandizing, that the Evangelical Prophet (Isaiah 23. 8.) denouncing the overthrow of Tyre, calls it The Crowning City, whose Merchants are Princes, and whose Traffickers are the Honourable of the Earth: And (Verse 3.) he termeth Sydon, a Mart of Nations. But so fully accomplished is the Prophetical Denounciation against 'em both, and so low and despicable is their Condition at present, that I heartily wish all flourishing Cities of Christendom might be so wise, as seriously to reflect on the same, and to take timely warning by them; especially considering that most of our Populous and Trading Cities, are now such Dens of Iniquity, that their Inhabitants may justly dread, That 'twill be more tolerable for Tyre and Sydon in the day of judgement than f●r them.  
In the Southern Parts of Palestine, is Asphaltis or Asphaltites, (so termed from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, i. e. Bitumen) 
Rarities.  that noted Lake of Judaea, where the abominable Cities of Sodom and Gomorrah formerly stood; otherways called the Dead Sea, and remarkable at present for abundance of Sulphurous Vapours which still ascend in so great a measure, that no Bird is able to fly from one side of the Lake to the other. 'Tis also observable for good store of Apples growing near its Banks, which appear very lovely to the Eye; but being touched and cut up, prove mere naught, being nothing else but a heap of nauseous Matter. (2.) Nigh to the place of the Ancient Sarepta, are many Caves and Apartments hewn out of the firm Rock, which some vainly imagine to have been the Habitation of Men in the Golden Age, before Cities in these Parts of the World were well-known: But others, with greater show of probability, take 'em for the Caves of the Sidonians, mentioned in the Book of Joshua, under the Name of Mearah. (3) Not far from the (once) noted City of Tyre, are several large square Cisterns, which still go by the Name of Solomon's among the Christians of that Country; but why so called, they can give no other reason than bare Tradition. (4.) At St John d' Acre (the Ancient Ptolemais) are yet to be seen the Ruins of a Palace, which acknowledgeth Richard I. King of England, for its Founder, and the Lion pissant is still visible upon some of the Stones. (5.) On Mount Carmel are some Remains of a Monastery of Carmelite Friars, with a Temple dedicated to the Blessed Virgin; and under it is a private Cell or Cave, which Travellers allege to be the ancient residing Place of the Prophet Elias. On the same Mountain are found a great many Stones that have the lively Impression of Fishes Bones upon 'em. As also abundance of petrified Fruit, particularly Plumbs, or Stones of that resemblance. (6.) Not far from the Brook Cedron stands a part of the Pillar of Absalon, which he erected in his life-time, out of an ardent desire to Eternize his Name; and nigh to it, is a great heap of small Stones, which daily increaseth, because either Jew or Mahometan passing by, seldom fails to throw one at the same, and that out of abhorrency of the Son's Rebellion against the Father. (7.) In the Mountains of Judah is a remarkable Spring, where Philip is said to have baptised the Ethiopian Eunuch; whereupon 'tis called by the Name of The Ethiopian Fountain, and hath a Church adjacent, erected ('tis probable) out of Devotion in Honour of the Place, and Memory of that Fact. Yet (by the by) 'twould seem that this were not the place of the Ethiopian's Baptism; because those rocky and declining Mountains are hardly passable on Horseback, much less in a Chariot. (8.) Nigh to the aforesaid Fountain is a considerable Cave, where, 'tis reported, St. John the Baptist did live from the seventh Year of his Age, till he appeared in the Wilderness of Judaea, as the promised Elias. (9) At Bethlehem is the goodly Temple of the Nativity, erected by St. Helena, (Mother of Constantine the Great) who called it St. Mary's of Bethlehem. 'Tis now possessed by the Franciscans of Jerusalem, and is still entire, having many Chapels and Altars, but those little frequented, except it be upon extraordinary Occasions. (10.) In the Mountains of Juda are the Remains of an Ancient Church, built by St. Helena, and dedicated to St. John the Baptist, and that in the place where Zachary the Prophet was born. And nigh to it (where the Blessed Virgin did Visit her Cousin Elizabeth) is a Grotto, in which 'tis said, that the Body of Elizabeth lies interred. (11.) Upon the left hand in going out of the City of Jerusalem, by the Gate of Joppa, is Mount Zion, on whose top are still to be seen the Ruins of the Tower of David, which was once a Building of wonderful Strength and admirable Beauty. (12.) Upon Mount Calvary is the stately Temple of the Holy Sepulchre, built by the aforesaid Virtuous St. Helena, and hitherto visited by Multitudes of Christians, who flock to it from all Parts of the World, either out of Devotion or Curiosity. It's divided into a vast multitude of Apartments, containing many Chapels and Altars, which (for the most part) receive their Names from some remarkable Circumstance of our Saviour's Passion; besides those, peculiar to Christians of different Nations at Jerusalem, particularly the Abyssines, Armenians, Georgians, Cophtes, Jacobites, Maronites, &c and at the entry of one of those Chapels is the Sepulchre of Godfrey of Boulogn on one hand, and that of his Brother Baldwin's on the other. But Lastly, In and about Jerusalem (besides the Observables abovementioned) are these following Particulars, viz, a Mosque erected in the very place where once stood the Coenaculum, the Church of St. Saviour, and that of the Purification of the Blessed Virgin, with her splendid Sepulchre; all three built by the incomparable St. Helena. Add to these the decent Tomb of Zachary, near Brook Cedron, with the Sepulchre of Lazarus, at the Town of Bethany. Here likeways are shown to Pilgrims all other noted Places in or about the City, which are frequently mentioned in the Sacred Volumn; as Mount Olivet, the Garden of Gethsemene, the Valleys of Jehosophat and Gehinnon, the Pool of Siloim, the Field of Blood, etc. They moreover show 'em the places where formerly stood the Palaces of Caiphas, Pilate, and Herod, with the Houses of Martha, and Mary, and Annas the High Priest; as also the particular Place where St. Peter wept upon the denial of his Master, and where Judas the Traitor hanged himself for the betraying of him. And finally, The Pilgrims are conducted unto, and visit the respective Place of each particular Scene of our Saviour's Sufferings, with that of his Ascension at last. All which are fully described by G. Sandys, Thevenot, and other latter Travellers in the Holy Land. To these Rarities of Palestine, I might also add those many remarkable Creatures, (whether Beasts, Birds, or Fishes) frequently mentioned in the Sacred Volumn, and formerly more plentiful than at present in this Country. But having drawn out this Paragraph already to so great a length, I shall not enter upon so vast a Subject, remitting the Reader to that incomparable Work of the Learned Bochartus, De Animalibus S. Scripturae, where he may be fully satisfied in that matter.  
As for Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universitities. See Anatolia. 
Archbishoprics.   
The mountainous Parts of this Country are mostly possessed by the Arabs, (of whom in Arabia) the Valleys 
Manners.  by the Moors, of whom in Africa. Other People here residing, are a few Turks, and many Christians, particularly Greeks, (of whom in Europe) and intermixed with all these, are some Jews, and of them here in particular. The Modern Jews (to say nothing of 'em in former times) are generally Characterised thus, viz. a Vagabond, perfidious, and Obstinate sort of People; a People now living as mere Aliens, not only in most Parts of the Earth, but also in this [once] their own Country; a People indeed universally given to Trading wherever dispersed, but as universally addicted to Cozening and Usury wherever they find occasion; a People so singularly stigmatised by Heaven, that (according to the Prophet's Prediction) they're now become an Astonishment and Hissing to all Nations. In a word, The Modern Jews (being extremely blinded in Judgement, and perverse in Will) do not only remain most obstinate in denying the Messias already come, notwithstanding of the clearest Demonstration to the contrary; but also they're a People that's universally corrupted in Morals, and that in the highest degree, the generality of 'em being addicted to the blackest of Vices.  
This Country being under the Turkish Yoke, its Inhabitants do generally use the Turkish Tongue. The 
Language.  various Christians here residing, (whether European or Asiatick) do commonly speak those Languages, peculiar to the Countries to which they Originally belong.  
How, and by whom this Country was governed, till it became a Roman Province, is best learned from the 
Government.  Historical Part of the Sacred Volumn, and the Writings of the noted Jewish Historian, Josephus. The Land of Palestine being brought under the Roman Senate by Pompey the Great, continued subject to that State till the beginning of the Seventh Century, when 'twas invaded by the Persians, and afterwards made a Prey to the Saracens, yet rescued from them by the Christians, under Godfrey of Bovillon, (Anno 1099.) whose Successors held it about eighty Years; but being taken from them by Saladin [King of Syria and Egypt] it remained subject to the Califs of Egypt, till conquered (Anno 1517.) by Selimus, the first Emperor of the Turks, who subjected the same to the Ottoman Yoke, under which it groans to this very day.  
The Arms of the Christian Kings of Jerusalem were Luna, a Cross Crosset crossed, Sol, commonly called the 
Arms.  Cross of Jerusalem. But this Country being now a Part (as aforesaid) of the Ottoman Dominions, is allowed no particular Arms at present, and cart only claim a share of the Ensigns Armorial of the Turkish Empire in general. What these are, see Turkey in Europe, page 182.  
The present Inhabitants of Palestine, are, in Point of Religion, reducible to Three Classes, viz. Christians, 
Religion.  Jews, and Mahometans. The chief Tenets embraced and maintained by the first and last of these, may be seen in their proper places, when treating of Christendom and Turkey in Europe. As for the Jews, I think no place more proper to Discourse of their Religion, than in this their Ancient Country. Know therefore that the Modern Jews. both here and elsewhere, adhere still as closely to the Mosaic Dispensation, as their present Circumstances in a dispersed and despised Condition will allow. Their Service chiefly consists in reading of their Law in the Synagogue, together with various Prayers, which they perform with little or no appearance of Devotion. Sacrifices they use not since the Destruction of their Temple at Jerusalem. The chief Articles of their present Belief and Practice, are these following: (1.) They all agree in the acknowledgement of a Supreme Being, both Essentially and Personally one; but entertain some ridiculous Apprehensions concerning him, as particularly the great Complacency they vainly imagine he takes in reading their Talmud. (2.) They acknowledge a twofold Law of God. viz a Written and Unwritten one: The Written is that delivered by God to the Israelites, and recorded in the Five Books of Moses. The Unwritten was also (as they pretend) delivered by God to Moses, and handed down from him by Oral Tradition, and now to be received pari pietatis affectu, with the former. (3.) They assert the Perpetuity of their Law, together with its Perfection; believing there can be nothing added to it, or taken from it. (4.) They unanimously deny the accomplishment of the Promises and Prophecies concerning the Messias; obstinately alleging that he is not yet come, and that whenever he appears, 'twill be with the greatest worldly Pomp and Grandeur imaginable, subduing all Nations before him, and making them acknowledge Subjection to the House of Judah. For evading the express Predictions of the Prophets, concerning his mean Condition and Sufferings, they, without any shadow of Divine Authority, do confidently talk of a twofold Messias; one Ben Ephraim, whom they grant to be a Person of a mean and afflicted Condition in this World; another, Ben David, who they believe shall be a Victorious, Powerful Prince, and the Restorer of 'em to their former Liberty and Possessions. (5.) They think that the Sacred Name of God can't be blasphemed by Man, if he only refrain from expressing the adorable 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. (6.) They condemn all manner of Images, though only designed as a bare Representation of Persons to after Ages. (7.) They imagine that the Sabbath-day is to be so strictly observed, that Works, even, of Necessity and Mercy are to be neglected. Lostly, They believe a Resurrection from the Dead at the end of Time, and expect a General Judgement at the last Day. These we may reckon the chief Articles of the Jewish Creed at present; but besides them, they admit of many other things which only Use and Custom have authorised, and those are very different, according to the different Countries in which they now reside. They are still observant, (according to their Circumstances) not only of the various Festivals appointed by God in the Jewish Church; but also several others of Human Institution, particularly that which they yearly Celebrate in Memory of their Deliverance from the projected Ruin of wicked Haman. During which Festival, the Book of Esther is thrice read over in their Synagogues; and whenever the Name of Human is mentioned, they all with one accord, best furiously with Hammars upon their Desks, as showing thereby their abhorrency of that Person who intended so bloody a Massacre of their Forefathers. The joyful Tidings of the Blessed Gospel were proclaimed in this Country by Christ himself, and his Apostles; but the obstinate Jews did shut their Eyes against the Light, and still persist in their inflexible Obstinacy to this very Day.    

§. 4. The Euphratian Provinces.  
THE remaining Parts of the Asiatic Turkey being Georgia, Turkomania, and Diabereck. Georgia 
Name.  (formerly Iberia) is so called from Georgi, a People anciently inhabiting these Parts. Turkomania (formerly Armenia Major) so called from the Turks, a Scythian People, who broke through the Caspian Straits, and possessed themselves of these adjacent Provinces, And Lastly, Diabereck, (formerly Mesopotamia and Padan-Aram, of the Scriptures) but why so called, I find no satisfactory Account. We choose to consider all these three under the assum d Title of Euphratian Provinces, because they lie near the Body and Branches of that [once] famous River of Euphrates.  
The Air of these Countries is generally very pleasant, healthful, and temperate, especially in the first 
Air.  and last. The opposite Place of the Globe to these Provinces, is that part of the vast Pacifick Ocean, lying between 255 and 265 Degrees of Longitude, with 37 and 45 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of these various Provinces, (they lying in in the 6th and 7th North Climate) is generally reckoned 
Soil.  very fit for Pasture on the Banks of the Tigris and Euphrates; and in many places it produceth abundance of Fruits, with variety of Grain. As also Georgia is said to afford great plenty of excellent Wine. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of these various Provinces, is about 15 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost is 9 Hours ¾; and the Nights proportionably.  
These being Inland Provinces, do not manage any brisk or considerable Trade with Foreign Parts, and 
Commodities.  therefore their Commodities are not very numerous, those they Export or Barter with their Neighbours, being chiefly Pitch, Fruits, Silk, and such like.  
At Ourfa in Diarbeck, is a large Fountain well stocked with Fishes, called by the Turks Abraham's Fountain and 
Rarities.  Fishes, and of so great Veneration among 'em, that the Banks of it are covered with curious Carpets for above twenty Paces in breadth. (2) Nigh to the aforesaid Ourfa, is a Mountain remarkable for several Grottoes, in which are to be seen very Ancient Sepulchers of many Primitive Christians. (3.) Adjacent to Carasara, (another Town in Diarbeck) are many little Rooms hewn out of the firm Rock, which were probably some private Cells for Ancient Christians, who affected such Retirements: each of 'em having as 'twere a Table and Bench, with a Reposing Place, all artificially cut out of the hard Stone; and over each of their Doors is a lively Impression of a Cross. (4) On the East of Tigris, over-against Mosul, are the Ruins (and those hardly discernible) of the once great and famous City of Nineveh; the very prospect of which, may strike the Beholder with just Apprehensions of the fading Glory of all Sublunary Magnificence; and that the largest of Cities, are not too big a Morsel for devouring Time to consume. (5.). About a day and half's Journey from Bagdat, is the Sepulchre of the Prophet Ezekiel, which is yearly visited by the Jews of Bagdat with great Devotion. (6.) About the same distance from Bagdat, but between the Euphrates and Tigris, is a prodigious heap of Earth, intermixed with a multitude of Bricks baked in the Sun, whereof each is thirty Inches square, and three thick; the whole being three hundred Paces in Circuit, is called Nemrod by the Christians and Jews in those Parts, and commonly believed by the Vulgar sort of 'em, to be the Remains of the renowned Tower of Babel; but others rather follow the Opinion of the Modern Arabs, who call it Agartouf, and believe it to have been raised by an Arabian Prince, as a Beacon or Watch. Tower to call his Subjects together upon all Occasions. (7.) Nigh to Carkliguen (a Town of Turcomania) is a vast Rock, in which are divers artificial private Apartments, generally reckoned the retiring Place of St. chrysostom during his Exile, as the Christians of those Parts allege.  
For Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. See Anatolia. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of these different Provinces, are very different in their Tempers and Manners. The 
Manners.  Armenians (or those of Turcomania) are Persons of a good Behaviour, and Just in their Dealings; and some of them (addicted to Trassick) are dispered through most Parts of the Trading World. But the People of Georgia, are said to be extremely given to Thieving, Drunkenness, and most sorts of other Vices. Those of the Female Sex, are generally reckoned the most beautiful Women of any in all the Oriental Countries; and so highly esteemed are they by the Grand Signior, and King of Persia, that their respective Seraglios are well stored with them.  
The Turkish, Persian, and Armenian Tongues, are all understood, and much used in these Provinces, especially 
Language.  the Turkish. In Diaberick the Armenian Tongue is chiefly made use of in Divine Service; and in Georgia, the corrupted Greek.  
The Western Parts of these Provinces do own Subjection mostly to the Grand Signior, and the Eastern 
Government.  to the King of Persia, and that purely as the necessity of their Affairs requires. Those subject to the Grand Signior, are governed by various Beglerbegs of his appointment; and those in Subjection to the Persian Power, are ruled by several Princes, some bearing the Title of Kings, (as one in the East of Georgia) who are elected by the King of Persia, and Tributary to him. Nevertheless, there are in these Provinces several Kings and Princes, who fear neither the Ottoman Slavery, nor the Persian Power; but eagerly maintain their Freedom, and keep all the Passes of the Mountains, notwithstanding of many Efforts hitherto made to the contrary.  
See the Ensigns Armorial of the Grand Signior, page 182. 
Arms.   
The prevailing Religion in many Parts of this Country, is that of the Armenians: The principal Points 
Religion.  whereof are these Three: (1) They allow the Apostolic and Nicene Creeds, but agree with the Greeks in asserting the Procession of the Holy Ghost from the Father only. (2) They believe that Christ at his Descent into Hell, freed the Souls of all the Damned from thence, and reprieved them till the end of the World, when they shall be remanded to Eternal Flames. (3) They also believe that the Souls of the Righteous are not admitted to the Beatisical Vision until after the Resurrection; and yet they Pray to Saints departed, adore their Pictures, and burn Lamps before them, praying likeways for the Dead in general. They use Confession to the Priest, and of late have been taught the strange Doctrine of Transubstantiation by Popish Emissaries, dispersed through most Parts of this large Country; but they still give the Eucharist in both Species to the Laity, and use unleavened Bread soaked in Wine. In administering the Sacrament of Baptism, they plunge the Infant thrice in Water, and apply the Chrism with consecrated Oil in Form of a Cross, to several Parts of the Body; and then touch the Child's Lips with the Eucharist. These are the chief Tenets and Practices of the Armenians in Religious Matters: But to these we may add that vast multitude of Fasts and Festivals, which they punctually observe (one fourth part of the Year, being such) and truly it is in the Observation of 'em, that the very Face of the Christian Religion is as yet kept up among this People. Christianity was planted in these Parts of the World in the earliest Ages of the Church, Bartholomew the Apostle being generally reckoned the chief (if not first) Propagator thereof.    

SECT. VI Concerning the Asiatic Islands.  
Reduced (page 45.) to Six Classes, viz. 

The Japan Islands.  
The Philippin Islands.  
The Isles des larron's.  
The Moluccoes.  
The Islands of the Sund.  
The Maldives and Ceylon.    
The chief of the Japan are Japan— Remarkable Towns are Meaco— from N. E. to S. W, Tonsa— Sanuqui Bongo— Idem The chief of the Philippin are Luconia— Idem— from N. to S. Tandaya— Achen Mindana— Idem— In the Islands des larron's— None. The chief of the Moluccoes are Celebes— Idem— W. to E. Gilolo— Idem Ceram— Cimbelo— The chief of the Isles of the Sund, are Borneo— Idem— Under the Equator. Sumatra Achem Java— Materan S. of Borneo Sumatra at The chief of the Maldives is Male None. In the Island of Ceylon— Candea.  
These Islands (as v) being reduced to Six Classes; of each of these Classes separately, and in their Order. Therefore,  

§. 1. The Japan Islands.  
THESE Islands (thought by some to be the Jabadii of the Ancients) are termed by the Italians, 
Name.  Giapone; by the Spaniards, Islas del Japon; by the French, les Isles du Japon; by the Germans, die Japanische Insuln; and by the English, The Japan Islands; but why so called, I find no satisfactory Account among Critics.  
The Air of these Islands doth much incline to Cold, but is generally esteemed very wholesome to breath 
Air.  in. The opposite Place of the Globe to Japan, is that part of the Paragueyan Ocean, lying between 340 and 350 Degrees of Longitude, with 30 and 40 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of these Islands is reckoned abundantly fertile in Grain, Roots, and divers sorts of pleasant Fruits; 
Soil.  as also the Ground (though much overspread with Forests, and encumbered with vast Mountains) is very fit for Pasturage, and well stocked with multitudes of Cattle. The length of the Days and Nights in these Islands, is much the same as in the middle Provinces of China, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands are Gold, Silver, Elephants Teeth, Rice, and most sorts of 
Commodities.  Minerals.  
There is in Japan (according to the Testimony of Varenius) a very remarkable Fountain, whose Water 
Rarities.  is almost equally hot with boiling Oil; it breaks forth only twice a Day for the space of one Hour, during which time, the Eruption is so violent, that nothing can withstand the strength of its Current; for with such a mighty force doth the Water burst out, that 'tis said to raise up, and throw away the greatest Stone they can lay over the Mouth of the Fountain, and that with such a noise, that it frequently resembles the Report of a great Gun: (2.) In the same Island is a prodigious high Mountain, generally supposed to equal (and by some to surpass) the famous Pike of Tenerife, being visible almost forty Leagues off at Sea, though eighteen distant from the Shore. (3.) In this Cluster of Islands are commonly reckoned no less than eight different Vulcano's, whereof some are very terrible. Here also is great variety of Medicinal Waters, and many hot Springs, besides that most remarkable one abovementioned. (4.) In the City of Meaco is a mighty Colossus of gilded Coper, to which People pay their Devotions. Of such a prodigious bigness is that Pagod, that being set in a Chair, (which is eighty Foot broad, and seventy high) no less than fifteen Men may conveniently stand on his Head. His Thumb is said to be fourteen Inches about, and proportionable to it is the rest of his Body. In this City are reckoned about seventy Heathen Temples, and one of 'em is said to be furnished with no fewer than 3333 gilded Idols.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Japanners (being People of an Olive-coloured Complexion) are generally of a tall Stature, strong 
Manners.  Constitution, and sit to be Soldiers. They're said to have vast Memories, nimble Fancies, and solid Judgements. They are abundantly Fair, and Just in their Dealings, but naturally Ambitious, Cruel, and Disdainful to all Strangers, especially those of the Christian Religion; admitting none such to Traffic with 'em, save only the Dutch, who (to monopolise an advantageous Trade) are so complaisant to those Pagan People, as to suspend the very Profession of Christianity during their abode among them.  
The Japonese Tongue is said to be very Polite and Copious, 
Language.  abounding with many Synonimous Words, which are commonly used according to the Nature of the Subject; as also the Quality, Age, and Sex, both of the Speaker, and the Person to whom the Discourse is directed.  
These Islands are Governed by several Petty Kings and Princes, (or Tanes) who are all subject to one 
Government.  Sovereign, stilled The Emperor of Japan. His Government is altogether Despotical, and his Subjects adore him as a God, never daring to look him in the Face, and when they speak off him, they turn their Countenances down to the Earth. Peculiar to the Emperors of Japan, is the following Custom, viz. that they esteem it a kind of Sacrilege to suffer either Hair or Nails to be cut after Coronation.  
The Emperor of Japan (according to the Relation of the Ambassadors of the Dutch East-India Company) 
Arms.  beats Or, six Stars Argent, in an Oval Shield, and hordered with little points of Gold. But according to others, his Arms are Sables, with three Tresoils Argent.  
The Japanners are gross Idolaters, having a multitude of Idols, to whose particular Service great numbers 
Religion.  both of Men and Women do consecrate themselves. The chief of those Idols are called by the Names of Amida and Foqueux. The Votaries of the former are said to assert the Soul's Immortality, and the Pythagorean Metempsychosis; and those of the latter imagine, That the frequent Repetition of certain Words will atone for all their misdoings, and procure to 'em the enjoyment of complete Felicity at last. Great was the multitude of Converts to Christianity once in these Islands, if we might safely credit the Testimony of our Roman Missionaries, who, Anno 1596. reckoned no less than 600000 of the Natives, then actually professing the Christian Religion. But how many soe'er were really brought over to the Knowledge of the Truth; most certain it is, that they quickly Apostatised from the same; and that no Person dares openly avow the Doctrine of Christ since the Year 1614 all Europeans, (save the Dutch) and others, professing Christianity, being then expelled those Islands, and not like to have any more Access there for the future.   

§. 2. The Philippin Islands.  
THESE Islands (discovered by Magellan, Anno 1520) are termed by the Italians, Philippine; by 
Name.  the Spaniards, Islas de Philippe; by the French, Philippines; by the Germans, Philippinische Insuln; and by the English, The Philippin Islands; so called from Philip II. of Spain, in whose time they began to be inhabited by Spaniards.  
The Air of these Islands is very moderate notwithstanding they lie so near the Line The opposite Place 
Air.  of the Globe to them, is the Northmost part of Brasil.  
The Soil of these Islands is generally very fertile, producing in great abundance most sorts of Grain, 
Soil.  Herbs, and Fruits. They are also very fit for Pasturage, and several of 'em are well furnished with some rich Mines of Gold, and other Metals. The length of the Days and Nights in these Islands, is much the same as in the Southern Parts of China, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands, are Rice, Pulse, Wax, Honey, Sugarcanes, Gold, cotton-wool, etc. 
Commodities.   
In the Sea surrounding these Islands, is frequently seen a sort of Fish or Sea-Monster, about the bigness 
Rarities.  of a Calf, which in Shape doth much resemble the ancient sirens, so famous among the Poets; whence our English Navigators term it the Woman-Fish, because its Head, Face, Neck, and Breast, are somewhat like those of the fair Sex. In several of the Philippins are some little Vulcano's, especially those of the Island Tandaia.  
Here is one Spanish Archbishopric, viz. that of Manilla, 
Archbishoprics.   
And subject to him are several Suffragan Bishops, 
Bishoprics,  but their Number and Titles are uncertain.  
Universities in these Islands. None. 
Universities.   
The Natives of these Islands are generally a Courageous and valiant sort of People, maintaining still their 
Manners.  Liberty in several places: They're said to be Civil and Honest enough in their Dealings with the Chinese and Europeans, but most of 'em have a great Aversion to the Spaniards, having been extremely ill used by that Nation in divers respects.  
The prevailing Language in these Islands, is the Spanish, which is not only in use among the Spaniards 
Language.  themselves, but is also understood and spoken by many of the Natives: As for the Language peculiar to 'em, we can give no particular Account thereof, save only its near Affinity to the Malay Tongue  
These Islands being mostly subject to the King of Spain, are ruled by a particular Vice Roy appointed 
Government.  by his Catholic Majesty, whose place of Residence is in Luconia, the biggest of 'em all. The Natives (as aforesaid) do still retain their Liberties in several places, especially in the Isle of Mindana, where those People called Hilanoones (i. e. Mountaineers) Sologues and Alfoores, acknowledge nothing of Subjection to the Spanish Power. 
Arms.   
Many of the milder sort of the Natives are instructed in, and make Profession of the Christian Religion; 
Religion.  and that by the care and diligence of Roman Missionaries sent thither from time to time. The rest being of a savage and intractable Temper, continue still in the thick Mist of Paganism. The Spaniards here residing, are the same in Religion with those in Spain.   

§. 3. Isles des larron's.  
THESE Islands were discovered by Magellan, Anno 1520. and so named by him, from the Nature of their Inhabitants, who were excessively given to thieving. This being all that's remarkable of 'em, we pass on to   

§. 4. The Molucques OF Moluccoes.  
THESE Islands (unknown to the Ancients) are termed by the Italians, Molucche; by the Spaniards, 
Name.  Molucco's; by the French, Isles Moluques; by the Germans, die Moluccische Insuln; and by the English, the Molucques or Moluccoe-Islands; so called from the word Moloc, which in the Language of the Country signifieth the Head; because the Islands properly called the Moluccoes, are situated (as 'twere) at the Head or Entrance of the Indian Archipelago.  
These Islands lying under, and on either side of the Line, the Air is extremely hot, and generally esteemed 
Air.  very unwholesome. The opposite Place of the Globe to the Moluccoes, is the Northern Part of Brasil.  
The Soil of these Islands is not reckoned so fertile as that of the Philippin, especially in Grain, but for abundance 
Soil.  of Spices and rich Mines of Gold, they far surpass them. The Days and Nights do not much vary in their Extent all the Year round, these Islands being so near unto, and partly under the Equinoctial.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands, are Gold, Cotton, Spices of all sorts, especially Cinnamon, 
Commodities.  Pepper, Cloves, Ginger, Nutmegs, Mastic, Aloes, etc.  
In the Island of Timor and Solor, grows a Tree which stinketh exactly like Human Excrements: A considerable 
Rarities.  part of an Arm of which Tree, is to be seen in the Public Musaeum of Gresham College. (2.) In several of the Moluccoe's are divers Vulcano's, particularly that called Gounong-apy in Banda, which some Years ago made a dreadful Eruption, not only of Fire and Sulphur, but also of such a prodigious number of Stones, that they covered a great part of the Island, and so many dropped into the Sea, that where 'twas formerly forty Fathom Water near the Shore, is now a dry Beach. (3.) In Ternata (one also of the Moluccoes) is another Vulcano, reckoned by many to be yet more terrible than the former; for a particular Description of which, Vid. Philos. Trans. N. 216. (4.) In the Moluccoe's is a Bird termed by the Natives Manucodiata, i. e. Avis Dei; and by the Europeans, the Bird of Paradise. He is indeed a Creature of admirable Beauty; and being always seen upon the Wing, 'twas currently believed, that he had no Feet. But that Opinion is now found to be a gross Mistake, notwithstanding the same was not only received by the unthinking Vulgar, but also embraced even by some considering (yet therein deceived) Naturalists; among whom the great Scaliger [Exerc. 228. S. 2] was one; and likeways Gesner [the Pliny of Germany] being led into the same Error, hath pictured that Bird accordingly. To these Remarkables abovementioned, I may here add that rare Quality of Cloves, (one of the chief Spices produced in these Islands) viz. their strange attractive Virtue when laid near any Liquids, being able to drain a Hogshead of Wine or Water in a short time; whereby some unwary Commanders of Ships have been most unexpectedly deprived of their beloved Liquors.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of these Islands (especially such as inhabit the midland Parts) are by most, esteemed a treacherous, 
Manners.  inhuman, and base kind of People, much given to beastly Pleasures, and generally walking Naked; but those upon, or near the Seacoasts, who have Commerce with Europeans, are pretty well civilised, and several of 'em prove very ingenious. Their manner of Dealing is all by Bartering, they being Strangers as yet to Money.  
All we can find of the Language peculiar to, the Natives of these Islands, is, that 'tis as barbarous as they 
Language.  who own it. The Trading Persons among 'em in their Dealings with Strangers use the Portugueze Tongue.  
These Islands are subject to many Sovereigns of their own, and some (particularly Celebes and Gilolo) 
Government.  have each of 'em several petty Kings, whom they own as Sovereign Lords and Governors. The Portugueze formerly had got considerable footing in these Islands; but now the Dutch, who send thither many of their condemned Criminals to be there employed as perpetual Slaves. 
Arms.   
The Natives of the Moluccoes are, for the most part, gross Idolaters; and intermixed with them are many 
Religion.  Mahometans, with some who know a little of Christianity; which Knowledge hath not been improved very briskly in those poor Creatures, ever since they happened to change their Masters.   

§. 5. The Islands of the Sund.  
THESE Islands (unknown to the Ancients) are termed by the Italians, Isola-di Sunda; by the Spaniards, 
Name.  Islas deal fond; by the French, let Isles de la Sonde; by the Germans, die Insuln in Sunde; by the English, The Islands of the Sonde or Sund; so called from the Straight of the Sund, between the Isles of Java and Sumatra.  
The Air of these Islands is extremely hot, (they being situated under the same Parallels of Latitude with 
Air.  the Moluccoes) and in Sumatra 'tis mighty unwholesome, by reason of many Lakes wherewith that Island abounds. The opposite Place of the Globe to the Isles of the Sund, is part of Terra Firma, and the Land of the Amazons in South America.  
The Soil of these Islands is generally very good, especially in Java and Sumatra, affording great plenty 
Soil.  of Corn and Fruits; mightily abounding with the chiefest of Spices; well furnished with various kinds of Fowl; and wonderfully stored with rich Mines of Gold, Tin, Iron, Sulphur, and several other Minerals. The length of the Days and Nights in these Islands, is much the same throughout the whole Year, their Latitude either South or Northern being inconsiderable.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands, are Gold in great quantities, most sorts of Spices, plenty of Wax 
Commodities.  and Honey, store of Silks and Cottons, some precious Stones, and the best kind of Brass.  
In the Island of Java are Serpents of a prodigious length and bigness; one being taken at a certain time, 
Rarities.  that was thirteen Yards and a half long: and so big, that they found a young Boar in his Belly. In the same Island is a remarkable Vulcano, which sometimes burns with great Rage. (2) Towards the middle part of Sumatra, is another burning Mountain, called Mons Balulvanus, which vomits forth Fire and Ashes in like manner as Mount Aetna in Sicily, or Vesuvius in Naples. (3.) In the same Island is a very observable Tree, called Sangali by the Malayans; and by the Portuguese, Arbor triste de dia; so termed from its remarkable property of putting forth abundance of lovely Buds every Evening, (which look very pleasant to the Eye, and fill the places adjacent with a most fragrant Smell) but these fading and falling to the Ground when the Sun ariseth, it appears in a melancholy and mourning Dress all day long. (4) In the Island of Borneo is a Creature, usually known to our English Navigators, by the Name of the Savage Man; being of all Brutes likest to Man, both in Shape, Stature, and Countenance, walking also upright upon his two hinder Legs, and that frequently, if not always. He's a Creature of great Strength, and extremely Swift in Running. Many reckon him the Ape peculiar to Borneo, and the hunting of him is esteemed a princely Diversion.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of these Islands do considerably differ in Point of Manners; those of Borneo being generally 
Manners.  esteemed Men of good Wits, and approved Integrity: those of Java very Treacherous, Proud, and much given to Lying: And the Inhabitants of Sumatra are affirmed to be good Artificers, cunning Merchants, and several of 'em expert Mariners.  
The Language in these various Islands, is not the same, at least it doth mightily differ in variety of 
Language.  Dialects. The Trading People who have frequent Dealings with the Franks, do understand and speak the Fortugueze Tongue.  
In each of these Islands are several Kings. In Borneo two, one Mahometan, and the other Pagan. In 
Government.  Sumatra and Java, are many Princes, some Mahometan, and some Pagan. The chief of those in Sumatra is the King of Achem, and Materan is the chief in Java. The Hollanders and Portugueze have established several Factories in these Islands, especially the former. 
Arms.   
The Natives of these Islands, who reside in the Inland Parts, are generally gross Idolaters; but those 
Religion.  towards the Seacoasts are (for the most part) zealous Professors of the Doctrine of Mahomet, in several of its Fundamental Points.   

§. 6. The Maldives and Ceylon.  
THESE Islands (unknown in former times, except Ceylon, which is thought by some to be the 
Name.  Ophit of Solomon, and the Taprobane of the Ancients) are termed by the Italians, Maldivee, Ceylon; by the Spaniards, Maldivas, Ceylon; by the French, Isles des Maldives & Ceylon; by the Germans, die Maldivische Insuln & Ceylon; and by the English, the Maldives and Ceylon. They are called Maldives from Male, the chief est of 'em; and Dive, which in their Language signifies an Island: But from whence Ceylon derives its Name is not very certain.  
The Air of these Islands (notwithstanding of their nearness to the Line) is very Temperate, there falling 
Air.  a kind of Dew every Night, which mightily helps to qualify the same, yet frequently mortal to Strangers. But in Ceylon 'tis so pure and wholesome, that the Indians term this Island, Temarisin, i. e. a Land of Pleasure The opposite Place of the Globe to these Islands is part of Mare deal Zur, lying between 280 and 290 Degrees of Longitude; with the Equator, and 10 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of these Islands is extraordinary fruitful, except in Corn, whereof the Maldives are said to be 
Soil.  scarce. The length of the Days and Nights in them, is much the same throughout the whole Year, the Latitude of the Northmost of 'em being inconsiderable.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands, are Cinnamon, Gold, Silver, most sort of Spices, Rice, Honey, 
Commodities.  Precious Stones, etc.  
In Ceylon is that remarkable Mountain, commonly called Adam's Pike, which is of a great height, and reported 
Rarities.  to send forth sometimes from its top both Smoke and Flame. In many of the Maldive Islands grows that Tree bearing the Cacoa, or India. Nuts, which is very remarkable for its various uses; for out of it, is yearly drained a large Quantity of Juice, which being drawn at certain Seasons, and prepared after different manners, do taste exactly like excellent Oil, Butter, Milk, as also some sorts of Wine and Sugar. Of the Fruit they usually make Bread, and the Leaves serve as Paper to write upon. And as for the Trunk of the Tree, they employ it either in building of Houses or Ships. These Islands likeways abound with variety of pretty white Shells, which are much admired, and pass current as Money in many Parts of the Adjacent Continent.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of these Islands (being for the most part, Tall and Straight of Body) are esteemed a Lazy, 
Manners.  Proud, and Effeminate Sort of People, yet some of 'em are reputed to be good Artificers in Metals. Most of 'em go stark Naked, except what Natural Instinct prompteth them to cover. To wear long Hair, is the only privilege of the King and Soldiers.  
The Inhabitants of the Maldives have a peculiar Jargon of their own. Those who reside on the Seacoasts 
Language.  of Ceylon, understand a little Dutch, and something of the Portugueze Tongue.  
The Maldives are mostly subject to one Sovereign, who hath his ordinary Residence in Male, the chief 
Government.  of all those Islands. And Ceylon is governed by its own King, residing at Candea, to whom several little Princes are Tributary; but much of the Seacoasts is possessed by the Dutch. The Maldive Sovereign is said to assume the Title of Sultan, King of Thriteen Provinces, and Twelve thousand Islands, viz. those of the Maldives, their number being generally accounted such. 
Arms.   
The Natives of this mighty Cluster of Islands, are partly Mahometans, partly Idolaters, especially the latter, 
Religion.  Paganism being the most predominant of the two.  
And so much for Asia and the Asiatic Islands. Now followeth,     


AFRICA by R. Morden    

CHAP. III. Of AFRICA.  
Divided (page 44.) into Egypt— Capital City Cairo. Barbary— Fez. Bildulgerid— Dara. Zaara, or the Desert— Zuenziga. The Land of the Negroes— Tombute. Guinea— Arda. Nubia— 〈◊〉. Ethiopia Exterior or Inf. 〈◊〉 Interior or Sup. 〈◊〉  
To these add the African Islands.  
Of all which in Order. Therefore,  

SECT. I. Concerning Egypt.  
 d. m. Situated between 52 06 of Long. It's greatest Length from N. E. to S. W. is about 650 Miles. 62 40 between 21 10 of Latit. Breadth from E. to W. is about 310 Miles. 30 00 It comprehen●● 〈◊〉, or the Lower Egypt— Chief Town Alexandria. Northward. Bechria, or Middle Egypt— Cairo— Sahid, or Upper Egypt— Sahid— Southward. The Coasts of the Red-Sea— Cossir—  
THIS Country (much the same with Ancient Egypt, and variously named of old, as Misraim 
Name.  by the Jews; Augustanica, by the Romans; Oceana, by Peros●s; Og●g●a, by X●uophon; Potamia, by Herodotus; and Hefostia, by Homer, etc.) is termed by the Italians, Egitto; by the Spaniards, Egypto; by the French, Egypte; by the Germans, Egypten; and by the English Egypt; so called [as many imagine] from Egyptus, Son of Belus, and Brother to Danaus.  
The Air of this Country is very hot, and generally esteemed extremely unwholesome, being always infected 
Air.  with nauseous Vapours, ascending from the fat and s●imy Soil of the Earth. That it never Rains in Egypt, (as some have boldly affirmed) may deservedly claim a place among the Vulgar Errors of the World The opposite Place of the Globe to Egypt, is part of Mare Pacificum, lying between 232 and 242 Degrees of Longitude; with 21 and 31 Degrees of South Latitude.  
Egypt (● lying in the 4th and 5th North Climate) was, and is still accounted as fertile a Country as any 
Soil.  in the World; the Soil being wonderfully fattened by the yearly overflowing of the Nile. It's exceeding plentiful of all sorts of Grain; and for its vast abundance of Corn in former times, 'twas commonly termed Horreum Populi Romani. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 14 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost is 10 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Sugar, Flax, Rice, all sorts of Grains and Fruits, Linen-cloth, 
Commodities.  Salt, Balfam, Senna, Cassia, Butargio, etc.  
In and near to Ancient Alexandria, (now termed by the Turks, Scanderick or Scanderie) are many considerable 
Rarities.  Remains of Antiquity; particularly the ruin'd Walls of that ancient famous City, with a considerable number of Towers; several of which are almost entire. Here also are divers stately Porphyry Pillars, and several curious Obelisks of pure Granet, (especially that which bears the Name of Pompey's Pillar) some of 'em still standing, others thrown down, and all adorned with variety of Hieroglyphics. For a particular Account of such Pillars, with a curious Draught of divers of 'em representing both their true Dimensions and Hieroglyphic Characters, Vid. Philos. Trans. N. 161. and 178. To these Curiosities we may add the [once] proud Palace of Cleopatra, now wholly in Ruins; being so defaced, that 'tis hardly discernible, if ever such a stately Structure was in that place. (2) In the Ancient Castle of Grand Cairo, are several Remarkables worthy of Observation, which Strangers (with some difficulty) obtain leave to see: The chief whereof are these Three. First, The Arcane, which is a frightful dark Dungeon, and that (as they tell you) into which the Patriarch Joseph was thrown down. Secondly, A very large Ancient Room with about thirty Pillars of Thebaick Stone as yet standing, which still bears the Name of Joseph's Hall. Lastly, In this Castle is a prodigious deep Pit, with a Spring of good Water in its bottom, (a Rarity in Egypt) which the Natives term Joseph's Well. From this Pit, some Travellers are pleased to talk of an Artificial Communication under Ground, between the Pyramids on one hand, and the Town of Swez on the other. For a farther account of these Particulars. Vid. Thevenot 's Travels, Part I. c. 9 (3.) A few Miles West of Grand Cairo, are the Egyptian Pyramids, (called by the Turks, Pharaon Doglary; and by the Arabs, Dgebel Pharaon, i. e. Pharaoh's Hills) those famous Monuments of Antiquity, which 'twould seem devouring Time could not consume. The biggest of 'em hath these Dimensions, viz. Five hundred and twenty Foot high, upon a Base of six hundred and two Foot square; two hundred and fifty Steps from top to bottom, each Step being two Hands broad, and almost four high; and its Top being flat, is able to contain thirty Men. (4.) Adjacent to the biggest Pyramid, is a monstrous Figure of a prodigious greatness, called Sphinx; and by Herodotus, Anarosphinx: The Bust (being all of one Stone) represents the Face and Breasts of a Woman, whose Head (according to Pliny) is a hundred and twenty Foot in Circumference, and forty three long. It's also a hundred sixty two from the top of the Head to the lowest part of the Belly. But these Dimensions are different from those of some Modern Travellers, who say, That 'tis but twenty six Foot high, and fifteen from the Chin to one of the Ears, and the rest proportionably. (5.) Near to Grand Cairo, are several deep Subterranean Cavities (hewn out of the firm Rock, and having variety of Hieroglyphics inscribed on the Walls) in which repose several of the famous Egyptian Mummies; and in some of those Repositories of the Dead, it is, that certain Lamps are said to have been found, which constantly burn without consuming, till exposed to the open Air. (6) In the famous River of Nile, is abundance of Crocodiles, those terrible and devouring Animals; now accounted the same with that Creature mentioned in the Book of Job, under the Name of Leviathan, commonly taken for the Whale, but falsely; as Bochart, De Animalibus S. S. (Part 2. Cap. 16, 17, 18.) hath fully demonstrated. A complete Skeleton of this Animal, about four Yards three quarters long, may be seen in the Repository of Gresham College, being presented to the Royal Society by that truly Worthy and Ingenious Gentleman, the Honourable Sir Robert Southwell. To these Curiosities of Egypt, I might here add that Supernatural (but Fictitious) Prodigy, that's reported to be yearly seen near to old Cairo, viz. The Annual Resurrection of many dead Bones on Holy Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday, (according to the old Calendar) which both Turks and Christians in those Parts, do firmly believe; and that by the means of some pious Frauds, of a few designing Santoes among them.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universitities. See Anatolia, 
Archbishoprics. etc.  page 262.  
The egyptians now a-days (being Persons of a low Stature, tawny Complexion, and of spare Bodies) are 
Manners.  generally reckoned Cowards, Luxurious, Cruel, Cunning, and Treacherous. They much degenerate from their Ancestors in every thing, save only a vain Affectation of divining, which some as yet pretend unto.  
The chief Language commonly used in this Country, is the Turkish and Vulgar Arabic, or Morisk, especially 
Language.  the latter. The Arabs brought in their Language with their Conquests, which hath been preserved here ever since; but the Cophti's still retain the use of the Ancient Egyptian Tongue, (which is very different from all the Oriental Languages) especially in their Religious Performances. In places of any considerable Traffic, many of the European Tongues are understood and spoken.  
This Country (very famous of old, both in Sacred and Profane History) being a Province of the Turkish 
Government.  Empire, is governed by a particular Bassa or Beglerbeg, who commonly resideth at Grand Cairo, which Post is generally esteemed the most Honourable Government of any belonging to the Port; having under him no less than fifteen different Governments; as also a powerful Militia, commonly reckoned the most considerable of all the Ottoman Empire.  
See Turkey in Europe, page 182. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of this Country, (being Moor's, Turks, and Arabs, besides the Natural Egyptians) are for the 
Religion.  most part stricter Observers of Mahomet's Doctrine, than any People elsewhere through all the Ottoman Dominions. Here also are Jews in great numbers, as also many Christians, called Cophti, who follow the Errors of Eutyches and Dioscorus, yet not concurring with them in every Point. The Christian Faith was first planted here by St. Mark, who is universally acknowledged to have been the first Bishop of Alexandria.   

SECT. II. Concerning Barbary.  
 d. m. Situated between 04 16 of Long. its greatest Length from W. to E. is about 2300 Miles. 52 10 between 24 40 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S is about 380 Miles. 35 00 Barbary comprehends the Kingdoms of Morocco— Chief Town Idem From W. to E. Fez— Idem Rlensen— Idem— Algiers— Idem— Tunis— Idem— Tripo'i— Idem— Barca— Idem—  
Barbary being the most considerable (at least the best known) Country of all Africa, I shall in particular consider its Divisions: Therefore,  
Chief Towns in Morocco are Taradunt— — Found from S. to N. Gazula— Morocco— — Tednest— Ehn din— — Teszca— Fez are— Fez in the main Land. From S. to N. E. upon the Sea-Coast. Beniz— Saliee— Larach— Arzilla— Tanger [now demolished] Ceuta— Telensin are Ora●.— From W. to E. Ten●—  
Chief Towns in Algiers are Algiers— From W. to E. Bugia— Gigiari— Bona— Tunis are Beggia.— From W. to E upon the Sea-Coast. Biserta— Tunis— Mahometa— Susa— Tripoli are Tripoli— From W. to E. Lebida.— Misurata— Barca are Barca— From S. to N. Zadra—  
THIS Country (comprehending Mauritiana of the Ancients, as also Africa propria and Lybia) 
Name.  is termed by the Italians, Barbaria; by the Spaniards, Berberia; by the French, Barbary; by the Germans, Barbaryens; and by the English, Barbary; so called by the Saracens from Barber, (which signifieth a murmuring Sound) because this People seemed at first to their Conquerors, to pronounce their Language after a strange murmuring manner. Others do rather imagine, that the Romans upon their Conquest of this Country, called it Barbaria, and its Inhabitants Barbarians, because of the Rudeness and Barbarity of their Manners.  
The Air of this Country is indifferently temperate, and generally esteemed very heathful to breath in 
Air.  The opposite Part of the Globe to Barbary, is part of Mare de'l Zur and Mare Pacificum, lying between 184 and 232 Degrees of Longitude, with 24 and 35 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
This Country (lying in the 4th and 5th North Climate) is very fertile in Corn, and most kinds of Fruit, 
Soil.  although 'tis full of Mountains and Woods, especially towards the Mediterranean Sea. It breadeth many kinds of Beasts, particularly Lions and Leopards, with many Apes, and some Elephants, besides abundance of Cattle. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 14 Hours ¼; the shortest in the Southmost, 10 Hours ⅓; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Honey, Wax, Oil, Sugar, Flax, Hemp, Hides, Cordevants, 
Commodities.  Dates, Almonds, Mantles, etc.  
On Mount Zagoan (about six Miles South from Tunis) are many Ruins of an old Castle, built by the Ancient 
Rarities.  Romans, with several Latin Inscriptions, as yet to be seen upon divers Marble Stones. (2) From the aforesaid Mountain to the City of Carthage, was once a curious Aqueduct; and upon Mount Guestet (in the same Neighbourhood) are some plain Vestigia of Roman Magnificence, still visible to this Day. (3.) In the City of Morocco, are two magnificent Temples; one built by Ali, and the other by Addul Mumen, which deserve the particular regard of a curious Traveller. (4.) In the Palace Royal of the Morocco Emperors (a Building of a vast Extent, and termed by the Natives, Alcacave or Michovart) is a stately Mosque, with a very high Turret, on whose Top are four Apples of solid pure Gold, which all together weigh seven hundred pounds' weight; and in another Court of the said Palace is a prodigious high Tower, so contrived, that the Emperor can mount up to the Top of it on Horseback. (5.) In the City of Fez, is that famous Mosque called Caruven, which is said to be almost half a Mile in Circuit, and furnished with thirty Gates of a prodigious bigness. It hath above three hundred Cisterns to wash in, before they go to Prayers: and in it are upwards of nine hundred Lamps, which are commonly lighted and burn every Night. (6) Over a certain River, called Sabu, (as it runs between two Hills, termed Beni-jasga and Silego) is a remarkable Bridge, or rather a ready way of passing from one side of the River to the other; and that by the help of two large Stakes fixed fast in the Ground (on either side, one) between which are extended two strong Ropes, and to one of them is tied a kind of a big Basket, able to contain ten Men, into which the Passengers being entered, and pulling one of the Ropes, (which runs by a Pulley) they waft themselves over much sooner, than we Europeans can pass either by Bridge or Boat. Vid. Dapper 's late Description of Africa.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Barbarians [thus Characterised of old by Herodian, Mauri (inqu●t ills) Genus sunt hominum suapte naturâ 
Manners.  coedit avidissimum, nihilque non facile audens & despèratis singles, contemptu scilices mortis & periculorum] are now a People that's generally very Inconstant, Crafty, and Unfaithful, Active of Body, Impatient of Labour, and Covetous of Honour. Some of 'em ●re Studious in Matters of their Law; and others are inclined to the Liberal Sciences, especially Philosophy and the Mathematics. The Inhabitants of Sallee, Tripoli, and Algiers, are mightily given to Piracy; and many of the Moroccoes are much addicted to Merchandizing. Dispersed through all these Countries are the Arabs, who (especially in Barca) exercise their common Trade of robbing and molesting Travellers on the Highway.  
In most of the Seaport Towns, and over all the Countries bordering on the Sea, the prevailing Language 
Language.  is Arabesque, or corrupt Arabic. In the City of Morocco, and several other Places, they still retain their Ancient Language, or rather a corrupt Dialect of the old African. The trading People (especially in their Dealing with Strangers) do use a certain Jargon compounded chiefly of Spanish and Portugueze, not unlike to the Lingua Franca among the Turks.  
This large Country (comprehending several Kingdoms and Provinces) is chiefly under the Great Turk, 
Government.  and Emperor of Morocco: To the latter belong the Kingdoms of Morocco and Fez, and to him are ascribed (or rather he assumeth) the following Titles, viz. Emperor of Africa, King of Morocco, Fez, Sus, and Taffalet; Lord of Gago, Dara, and Guinea; and Great Xeriff of Mahomet. The other Kingdoms or Provinces of this Country, are mostly subject to the Great Turk, and are governed by his particular Bassa's set over 'em, only Tunis and Algiers, (two considerable Commonwealths, or rather distinct Kingdoms) though each of 'em hath their respective Bassa appointed by the Grand Signior; yet they're so eager in maintaining their Liberties and Privileges, that those Bassa's are little more than mere Ciphers. For in the former of these, the Inhabitants have a Power of choosing their own Governor or Captain, termed the Dey, who Rules the Kingdom, Constitutes Cadi's, and passeth Sentence in all Affairs, whether Civil or Criminal. The Divan of Tunis is composed of one Aga, one Chaya, twelve Odabachi, twenty four Bouloubachi, two Secretaries, and four Chiaoux, who judge in all Matters after they have heard the Sentiment of the Dey, who may accept or reject their Advice, as he thinks fit. As for Aegiers, The Government thereof is lodged in the Hands of the Army, particularly the Officers of the Janissaries, of whom the Council of State is composed, and of it the Aga of the Janissaries is Precedent. It's true, the Grand Signior keeps always in this Place a Bassa, with the Title of Viceroy, but he's at best but a mere Shadow; for he may not so much as enter the great Divan, unless invited by the whole Council; and when admitted, he hath but one single Voice, and can only advise in Matters. Besides these two Potent Republics of this Country, there's another, viz. That of Tripolt; but it is entirely subject to the Grand Signior, who governs the same by a particular Bassa sent from the Ottoman Court, and renewed every third Year. He is honoured with the Standart of Tunis, and the Title of Beglerbeg.  
The chief Independent Potentate in these Countries being the Emperor of Fez and Morocco, he bears for 
Arms.  Arms, Three Wheels, Argent. As for the rest of Barbary. Vid Turkey in Europe, page 182.  
The established Religion of this Country, is Mahometanism; but the Inhabitants of Morocco differ from other 
Religion.  Mahometans in several considerable Points; particularly those maintained by the Followers of Hamet, (the first of the present Race of the Morocco Emperors) who was at first a kind of Monk, and quitting his Retirement, A. C. 1514. began publicly to Preach to the People, that the Doctrine of Hali and Omar, and other Interpreters of the Law, was only Humane Traditions; besides several other things of that Nature, which occasioned such Animosities between other Turks and the Morocco's, that a Turkish Slave with them, is no whit better treated than a Christian. There are also many Persons in and about Algiers, who likeways differ from other Mahometans in divers Particulars. Some of 'em maintain, that to fast seven or eight Months doth merit Eternal Happiness: That Idiots are the Elect of God: That Sins against Nature are Virtues: That the Marabouts among 'em are inspired by the Devil, and yet they account it an honourable thing to be defiled by one of 'em. These and many other such ridiculous Follies do they believe and avouch. The Christian Faith was first planted in this Country by some of the seventy Disciples, and St. Simon the Apostle, Surnamed Zelotis.   

SECT. III. Concerning Bildulgerid.  
 d. m. Situated between 02 00 of Long. It's greatest Length from W to E. is about 2040 Miles. 55 00 between 22 30 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 300 Miles. 32 40 Bildulgerid comprehends the Provinces of Tesset— Chief Town Idem— From W. to E. Dara— Idem— Segelmess— Idem— Tegorarin— Idem— Zeb.— Teulachar Bildulgerid prop. so called Caphesa— Desert of Barca— None considerable.  
THIS Country (the Ancient Numidia) is termed by the Italians, Spaniards, French, Germans, and 
Name.  English, Bildulgerid; so called from the vast numbers of Dates it produceth; the Name in the Arabic Tongue signifying a Date.  
The Air of this Country is very hot, but generally esteemed abundantly wholesome to breath in. The 
Air.  opposite Place of the Globe to Bildulgerid, is that part of Mare de'l Zur and More Pacificum, lying between 182 and 235 Degrees of Longitude, with 22 and 32 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 3d and 4th North Climate) is somewhat Barren, the Ground, for 
Soil.  the most part, being very Sandy, yet in some low Valleys is found Corn, and great Quantity of Dates. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 14 Hours; the shortest in the Southmost, 10 Hours ¾; and the Nights proportionably.  
The Commodities of this Country are very few, they chiefly consisting in Corn, Cattle, Dates, and 
Commodities.  Indigo.  
A certain River, (whose Origine is in Mount Atlas, but watereth the Plains of Bildulgerid in its main Body) 
Rarities.  passing by a Town called Teolacha, hath a Current of Water extremely warm; and is known to European Travellers, by no other Name than la Riviere Chaude, or the Hot River. (2.) There's another River issuing out of the Mountains of Numidia, and passing by the four Forts of Ifran, disgorgeth itself into the main Ocean, between Bojadore and the Town of Nun, which in the Wintertime (when other Rivers do usually swell over their Banks) grows commonly dry, and goes thereupon by the Frank Name of la Riviere seek. (3.) Nigh the aforesaid Teolacha, is a little Village, called Deusen, which is of great Antiquity, being built by the Romans, as appears by the Remains of several Structures, and some Roman Sepulchers; besides variety of Medals, (found frequently after a Rain) having commonly a Head upon one side of 'em, with Latin Inscriptions, and Trophies on the other. Vid Dapper 's late Description of Africa,  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of this Country (besides the Natives) being chiefly Arabs, are generally Ignorant, 
Manners.  Cruel, Lecherous, and much given to Robbing.  
All we can learn of the Language commonly used by the Natives of this Country, is, that 'tis as Rude and Barbarous 
Language.  as they themselves. The Arabs here residing, do still retain their own Tongue.  
This great Body is subject unto several little Kings or Lords, who (for the most part) are Tributary to 
Government.  the Great Turk, and Emperor of Morocco. Some places are governed in Form of Independent Commonwealths; and others are without any kind of Government or Order among them.  
The Religion professed by the Savage Inhabitants of 
Arms.  this Country, is that of Mahometanism; but many of 
Religion.  'em are sunk into the grossest Stupidity as to Religious Matters, either not knowing what they profess, or professing as good as none at all. Here are several Jews scattered up and down those places, best inhabited. The Christian Faith was first planted in this Country much about the same time with Barbary. Of which already.   

SECT. IV. Concerning Zaara, or the Desert.  
 d. m. Situated between 02 00 of Long. Itsgreatest Length from W to E. is about 2340 Miles. 50 00 between 21 00 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 330 Miles. 28 00 Zaara or the Desert comprehends the Provinces of Borno— Chief Town Idem— From W. to E. Gaogo— Idem— Bardoa— Idem— Lempta— Idem— Targa— Idem— Zuenziga— Idem— Zanhaga— Tagassa—  
THIS Country (a Part of Ancient Lybia, the Seat of the Getuli and Garamantes) is termed by the 
Name.  Italians, Zaara; by the Spaniards, Zaara o Desierto; by the French, Zahara ou Desert; by the Germans, Zaara or Wijste; and by the English, Zaara or the Desert; so called by the Arabians (the Name signifying a Desert) because 'tis a Country very Barren, and thinly inhabited.  
The Air of this Country is much the same as in Bildulgerid, only a little more hot, yet very wholesome to 
Air.  breath in. The opposite Place of the Globe to Zaara, is that part of Mare deal Zur and Mare Pacificum, dying between 182 and 243 Degrees of Longitude, with 21 and 28 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country (lying in the 3d and 4th North Climate) being generally very Dry and Sandy, is not 
Soil.  fertile either for Corn or Fruits; yea, 'tis generally so barren that its Inhabitants can hardly live. Such are those vast Deserts and terrible Mountains of Sand in this Country, that Travellers are frequently reduced to great Extremities, being liable either to be overwhelmed with Sand, (if a Tempest of Wind arise) or to perish with Thirst if it chance not to Rain. To prevent the last of these, (the first being unavoidable in case of Wind) they commonly kill one of their Camels, and drink the Water in his Stomach; those Creatures taking in so large a quantity at one time, as sufficeth Nature for fourteen or fifteen Days together. The longest Day in the Northmost Part, is about 13 Hours¼; the shortest in the Southmost, is 10 Hours¾; and the Nights proportionably.  
The Commodities of this Country are very inconsiderable, they chiefly consisting in a few Camels, 
Commodities.  Dates, and Cattle.  
Nigh to C. Bojadore, on the West of Zahara, are certain Banks of Sand stretching along that part of the 
Rarities.  Coast; towards which so strong a Current sets in, that the Water being in a mighty Agitation, both Waves and Sand mixing together, do not only resemble a boiling Salt-pan, but also they frequently mount up to a prodigious height. (2.) In the Desert of Araoan, are two Tombs with Inscriptions upon 'em, importing that the Persons there interred, were a rich Merchant, and a poor Carrier, (who both died of Thirst) and that the former had given ten thousand Ducats for one Cruise of Water. (3.) North of Gaogo, are some Vesligia of the Ancient Cyrene, the chief City of Lybia Cyrenaica, and formerly one of the famous Pentapolis.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universitities. None. 
Archbishoprics. etc.   
The Inhabitants of this Country, being mostly Arab's, are an Ignorant, Brutish, and Savage kind of 
Manners.  People, resembling rather Wild Beasts than Rational Creatures.  
What was said of the Language spoken by the Natives of Bildulgerid, the same may be affirmed of that 
Language.  commonly used in this Country, viz. that it's as Rude and Barbarous as they who speak it.  
This great Country is subject to several particular Lords, whom they term Xeques; but many of 'em 
Government.  wander up and down, hunting in great Companies, accounting themselves Independent.  
This Country being stocked with Arabs, the only 
Arms.  Religion here professed, is that of Mahomet's; but so 
Religion.  Barbarous and Brutish is the generality of this People, that many of 'em live without the least sign of Religion among them. The Christian Faith was once planted here, but quite exterminated towards the beginning of the Eighth Century.   

SECT. V. Concerning the Land of the Negroes.  
 d. m. Situated between 00 10 of Long. It's greatest Length from W. to E. is about 2280 Miles. 46 20 between 10 00 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 600 Miles. 23 10 The Land of the Negroes comprehends the Provinces of Genohoa— Chief Town Idem— From W. to E. upon the North of the Niger. Galata— Idem— Tombut— Idem— Agades— Idem— Canon— Idem— Cassena— Idem— Guangara Idem— Melli— Idem— From W. to E. upon the South of the Niger. Mandinga Idem— Gago— Idem— Guber— Idem— Zegzeg— Idem— Zanfara— Idem—  
Besides these is the Country of the Jalofes upon the Mouth of the Niger.  
THIS Country (unknown to the Ancients) is termed by the Italians, Paese di Mori; by the Spaniards, 
Name.  Yierra de los Negro; by the French, Pays des Negres; by the Germans, Moren-land; and by the English, Negroeland, or The Land of the Negroes; so called, either from the Colour of its Inhabitants, or the River Niger.  
The Air of this Country is very warm, yet generally esteemed so wholesome to breath in, that sick Persons 
Air.  are reported to be brought thither from several of the Adjacent Countries; and upon their stay in it for any considerable time, are perfectly restored to their former Health. The opposite Place of the Globe to Negroeland, is part of the West American Ocean, lying between 180 and 220 Degrees of Longitude, with 10 and 23 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 2d and 3d North Climate) is very rich, especially towards the 
Soil.  River Niger, which overflows a considerable part thereof, as the Nile doth Egypt. Here is great store of Corn and Cattle, and variety of Herbs. Here are many Woods, and those well furnished with Elephants, and other Beasts, both Wild and Tame. Here also are several Mountains, and those richly lined with valuable Mines of Silver and Gold. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country, is about 13 Hours ¼; the shortest in the Southmost, is 11 Hours ¼; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Ostridge-Feathers, Gums, Amber, Gold, Red Wood, Civer, 
Commodities.  and Elephants Teeth, etc.  
In Juala (a little Kingdom in the Country of the Jalofes) is a small River, called by the Franks, Rio de 
Rarities.  la Grace; opposite to whose Mouth is a considerable Bank of Sand, out of which there issueth, at low Water, a gentle Stream of curious fresh Water, most pleasant to the Taste. (2) Nigh to Sanyeng (a Village in the same Country) is a Well of ten Fathom depth, whose Water is naturally so very sweet, that in taste it comes nothing short of ordinary Sugar. (3.) In the Province of Gago, the Sandy Desert is of such a Nature, that Humane Bodies laid in the same, (for many Persons parish in endeavouring to cross it) done't in the least corrupt, but become hard like the Egyptian Mummies.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Negroes (having their Denomination from the blackness of their Complexion) are a People very ignorant 
Manners.  in all Arts and Sciences. In Behaviour extremely rude and barbarous, much given to Luxury, addicted to beastly Pleasures, and universally great Idolaters In the Maritime Places they Trade in Slaves with the Europeans, selling to them not only what Captives they take in Wars with one another, but also (many times) their nearest Relations, even Wives and Children not excepted.  
In this vast Country there are variety of Languages, and very different from one another. The principal 
Language.  of which, are the Sungai and Guber; that of Gualata, and what they ordinarily use in Guangara. In the Country of the Jalofes, are those called by the Names of Bolm and Timna; the first being a Language that's extremely rough in Pronunciation, and hard to be learned; but the other is generally reckoned very sweet and easy.  
This spacious Country is subject to many Kings, who are absolute over their own Territories; but all, 
Government.  or most of 'em are Tributary to one Sovereign, viz. the King of Tombute, who is reckoned the most powerful of 'em all. Next to him are Mandingo, Gago, and Cano. 
Arms.   
The numerous Inhabitans of this vast Country, are either Mahometans, or gross Idolaters; and some in the 
Religion.  Midland Provinces live without any sign of Religion or Worship among them. A faint Knowledge of the Mosaical Law, was once introduced into some Parts of Negroeland; and the Marabouts of Cambea and Cassan, give still a confused Account of the Historical Part of the Old Testament. They acknowledge the Existence of One God, and never Adore him under any Corporeal Representation. They also own our Blessed Saviour as a mighty Prophet, and Worker of Miracles. They generally use Circumcision as other Mahometans do. Christianity got once some footing in these Parts of the World, but was wholly overclouded by Mahometanism, towards the middle of the Tenth Century.   

SECT. VI Concerning Guinea.  
 d. m. Situated between 03 00 of Long. its greatest Length from W. to E. is about 1320 Miles. 30 00 between 04 10 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 360 Miles. 11 40 Guinea compreh. The Coasts of Maleguette— Chief Town Timan— W. to E. Guinea prop Ivory Coast, W. Tabo— Quaqua Coast Assin.— Gold Coast, E. S. George de Mina The Kingdom of Benin— Arda—  
THIS Country (unknown to the Ancients, and properly a part of Negroeland) is termed by the 
Name.  Italians and Spaniards, Guinea; by the French and Germans, Guinea; and by the English, Guinea; so called (as most imagine) from the Nature of the Soil, and excessive Heat of the Country, the Name signifying Hot and Dry.  
The Air of this Country is extremely hot, and very unwholesome, especially to Strangers, with whom 
Air.  it so disagreeth, that many live but a short time after their arrival in it. The opposite Place of the Globe to Guinea, is that part of New Guinea, and Adjacent Ocean, between 186 and 210 Degrees of Longitude, with 4 and 11 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil in many places is wonderfully fertile, producing the choicest of Grains and Fruits. This Country 
Soil.  is well stored with Elephants, whose Teeth bring great Gain to the Inhabitants, when either sold or bartered for other Goods of those Merchants who Trade with them. Here also are several inexhaustible Mines of Gold; and in many of its Rivers are found some Pearls of great value, with abundance of Gold-Dust. The longest Day in the Northmost Part is about 12 Hours ¾; the shortest in the Southmost 11 Hours ¾; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold, Ivory, Hides, Wax, Ambergriss, Guinea-Pepper, 
Commodities.  Redwood, Sugar, Civet, etc.  
So impetuous is the Current of Rio da Volta, that the Sea, for about a Mile near the place where the River 
Rarities.  disgorgeth itself, appears always of a whitish Colour, and is said to have a sweetish Taste for almost ten Fathoms deep. (2.) In several Parts of Guinea grows a certain Tree, (commonly called Mignolo) which having an Incision made in its Body, doth yield an excellent Liquor of much request among the Natives; proving to them more pleasant, strong, and nourishing, than the choicest of Wines. (3.) In several Inland Provinces of Guinea, and the Country's adjacent, is sometimes seen that remarkable Creature, termed Savage by the Portugueses, [and by the Natives, Qoja-Marrow] but most usually found in Angola, from whence one was lately brought to England, and viewed by multitudes of People at London. Such Creatures walk frequently upright as Men; at other times, on all four; and so near is their resemblance to Human Shape, that many of the Negroes either take them for Real Men, (imagining that by long continuance in the Woods they're become Demi-Brutes) or look upon them as the spurious Issue of unnatural Commixtures. Some of our Modern Travellers would fain persuade the World, that such Creatures are the genuine Offspring, either of the Ancient Satyrs or Pigmies, so famous among the Poets, and so frequently mentioned by Pliny, (who spoke much of them by hear-say.) But others, with more show of probability, do reckon them specifically the same with the Apes of Borneo, already mentioned, page 289. For a full and satisfactory Account of this remarkable Creature, with a nice Examination of the various Conjectures about it, I must refer the Reader to a particular Treatise on that Subject, now preparing for the Press, by the Learned Dr. Teyson.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Country are great Idolaters, very Superstitious, and much given to Stealing. In 
Manners.  Complexion they're of the blakest sort, and most of 'em walk quite Naked without the least shame. Some of 'em on the Sea-Coast are given to Trading, and understand Commerce tolerably well; but generally they're a cheating, proud, lazy, and sluttish kind of People. Remarkable is one fundamental Law (or rather an Ancient Custom) among some People upon the Quaqua-Coast; viz. That every Person is obliged to betake himself to the same Trade or Employment, which his Forefathers have followed. Upon the Death of a Husband in the Kingdom of Benin, the Widow becomes wholly subject to her own Son, (if any) and may be reckoned among his number of Slaves; only with this difference, that she can't be sold without leave obtained from the immediate Prince of the Country where they live. To kill a considerable number of Slaves at the Funeral of any great Person, was a Custom (almost) universal through all Pagan Countries; and particularly here, but much worn out in these latter Ages.  
The chief Language in this Country, is that called Sungai, which is also understood and spoken in several 
Language.  Adjacent Countries, particularly Tombut and Melli. Of the several Tongues in use upon the Golden Coast, That of the Acanistes is most universal; being current almost all Guinea over, except Anten, Acara, Ningo, and Sinco, which have each their particular Dialects. The Trading Part of 'em understand and speak Portugueze.  
This Country owneth Subjection to several Sovereigns, the chief of whom is ordinarily styled the 
Government.  Emperor of Guinea, to whom divers other Kings and Princes are subject. Next to him is the King of Benin, who is esteemed a powerful Prince, having several States Subject and Tributary unto him.  
Paganism is the Religion of this Country, the Profession 
Arms.  whereof is attended with many ridiculous Superstitions; 
Religion.  and in some places on the Golden Coast, that Diabolical Custom of offering up Human Sacrifices is still in use, but not so current as formerly. The Pythagorcan Opinion (embraced by a great part of the Heathen World) prevails mightily here. Those of the Kingdom of Benin do own a Supreme Being, whom they call by the Name of Orifa, acknowledging him as the Creator of Heaven and Earth; but think it needless to serve him, because (say they) he being Infinitely Good, will be sure not to hurt them. On the very contrary Account, they're very careful in paying their Devotions, and offering Sacrifices to the Devil, or some bad Spirit, who they think is the cause of all their Calamities. They likeways offer up a yearly Sacrifice to the Sea, reckoning thereby to appease the Waves, and procure calm and peaceable Wether. In several other parts of this Country, are neither Idol nor Temple, and many of the People seem to entertain but very slender hopes of a future State; and wholly deny the Resurrection of the Body, except those who are killed in the Wars. Which Exception hath been undoubtedly inculcated upon 'em by some of their Princes, and that probably out of a Political Design.   

SECT. VII. Concerning Nubia.  
 d. m. Situated between 42 00 of Long. It's greatest Length from N. E. to S. W. is about 840 Miles. 57 00 between 09 30 of Latit. Breadth from E. to W. is about 570 Miles. 23 00 Nubia North— the River Nuba, chief Towns are Samna. South Nubia.  
THIS Country (known formerly under the same Name) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, 
Name.  Nubia; by the French, Nubie; by the Germans, Nubien; and by the English, Nubia; so called from its Ancient Inhabitants, the Nubi or Nubii, or (according to others) the Nobadoe and Nobades; and finally some would derive its Name from Nuabia, (once) the Capital City of the whole Country.  
The Air of this Country is every where extremely hot, it being seldom qualified with Showers of Rain. 
Air.  The opposite Place of the Globe to Nubia, is part of Mare de'l Zur, lying between 220 and 240 Degrees of Longitude, with 9 and 23 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 2d and 3d North Climate) is said to be very fertile in those Parts 
Soil.  adjacent to the River Nile; but elsewhere 'tis generally very barren, being cumbered with many formidable Mountains of Sand. Here is good store of Elephants, some Sugarcanes, and (as several report) a few Mines of Gold. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 13 Hours ½; the shortest in the South-most, 11 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold, 
Commodities.  Civet, Sugar, Ivory, Arms, etc.  
In divers Parts of Nubia are still extant, the Ruins of many Christian Churches, (being reckoned one hundred 
Rarities.  and fifty in all) with several Pictures of our Blessed Saviour, the Virgin Mary, and many Saints. Most observable is that strange subtle Poison produced in this Country, one Grain thereof being able to kill ten Men in a quarter of an Hour. It's commonly sold at an hundred Ducats an Ounce, but never to Strangers, unless they promise by Oath not to use it in these Parts of the World. Remarkable is this Country for being the Birth-place of the famous Nubian Geographer.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Nubians (of a Colour extraordinary Black) are said to be a strong, courageous, and cunning sort of 
Manners.  People, much given to War, very Laborious, and many of 'em exceeding Wealthy, there being established a considerable Traffic between them and the Merchants of Grand Cairo in Egypt.  
The Nubians have a particular Language of their own, which hath some Affinity with the Arabic and Chaldean; 
Language.  as also some agreement with the old Egyptian Tongue.  
This Country is governed by its own Independent King, who is said to be a very Powerful Prince. 
Government.  One of his Predecessors, called Cyriacus, upon Information of the Christians being oppressed in Egypt, is reported to have raised one hundred thousand Horse for their relief.  
This spacious Country was once Christian; but the 
Arms.  Ministry failing, the Inhabitants, for want of Pastors, 
Religion.  fell off from Christianity, and in process of time became either strict Mahometans or Gross Idolaters. The Sound of the Blessed Gospel did reach the Nubians, and was cordially received by them in the earliest Ages of the Church.   

SECT. VIII. Concerning Ethiopia.  
 d. m. Situated between 35 20 of Long. It's greatest Length from N. E. to S. W. is about 3600 Miles. 73 20 between 23 00 of. Latit. Breadth from W. to E. is about 2180 Miles. 34 30  
It being divided into Ethiopia 

Interior.  
Exterior.    
Ethiopia Interior comprehends many Provinces, the chief of which are Barnagasso— Chief Town Barva— N. to S. Tigremahon— Chaxumo.— Dobassat— Dobas.— Fatigar.— Idem Angote— Idem Amara— Idem S. to N. Beleguanze— Idem Bagamedri— Idem Exterior comprehends the Kingdoms of Biafara— Chief Town Idem— N. to S. on the W. of the Abyssins'. Loango— Idem— Congo— Salvador Angola— Idem— Empires of Monoemungi Camure— N. to S on the South of the Abyssines. Monomotapa Idem— Coasts of Cafres'— Cofala— Zangucbar Melinda— S to N. on the E. of the Abyssins'. Ajan— Brava— Abex— Erecco—  
THIS vast Complex Body being generally considered, as divided into these Two Classes, viz. Upper and Lower; or rather Ethiopia Interior and Exterior: I shall separately Treat of them both. Therefore,  

§. 1. Ethiopia Interior, or the Land of the Abyssines.  
THIS Country (but badly known to the Ancients, and much encroached upon of late by 
Name.  Neighbouring Princes) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Abyssinia; by the French, l' Empire des Abyssins'; by the Germans, Abyssinen; and by the English, Ethiopia Interior, or The Land of the Abyssines. It's called Interior, because of its Situation, in respect of the other Ethiopia, being encompassed by the same on three sides; and Abyssinia, either from the River Abas, or its Inhabitants, whom the Arabians call Abassi, a People once residing in Arabia Foelix. The Name in the Egyptian Language signifieth Scattered Nations.  
This Country being wholly within the Torrid Zone, its Air is generally very hot, but yet in some Valleys 
Air.  extremely cool and temperate; by reason of the many and prodigious high Mountains, so situated in divers places, that at certain times of the Year they intercept the Sunbeams from low Valleys lying between them. The opposite Place of the Globe to the Land of the Abyssines, is part of Mare de'l Zur and Mare Pacificum, lying between 215 and 252 Degrees of Longitude, with 10 and 23 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 1st, 2d, 3d North, and 1st, 2d, 3d South Climate) is very different; 
Soil.  for in some places adjacent to the numerous Branches of the Nile, the Ground is sit to produce most sorts of Grain, Fruits, and Herbs, in great plenty; but in those that are Mountainous and Remote from the Nile, nothing is to be seen, but vast Deserts, sandy Mountains, and formidable Rocks. This Land is also said to produce great store of Sugarcanes, Mines of Iron, a great quantity of Flax, and plenty of Vines; but the Inhabitants either know not, or care not to make use of these things to any considerable advantage. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 13 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost, 10 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold, Metals, some Gems, Corn, Cattle, Salt, Flax, Wines, 
Commodities.  Sugarcanes, etc.  
Many are the Natural Salt-Pits of excellent Rock-Salt in this Country; and in the Confines of Dancala 
Rarities.  and Tigra, (two Adjacent Kingdoms) is a large Plain, of four days Journey, one side whereof is entirely crusted over with pure white Salt, which serves the Inhabitants of the Country, both far and near; some hundreds of Camels, Asses, and Mules, being daily employed in carrying of it. (2.) In the Mountains of Gojame, is a great natural hollow Rock, opposite to which is another, so situated, that (according to Travellers Accounts of those Parts) a Word only whispered on its top, is heard at a considerable distance; and the joint Voices of several Persons speaking at once, appear as loud as a great Shout of a numerous Army. (3.) Of the many Christian Temples in this vast Empire, there are ten stately ones hewn out of the firm Rock, which are reported to have been all perfected in twenty four Years; and each of 'em are said to be proportionable in all its Parts, with Gates and Windows in a most regular manner: For the Ichnography of one of those Temples, Vid. Comment. J. Ludolphi in Historiam suam Ethiopicam, lib. 2. cap. 5. page 235. (4.) In several Lakes of this Country, and the River Nile, is frequently seen that amphibious Creature, called by the Ethiopians, Bihat; and Hippopotamus by the Greeks, because of its having some resemblance to a Horse in several Parts of the Body. This is that Creature which goes by the Name of Behemoth in the Book of Job, according to the Learned Bochartus [De Animalilus S. S. Part 2. cap. 15.] who therein differs extremely from the Vulgar (and formerly received) Opinion in this matter. (5.) In other Lakes and Rivers, is sometimes taken the Torpil Fish, whose Nature is such, that if a Person only touch it, he's suddenly seized with an excessive Cold and Trembling. The Natives are said to allay the violent Heat of burning Fevers by touching the Patient therewith. (6.) Of the many curious Birds in this Country, the Pipis is most observable, as being the ready Conductor of Hunters to find out their Game; for having discovered any Beast in his lu●king place, he's said to fly towards the Huntsmen, and calling incessantly Fonton Kerre, (which imports that they should follow him) he flies softly before them, and is sure to conduct them to their desired Prey. (7) Great is the variety of strange Animals to be seen in various Provinces of this vast Empire; the most noted of which are these three: First, That Creature commonly called by the Natives, Arweharis; [and by the Arabs, Harish or Harshan] which hath one long Horn in its Forehead: Whereupon some conclude, that this is the famous Unicorn of the Ancients. Secondly, The Cameleopard, (so termed from having a Head and Neck like a Camel, and a spotted Body as a Leopard) which is said to have so long Legs, that a Man mounted on an ordinary Horse may easily pass under his Belly without so much as touching him. Lastly, The Zecora, which is generally reckoned the most comely Creature of all Quadrupeds whatsoever. For a particular Account of these, and many more in this Country, Vid. Ludolphus abovementioned, Lib. 1. Cap. 10. And the Learned Bochartus his Hierozoicon, Part 1. Lib. 3. To these Rarities of this Country, I might here add the thrice famous Mountain of Amara, which ought indeed to lead the Van, rather than bring up the Rear, if only a tenth part of what hath been related of it, were really true. As for the Sabbatical River, (mentioned both by Pliny and Josephus, and which some of our Modern Jews would fain persuade the World, were now to be found in this Country, being formerly said to be in Judaea) 'tis justly looked upon as one of the many Rabbinical Fictions among them.  
Although the Abyssines allow of an Ecclesiastical Hierarchy in the Alexandrian Church, (whose Patriarch 
Archbishoprics, etc.  is owned as their Head) yet they done't now admit of any other Order among 'em superior to that of a Presbyter, save only their Abbuna.  
The Inhabitants of this Country (being Persons of of a tawny Colour) are generally esteemed an ignorant, 
Manners.  lazy, and perfidious sort of People; not to be credited unless they swear by the Life of their Emperor. Of several ridiculous Customs among 'em, one is, That they generally hate a Smith as the Devil. Those in and about Chaxumo, are reckoned the best of the whole Empire; divers of them being accounted very Ingenious, besides many others, who betake themselves to a devout and religious sort of living.  
The Abyssine Tongue seems to have some Affinity with the Hebrew and Chaldaic. It's divided into a 
Language.  great many Dialects (the chief and most refined of which, is the Amaric) and those so different from one another, that some reckon no fewer than eight different Languages within the Limits of this Empire. Remarkable is the Abyssine Tongue for one thing truly singular, and peculiar to it, viz. That whereas the Letter A is reckoned the first of the Alphabet in all known Languages of the World; yet wtih the Abyssines, 'tis commonly accounted the thirteenth, according to Ludolphus his Grammar.  
This spacious Country is subject to one Sovereign, styled in the Ethiopian Language, Naggasi (which signifies 
Government.  Lord or Ruler); otherways, Neguscha Nagascht, i ●. Rex Regum: As for the European Title of Prester or Presbyter John, that's now reckoned as one of the many Vulgar Errors in the World. It's generally agreed upon, That this Ethiopian Monarch fancieth himself to be sprung from Solomon and Maqueda, (or Nizaule, according to Josephus) Queen of the South. He's said to assume a great many vain and exorbitant Titles, expressing all those Provinces by Name comprehended within the Circuit of his Dominions; and styling himself, The Beloved of God, sprung from the Stock of Judah: The Son of David: The Son of Solomon: The Son of the Column of Zion: The Son of the Seed of Jacob: The Son of the Hand of Mary: The Son of Nahu after the Flesh: The Son of St. Peter and Paul, after the Spirit, etc. His Government is altogether Despotical, his Subjects being treated as the worst of Slaves. He is so reverenced by the greatest of 'em, that at his very Name they bow their Bodies, and touch the Ground with one of their Fingers. The Empire doth not descend to the Eldest Son, but to him whom the Father upon his Deathbed shall be pleased to name.  
The Abyssine Emperors, for Ensigns Armorial, bear a Lion holding a Cross, with the following Motto, 
Arms.  Vicit Leo de Tribu Juda.  
Within the Limits of this spacious Empire, is a great mixture of People, as Pagans, Jews, and Mahometans, 
Religion.  of various Nations; but the main Body of the Natives is Christian. They hold the written Word of God to be the only Rule of Faith; and that the Canon of Holy Scripture consists of Eighty five Books, whereof Forty six, they say, are in the Old, and Thirty nine in the New Testament. They're not well acquainted with the Apostolic Creed, but in lieu thereof do use the Nicene, or rather Constantinopolitan. As to the grand Doctrine of the Incarnation, they're generally Eutychians, being formerly led into that detestable Heresy, by Dioscorus, Patriarch of Alexandria. In the Person of their Emperor, they lodge the Supreme Authority in all Matters, as well Ecclesiastical as Civil; and do thereupon wholly deny the Supremacy of the Bishop of Rome, allowing him indeed to be the first Patriarch, but esteeming it Antichristian in him, to pretend to a Jurisdiction over the whole Church of Christ. As they disown the Pope's Supremacy, so also do they disclaim most Points of the Popish Doctrine; particularly those of Transubstantiation, Purgatory, Service in an Unknown Tongue, Auricular Confession, Images in Churches, Celebacy of the Clergy, Extreme Unction, etc. They make use of different Forms in Baptism, and keep both Saturday and Sunday as Sabbath. They punctually observe Circumcision, and abstain from eating of Swine's Flesh, not out of any regard to the Mosaic Law, but purely as an Ancient Custom of their Country. They're much inclined to giving of Alms, and visiting the Sick. Their Divine Service doth wholly consist in Reading of the Holy Scriptures, Administration of the Eucharist, and hearing some Homilies of the Fathers. They repair to Church by times, and never enter with their Shoes on, nor sit down unless upon the bare Ground. They carfully observe the appointed Hours for Public Prayer, and perform that Duty with great Devotion. In a word, many of the Abyssines express in several respects, a deep Sense of Religion. For a particular Account of this People, both as to their Religion, and other Remarkables, Vid. J. Ludolphu●'s Ethiopic History. The Roman Missionaries did so prevail about Seventy Years ago, that the Popish Religion was like to have got sure footing in this Empire; for they had once gained the Emperor and Court, and obtained a Proclamation in their Favours, enjoining the whole Body of the People to embrace the Doctrine of the Roman Church. But the Abyssines were so loath to part with the Religion of their Forefathers, that the Emperor's endeavour to propagate the Roman Faith, occasioned many dreadful Insurrections in his Empire, which could not be quelled without shedding a Sea of Blood. Finding therefore his endeavours to be in vain, and dreading the consequence of making any new Attempt, he wholly gave over the Design; and not only returned to his former Belief himself, but also gave leave to all his Subjects to do the same. And that he might regain the [almost lost] Affection of his People, he forthwith banished out of his Dominions all Roman Missionaries whatsoever, together with Alphonso Mendez, a Jesuit, who having been consecrated Patriarch of Ethiopia at Lisbon, and approved by the Pope, had been honourably received by the Abyssine Emperor under that Character, and resided at Court in a peaceable discharge of his Office for several Years. As for the Plantation of Christianity in this Country, 'tis a constant Tradition among the Inhabitants, that the Eunuch baptised by Philip the Deacon, was Steward to the Empress of Ethiopia; and that upon his return, he converted the Court and whole Empire to the Christian Faith. But (following the Opinion of the most Judicious Writers) this Country was destitute of the Blessed Gospel till the Fourth Century; when first instructed therein by Frumentius, (the Son of a Tyrian Merchant) who was consecrated Bishop by St. Athanasius, and is commonly reckoned the first Abbuna of this mighty Empire.   

§ 2 Ethiopid Exterior.  
THIS Country (unknown to the Ancients) together with Abyssinia abovementioned, is termed 
Name.  by the Italians and Spaniards, Ethiopia; by the French, Ethiopie; by the Germans, Ethiopien; and by the English, Ethiopia; so called from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Uro, and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, Vultus, upon the account of its excessive Heat, the greatest part thereof being in the Torrid Zone. This Ethiopia is styled Exterior, because of its Situation, in respect of the other.  
This vast Body comprehending several Kingdoms, Empires, and Sovereignties, and those mightily extended 
Air.  from South to North, can't reasonably be supposed to enjoy the same Nature of Air in all its Parts. In Biafara and Congo, 'tis extremely hot, and would be intolerable to the Inhabitants, were it not qualified in the first of these Kingdoms, by daily Showers of Rain, and in the other by violent Winds, which frequently blow from the Western Ocean. In Monomotapa and Monoemungi, as also the Coasts of Cafres', the Air is much more temperate; in Zanguebar very unwholesome; and in Ajan and Abex, extremely hot. The opposite Place of the Globe to Ethiopia Exterior, is part of 〈◊〉 Zu●, lying between 210 and 250 Degrees of Longitude; with 10 Degrees South, and 25 Degrees North Latitude.  
The various Divisions of this great Body being situated in different Climates, (particularly the 1st, 2d, 
Soil.  3d Northern, and the 1st, 2d, 3d Southrens) the Soil must of necessity be very different. Biafara is said to be less fertile than Congo. The Empires of Monomotapa and Monoemungi do produce abundance of Grain, and are generally esteemed very fit for Pasturage. The other Divisions on the East and Southeast of the Abyssines, are for the most part, very Barren in all sorts of Grain, yet productive enough of some Sugarcanes, several kinds of Fruit and Spices; as also furnished with some considerable Gold and Silver Mines, and every where abounding with Elephants and Lions. So rich were those Mines found by the Portugueses in Zanguebar, and several Parts of the Cafres', that the Country about Sofala, hath been looked upon by some Modern Geographers, as the much controverted Land of Ophir. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is 13 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost, 9 Hours ¾; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commoditities of this Country, are Gold, Silver, Ambergriss, some Pearls and Musk, Rice, 
Commodities.  Mill, Cattle, Lemons, Citrons, Ivory, and Oil, etc.  
In the Kingdom of Angola is found the Quoja-Marrow, that remarkable Creature, of whom already in 
Rarities.  Guinea, p. 311. (2) Most sorts of Creatures in Congo, are to be seen also in Angola, particularly, a Serpent (called Minià by the Inhabitants of Quoja, and Embamma by the Angolois) which is reported to be of such a prodigious bigness, that he's said to swallow a young Deer at one Morsel. (3.) In divers Lakes of Angola, (particularly those of Quihaite and Angolone) are frequently seen some Water-Monsters, termed Ambisiangulo and Pesiengoni by the Natives; but Europeans give them the Title of Syrenes, because [when taken] they fetch heavy Sighs, and cry with a dolorous Tone, resembling very much the mournful, yet charming Voice of a Woman. (4) In the Island Levando, is a remarkable Tree, called by the Inhabitants Eusada, and Arbour de Raiz (i. e. Arbor Radicum) by the Portugueze. It derives this Name from the Nature of its Branches, which spring forth on all sides from the Trunk, [where 'tis generally three Fathoms in Diameter] and many of 'em bowing so low as to touch the Ground, take root and spring forth anew, till by their weight they bow down again, and take Root the second time, and so on, till they cover a thousand Paces in Circuit, and able to lodge under its Branches three thousand armed Men, who may find Defence not only from Heat, but also Rain; so thick and numerous are those Filaments, and so well lined with Leaves. (5) In several Parts upon, and South of the River Coanza, are considerable Mines of Rock-Salt. For these and several other Remarkables of this Country, Vid. Dapper of Africa.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The various Inhabitants of these many and vastly extended Countries, are generally a Dull, Savage, 
Manners.  and Swarthy kind of People, among whom a great many remarkable Customs prevail. To instance only in a few: It's reported of the Emperor of Monomotapa, that when e'er he Drinks in public, the whole Court doth jointly put up their Prayers in his behalf and that with a very loud Voice, which being heard in the Neighbourhood, all Persons there living are bound to do the same, as likewise others hearing them, and so on; whereby the whole City or Country adjacent is always sensible when the Emperor takes his Glass. In the Kingdom of Loango are many Canabals, and in several places 'tis as usual to sell Human Flesh publicly in Shambels, as other Nations do commonly Beef and Mutton. In the same Kingdom 'tis established by an Ancient Custom, That when e'er a Father deceaseth, his Goods belong not to the Children, but his own Brothers or Sisters, who are bound to take care of such of the little Ones, as they think are not able to care for themselves. To add no more, We read of another Custom yet more uncouth among a certain People inhabiting the Cafres', which is, That when e'er a Father deceaseth, the Children both Old and Young are obliged to lose the little Finger of their Lefthand, and to bury it with him. For deferring the performance of that painful Duty, they're commonly very tender of their Parent's Health, and take all care imaginable to prolong his Life; which was probably the Original Cause of so strange a Practice. But of all the Inhabitants of these various Countries, there's none more observable for their manner of living than a certain People near unto, and upon the Cape, and commonly called by the Name of Hottantots. They're so termed from a frequent Repetition of that, or such like word, and may be reckoned the most Nasty and Brutish of all reasonable Creatures, having nothing save the Shape of Man, that can lay claim to that noble Character. Their Bodies are usually besmeared with common Grease, or some worse stinking Stuff, which occasions a very loathsome smell. Their ordinary Habit is a Sheepskin just as 'tis pulled off from the Carcase; and they use (as Ornaments) the Guts, cum puris Naturalibus, wrapped about their Legs and Arms two or three Inches deep, on which they frequently feed when scarce of fresh Provisions. Notwithstanding of the unparallelled nastiness of this People; yet some Travellers talk of a certain Inland Cannibal Nation, (termed Cobonas) who make frequent Incursions into their Neighbouring Countries, and spare none they catch, no not the Swinish Hottantots themselves, who ('twould seem) should make but a very unsavoury Repast.  
There is a wonderful variety of Languages, in those various and vastly extended Countries, which go under 
Language.  the Name of Ethiopia Exterior. The Inhabitants of Congo and Angola, have each of 'em a peculiar Language of their own. In the Eastern Divisions, particularly Ajan and Abex, the Arabian, with Variation of Dialect, doth chiefly prevail; but the Language in use among those of the Cafres', especially the Hotantots, doth seem to be only a confused and inarticulate Noise and Bellowing.  
The various Divisions of this great Body, are subjected to various Sovereigns; particularly the Kingdoms 
Government.  of Biafara and Congo, are ruled by their own Kings, to whom several Princes are subject. The Empires of Monomotapa and Monoemungi, are governed by their respective Emperors, (who are reckoned powerful Princes) and to them several Kings are Tributary. The People inhabiting the South and Southeast Coasts of this great Body, (except those of the Cafres', who know little or nothing of Government) are subject to several Princes, as Zanguebar is governed by some petty Kings of its own; and many Places on the Sea Coasts are Tributary to the Portugueses. The Coast of Abex doth principally belong to the Turk. And lastly, Ajan is partly under the Turk, and partly it's own Kings.  
The numerous Inhabitants of these many Countries, 
Arms.  are generally gross Idolaters, excepting those of Zanguebar, 
Religion.  Ajan, and Abex, who incline to Mahometanism; and some on the Coasts of the Cafres' (particularly the Hottantots abovementioned) do live without any sign of Religion, being destitute both of Priest and Temple; and never show any token of Devotion among 'em, except we reckon their Dancing at the Full and New Moon for such. In the Kingdom of Loango, the generarality of People entertain a certain faint Idea of God, (whom they term Sambian-Pongo) but being sunk into the blackest Idolatry, they admit of many ridiculous Superstitions in their way of Worship. However the Inhabitants of Malemba, in the same Kingdom, do vastly surpass their Neighbours, and by some wonderful Marks of Natural Religion, do publicly baffle their gross Stupidity; for of them we're credibly informed, that they set apart every fifth Day for Public Worship; at which times, one of reputed Integrity makes a Public Oration, deterring them from the Commission of Murder, Stealth, Impurity, or such like; and to enforce his Exhortation, he backs the same with the powerful Topics of Rewards and Punishments in a Future State; affrighting their Conscience with a miserable State in the Society of Benimbe, (i. e. the Devil) on one hand; and solacing their Minds on the other with the hopes of enjoying Zammampoango, by which they mean God, or the Maker of this Visible World. They likeways use Circumcision, admitting their Children into their Religion by that Ceremony, which is performed by one of themselves set apart for that Office.    

SECT. IX. Concerning the African Islands.  
The African Islands being More remarkable as Madagascar. The Isles of Cape Verde The Canary Islands The Madera Less remarkable as Zocotora. Isles of Comore. S. Thomas. The Princess Island. Anobon. S. Helena. The Isle of Ascension.  
Madagascar, [containing many Provinces but very uncertain] it's Chief Town is Fanshere upon the S. E. part of the Island.  
Islands of Cape Verde are St. Anthony— W. to E. Chief Town of all is S. Jago in the Isle S. Jago. S. Vincent— S. Lucia— S. Nicolas— Insula de Sal— Bonavista— N. E. to S. W. Mago— Jago— Insula del Fuego— Brava— The Canary Islands are Lancerota— From E. to W. Chief Town of all is Canaria, in the Island Canaria. Forte ventura— Canaria— Teneriffe— Gomera— Ferro— Palma—  
Madera lying in 32 deg. 30 min. North Latitude, It's Chief Town is Tunchal or Tonzal.  
THE most remarkable of the African Islands being here reduced to Four Classes, viz. Madagascar, Cape Verde Islands, the Canaries, and Madera, we shall particularly consider them, and then take a General View of all the rest. Therefore,  

§. 1. Madagascar.  
THIS Island (unknown to the Ancients) is termed by the Spaniards, Isla de San Lorenzo; by 
Name.  the French, St Laurence, otherways Dauphine; by the Italians, Germans, and English, Madagascar; which Name was used by the Natives, and still retained. As to the Title of St. Laurence, the same was given to this Island by the Portugueses, it being on St. Laurence Day that they made their first Discovery of it.  
The Air of this Island is generally very temperate, and by most affirmed to be exceeding wholesome to 
Air.  breath in. The opposite Place of the Globe to Madagascar, is the South Part of California.  
The Soil of this Island is extraordinary fruitful in many Parts thereof, affording all things necessary for 
Soil.  the Life of Man in great plenty. The length of the Days and Nights in Madagascar, is the same as in Monoemungi, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Rice, Hides, Wax, Gums, Crystal, Steel, Copper, Ebony, 
Commodities.  and Wood of all sorts.  
Towards the Eastern Part of this Island is a pleasant and fertile Valley, called Ambouse, which is stocked with 
Rarities.  several rich Mines of Iron and Steel, and yields great store of the Oil of Sejanum. (2.) Nigh to the aforesaid Valley is an excellent Medicinal Well of hot Water, which proves a ready Cure for Cold Distempers in the Limbs. (3) In the same Neighbourhood is a high Mountain, on whose Top is a remarkable Spring of very Salt Water, though upwards of thirty Leagues from the Sea. (4.) In this Island (especially the Southern Provinces) are most sorts of Mineral Waters, very different both in Colour, Taste, and Qualities; and some places afford large Pits of Bitumen. (5.) In this Island is also a River, whose Gravel is so exceeding hot that there's no treading upon it, and yet the Water of that River is extremely hot.  
The Natives of Madagascar are reported to be a Lecherous, Ignorant, Inhospitable, and Treacherous 
Manners.  Sort of People; they hate Polygamy, and still punish Murder by Death. Divers singular Customs prevail in several Parts of this Island, particularly these two: First. If any Woman be safely delivered of a live Child, and afterwards die in Childbed, the living Child is buried with the dead Mother; being better (say they) that the Child should die than live, having no Mother to look after it. The other is, The exposing of their Children to wild Beasts if brought forth upon an unlucky Day, (as they term it) or during some unfortunate Aspects of the Planets, as their Ombiasses, or Priests pretend to tell them. So numerous are those Days they reckon unlucky, that almost one half of the Year is accounted such; and hence it is, that this Island is so thinly stocked with Inhabitants.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Language here commonly used, is as barbarous as they who speak it. Almost every Province hath its 
Language.  peculiar Dialect, yet not so different but that they understand one another; so that the Natives of this Island may be said to have but one Tongue in common among 'em all.  
This Island is subject to many particular Lords, commonly called Rohandrians, who are continually at 
Government.  War among themselves about their Cattle and Slaves, yet unanimous enough to defend themselves against the Invasion of Strangers. Some formerly reckoned six Sovereign Princes or Kings in Madagascar, others four; but now every Province hath its particular Governor, having under him various Filoubei, (i. e. Governors of Villages and Castles) who stand accountable to him in every thing.  
Arms. None. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of this Island are either Pagans or Mahometans, except those People living upon the 
Religion.  Eastern Coasts, between fifteen and eighteen Degrees and an half of South Latitude, termed Zaffehibraim, [i. e. the Race of Abraham]; and others on the Adjacent Island, called Nossi-Hibraim, [i. e. The Isle of Abraham] who differ extremely from their Neighbours in Religious Matters. For many of 'em are said to observe the Jewish Sabbath, and give not only a faint Account of the Creation of the World, and Fall of Man; but also a few broken Passages of the Sacred History concerning Noah and Abraham, Moses and David. Whence divers Travellers conjecture, that they're originally descended of some Jews, who might have been droven upon that part of the Island, none knows how, nor when.   

§ 2. Cape Verde Islands.  
THESE Islands (the Hesperides of the Ancients) are termed by the Italians, Isola di Capo Verde; by 
Name.  the Spaniards, Islas de Caboverde; by the French, les Isles du Cape Verde; by the Germans, Cape Verde Insuln; and by the English, Cape Verde Islands; so called from the opposite Cape in Negroeland, which beareth that Name, and that because it is, or appeareth always of a Green Colour.  
The Air of these Islands, is generally reckoned very unwholesome, especially in S. Jago, the biggest and 
Air.  chief of them all. The opposite Place of the Globe to Cape Verde Islands, is part of the West American Ocean, lying between 170 and 180 Degrees of Longitude, with 10 and 20 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of these various Islands, is not the same in all, some of 'em being very Fertile, and others extremely 
Soil.  Barren. The length of the Days and Nights in them, is the same as in the Land of the Negroes, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
From these Islands, the Portùgueze transport incredible quantities of Salt, as also great numbers of 
Commodities.  Goatskins (of which they make excellent Cordevants); and likeways from thence may be brought most sorts of pleasant Fruits, particularly Lemons, Citrons, Oranges, Coco's, Figs, and Melons.  
The most remarkable of these Islands, is the Isle de Fuego or Fogo, so called as being a noted Vulcano, continually 
Rarities.  sending up Sulphurous Exhalations, and sometimes the Flame breaks out (Aetna or Vesuvius like) in such a terrible manner, and Vomits forth such a number of Pumice-Stones, that it annoys all the Adjacent Parts. In Insula de Sel, are many Natural Salt-pits, which yield a prodigious Quantity of Salt; from whence the Island derives its Name.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics. etc.   
The Inhabitans of these Islands being Portugueze, are much the same with those on the Continent. 
Manners.   
The Inhabitants of these Islands being Portugueze, (as a foresaid) do still retain their own Language. 
Language.   
These Islands at their first discovery being destitute of Inhabitants, were peopled by their Discoverers 
Government.  the Portugueze, and at present belong to the Crown of Portugal, and are ruled by a particular Governor, who assumeth the Title of Viceroy, and commonly resideth in the Island St. Jago. 
Arms.   
The Portugueze here residing, are of the same Religion with those in Portugal. 
Religion.    

§ 3. The Canary Islands.  
THESE Islands (the Insulae Fortunatae of the Ancients) are termed by the Italians, Isola di Canaria; 
Name.  by the Spaniards, Islas Canarias; by the French, les Isles Canaries; by the Germans, Canarische Insuln; and by the English, the Canary Islands; so called from the chief Island Canaria, which derived its Name from Can, [i. e. Dog in Spanish] because a vast number of Dogs were found thereon by the Spaniards at their first discovery of it.  
The Air of these Islands (inclining to heat) is generally esteemed extraordinary wholesome. The opposite 
Air.  Place of the Globe to the Canary Islands, is that part of the vast Occidental Ocean, lying between 180 and 190 Degrees of Longitude, with 25 and 35 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of most of 'em is wonderfully fertile. In the Island Canaria they have commonly two Harvests 
Soil.  in the Year. Teneriffe is noted not only for its high Pike (of which afterwards) but also many Laurel and Dragon Trees, where the sweet Singing-birds do daily warble their pleasant Notes. These Islands (besides their great plenty of Fruits and Grain) are famous for producing the best Wine in the World. The length of Days and Nights in them, is the same as in Bildulgerid on the Continent, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands, are Wine, Honey, Wax, Sugar, Oad, Plantons, Dragons-blood, 
Commodities.  Canary-birds, etc.  
Among the Rarities of these Islands, is reckoned a certain Tree in the middle of Fero (termed Garoe by the 
Rarities.  Natives; and by the Spaniards, Santo) whose Top is said to be encompassed every Night with a thick misty Cloud, which condensing into Water, doth drop from the Leaves the next Morning; and that in such quantity, as sufficiently serveth all the Inhabitants, the Island itself being destitute of Springs. As for the Isle of Teneriffe, 'tis famous, all the World over, for its prodigious Pike, which (appearing to the Eye as a large Mass of many Rocks, promiscuously heaped up, in Form of a rugged Pyramid) is thought by some curious Naturalists, to have been raised on a sudden by a mighty Conslagration of much subterraneous Sulphurous Matter, whose forcible Eruption the very Rocks themselves could not withstand, but were thereby piled up in the manner they now appear. For strengthening of this Conjecture, they allege the great Quantity of Sulphur with which this Island doth still abound, (especially nigh the foot of the Pike) and the Colour of the Rocks themselves, many of 'em seeming to Spectators, as if long burnt in a Fire.  
In these Islands is only one Bishopric, viz. that of Canaria. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of these Islands being mostly Spaniards, are much the same in Manners with those on the 
Manners.  Continent. The few Natives yet remaining, (termed Guanchas') do mostly reside in Mountains, Dens, and Caves.  
The Spaniards here residing, do still retain their own Language. 
Language.   
These Islands belong to the King of Spain, who for the better ordering of Affairs in them, doth always 
Government.  keep a Governor in Canaria, the chief Town of the chief Island. His Power extendeth over all these Islands, in Affairs both Civil and Ecclesiastical.  
The Inhabitants of these Islands (as aforesaid) being mostly Spaniards, are of the same Religion with those in Spain. 
Religion.    

§. 4. Madera or Maderas.  
THIS Island (not observable of old) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Madera; by the 
Name.  French, Madre; by the Germans, Maderens; and by the English, the Madera or Maderas; so called by the Portugucze at their first Discovery of it, Anno 1429. because wholly over grown with Trees; the word Madeira signifying a Wood  
The Air of Maderas being very Temperate, considering the Latitude of the Island, is generally esteemed 
Air.  very healthful to breath in. That Place of the Globe opposite to Madera, is part of the vast Occidental Ocean, between 180 and 182 Degrees of Longitude, with 32 and 33 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil of this Island is very fertile, producing in great plenty most sorts of excellent Fruits, and a kind 
Soil.  of Wine that's much esteemed off, being fit to keep for a long time both by Sea and Land. The length of the Days and Nights in this Island, is much the same as in Zaara on the main Continent, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are excellent Wine, and most sorts of desirable Fruits, as also 
Commodities.  Honey and Wax, etc.  
What mostly deserves the Epithet of Rare on this Island, is that excellent Quality, either of its Air or 
Rarities.  Soil, or both, which, like our Neighbouring Island, [Ireland] proves mortal to all Venomous Animals; none such being found here, or able to live, if brought thither from abroad. In the side of a Hill, nigh Fonzal, is a remarkable Fountain, whose Waters do sometimes issue forth in such abundance, that the adjacent Parts of the Island are then subject to a terrible Inundation.  
Archbishoprics, None. One Bishopric, viz. that 
Archbishoprics, etc.  of Fonzal or Funchale, which is Suffragan to Lisbon.  
The Inhabitants of this Island being Portugueze, are much the same in Manners with those on the Continent, 
Manners.  but more viciously inclined, (if that can be well supposed) being mighty Proficients in their common Crimes of Theft and Murder.  
The Portugueze here residing, do still retain their own Language 
Language.   
This Island belonging to the Crown of Portugal, is ruled by a particular Deputy, whose place of Residence is commonly at Tonza! 
Government.   
The Inhabitants of this Island being Portugueze, (as aforesaid) are of the same Religion with that publicly 
Religion.  professed in the Kingdom of Portugal.  
Having thus considered, in particular, the most remarkable of the African Islands; proceed we now (in pursuance of our proposed Method) to take a General View of all the rest, or those that are less remarkable. Now, such Islands (to be very brief) being strangely scattered up and down the Ethiopic and Atlantic Oceans, do mightily differ in their Air and Soil, according to the various Climates they lie in; and in none of 'em is any remarkable place, except only the Isle of Zocotora, in which is a Town of the same Name. As for the chief Observables relating to their Inhabitants, [particularly their Manners, Language, and Religion,] we may sufficiently learn the same, only by naming those several States or Sovereigns on the Continent, to whom these Islands belong (they being generally peopled and possessed by some of them). Their present Possessors then [in short] are as followeth,  
Less remarkable Islands being Zocotora— is possessed by the Arabians. Comore— the Natives. St. Thomas— the Portuguexe. The Prince's Island— the Portugueze. Annobon— the Portugueze. St. Helena— the English. Ascension Island not inhabited.  
And so much for Africa and the African Islands. Now followeth,     

  

CHAP. IU. Of AMERICA.  
Divided (page 44.) into North comprehending Mexico or N. Spain Capital City Mexico. N. Mex. or Granada S. Fee. Florida— Coca Terra Canadensis Boston. Terra Arctica— — South comprehending Terra Firma— S. Feed Bagota Peru— Lima. Land of the Amazons — Brasil— S. Salvador. Chyli— S. Jago. Paraguay— Assumption. Terra Magellanica — Terra Antarctica —  
To these add the American Islands.  
Of all which in Order. Therefore,  

SECT. I. Concerning Mexico or New Spain.  
 d. m. Situated between 259 00 of Long. its greatest Length from S. E to N. W. is about 2520 Miles. 297 00 between 08 50 of Latit. Breadth from E. to W. is about 840 Miles. 30 00 Divided into Audience of Guadalajara C. T. Idem— N. W. to S. E. Audience of Mexico— Idem— Audience of Guatimala— S. Jago de Guat. Guadalajara comprehends the Provinces of Cinalod— Chief Town S. Juan— In the Midland from N. to S. New Biscay Barbara— Zacaticas— Zacatecas— Guadalajara Idem— Chiameltan St. Sebastian On the Sea Coast from N. to S. Xalisco— Compostella Mexico comprehends the Provinces of Panuco— Idem— On Sinus Mexicanus from N. W. to S. E. Mexico— Idem— Mechoacan Idem— Los Angelos Idem— Antequera Idem— Tabasco— Port Royal Jucutan— Merida— Guatimala comprehends the Provinces of Soco Nusco Guevetland— from N. W. to S. E. on the South Sea. Guatimald S. Jago de Guat. Nicaragua Leon— Cost a Rica Carthago— Veragua— Conception— Honduras New Valladolid From S. E. on N. W. upon Sinus Mexic. Vera Pax Idem— Chiapa— Cividad real  
THIS Country (discovered at first by John Grijalve, but more exactly viewed, and at last conquered 
Name.  by the Valiant Ferdinando Cortes, Anno 15 18.) is termed by the Italians, Spagna Novella; by the Spaniards, Nueva Espana; by the French, Nouvelle Espagne; by the Germans, Neu Spanien; and by the English, Mexico or New Spain; called Mexico from the chief City thereof, and New Spain, to distinguish it from the Kingdom of Spain in Europe.  
Notwithstanding this Country (for the most part) lieth within the Torrid Zone, yet the Air is very temperate, 
Air.  and generally reckoned extraordinary wholesome to breath in, being qualified with refreshing Showers in the hottest Months, and cool Breezes from the Sea all the Year. The opposite Place of the Globe to New Spain, is part of the East-India Ocean, lying between 80 and 117 Degrees of Longitude, with 8 and 30 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country (lying in the 3d and 4th North Climate) is blessed with a very fertile Soil, producing many 
Soil.  sorts of Grain, as Wheat, Barley, Pulse, and Maize; several kinds of Fruits, as Pomegranates, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, Malicatons, Cherries, Pears, Apples, Figs, Cocoa-Nuts; and great plenty of Herbs, Plants, and Roots. Here also are some rich Mines of Gold and Silver; and vast and spacious Plains, affording the best of Pasturage. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country, is about 13 Hours ¾; the shortest in the Southmost 12½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Wool, Cotton, Sugar, Silk, Cochencel, Feathers, Honey, 
Commodities.  Balm, Amber, Salt, Tallow, Hides, Tobacco, Ginger, and divers Medicinal Drugs.  
About three Leagues from Guayaca, is the Stump of a Hollow Tree, (called Tlaco-Chavoya) which was of 
Rarities.  a prodigious bigness when entire, being then reckoned sixteen Fathoms in compass near the Root, and somewhat higher twelve. Before 'twas Thunder struck, (which occasioned the hollowness) no fewer than a thousand Men ['tis said] could conveniently shelter themselves from Rain, under its wide extended Boughs. (2) In several Parts of this Country, grows a certain Tree, (called Maguey) which may be said to yield Water, Oil, Wine, Honey, and Vinegar. For the Body of the Tree being big and hollow, contains a good quantity of Liquor as limpid as the best Fountain-water, and the Surface thereof is covered with a pure Oilysubstance. This Liquor being a little boiled, tastes like a good palatable Wine; if much boiled, 'tis extremely sweet, and if long kept, [unboiled] no Vinegar is sourer. (3.) In the Audience of Guatimala are several remarkable Vulcano's, particularly that near Realejo, which towers up like a Sugar-loaf to a great height, and always Smokes. As also the burning Mountain of Leon, West of the Lake Nicaragua, which frequently evacuates Fire as well as Smoke. (4.) Nigh to Guatulco, on the Western Coast, is a great hollow Rock, (called by the Spaniards, Buffadore) which having a large Hole in its top, make a hideous Noise at every Surge of the Sea, and spouts up Water [as a Whale] to a prodigious height. (5.) In some Parts of this Country, are several Springs of Water, so impregnorated with certain Minerals, that the Current issuing from them is of so darkish a Colour, that it resembles a Stream of Ink. (6) Remarkable is the Lake of Mexico for several particulars: As First, It's having two sorts of Water, viz. Fresh and Salt. Secondly, That the Fresh is usually Calm, and aboundeth with Fishes; whereas the Salt is, for the most part, Boisterous, and breedeth none. Thirdly, In the middle of this Lake, is a pleasant Rock, out of which doth issue a considerable Stream of hot Water, much esteemed off for several Distempers. Lastly, Upon this Lake are several delightful Artificial Gardens, well stocked with variety of Herbs and Flowers, and movable from one place to another, being supported by large Floats of Timber. Vid. J. Acosta, his Natural and Moral History of the Indies.  
Here is one Spanish Archshoprick, viz. that of Mexico. 
Archbishoprics.   
Spanish Bishoprics erected here, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Merida,  
Chiapa,  
St. Jago de los Cavalleras,  
Mechoaca,  
Honduras,  
Leon in Nicaragua,  
Guaxaca,  
Vera paz,  
Antequera.  
Guadalajara,  
Pueblo de los Angelos,    
The Natives of this Country, are now esteemed a 
Universities.  People very Civil and Docile, and extraordinary faithful 
Manners.  to those they love. Some of 'em are also wonderfully Ingenious, especially in Painting, and making most lively Pictures with various coloured Feathers of certain little Birds, called Cincons. Others are said to Play incomparably well upon divers Musical Instruments. In short, the generality of this People is so civilised, that they live after the manner of the Spaniards, save a few, commonly residing in the Mountains, who continue as Wild and Savage as ever. The Spaniards here residing, are much the same with those in Spain.  
The prevailing Language in this Country, is the Spanish, it being not only in use among the Spaniards, but 
Language.  also the Natives themselves, who generally understand and speak the same. The various Dialects of their Ancient Jargon do daily decrease, and in a few Generations will be quite extinguished.  
This large and pleasant Country, was of old subject unto, and ruled by its own Sovereign Princes, 
Government.  called Kings of Mexico, and had continued (according to probable Conjectures) a mighty and flourishing Monarchy for many Ages, before 'twas invaded by the Spaniards. But being fully conquered by them with only a handful of Men, Anno 1521. under the Valiant Ferdinando Gortez; it hath ever since remained subject to the Crown of Spain, being governed by a Viceroy commonly residing at Mexico; and to him is entrusted the oversight of all the Governors of the various Provinces, belonging to his Catholic Majesty in North America.  
Arms. None. 
Arms.   
The Inhabitants of this Country are partly Christian, partly Pagan, and (as 'twere) a mixture of the two. 
Religion.  The Spaniards are rigid Papists according to the strict Profession of Popery in their own Country. Of the Natives, many do still retain their heathenish Worship, and indeed multitudes are converted to Christianity according to the Doctrine of the Church of Rome; but (by our latest Accounts) they're hardly persuaded as yet of the Truth of those Doctrines taught them.   

SCET. II. Concerning New Mexico or Nova Granada.  
This Country is of no certain Extent nor Division, its chief Town is S. Fee or New Mexico, upon the River North.  
THIS Country (discovered by the Spaniards, Anno 1540) is termed by the Italians, Granada Novella; 
Name.  by the Spaniards, Nueva Granada; by the French, Novelle Granada; by the Germans, Neu Granada; and by the English, New Mexico or Nova Granada. It was called Mexico, after the Empire of that Name, described in the foregoing Section; and the Epithet Neuva (or New) was added by the Spaniards, to distinguish it from the said Empire, its Discovery being posterior to that of Mexico. The Title of Nova Granada, was also given it by the Spaniards, and that from a Province of the same Name in their own Country.  
The Air of this Country (according to the Climate) is abundantly temperate, and generally esteemed very 
Air.  wholesome to breath in, but attended with the great Inconveniency of frequent Hurricanes, besides Thunder and Lightning. The opposite Place of the Globe to Nova Granada, is that part of the Ethiopic Ocean, lying between 70 and 90 Degrees of Longitude, with 20 and 40 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country is but badly known, and the Soil of those Parts already discovered; very ordinary; being 
Soil.  generally a dry, faudy, barren Ground, far inferior to most other Countries in America, belonging to the Spaniards. Its Bounds being undetermined, (especially in the Northmost Parts) we can say nothing of the true Extent of its Days and Nights.  
This Country being none of the best, and but rarely frequented by Strangers, its Commodities are 
Commodities.  very few, Cattle being the chief or only thing they Trade in  
What things in Nova Granada do truly merit the Epithets of Rare and Curious, we must refer to the 
Rarities.  better Discovery of after Ages; our knowledge of this Country being as yet but very slender.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universitities. None. 
Archbishoprics. etc.   
The Inhabitants of this Country, (except those called Paunches in the Southmost Parts) are said to be of a 
Manners.  much less Savage Temper than most of the wild Americans. They are much given to Hunting; and several of 'em understand Agriculture tolerably well.  
The Spaniards here residing, do commonly use the Spanish Tongue. As for the Natives of this Country, 
Language.  they retain their own Jargon, of which we can give no account.  
The New Mexicans are still governed by certain Captains of their own, called Caciques; but the Spaniards 
Government.  here residing, and those of the civilised Natives, are ruled by a particular Governor, sent thither by the King of Spain, whose place of Residence is ordinarily at Santa Fee, upon the River Nort.  
The Natives of this Country are generally gross Idolaters, 
Arms.  and many of 'em have little or no Sign of Religion 
Religion.  at all. The Spaniards here residing, are the same in Religion with those in Europe.   

SECT. III. Concerning Florida.  
 d. m. Situated between 276 00 of Long. It's greatest Length from E. to W. is about 1000 Miles. 297 00 between 26 50 of Latit. Breadth from S. to N. is about 600 Miles. 40 00  
The large Country of Florida being of no certain Divisions, its chief Towns are 

Coca, in the main Land.  
S. Augustine, in the Peninsula of Tegeste  
S. Ma●hea, in the Peninsula of Tegeste.    
THIS Country (first discovered by Sebastian Cabot, Anno 1497. but more particularly afterwards by 
Name.  John D●pony, a Spaniard, who took Possession thereof in the Name of his Catholic Majesty, Anno 1527.) is termed by the Italians and Spaniards, Florida; by the French, Floride; by the Germans and English, Florida; so called by the Spaniards, either because they arrived at it on Palm-Sunday, (which they term Pascha Florida) or because they found the Country full of Flowers at their arrival.  
The Air of this Country is said to be so extraordinary temperate, that (according to our latest Accounts) 
Air.  the Inhabitants live to a great Age. The opposite Place of the Globe to Florida, is that part of the East Indian Ocean, lying between 96 and 110 Degrees of Longitude, with 26 and 40 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 5th and 6th North Climate) is wonderfully fertile, abounding 
Soil.  in most sorts of Grain, Herbs, and Fruit. It's also well stored with Venison and Fowl; enriched with considerable Mines of Gold and Silver, especially those of the Appalachine Mountains; and here they fish vast numbers of valuable Pearls. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country, is about 14 Hours ¼; the shortest in the Southmost, is 9 Hours; and the Nights proportionably.  
This Country being slenderly known in the Inland Parts, and even those next the Sea, but little frequented 
Commodities.  by Strangers, its Commodities are very few, yet very costly; viz. Gold, Silver, Pearls, and Furs.  
In several Parts of Florida, grows a certain Tree, about the bigness of an ordinary Appletree, the 
Rarities.  Juice of whose Fruit, the Natives use to squeeze out, and therewith anoint their Arrows, being a rank sort of Poison. If there be no Fruit, than they break off a Branch, and out of it do press a milky Substance, equally poisonous with the Juice of the Fruit. So strong a Poison is this Tree, that if a few handfuls of its Leaves are bruised and thrown into a large Pond of Standing-Water, all sorts of Beasts that happen to come and drink thereof, do suddenly swell and burst asunder. Purchas his Pilgrims. Part 4. Lib. 8. Cap. 1. In Bahama, (an Island near C. Florida) is the famous Bahama-Spider, the biggest of all the Species, being two Inches long, and deservedly termed Phalangium Maximum Indicum. He hath six Eyes, and those not so big as the smallest Pin's head. Some of these remarkable Infects are to be seen in the Public Musoeum of Gresham College, London.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Floridins are naturally White, but by anoincing themselves (both Men and Women) with a certain 
Manners.  Ointment, they still appear of an Olive-colour. They are tall of Stature, well proportioned, lovers of War. and ordinarily go quite naked, except a small piece of Deer-S●in, which many wear about their middle.  
The Language of the Natives doth very much 〈◊〉 in Dialect, according to different Parts of this Country. 
Language.  The few Spaniards here residing, do still retain the Spanish.  
The Natives of this Country are subject to several Lords of their own, (termed Paroustes or Caciques) 
Government.  one of whom is said to have the Precedency, and is generally respected by the rest, as an Emperor. The Spanish Colonies on the Seacoasts, have their peculiar Governors appointed by his Catholic Majesty.  
The Natives of this Country, are gross Idolaters, 
Arms.  worshipping the whole Host of Heaven, especially 
Religion.  the Sun, to whom they attribute the good fortune of all their Victories, and return him thanks accordingly. They mightily respect their Priests, (who are generally great Sorcerers) and call them by the Name of Joanas, and in some places Jowa's. Several Missionaries were sent into this Country in the Days of Charles the Fifth; but the Savage Inhabitants quickly destroyed them.   

SECT. IV. Concerning Terra Canadensis.  
 d. m. Situated between 290 00 of Long. It's greatest Length from E to W. is about 1500 Miles. 330 00 between 30 00 of Latit. Breadth from S. to N. is about 1920 Miles. 62 00 It being divided into North— the River Canada. South— North comprehends Terra Canadensis propria— Chief Town — From N. to S. Nova Britannia— — Nova Francia— Quibeck— South comprehends Nova Scotia— Port Royal- The English Territor. viz. Those of New England— Boston— From N. E. to S. W. New York— Idem— N. Jersey East Elisabeth— West Elsingburgh Pensilvania— Philadelphia  Maryland— Baltimore Virginia— James Town Carolina— Charles Tow.  
TERRA Canadensis (so called from the River Canada) being a vast Complex Body, consisting of several large and considerable Countries, and particularly those in which the English Nation is chiefly concerned; we shall distinctly consider its various Divisions, (especially those of the English Empire) and that in the same Order laid down in the foregoing Table. Therefore,  

§. 1. Terra Canadensis propria.  
THIS Country being the Northmost of all the rest, is esteemed none of the best. But being so slenderly known as yet, we pass on to   

§. 2. Nova Britannia.  
WHICH Country is likeways of a very ordinary Soil, by what we find, and almost as thinly Inhabited, and little frequented as the former. We shall therefore make no stay therein, but proceed to   

§. 3. Nova Francia.  
THIS Country is reckoned to be much colder than most others in the same Latitude; however 'tis said to be blessed with a Soil abundantly fruitful; and is chiefly furnished with Stags, Bears, Hares, martin's, Foxes, Coneys, and great store of Fish and Flesh. The French here residing, (about six thousand in number) do commonly trade in Beaver, Mouse Skins and Furs. This being all that's remarkable of it, we continue our Progress to the next Division, viz.   

§. 4. Nova Scotia.  
WHICH Country (first discovered by Sebastian Cabot, at the Charge of Henry the Seventh) was once inhabited by a Scotch Colony, sent over Anno 1622. by Sir William Alexander [then Lord Secretary of Scotland] to whom King James by Letters-Patent made a Donation thereof; but that Colony failing, the French became Masters of the Country, and settled themselves therein, calling it by the Name of Accadie.  
But leaving these Northern Parts of Terra Canadensis, as Countries little known, and of less Note unto us: Proceed we to that which more nearly concerns us, viz. a particular View of the various Parts of the Western English Empire; and that according to their Order, as they lie in the foregoing Table. The first whereof is   

§. 5. New England.  
THIS Country (discovered first by the English, under the Conduct of the two Cabots, Anno 
Name.  1497. and afterwards taken Possession of for Queen Elizabeth by Sir Philip Amadas, Anno 1458.) is termed by the Italians, Inghilterra Novella; by the Spaniards, Nueva Inglaterra; by the French, Nouvelle Angleterre; by the Germans, Neu Engeland; and by the English, New England; so called by the Discoverers after the Name of their own Country.  
Notwithstanding this Country is of a Situation considerably more Southern than Old England, yet the Air 
Air.  of both is much the same; the Heat thereof being allayed by cooling Breezes, which frequently happen. The opposite Place of the Globe to New England, is that part of the vast Atlantic Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 41 and 45 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country is in most Parts very fertile, producing in great plenty most sorts of English Grain, 
Soil,  Fruits, and Roots, besides Indian Corn. It's very well stocked with Fish and Fowl, as also variety of tame and wild Beasts. In short, 'tis not only furnished with the Necessaries, but likeways many of the Comforts of Human Life; and the Colony (now upward of an hundred thousand) doth flourish daily more and more. The length of the Days and Nights in New England, is much the same as in the Northern Provinces of Spain, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Fish, Grain, Masts for Ships, Deal-boards, Iron, Tar, Bever, 
Commodities.  Mouse-Skins, Furs, etc. And 'tis observable of those in New England, that they have Annually, for some Years, imported and exported to and from Old England, as many Commodities in value as they carried out at first.  
In several Parts of New England grows a certain Fruit, (termed the Butter-Nut) so called from the Nature 
Rarities.  of its Kernel, which yields a kind of sweet Oil, that hath the exact taste of ordinary Butter. (2) In Baker's Cave, about fifty League's East from Boston, is found the Scarlet Muscle whose purple Vein being pricked with a Needle, yields a Juice of a pure Purple-colour, which gives so deep a Dye, that no Water is able to wash it our. (3) About eighty Miles North-East of Scarb●row, is a Ridge of Mountains in length about an hundred Leagues, and known commonly by the Name of the White Mountains, because their Tops are covered with Snow all the Year round. Upon the highest of these Mountains is a large Plain, and at the farthest end of it, a natural Rocky Pyramid, [vulgarly called the Sugar-Loaf) to the uppermost part of which one may easily ascend by a continued Set of 〈…〉 Steps winding about the R●●ky Mount up to its very Top, where is another Plain of about an Acre of Ground, and in the middle of it a deep Pond of clear Water. (4.) Upon the Seaside, near N●w-Haven, is a large Bed of Sand of a perfect black Colour, with many Grains of Red and White intermixed. (5.) Upon the Coast of New England, is sometimes taken that remarkable Fish, which the English Inhabitants call by the Name of the Monk-Fish, because he hath, as 'twere, a Hood much of the same fashion with a Fryer's Cowl. (6.) In divers Parts on the Coast of this Country, is found the Stella Marina Arborescens, or Branched Starfish: A rare kind of which, taken in the Bay of Mastachuset, is to be seen in Gresham College, and described in the Philos. Trans. [N. 57] under the Name of Piscis Echionostellaris Visciformis. (7.) Of many rare Birds in New England, the most remarkable, are the Troculus, and That called the Hummingbird. The former of these (being about the bigness of a Swallow) is observable for three things. First, Having very short Legs, and hardly able to support himself; Nature hath provided him with sharp pointed Feathers in his Wings, by darting of which into the Wall of a House, he sticks fast and rests securely. Secondly, The manner of his Nest, which he useth to build (as Swallows) in the Tops of Chimneys, but of such a fashion that it hangs down about a Yard long. Lastly, Such Birds are remarkable for their Ceremony at departing; it being always observed, That when they remove, they never fail to leave one of their Young behind in the room where they have nested, making thereby (as 'twere) a grateful acknowledgement to the Landlord for their Summer's Lodging. As for the Hummingbird, he is observable for being the least of all Birds. The manner of his Nest resembles a Bottom of soft Silk, and the Egg in which he's hatched, is not larger than a white Pease of an ordinary size. But of him elsewhere. For these and some other such Remarkables, Vid. that small Treatise, entitled, New England's Rarities, per J. Josselyn, Gent.  
Archbishoprics and Bishoprics. None. As for Universities, here are two Colleges erected at New Cambridge, 
Arbishopricks, etc.  which (in Conjunction with other such Nurseries of Learning hereafter established) may, we hope, deserve that Title in process of time.  
The English here residing, are much the same with those in Old England. As to the Natives, they are 
Manners.  generally characterized thus, viz. a People that's Crafty, Timorous, as also barbarously Cruel and Revengeful when they find opportunity. But some of 'em are of a much milder Temper, being likeways very Ingenious and quick of Apprehension. Their Number (especially within the English Territories) is mightily diminished, the greatest part of 'em, being swept away by the Smallpox, about the first Settlement of the English; others by Tumults among themselves, and most of the rest by the late treacherous Wars with the English.  
The English Inhabitants of this Country use their own Language. As to that of the Natives, it's divided 
Language.  into a great many Dialects, and reckoned very difficult to be learned by Strangers; the generality of its Words being extremely long, and of an inarticulate Pronounciation.  
The Natives of this Country, are divided into many Bodies, and are subject unto their Sachams and Sagamores, 
Government.  who exercise an absolute Jurisdiction over them; the Will of their respective Governors being all the Law they pretend to. The English here residing, are governed by their own Laws, and have several Courts of Judicatory erected for hearing and determining of Causes, both Civil and Criminal; as also for making and repealing of Laws that concern the Plantation. The Management of Public Affairs, is in the Hands of a certain number of Magistrates and Assistants, determined by their Patent; and out of these do the People annually choose a Governor, and Deputy Governor.  
The English here residing, are Professors of the Protestant Religion in general, but greatly divided (as too 
Religion.  common elsewhere) into different Parties. The Natives continue Pagan, except those few acquainted with the Principles of Christianity, by a late Serious Divine, Mr. John Eliot, who [by Translating the Holy Bible, and several Books of Devotion, into a certain Dialect of the Indian Tongue, and by frequently preaching among them in their own Language] laid some Foundation for a more general Conversion: Did such a generous Spirit possess the Minds of Christian Benefactors, as to extend their Charity that way (than which none can be more extensive) or to mortify some part of their worldly Estate for that noble Undertaking, [which might probably be less subject to Abuses, than erecting and endowing of Hospitals, Almshouses, and such like] that in process of time, such a stock of Money might be settled in a sure Fund, as yearly to afford a desirable Competency to a continued Set of Men, who should be found sufficiently able and willing to labour in that most Christian Design;   

§. 6. New York.  
THIS Country (discovered Anno 1608. by Mr. Hudson) is termed by the Italians, York Novella; 
Name.  by the Spaniards, Nuevo York; by the French, Nouvelle York; by the Germans, New York; and by the English, New York; so called from the then Duke of York: for it being sold by Mr. Hudson to the Dutch, without leave from his Master, the King of England; and they keeping Possession thereof, under the Name of New netherlands till the Year 1664. 'twas then reduced to the English Crown; whereupon King Charles the II. by special Writ, made his Royal Brother [the Duke of York] Proprietor of it, from whom (as aforesaid) it derives its Name.  
The Air of this Country is commonly reputed to be much the same with that of New England. The opposite 
Air.  Place of the Globe to New York, is that part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 40 and 42 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country, as also Long Island, is (by general Relation) so rich, that one Bushel of European 
Soil.  Wheat, doth ordinarily produce an hundred in many places. It aboundeth likeways with most sorts of English Grain, Herbs, and Fruits; and produceth excellent Tobacco, as also Melons, Pumpkins, etc. The length of the Days and Nights in this Country, is the same as in the Kingdom of Naples, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Tobacco, Bever, Otter, Ratoon, Deer and Elk-Skins, 
Commodities.  and other costly Furs; for which the English and Dutch trade with the Natives.  
In divers Parts of New York, (especially those nigh unto, and upon the Banks of the River Connecticut) 
Rarities.  grows a sort of Snake-Weed, whose Root is much esteemed off for the Biting of the Rattle-Snake. Being pulverised, it hath an excellent Fragrant Smell, and a good Aromatic Taste, but seems different from the Serpentaria of the Shops.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Country (especially those of Long Island) are, by mortal Diseases and frequent Wars 
Manners.  among themselves, reduced to a small number. Some of 'em are now serviceable to the English; and the rest spend their time commonly in Hunting, Fowling, and Fishing, especially the Men, who remove from place to place, and leave their Wives for Tilling the Ground, and Planting the Corn. They're much given of late to Drinking, and frequently intoxicate themselves with strong European Liquors.  
The Inhabitants of this Country being English, and a few Dutch, do use the Languages peculiar to their respective 
Language.  Countries. The Natives speak a very unpleasant Dialect of the Indian Tongue.  
The Natives of this Country are governed by their peculiar Sachems, who are said to advise with their 
Government.  chief Councillors in Matters of Importance, but still to pronounce the definitive Sentence themselves, which their People commonly receive with great Applause. The English here residing, are subject unto, and ruled by their own Governor, authorized and sent over by His Majesty, the King of Great Britain.  
The English here residing, are much the same in 
Arms.  Point of Religion with those here in England: But the 
Religion.  Natives are still in the dark, and addicted to the blackest Idolative the generality of 'em being said to Worship the Devil, under the Name of Monetto, to whom they frequently address themselves, with a kind of Magical Rites, and their Priests (called Pawaws) do act as so many Conjurers.   

§. 7. New Jersey.  
THIS Country (discovered by the English, under the Conduct of the two Cabots, Anno 1497. and 
Name.  lately divided into East and West Jersey) is termed by the Italians, Jerscia Novella; by the Spaniards, Nuevo Jersey; by the French, Nouvelle Jersey; by the Germans, Neu Jerseii; and by the English, New Jersey; so called from the Island Jersey in the British Channel; but why so termed, is somewhat dubious.  
The Air of this Country is esteemed abundantly healthful to breath in, and agreeable enough to English 
Air.  Constitutions, as sufficiently appears from the long Experience of many Planters. The opposite Place of the Globe to New Jersey, is that part of the vast Indian Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 39 and 41 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
The Soil is not every where the same, being in some Parts extraordinary good, and in others very indifferent. 
Soil.  But 'tis generally believed to prove much better after the felling of the Timber, and clearing the Ground, in which the Colony begins now to make a good Progress. The length of the Days and Nights in this Country, is the same as in the South of Italy, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities exported hence for England, are whale-oil, Whale-Fins, Bever, Monkey, Ratoon, 
Commodities.  and Martin-Skins: As also Beef, Pork, Corn, Butter, and Cheese, to the adjacent Islands.  
As the principal Observables of New Jersey, we may reckon some rare Plants growing in divers Parts of that 
Rarities.  Country, and easily found by the curious Botanist, if only at the pains to make a search proportionable to his Curiosity. Here also is that huge Creature, called the Moose, of whose Skin they make excellent Buff.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Country (fewer in number than in most of the adjacent Colonies) are generally reckoned 
Manners.  a very simple and innocent sort of People, and many of 'em are now become very serviceable to the Planters. The English here residing, are much the same in Manners with those in England.  
All that can be said of the Language of the Natives of this Country, is, in general, that 'tis one of the 
Language.  many different Dialects of the Indian Tongue. Those of the Plantation retain and use their own Language.  
This Country being divided into a certain number of Shares or Proprieties; out of each Propriety is Annually 
Government.  chosen a Freeholder by the Inhabitants thereof. These Freeholders meet at a certain time of the Year, as a General Assembly, or complete Representative Body of the whole Colony: In that Assembly (together with the Governor, or his Deputy) is lodged the Legislative Power, in making or repealing of Laws relating to the whole Province; but still with this Restriction, that they no ways infringe that Liberty of Conscience at first established; and that by an irrevocable Fundamental Constitution, never to be altered by any subsequent Law whatsoever. No Tax or Subsidy, Rates or Services, are to be imposed upon the People, but by and with the Consent of their Representatives in that Assembly.  
The English here residing, are of different Persuasions 
Arms.  in Point of Religion, there being a Liberty of Conscience 
Religion.  allowed to all of the Colony. But the poor Natives (to our great shame) are still groping in the Twilight of Paganism.   

§. 8. Pensilvania.  
THIS Country (discovered at the same time with the rest of the adjacent Continent) is termed by 
Name.  the French, Pensilvanie; by the Germans, Pensilvanien; by the Italians, Spaniards, and English, Pensilvania; so called from William Pen Esquire, whom King Charles II. made first Proprietor thereof by Letters Patent, Anno 1680.  
The Air of this Country is generally granted to be clear and sweet, the Heavens being seldom over cast 
Air.  with Clouds. The length of the Days and Nights, is much the same here as in New Jersey.  
The Soil of this Country is tolerably good in many Parts, but in some Places extremely barren. The opposite 
Soil.  Place of the Globe to Pensilvania, is that part of the East-India Ocean, lying between 115 and 125 Degrees of Longitude, with 40 and 45 Degrees of South Latitude.  
There being no considerable Trade as yet settled between this and Foreign Countries; the chief Commodities 
Commodities.  hither to exported, are mostly Horses and Pipe-Staves, commonly sent to the Island of Barbadoes.  
In several Parts of Pensilvania, are Springs of good Mineral Waters, particularly those about two Miles 
Rarities.  from Philadelphia, which for Operation, are accounted much the same with our Purging Waters at Barnet.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Country being Persons of tall Bodies, and swarthy Complexions, are generally reckoned 
Manners.  more mild and civilly inclined, than most others of the Indian Nations. The Europeans here residing, being mostly English, with a few Dutch and Swedes, are much the same with those in Europe.  
The Language of the Natives, being a Dialect of the Indian Tongue, is said to be very Lofty, Sweet, 
Language.  and Emphatic, in respect of many others in these Parts of the World; as also very easy to be acquired by Strangers. The Europeans here residing, retain the respective Languages of their own Countries.  
This Country being granted (as aforesaid) to William Pen, by his Majesty, King Charles II. the Public 
Government.  Affairs thereof are managed by several Courts of of Justice, there established under him as Proprietor, who (or his Deputy) Rules the same in Subordination to the King of Great Britain.  
The English here residing, are of different Sects and 
Arms.  Persuasions; but Enthusiasm chiefly prevails, this Country, 
Religion.  being stocked with Quakers by their Governor, William Pen. The Natives are said to have a pretty clear Notion of a Supreme Being, the Immortality of the Soul, and a Future State. Their Worship chiefly consists in Sacrifices and Songs, intermixed with Dancing.   

§. 9 Mary-Land.  
THIS Country (discovered by the English, under the Conduct of the two Cabots, Anno 1497.) is 
Name.  termed by the Italians, Marylandia; by the Spaniards, Tierra de Maria; by the French, Terre du Marie; by the Germans, Marienland; and by the English, Maryland; so called at last in Honour of Queen Mary, Wife to King Charles I. who gave it by Letters-Patent, under that Name, to the Right Honourable Caecilius Colvert, Lord Baltimore, Anno 1632.  
The Air of this Country is much more healthful now, and more agreeing to English Constitutions than 
Air.  formerly, when the Woods were entire: and the better it still grows, the greater Progress they make in felling the Timber. The opposite Place of the Globe to Maryland, is that part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 37 and 40 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country is generally reckoned very fertile and rich, producing in great plenty the same 
Soil.  things with New York. The length of the Days and Nights in Maryland, is much the same as in the Southern Provinces of Spain, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Tobacco, Hemp, Flax, Wood, Hops, Rape-Seed, Madder, 
Commodities.  Furs, Elk-Skins, etc.  
Of several rare Crustaceous Animals found in this Country, That called the Signoe or Signenoc, is most observable; 
Raritics.  and that particularly for the admirable contrivance of his Eyes. For they being placed under the Covert of a thick Shell, Nature (whose Operation is wonderful in every thing) hath so ordered, that those Parts above the Eyes are so transparent, as to convey a competency of Light, whereby the (otherways benighted Animal) can clearly see its way. For several other remarkable Creatures, with a Catalogue of rare Plants in Maryland. Vid. Philos. Trans. N. 246.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universitities. None. 
Archbishoprics. etc.   
The Natives of this Country (considered in the main) are generally reckoned the same with those of 
Manners.  New York, or the nearest to them in their Temper and Customs of any other of the American Nations whatsoever. The English here residing, are much the same with those in England.  
The Language of the Natives in this Country, is said to consist of divers Idioms, very different from one 
Language.  another; and none of 'em either so pleasant to the Ear, or so easy to be acquired by Strangers, as those in Pensilvania. The English here residing, use their own Language.  
The Right Honourable Coectlius Colvert, Lord Baltimore, his Heirs and Assigns, being by Letters-Patent 
Government.  [Anno 1632] created Lords and Proprietors of Maryland, (excepting the Sovereign Dominion and Allegiance, with a fifth part of the Gold and Silver o'er reserved to His Majesty). The Government of the Colony, by their Lordship's Care and Prudence, is so modelled, that we may reckon it a Diminutive of that of England. For the Supreme Court [called a General Assembly] resembles in some measure our English Parliament, being divided into an Upper and Lower House. The Upper consists of the Governor himself, with his Council, and such Lords of Manors, and others, as his Lordship or Lieutenant shall by Writ call thither. The Lower is made up of Delegates, elected and sent by each County of the whole Plantation. This Assembly is conveen'd, prorogued, or dissolved at pleasure, by his Lordship or Lieutenant; and whatever is agreed upon, and enacted by both Houses, and assented unto by his Lordship hath the Sanction of a Law, and can't be repealed but by the same Authority. Next to this Legislative Assembly, is the Provincial Court, generally held at St. Mary's, to which Appeals are made from all Inferior Courts of the whole Province.  
The English here residing, are of various Persuasions 
Arms.  in Point of Religion, there being a Toleration enjoined 
Religion.  for all Sects of Christianity. The Natives know nothing as yet of the true God, save what they obscurely see by the glimpsing Light of Nature.   

§. 10. Virginia.  
THIS Country (discovered first by Sebastian Cabot, Anno 1497. but afterwards more perfectly by 
Name.  Sir Walter Raleigh, Anno 1584. when he took Possession thereof in Queen Elizabeth's Name) is termed by the French. Virginie; by the Germans, Virginien; by the Italians, Spaniards, and English, Virginia; so called in Honour of Queen Elizabeth, that Masculine Virgin Queen, of happy Memory.  
The Air of this Country, as to Heat and Cold, Dryness and Moisture, is variable according to the Winds; 
Air.  those from the North and North-West being universally cold and piercing; but those from the South and Southeast, do commonly bring along with them great Heat in the Summer, which is frequently succeeded in September by Rain in such quantity, that it hath several times occasioned an Epidemical Sickness among the People. The opposite Place of the Globe to Virginia, is that part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 33 and 40 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country [strangely intermixed with a vast number of Oyster-Shells] is generally Sandy, yet 
Soil.  abundantly fertile in Grain, where employed that way. It affordeth also most sorts of Roots, and desirable Fruits, with Physical Plants and Herbs in great plenty; but above all, it produceth a wonderful quantity of Tobacco, that bewitching Weed so accounted off all the World over. The length of the Days and Nights in Virginia, is the same as in the Southern Provinces of Spain, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, in which the Natives Traffic with the English, are Skins of 
Commodities.  Deer, Beaver, and other Wild Beasts, for which the English return them Guns, Powder, Shot, Iron-Tools, Brandy, etc. but the chief thing exported hence for England, is Tobacco, there being above an hundred and fifty Sail of Ships commonly that load therewith every Year.  
Such is the prodigious multitude of Oyster-Shells intermixed with the Earth in Virginia, that in some places 
Rarities.  they're found three or four Yards deep in the Ground, where lying close together, they're said to petrify, and seem to make a Vein of such a Rock. But whether the Parts of that Rock, are really the Shells of Oysters, there left by the Sea, (which some suppose to have overflowed this Tract of Land) or Lapides sui Generis, sub Judice lis est. (2.) In some lesser Banks of Shells are found Teeth, [about two or three Inches long, and one broad] supposed to be those of Fishes; and in other Parts are dug up the Bones of Whales several Yards deep, and that many Leagues from Sea. (3.) Near the River Patomeck is a sort of Aluminous Earth, of an Ash-colour, very soft and light, and of an Acid-astringent Taste, almost like that of Alum. (4.) In many Parts of this Country is found a certain kind of Squirrel, who, at his pleasure, can stretch out the Skin of his Sides, Thighs, and Legs, about an Inch in breadth (almost like the Wings of a Bat) by the help of which, he leaps farther, and alights more surely than the ordinary sort, and is therefore called the Flying-Squirrel.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics. None. As for Universities, here is a considerable Seminary of Learning 
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, etc.  lately established at St. James Town, which already merits the Title of College, and we hope it will in process of time deserve the Name of an University.  
The Natives of this Country being Persons generally of tall and slender Bodies, black Hair, and of a 
Manners.  tawny Complexion, are much given to Revenge, and very exact in vindicating the Death of a Friend, if they can by any means possible. They spend most of their time in Hunting wild Beasts, particularly Dear and Beaver, whose Skins (as aforesaid) they interchange with the English for what Necessaries they want. Natives of the Inland Parts, are said to burn their Dead, and lay up their Ashes near their Cabins. Those whom they own as Priests, are looked upon as so many Conjurers, because by their Invocations in a private Cabin, 'tis reported, that they frequently cause abundance of Rain to fall. The English here residing, are much the same with those in England.  
The Language of the Natives of this Country, is remarkable for its vast variety of Dialects, and those 
Language.  so different from one another, that People of twenty Miles distance (and sometimes less) are as quite different Nations, neither of 'em being able to comprehend the full meaning of one another's Jargon, without the help of an Interpreter. Of such People or Nations, are chiefly reckoned the Chawonocks, Mangoags, Monacans, Mannahocks, Masawomekes, Pawhatans', &c. The English here residing, retain and use their own Language.  
The Natives (especially those in the Inland Parts of this Country) own Subjection to certain Governors 
Commodities.  of their own, called Weroans. The English are subject unto, and ruled by a particular Governor, appointed and sent thither by his Britannic Majesty. The various Laws, which immediately relate to the Colony itself, are made by the Governor, with the Consent of his Council, in Conjunction with the Burgesses elected by Freeholders'. But for Decision of Matters, (whether Civil or Criminal in general) they're the very same with those here in England. The chief Court of Judicature, being held Quarterly, is called the Quarter-Court: In it the Governor and Council are Judges, who determine in Affairs of greatest moment; and to it Appeals are made from Inferior Courts, Monthly kept in every County; there being Sheriffs, Justices of the Peace, and other Officers appointed for that end by the Governor.  
The English here residing, are (for the most part) 
Arms.  Professors of the Protestant Doctrine, and Observers 
Religion.  of the Forms of Divine Worship, according to the Model of the Church of England. But the Natives continue Pagan, except a few of the younger sort already taught the Elements of Human Literature, and instructed in the Principles of Christianity, by the Members of our lately erected Seminary of Learning at St James Town: of whose happy and desired Progress in this matter, we have all Reason in the World to wish, and no small Grounds to hope the best.   

§. 11. Carolina.  
THIS Country (discovered at first about the same time with Virginia, and afterwards, Anno 1660 
Name.  granted by Patent to several Noblemen as Proprietors thereof) is termed by the French, Caroline; by the Italians, Spaniards, Germans, and English, Carolina; so called in Honour of His Britannic Majesty, King Charles the Second.  
The Air of this Country is reckoned very healthful to breath in, and so temperate, that 'tis a good Medium 
Air.  between the extremities of Heat and Cold, that are most sensibly felt in divers Parts of the World. The opposite Place of the Globe to Carolina, is that part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 29 and 36 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country is for the most part very fruitful, producing in great plenty most sorts of Fruits, 
Soil.  Roots, Plants, Herbs, etc. besides variety of English Grain. The length of the Days and Nights in Carolina, is much the same with those in the Southmost Part of Spain, and Northmost of Barbary, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities exported hence, are Skins of Otters, Bears, and Leopards; as also Oil, Olives, 
Commodities.  Cotton, Indigo, Ginger, Tobacco, Sorsaparilla, Turmerick, Snakes-Root, etc.  
What chiefly deserves the Epithet of Rare in Carolina, is a certain Herb, which goes by the Name of the 
Rarities.  Country; and remarkable for its long red Root, which draws upon Paper good red Lines, but answers not in Dying.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Country, being naturally Men of good Courage, and for a long time at Wars among 
Manners.  themselves, are mightily diminished in their Number, by what they were. But those remaining, are generally Persons of a good agreeable Temper, and maintain a firm Friendship with our Colony. The English here residing, are the same in Manners with those here in England.  
The Natives have a particular Jargon of their own, which sounds very harsh to the Ear, and seems to 
Language.  Strangers extremely hard, if not impossible to be acquired. The English use their own Language.  
King Charles II. having granted Carolina by Letters-Patent, in Propriety to George Duke of Albemarle, 
Government.  Edward Earl of Clarendon, etc. by those Letters, the Laws of England were to be always in force in this Country, only the Lords Proprietors are impower'd (together with the Consent of the Inhabitants) to make or repeal such By-Laws, as shall from time to time be thought expedient, for the better governing of the whole Colony.  
The English here residing, are of many and different 
Arms.  Persuasions in Matters of Religion, there being a Liberty of Conscience allowed by the very Constitution 
Religion.  of their Government. The Natives have as yet no revealed Knowledge of the True God, but follow the vain Imaginations of their own Minds; however, they are said to acknowledge one Supreme Being, whom they Worship under the Name of Okee, and to him their Priests do frequently Sacrifice; but they believe that he takes no care of Human Affairs, committing them to lesser Deities. They acknowledge also a Transmigration of Souls, and a Future State of Happiness after this Life.    

SCET. V. Concerning Terra Arctica.  
UNDER the Title of Terra Arctica, we comprehend all those Northern Countries, lying either entirely (or mostly) within the Arctic Polar Circle. The chief of which are these following, viz. 

Greenland,  
Nova Zembla,  
New Denmark,  
Spitsberge,  
Terra de Jesso,  
New North Wales.    
Of these we know little more, as yet, than their bare Names. I am very sensible, That in treating of them, (yea, and that individual Part of the Earth exactly under the North Pole) some Writers are pleased to speak as particularly, as if they were discoursing of the Fifty two Counties of England. But leaving such Gentlemen to divert themselves with their own Chimeras; and leaving these Countries to the better Discovery of Future Ages, I pass on to the various Divisions of South America; choosing rather to say nothing of the aforesaid unknown Countries, than to relate things of them that are satisfactory neither to myself, nor the Reader; being willing to have due regard to that excellent Saying of the Roman Orator, Quam bellum est velle confiteri potius nescire guod Nescias, quam ista effutientem nauseare, atque ipsum sibi displicere! Cic. de Nat. Deor. Lib. 1. Now followeth,   

SECT. VI Concerning Terra Firma.  
 d. m. Situated between 297 30 of Long. It's greatest Length from E to W. is about 1260 Miles 330 00 between 03 20 of Latit. Breadth from S. to N. is about 480 Miles. 11 30 Being divided into East the River Orinoque, called Guiana. West the River Orinoque, termed Castello del Oro. East comprehands the Provinces of Caribana— Chief Town Moreshego— N. to S. Guiana— Manboa— West comprehends the Provinces of Panama, or Terra Firma Panama— From W. to E. Carthagena— Idem— St Martha— Idem— Rio de la hacha Idem— Venezula— Idem— Andaluzia— Comane— Paria— Maluregvara— From E. to W. Granada— St. Fe de Bagota— Popayan— St. Fe de Antiochia  
THIS Country (discovered by the Spaniards, and Conquered, Anno 15 14. is termed by the Italians, 
Name.  Terra Firma; by the Spaniards, Tierra Firma; by the French, Terre Farm; by the Germans, Haet vast Land; and by the English, Terra Firma; so called by the Discoverers thereof, as being one Part of the Firm Land, or Main Continent, at which the Spaniards first touched in their Western Discoveries.  
The Air of this Country is extremely hot, yet generally accounted very wholesome, save in the Northmost 
Air.  Parts adjacent to the Isthmus of Panama, where the Ground is full of Lakes and Marshes, which by their ascending Vapours do render the Air very gross, and consequently less wholesome to breath in. The opposite Place of the Globe to Terra Firma, is that part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 107 and 150 Degrees of Longitude, with 3 Degrees of North, and 11 Degrees of Southern Latitude.  
This Country (lying mostly in the first North Climate) is said to be blessed with an excellent Soil, producing 
Soil.  great plenty of Corn and Fruits, where duly manured. It mightily abounds in Venison, Fish, and Fowl. A great part of it is planted with Cotton, and others are very productive of Sugars and Tobacco. Here are also very considerable Mines of Gold, Silver, Brass, etc. many precious Stones, and in several places, good fishing of Pearls. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of this Country, is 12 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost, is 12 Hours, or thereabouts; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold, Silver, and other Metals, Balsam, Rozin, Gums, 
Commodities.  Long Pepper, Emeralds, Saphires, Jasper, etc.  
Upon the Coast of Terra Firma nigh Surinam, is frequently seen, and sometimes taken that Fish, usually 
Rarities.  called by Mariners, the Old Wife, but otherways, the Square Acarauna; so termed from his Figure, being almost a complete Quadratum. (2.) In several Parts of Guiana, are certain Trees, called Totock, remarkable for their Fruit, which is of so great a bulk, and withal so hard, that People can't with safety walk among 'em, when the Fruit is ripe, being in danger every moment to have their Brains knocked out. (3.) In one of the Branches of Orenoque River, is such a hideous Cataract, that the Water falling down, makes as loud a Noise, as if a thousand Bells were knocked one against another. Vid. Heylin's Cosmog. last Edition, page 1086. (4.) On the top of a high Mountain, called Cowob, is a considerable Lake, (according to the Report of the Natives) and that well-stockt with most sorts of Fishes. (5) In some Rivers of Guiana, is a certain little Fish, about the bigness of a Smelled, and remarkable for having four Eyes, two on each side, one above the other; and in Swimming, 'tis observed to keep the uppermost two above, and the other two under Water. (6.) In the Island of Trinidado, [near the Coast of Terra Firma] is a remarkable Fountain of Pitch, which boileth out of the Earth in great abundance, and is exported thence to various places in these Parts of the World. (7.) Near C. Brea, on the Continent, is another Fountain of Pitchy Substance, much used in triming of Ships with good success, and preferable to the ordinary Pitch in those hot Countries, being able to resist the scorching Heat of the Sunbeams. Vid. Purchas his Pilgrims, Part 4. Lib. 6.  
Here is one Spanish Archbishopric, viz. that of St. Fee de Bagota. 
Archbishopric.   

Bishoprics.  Bishoprics four, viz. those of 

Popayan,  
Carthagena,  
Panama,  
St. Martha.    
None. 
Universities.   
The Natives of this Country, being Persons of a tawny Colour, and (for the most part) of very robust 
Manners.  and proper Bodies, are a People that's very healthful, and generally live to great Ages, notwithstanding the Air they breath in is none of the best. They spend most of their time in Hunting, and such like Diversions, as the generality of other Americans do, and commonly they walk naked above their Middles.  
Here is a great Diversity of Languages among the Natives, and each of these divided into several Dialects. 
Language.  The Europeans here settled retain the several Languages, peculiar to their respective Countries from whence they came.  
This spacious Country, is, in a great part, subject to the King of Spain, and governed by the Viceroy 
Government.  of Mexico, under whom are several Deputy-Governors in divers Parts for the better management of the whole; and for an equal Distribution of Justice every where, there are established many Courts of Judicatory, in which all Causes, whether Civil or Criminal, are heard and determined. Some of the Midland Provinces are as yet free from the Spanish Power, being still maintained by the Natives, who acknowledge Subjection unto, and are governed by the Heads, or Eldest of their Families.  
The Natives of this Country (especially in the Midland 
Arms.  Provinces) are gross Idolaters. Nigh unto, and 
Religion.  upon the River Wiapoco, is a certain Nation, (called Marashewaccas) whose Object of Religious Worship, is a monstrous Idol of Stone, set up in a most frightful Posture. For it is fashioned like a very big Man sitting upon his Heels, resting his Elbows upon his Knees, and holding forwards the Palms of his Hands, and looking upwards, doth gape with his Mouth wide open. The different Europeans here residing, are of the same Religion with that established in the respective Countries from whence they came.   

SECT. VII. Concerning Peru.  
 d. m. Situated between 290 30 of Long. Itsgreatest Length from N. to S. is about 1440 Miles. 307 10 between 25 30 of S. Latit. Breadth from W. to E. is about 480 Miles. 01 00 of N. Lat. Peru comprehends the Province of Posto— Chief Town Poston— From N. to S. Los Quixos— Baesa— Pacamores— Valladolid— Qui●c— Idem— Peru— Lima— Los Carea●— Potosi—  
THIS Country (discovered by the Spaniards, Anno 1525.) is termed Peru by the Italians, Spaniards, 
Name.  French, Germans, and English; so called (according to the best of Critics) from a certain Rivulet, which bore that Name among the Indians, at the Spaniards first arrival.  
The Air of this Country is of a very different Nature, being in some places extremely hot, and in others 
Air.  extraordinary sharp and piercing. The Wind upon this Coast (according to J. Acosta) blows always from the South and South-West, (contrary to what's usual between the Tropics) and is not violent, tempestuous, or unhealthful, as elsewhere; but very moderate and agreeable. He further observes, That all along the Coast, called Lanos, it never Rains, Thunders, Snows, nor Hails; yet very frequently a little out at Sea: And that among the Andes, it Rains in a manner continually. The opposite Place of the Globe to Peru, is that part of the Gulf of Bengale, between 110 and 127 Degrees of Longitude, with 1 and 25 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Country (lying in the 1st, 2d, and 3d South Climate) consisteth of many large and pleasant Valleys, 
Soil.  with divers high and lofty Mountains. The Valleys in some places, especially towards the Seacoasts are very Sandy, and frequently subject to Earth Quakes; in other places they are very rich, and the Air extremely sultry. The Mountains (particularly the Andes) are, for the most part, continually Cold in their Tops, yet exceeding fertile, and generally lined with most costly Mines beyond any Country in the World, witness the famous lofty Hill of Potozi, in the Province of Los Carcase. It is universally esteemed the richest of all the Foreign Plantations belonging to the Spaniard. The longest Day in the Northmost Part of Peru, is about 12 Hours ¼; the shortest in the Southmost, is 10 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold and Silver in vast quantities, costly Pearls, and abundance 
Commodities.  of Cotton, Tobacco, Cocheneel, Medicinal Drugs, etc.  
There's a high Mountain in Peru, (called Periacaca) to whose Top if any Person ascend, he's suddenly 
Rarities.  taken with a terrible sit of Vomiting. And many Travellers endeavouring to pass over the Desert of Punas, have been benumbed on a sudden, and fallen down dead, which makes that way wholly neglected of late. (2.) On the Tops of the highest Mountains in Peru, (as in other Parts of the World) are frequently found some considerable Lakes, several of which are very hot. (3) In the Valley of Tarapaya, near to Potozi, is a very hot Lake of a Circular Form, whose middle part (for about twenty Foot square) continually boils up; and though the Water is so extremely warm, yet the Soil about the Lake is extraordinary cold. (4) At the Baths of Ingua, is a Stream of Water almost boiling hot; and hard by it doth issue forth another Stream as cold as Ice. (5.) In the Province of Loc Carcase is another Spring of Water so very hot, that one can't hold his Finger in it for the short space of one Ave-Maria. And somewhere else in this County is a Fountain, out of which there issueth a considerable Current, of a Colour almost as red as Blood. (6.) Near to Cusco is a Spring, whose Waters turn into pure white Salt, wherewith the whole Country adjacent is supplied. (7) Among the Quicksilver Mines in Guaniavilica, is a Fountain of hot Water, whose Current having run a considerable way, turns at last into a soft kind of Rock, which being easily cut, and yet very lasting, is usually employed for building of Houses thereabouts. (8) Nigh C. S. Helen, and all along the Coast, are many Fountains of Coppey, (a Substance resembling Pitch, and frequently used as such) or Gultran resin, which flow in such abundance, that Ships at Sea (out of sight of Land) can give a shrewd guess where they are, by the very smell of such Fountains, providing there be a gentle Breeze from the Shore. (9) In divers Parts of Peru, are still Extant the Ruins of many stately Indian Temples, particularly that called the Pachamana (about four Leagues from ●●ma): And another in the City of Dusco, which might have been formerly accounted the American Pantheon, for the Idols of all Nations conquered by the Inguas, were always brought thither, and there set up. (10) Among the Curiosities of this Country, we may also reckon the Cucujus Peruvianus, or Lanthorn-Fly: An Insect of a considerable bigness, and remarkable for its shining Property in the Dark, (appearing as a little Lantern at a distance) whereupon the Natives when obliged to Travel a Nights, do usually fasten a few of 'em to a Stick, and by their Light can clearly see their way. We may also add those extraordinary little Birds of this Country, called Tomineios, [of whom in Brasile] being of so small a Bulk, that they surpass not common wild Bees in bigness. And finally those prodigious great Birds, [named Condores] who are so large and strong, that they'll set upon and devour an ordinary Calf. For all these, and several other Remarkables of Peru, Vid. J. Acosta, his Natural and Moral History of the Indies.  
Here is one Spanish Archbishopric, viz. that of 
Archbishoprics.  Lima.  
Bishoprics, are those of 
Bishoprics.  

Cusco,  
Truxillo,  
Quinto.  
Arequipa,  
Guamanga,    
Universities in this Country. None. 
Universities.   
The Natives of this Country, are reported to be a People that's (for the most part) very Simple, and 
Manners.  grossly Ignorant. Those towards the Equator, are generally esteemed more Ingenious than the rest, but withal much addicted to two most detestable Vices, viz. Dissimulation and Sodomy. The Spaniards here residing, are much the same with those in Spain.  
The Language of the Natives, did formerly consist of several quite different Dialects (or rather so many 
Language.  distinct Tongues, they being unintelligible to one another) but these are much diminished, and daily grow fewer; for the People in the lower Part of this Country, being now (almost) entirely civilised, have left their Ancient Jargon, and commonly use the Spanish Tongue.  
This rich Country (by most probable Conjectures) was governed by its Incas, or Hereditary Kings, 
Government.  above three hundred Years before the Spaniards got any footing therein; but being fully mastered by them, Anno 1533. under the Conduct of Pizarro, it hath been ever since accounted a considerable Part of the King of Spain's American Dominions, and is governed by his Viceroy, who ordinarily resideth at Lima. In several places, the Natives (especially those of the Mountains) maintain as yet their Liberties, and are ruled by some particular Caciques.  
The Peruvians (except those converted to Christianity) 
Arms.  are gross Idolaters, worshipping the Sun, Moon, 
Religion.  Stars, Lightning, Thunder, etc. To each of such Deities were formerly erected in this Country very stately Temples, whose Remains are still extant in many places, besides one almost entire, viz. that at Cusco. This Temple was dedicated to the Sun, but is now a part of the Monastery of St Dominick. Its Walls were over-laid with Plates of Gold from top to bottom, and in it was set up a glorious Representation of the Sun, being a lively Figure of that Celestial Body in pure Massy Gold. Near to this Temple were four others, one whereof was dedicated to the Moon, whom they called Quilla, reckoning her either Wife or Sister to the Sun. Another to the Planet Venus, which they termed Chasca. A third to Thunder and Lightning, which went by the common Name of Yllapa. And a fourth to Cuychu, i. e. Iris, or the Rainbow. All of them were wonderfully erriched with either Gold or Silver; and besides these, were many others, through the various Provinces of this [once] mighty Empire; but the most magnificent Temple of all Peru, was that spendid piece of Indian Architecture in a certain Island of the Lake Titicaca, in which the Incas are believed to have hid a great deal of Treasure, when the Spaniards invaded their Country.   

SCET. VIII. Concerning the Land of the Amazons.  
This vast Country is of no certain Extent nor Division, neither hath it any remarkable Town.  
THIS Country (discovered by the Spaniards, Anno 1541.) is termed by the Italians, Paese di Amazona; 
Name.  by the Spaniards, Tierra de las Amazonas; by the French, Pais des amazons; by the Germans, Y land van d' amazons; and by the English, The Land of the Amazons; so called from the many warlike Women, (resembling the Ancient Amazons) who appeared in Arms on the Banks of the River Amazon, at the Europeans first entering into this Country.  
The Air of this Country, in places as yet discovered, is reported to be very Temperate, considering the Latitude 
Air.  of the Country. The opposite Place of the Globe to the Land of the Amazons, is partly the Gulf of Bengal, and partly the Peninsula of Malacca.  
The Soil of this Country, (it lying in the 1st, 2d, and 3d South Climate) where yet discovered, is very 
Soil.  fertile, producing great variety of Fruits and Grain. Here also are abundance of Mines, Sugarcanes, Cacoa, and Tobacco. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 12-Hours, and a little more; the shortest in the Southmost, is 11 Hours; and the Nights proportionably.  
The Commodities of this Country are reckoned Gold, Silver, Sugar, Cacoa, Ebony, Tobacco, etc. but this 
Commodities.  Part of the World being as yet very slenderly known, and little frequented by Strangers, these may be rather reckoned the Product than Staple Commodities of this Country.  
In the River Amazon, is a dreadful Cataract, a considerable way from the Sea; for the Water being 
Rarities.  penned up between two steep Rocks (under which is a hideous Precipice) the Stream falleth down with great Violence and Noise. Yet notwithstanding of this so terrible a Fall, there be many of the Natives, who, 'tis reported, are so bold, as to descend that Stream in their little Canoes. In falling, they are sure to turn topsy-turvy many times, and are severely plunged in the Deep when down; yet such is their Care and Nimbleness, that they quickly recover their Canoes, and forthwith proceed on their Voyage. J. Acosta.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
Upon the Banks of the River Amazon, (as is hinted at already) were discovered about fifty different Nations. 
Manners.  who seemed generally to be a fierce and savage sort of People; all, both Men and Women, appearing in Arms, at the first approaching of the Spaniards; and they still continue as fierce and savage as formerly, and many of 'em are reported to be Anthropophagis, or eaters of Human Flesh.  
Our knowledge of this (as yet) ill discovered Country is so slender, and the Commerce between Europeans 
Language.  and this People, so little, that we can make no Observations on the Nature and Number of their Languages.  
How this People is governed, (or if any Form of Government among them) is not yet very certain. 
Government.  A further Enquiry into the sum, must be referred to the better Discovery of Future Ages.  
That the Inhabitants of this Country, are in general 
Arms.  gross Idolaters, is most that can be said of them as 
Religion.  yet. They are reported to make their Images of Wood, and to set them up in the Corners of their Houses, (having no Temples) and do firmly believe, That those polished Pieces of Timber are really inhabited by some Divinities descended from Heaven, being taught the same by their Priests.   

SECT. IX. Concerning Brasil.  
 d. m. Situated between 322 00 of Long. It's greatest Length from N. E. to S. W. is about 1600 Miles. 346 30 between 01 00 of Latit. Breadth from N. to S. is about 1380 Miles. 23 00 Brasil [of no certain Division] it's Chief Towns are those of S. Vincent— Found upon the Sea Coast from S. to N. Sanctos— Angra does Reyes— S. Sebastian— Spiritu sanctio— Porto seguro— S. Salvadore— Pernambuco— Parayba—  
THIS Country (discovered by the Portugueze, Anno 1501.) is termed Brasil by the Italians, Spaniards, 
Name.  French, Germans, and English; but why so called is not certain. Those, who derive the Name from the abundance of that Wood (termed by the Europeans, Brasile-Wood) which grows in this Country, do give [methinks] no satisfactory Account of the matter.  
The Air of this Country is generally very wholesome; and notwithstanding Brasil is almost entirely 
Air.  within the Torrid Zone, yet in those Parts already discovered, 'tis exceeding Temperate, being daily qualified by Sea-Breezes about Noon. Opposite on the Globe to Brasil, are the Philippin Islands; with part of the Eastern Ocean adjacent to them.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th South Climate) is reported to be extraordinary 
Soil.  fertile, especially in those Places already discovered. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 12 Hours ¼; the shortest in the Southmost, 10 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Redwood (otherways Brasil-wood, much used for Dying) 
Commodities.  in great quantities; abundance of Sugar; as also Amber, Rozin, Balm, Tobacco, train-oil, Confectures, etc.  
As the principal Rarities of Brasil, we make fitly reckon the considerable number of very strange Creatures 
Rarities.  found in that Country: The chief of which I shall here mention, and those reducible to Four General Classes, viz. Beasts, Serpents, Birds, and Fishes. I. Of Beasts. The most remarkable of them are these following. (1.) Monkeys, particularly that sort, called by Europeans, the Kings-Monkey, the biggest of the whole Species, and observable for having a thin hollow Throttle-Bone, near the upper end of the Larynx, by the help of which he makes a great noise. Here also are many Monkeys (of a yellowish Colour) that smell like ordinary Musk. (2.) The Sloth [termed by the Natives Haii, from his Voice of a like sound] but by most Europeans, Ignavus or Pigritia; and corruptedly Percza, by the Spaniards; so called from the Nature of that Animal, being of so flow a Motion, that he requires three or four Days to climb up a Tree of an ordinary height, and twenty four Hours to walk fifty Paces on plain Ground. His Fore-feets are almost double his hinder in length; and when he climbs a Tree, his hold he takes is so sure, that while he hangs by a Branch, he can Sleep securely. (3.) The Tamandu●-guacu, [which is a great Bear] so termed by the Natives, but commonly by Europeans, the Ant-Bear, because he usually feeds upon Ants, at least destroys those Creatures wherever he finds them. His Tail is so big that [Squirrel like] he can cover his whole Body therewith. (4.) The great Shell'd-Hedghog, called by the Natives Tatu; and Armadillo by the Spaniards, because he gathers himself up, Head, Feet, and Tail, within his Shell, as round as a Ball; and that as a sure Defence, when either he goes to Sleep, or is actually assaulted by any destructive Creature, with whom he dares not grapple. II. Of Serpents. The most remarkable of them, are, (1.) That called by the Natives Ibibaboca, which is about three Yards and an half long and of a considerable bigness; his Colours are originally White, Red, and Black, of all kinds; and his By't is most pernicious of any, yet worketh the slowest. (2) The Boigua●u, which is the biggest of the whole Species, being half a Yard in compass about the Middle, and almost seven Yards long. (3) The Bo●cininga, otherways the Rattle Snake, so called by Europeans from a Rattle in the end of his Tail, composed of a number of d●y Bones, from eight to sixteen, which are hollow, thin, hard, and very sonorous. Those Persons, whose misfortune it is, to be bitten by him, are tormented with exquisite Pain, (their whole Body cleaving into Chaps) and frequently die within twenty four Hours in a most sad Condition. But (as a remarkable Act of the Divine Providence) this noxious Animal gives timely warning to Travellers to avoid him, by making a great noise with his Rattle, how soon he hears any Person approaching towards him. III. Of Brasile Birds, the most remarkable are, (1.) The Hummingbird, which is so called from the humming noise he makes with his Wings like a Bee, when he seeds, by thrusting his small Bill into Flowers. The Brasilians term him Guanumbi, and some Writers Ourissia, i. e. the Sunbeam, because of his radiant coloured Feathers, with which the Indians adorn their Images; but the Spaniards call him Tomineius, because so small, that one of them with its Nest weighs only two Tominoes, a Weight in Spain consisting of twelve Grains. (2.) The Anhima, so called by the Natives, but by Europeans the Unicorn-Bird, because he hath a kind of Horn growing out of his Forehead about two or three Inches long, of a brittle substance, and blunt at the top; and is therefore neither defensive nor offensive to him. (3.) That called Guara by the Brasilians, and by Europeans the Sea-Curlew; the same with Numenius Indicus, and Arcuata Coccinea among Latin Authors, and remarkable for its alteration of Colours: Being at first Black, then Ash-coloured, next White, afterwards Scarlet, and last of all Crimson, which grows the richer dye, the longer he lives. IV. Of Fishes taken upon the Coast of Brasile, the most remarkable are, (1.) Orbis Minor, or the Globe-fish, so called from his Orbicular form; and remarkable for being armed with many long, round, hard and sharp Spikes and Needles all over his Body, almost like those of a Hedgehog. When he swims, 'tis believed, that he draws those Needles in, depressing them to his Body, to facilitate his way through the water; and that he advances them at any time he happens to be pursued, bidding (as 'twere) the Enemy to come at his peril. (2.) Upon this Coast is frequently seen the Echeneis or Remora, a Fish very famous among the Ancients for it stupendous power in stopping a Ship (as they imagined) though under fail, and before a brisk gale of Wind. Which strange account was generally believed for many Ages, and not a few have laboured to assign the cause; but is now looked upon as a ridiculous Story, and deservedly exploded by every ordinary Traveller. These are the most remarkable Creatures, whether Beasts, Serpents, Birds or Fishes belonging to Brasile; and all (or most) of them, are to be seen in the public Repository of Gresham College, London.  
Here is one Portugese Archbishopric, viz. that of S. Salvadore, to whose Incumbent are subject 
Archbishoprics, etc.  several Suffragans, but their Number and Names are uncertain. Universities none.  
The Brasilians are reported to be generally a cruel, thievish and revengeful sort of People; yet some on the 
Manners.  Sea-coast being civilised, prove very ingenious. This vast Body comprehends several different Nations, the chief of which are the Toupinambous, the Margajas, the Tapuyes, etc. who are ordinarily distinguished from one another by the wearing of their Hair. They generally go quite naked, and in many places of the main Land are multitudes of Cannibals. Their manner of reposing a Nights is in a kind of Net, gathered at each end, and tied to two Poles fixed fast in the ground. This Net is made of the Rind of a certain Tree called Haemac; and hence is derived the vulgar appellation of Sea-Bedding, commonly used in the English Fleet.  
The diversity of Languages among the Natives of those Places already discovered on the Seacoasts, doth 
Language.  sufficiently evince, that their number must be much greater, in the Inland parts of this vastly extended Country. The only thing observable of those Languages upon the Seacoasts, is, that the Natives can't pronounce the three Letters of L. F. R. and that their manner of pronunciation is much through their Throat. The Portugueze here residing retain and use their own Language.  
The Brasilians being divided (as aforesaid) into many different Nations, several of them choose certain 
Government.  Captains or Governors, by whom they're ruled; others wander up and down, and live without any Order or Government among them. The Portugueze being Masters of the Seacoasts since the Year 1501. and having divided them into certain Praefectures, over each of these is set a particular Governor, which Governors are all accountable to the Viceroy of Portugal, whose place of Residence is ordinarily at St. Salvadore.  
The Natives of Brasil are reported to entertain but a 
Arms.  faint notion of a Supreme Being, and a Future State; 
Religion.  and many are sunk even beneath Idolatry itself, having neither Idol nor Temple to be seen among them. Others are said to believe the Soul's Immortality; and to give some obscure hints of an Universal Deluge. Many of those who live nigh unto, and upon the Seacoasts, are converted to Christianity, and that by the commendable Industry of the Portugueze, who are of the same Religion with that established in Portugal.   

SECT. X. Concerning Chili.  
 d. m. Situated between 302 00 of Long. its greatest Length from N. to S. is about 960 Miles. 306 00 between 25 30 of Latit. Breadth from W. to E. is about 200 Miles. 44 00 Chili comprehends the Provinces of Chili propria— Ch. Town St. Jago— No. to S. upon the Sea-Coast. Chili Imperial— Balvidia— Chucuito— Mandosa, East of Chili propria. Chili Imperial.  
THIS Country (discovered by the Spaniards, Anno 1554.) is termed Chili by the Italians, Spaniards, 
Name.  French, Germans, and English; so called (as most imagine) from a large and spacious Valley of that Name.  
The Air of this Country, during the Summer, is much of the same Quality as in Spain, or rather more 
Air.  Temperate, being frequently fanned by Westerly Sea-Breezes: But in the Winter, the Cold is so excessively piercing, that both Man and Beast do perish in great numbers. The opposite Place of the Globe to Chili, is the South part of Tartary, between 122 and 126 Degrees of Longitude, with 25 and 44 Degrees of North Latitude.  
The mountainous Parts of this Country (it lying in the 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th South Climate) are generally Dry 
Soil.  and Barren; but in the large Valleys towards the Sea, the Soil is exceeding fertile, producing great plenty of Maize, Wheat, and most sorts of other Grain; as also variety of Herbs and Fruits; and the Vines brought hither from Spain, do prosper extraordinary well. This Country affordeth likeways some rich Mines of Gold and Silver. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 13 Hours ½; the shortest in the Southmost, is 7 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, are Gold, Silver, Maize, Corn, Honey, Ostriches, and several 
Commodities.  Metals.  
In Chili is a very remarkable Bird, called Cuntur, (corruptedly Condor by the Spaniards) which is of a 
Rarities.  prodigious Size, and extremley Ravenous. He frequently sets upon a Sheep or Calf, and comes down with such force, that his Blow is always mortal, and not only kills, but is also able to eat up one of 'em entirely. Two of 'em will dare to assault a Cow or Bull, and usually master them. The Inhabitants of the Country are not free from such Attempts; but Nature hath so ordered, that this destructive Creature is very rare, the whole Country affording only a very small number, otherways not to be inhabited, Vid. J. Acosta, his Natural and Moral History of the Indies.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Country, being of a white Complexion, and tall of Stature, are a very warlike and 
Manners.  courageous sort of People, especially the Arauques, who are as yet unconquered by the Spaniards. For Clothing, they use nothing else than the Skins of Wild Beasts.  
The prevailing Language of this Country, is the Spanish, which is not only in use among the Spaniards 
Language.  themselves, but also is currently spoken (at least understood) by the Plurality of the Natives. Those of 'em, who entertain little Commerce with the Spaniard, retain still their own Jargon as in ancient Times.  
The Natives (where they maintain their Freedom as yet) are ruled by certain Captains of their own 
Government.  choosing: But this Country being invaded, and taken Possession of by the Spaniard, above an hundred Years ago, is mostly subject to the Crown of Spain, and ruled by a particular Governor, residing at Conception, in Subordination to the Viceroy of Peru.  
The Natives of this Country (excepting those converted 
Arms.  to Christianity) are generally reckoned the 
Religion.  grossest Idolaters of all the Americans, the chief Object of their Worship being the Devil, whom they term Eponamon, which signifies Strong or Powerful. The Spaniards here residing, are Roman Catholics, as in the Kingdom of Spain.   

SECT. XI. Concerning Paraguay.  
 d. m. Situated between 307 10 of Long. It's greatest Length from N. to S. is about 1560 Miles. 337 40 between 12 00 of Latit. Breadth from W. to E. is about 1500 Miles. 37 00 Paraguay divided into several Provinces, the best known of which are Guayra— Chief Town Cividad Real E. to W. on the Br. of Rio de Plat. Paragaia propria Villa Rica— Chaco— Conception Tucoman— St. Jago Assumption W. to E. on the Rio de la Plata— B. of Rio de Pl.  
THIS Country (discovered first by John Dias de Solis, but more successfully, Anno 1546 when 
Name.  the Spaniards took Possession thereof) is termed by the Germans, Paraguaii; by the Italians, Spaniards, French, and English, Paraguay; so called from a River of the same Name. It's also called Rio de la Plata by the Spaniards, because of the abundance of Silver they found therein.  
The Air of this Country is generally reported to be very temperate, and abundantly healthful to breath 
Air.  in. The opposite Place of the Globe to Paraguay, is that part of the Kingdom of China and the Mogul's Empire, between 127 and 157 Degrees of Longitude, with 12 and 37 Degrees of North Latitude.  
The Soil of this Country (it lying in the 2d, 3d, 4th, and 5th South Climate) is esteemed to be very 
Soil.  fertile in most places, producing abundance of Corn, Wine, Fruits, and Herbs; and here also are several considerable Mines. The longest Day in the Northmost Parts, is about 13 Hours; the shortest in the Southmost, is 10 Hours ½; and the Nights proportionably.  
The chief Commodities of this Country, (at least the Product thereof) are reckoned to be some Gold, 
Commodities.  Silver, Brass, Iron, Sugars, Amethists, etc.  
Upon Rio de la Plata are frequently seen, and sometimes killed divers kinds of Serpents of a prodigious 
Rarities.  bigness. (2.) Towards the Northern Parts of Paraguay, is a certain Champaign Country, about six Leagues square, which is all overspread with an excellent sort of Salt, and that to a considerable height (3.) In the Western Parts of Tucoman, is a prodigious high and large Mountain, which for its wonderful Glistering in a clear Sun-shine-day, is called the Crystal Mountain. Under it is extended a hideous Cave-passage, through which doth glide a considerable Current of Water, with so many windings and turnings, that from the time of its entry under the Mountain, to its issuing forth on the other side, is almost the space of twenty four or thirty Hours, according to the Computation of the Portugueses, who were so adventurous, as to make the Experiment, and that by hazarding their Persons upon a Roft made of Canes, Vid. Purchas his Pilgrims, Part 4. Lib. 6.  
Here is one Spanish Archbishopric, viz. that of 
Archbishoprics, etc.  Rio de la Plata.  
To the Archbishopric of Rio de la Plata, are several Suffragans, viz those of  
St. Jago de Lestero, Assumption, Panama, Paraguay.  
As for Universities, here are none. 
Universities.   
The Paraguayans, though Persons of very big and tall Bodies, are nevertheless reported to be very nimble, 
Manners.  and much given to Running. They are said to be somewhat Laborious, and less Savage than many others of the adjacent Nations, yet a little inclined to a revengeful Humour against those who chance to wrong them.  
All we can learn of the Language mostly in use among the Natives, is, in general, that 'tis a very 
Language.  harsh and unpleasant Jargon, as the Plurality of the Indian Tongues are. The Spaniards here residing, do commonly use their own Language.  
The Natives of this Country (according to our latest Accounts) are in a great part subject to their 
Government.  own Captains or Caciques, whom they choose among themselves, and under whose Conduct they go out to War. A considerable Part of this Country doth belong to the King of Spain, who ordinarily keepeth one Governor at St. Jago in Tucoman, and another at Assumption in Rio de la Plata, both of 'em being answerable to the Viceroy of Peru.  
The Natives of this Country are generally gross 
Arms.  Idolaters, yet 'tis reported of 'em, that they're more 
Religion.  capable of learning our Arts and Religion, than most of the other Americans. And some speak of a Tradition spread among 'em, importing that certain Priests shall come into their Country, and instruct them of a new Religion, whereby they shall be most happy in another World. The Spaniards here residing, are (as in Spain) rigid Papists.   

SECT. XII. Concerning Terra Magellanica.  
THIS Southmost Part of the Continent of South America (called also Regio Patagonum) derives its Title from Ferdinand Magellan, a Portugese, who made the first Discovery thereof, Anno, 1519. as also of that famous Streight which still bears his Name, he being the first (for aught we know) that ever passed through the same. Many things (equally frivolous as ridiculous) are related of this Country and its Inhabitants, with which I shall neither trouble myself, nor the Reader, but proceed to   

SECT. XIII. Concerning Terra Antarctica.  
BY Terra Antarctica, we understand all those unknown and slenderly discovered Countries towards the Southern Parts of the Globe; the chief of which do bear the Names of New Guinea, New Zealand, New Holland, and (which may comprehend these and all the rest) Terra Australis incognita. Which Southern Countries, though they belong not to the Continent of America, yet we choose to mention 'em in this place, since the Southmost Part of the Continent of South America doth extend itself farther towards the South, than any Part or Headland of the old Continent. What was said of the Northmost Countries, [Sect. 5.] under the Title of Terra Arctica, (viz. that our knowledge of them did reach little farther than their bare Names) so the same may be affirmed of those that bear the Title of Terra Antarctica. Leaving them therefore to the better Discovery of Future Ages, we pass on to   

SECT. XIV. Concerning the American Islands.  
Reduced (page 45.) to three Classes. North, viz. those of California. Newfoundland. Middle, viz. the Antilles Greater, Cuba. Jamaica. Hispamola. Port-rico. Lesser, Caribees. Lucayes. Sotovento. Bermudas. South, viz. the Island of Terra del Fuogo.  
Of which Islands distinctly and in their order. Therefore  

§. 1. California.  
THIS Island was formerly esteemed a Peninsula, but now found to be entirely surrounded with Water. It's North part was discovered by Sir Francis Drake, Anno 1577. and by him called New Albion, where erecting a Pillar, he ●●st●ed thereon the Arms of England. The Inland parts thereof were afterwards searched into, and being found to be only a dry, barren, cold Country, Europeans were discouraged from sending Colonies to the same, so that it still remains in the hands of the Natives: And there being nothing remarkable relating either to them or it, we shall proceed to   

§ 2. Newfound Land.  
THIS Island (discovered first by the two Cabots, at the charge of Henry the 7th of England, Anno 
Name.  1497. but more particularly by Thorn and Eliot of Bristol, Anno 1527. and the English Title thereto being renewed in the name of Queen Elizabeth, Anno 1583. a Colony was settled therein about 30 years afterwards) is termed by the Italians, Terra Novella; by the Spaniards, Tierra Nueva; by the French, Terre Neuve; by the Germans, Newfunden Land; and by the English, Newfound Land; the derivation of which Name is sufficiently expressed in the Name itself.  
Notwithstanding this Island is situated between the Parallels that pass through the Southern part of England, 
Air.  and Northern of France, yet the Air thereof doth extremely differ from that in either of these Countries; it being subject to a greater excess of heat in the Summer, and more pinching cold in the Winter, than commonly happens in them. The opposite place of the Globe to New found-land is that part of Terra Australis incognita, between 140 and 150 degrees of Longitude with 45 and 53 degrees of South Latitude.  
This Island, for the most part, is overspread with Woods, which are but slowly cut down, because the 
Soil.  Country is very thinly inhabited. Where the Ground is already cleared, the Soil is not altogether despicable; affording variety of Roots, and several sorts of our English Grain: and those Parts possessed by the French, produce some plenty of Vines. This Island is sufficiently stocked with Deer, Hares, Otters, Foxes, etc. Here also is abundance of Land and Waterfowl; but above all things, its Coasts are surrounded with incredible multitudes of Codfish. The length of the days and Nights in Newfoundland, is the same as in the Southmost parts of England, and Northern of France, they all lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The Commodities of this Island are principally Furs, whale-oil, and Codfish, especially the latter, whereof 
Commodities.  there is such plenty, that the Fishing and bringing of them to Europe (particularly the straits) is now grown to a settled and very advantageous Trade.  
Nothing here deserves the Epithet of Rare, unless we reckon that prodigious large Bank of Sand upon the 
Rarities.  Southeast of the Island (about 300 miles in length, and upwards of 75 in breadth where broadest) remarkable for those vast multitudes of Bacalaos (or Codfish) and Peer John, which are taken in great numbers by divers European Nations, who yearly resort hither for that end. So thick do those Fishes sometimes swarm upon this Bank, that they retard the passage of Ships sailing over the same.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Natives of this Island are (for the Plurality of 'em) Persons of a middle Stature, broad-faceed, and 
Manners.  those of the Masculine Sex are usually beardless. They generally colour their Faces with Ochre, and for Clothing, use Skins of Wild Beasts. They live by ten or twelve Families together, in poor Cabins made of Poles, in form of our Arbours, and covered with Skins. They ordinarily employ themselves in Hunting, as most of the other Americans usually do. The English and French here residing, are much the same with those in Europe.  
All that can be said of the Language here commonly used among the Natives, is, that 'tis a certain 
Language.  Dialect of the Indian Tongue, which prevails among all the Indian Inhabitants, with little variation of Accent in the various Parts of the Island. The Europeans here residing, do still retain the maternal Language of the respective Countries from whence they came.  
In the Year 1623. Sir George Calvert, Principal Secretary of State, having obtained a Patent for a 
Government.  Part of Newfoundland, erected the same into a Province, [called Avalon] and therein settled a Plantation; which after him, was enjoyed by his Son Caecilius Lord Baltimore. This Island was set upon, and mastered by the French in the late tedious War, but speedily retaken by the English, who are now in full Possession of what they formerly enjoyed.  
The Natives of this Island (upon its first discovery) 
Arms.  were found to acknowledge a Supreme Being, whom 
Religion.  they owned as the Creator of all things; but erred extremely in their Apprehensions about the manner of the Creation: alleging that Men and Women were at first made of a certain number of Arrows stuck fast in the Ground. They generally believe the Immortality of the Soul, and that the Dead go into a far Country, there to make merry (as they think) with their Friends.   

§. 3. Cuba.  
THIS Island (discovered by the Spaniards, Anno 1494.) is termed by the Italians, Spaniards, French, 
Name.  Germans, and English, Cuba. Which Name is the same it had when first discovered, being so called by the Natives and neighbouring Islanders; what may be the Etymology of that Indian Appellation, we know not.  
The Air of this Island (considering its small Latitude) is very temperate, being mightily qualified by 
Air.  Vapours that daily ascend from the Earth. The opposite Place of the Globe to Cuba, is that part of the East-Iudian Ocean, lying between 110 and 120 Degrees of Longitude, with 20 and 23 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Island (lying in the same Climate with the Northern Part of New Spain) is not so fertile in Grain 
Soil.  as Wood, being generally covered over with Trees, some of which do drop the purest Rozin: Here is great plenty of Fish and Flesh; and in some Parts are divers kinds of excellent Fruits. The length of the Days and Nights in Cuba, is much the same as in the North of New Spain, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Gold, Ginger, Cassia, Mastic, Aloes, Cinnamon, Sugar, 
Commodities.  etc.  
The most remarkable thing in this Island, is a noted Bituminous Fountain, out of which there flows a sort 
Rarities.  of Pitchy Substance, commonly used for calking of Ships. Here also is a Valley full of Flint-Stones of different sizes, and those by nature so round, that they may serve as Bullets for most sorts of Cannons. Vid. Heylin's Cosmog. page 1079.  
In this Island is one Bishopric, viz. that of St. Jago, Suffragan to the Archbishop of St. Domingo 
Archbishoprics, etc.  in Hispaniola.  
The Inhabitants of this Island, being for the most part Spaniards, are the same in Manners with those on 
Manners.  the Continent.  
The Spaniards here residing, do still retain and commonly use the Spanish Tongue. 
Language.   
This Island was formerly governed by certain Caciques or Captains, but is now wholly subject to the 
Government.  King of Spain, who still keeps a particular Governor in it, whose ordinary Residence is in that Great and Populous City, Havana.  
The Spaniards here residing, are of the same Religion 
Arms.  with that established and universally professed in Spain. 
Religion.    

§. 4. Jamaica.  
THIS Island (first discovered by Columbus in his Second Voyage to America, and brought into 
Name.  Possession of the English by Penn and Venables, in the time of Oliver Cremwell) is termed Jamaica by the Italians, Spaniards, French, Germans, and English. It was at first called St. Jago by Columbus, which Name was afterwards changed into that of Jamaica, (after King James, than Duke of York) when it had been subjected for some time to the Crown of England.  
The Air of this Island is more temperate, than in most of the neighbouring Islands, the Heat thereof 
Air.  being much allayed by fresh Easterly Breezes that blow in the Daytime, and the frequent Showers that fall in the Night. Hurricanes and Earthquakes (so frequent in the Caribbees) are seldom heard of here; whereupon we may justly impute that terrible Earthquake [Anno 1693.] rather to a Moral than a Natural Cause, viz. the many and horrid Abominations abounding among the Inhabitants, which [without doubt] did loudly call for Judgements from Heaven. The opposite Place of the Globe to Jamaica, is part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 110 and 120 Degrees of Longitude, with 17 and 20 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of this Island is extraordinary rich and fertile, producing great quantity of Corn, Herbs, and 
Soil.  Fruits; abounding also in Sugar, Cotton, Tobacco, various kinds of Spices, with divers sorts of Physical Drugs and Gums, as Sumach, Guiacum, Aloes, Benjamin, Sarsaparilla, etc. The large and pleasant Fields appear constantly Green and Springing, they being well stocked with variety of Trees and Plants, which are never disrobed of their Summer-Liveries. Here likeways are several Rivulets, and those affording many excellent Fish, especially Tortoise. The length of the Days and Nights in Jamaica, is the same as in the middle Provinces of New Spain, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Cocao, Sugar, Indigo, Cotton, Tobacco, Hides, Copper, 
Commodities.  Piemento or Jamaica-Pepper, Tortoise-Shells, Wood for Dyers, and several sorts of Drugs, etc.  
This Island is furnished with some Springs of Mineral-Waters; particularly two, whereof one is Sulphurous, 
Rarities.  and the other Salt; but both approved of for the common Distempers of the place. (2) In divers Parts of Jamaica grows that Fruit, called the Machinel Apple, which is very beautiful to the Eye, of a pleasant Smell and Taste, yet Mortal if eaten, whence some term it the Eve-Apple. (3) Here are many Shiningflies, (a king of Cantharideses) appearing of a green Colour in the Daytime, but shining in the Night with such a Lustre, that one may see to Read by their light. (4.) Of all Creatures belonging to this Island, the most remarkable is the Allegator, that destructive Animal, commonly harbouring in or near to Rivers and large Land-Ponds. Although he be a very big Creature, and about ten, fifteen, or twenty Foot in length, yet he's hatched of an Egg not larger than that of a Turkey. His Back being full of hard Scales is impenetrable, whereupon 'tis a difficult matter to kill him, unless he receive a Wound in the Eye or Belly. He is an Amphibious Animal, and to enable him, either to Walk upon dry Ground, or Swim in the Water, Nature hath furnished him both with Feet and Fins. In moving on the Land, he's very swift, (providing his Course be straight forward) but extremely slow in turning, and therefore easily avoided. Lastly, In Jamaica are produced some rare Plants, much regarded by the Inquisitive Botanist. But for a particular Account of them and all others, found both in this, and several of the Caribbee Islands, I refer the Reader to a curious Catalogue, published some Years ago by that great Promoter of Natural Knowledge, the Ingenious Dr. Sloane.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of this Island being English, are much the same in Manners with those in the Kingdom 
Manners.  of England, only with this difference, that the generality of 'em is somewhat more viciously inclined, a thing too common in most of our Western Plantations.  
This Island being entirely inhabited by English, they retain and still use their own Native Language. 
Language.   
Jamaica is wholly subject to the Crown of England, and ruled by a particular Governor, sent thither by His 
Government.  Majesty, the King of Great Britain. The Laws by which they're governed, are (as near as can be) to those of England. Here they have several Courts of Judicatory for hearing and determining of all Causes between Man and Man; and for the better Assistance of the Governor, he is furnished with his Council to consult with, when occasion requires.  
The Inhabitants of this Island, are of the same Religion 
Arms.  with that publicly possessed, and by Law established 
Religion.  in England; excepting the Negroe-Slaves, who, (both here, and in other Islands of the English Plantations) are still kept in woeful Ignorance; which is undoubtedly a grievous Scandal to our Holy Profession in general, and an abominable Shame to their respective Masters in particular: But let such Masters know that the time is coming, when the [now] despised Souls of those toiling Slaves will certainly be required at their Hands.   

§. 5. Hispaniola.  
THIS Island (discovered by Columbus, Anno 1492.) is termed by the Spaniards, Espaniola; by the 
Name.  French, Espagnole; by the Italians, Germans, and English, Hispaniola; so called by the first Planters therein, (viz. the Spaniards) as a Diminutive of their own Country.  
The Air of this Island is much inferior to that in Jamaica, being much infested with morning Heats, 
Air.  which would be intolerable, were they not allayed by some cooling Breezes in the Afternoon. The opposite Place of the Globe to Hispaniola, is that part of the East-Indian Ocean, lying between 120 and 130 Degrees of Longitude, with 17 and 21 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Island is blessed with an extraordinary rich and fertile Soil. The Trees and Meadows in it are still so 
Soil.  green, that we may truly say, it enjoys a continual Spring. Herbs and Fruits are said to ripen in eighteen Days, and so rich and fruitful is the Native Turf, that of several Grain the common Increase is an hundred-fold. Here is abundance of Palm-Trees of a prodigious height and bigness, in whose Body an Incision being made near the Root, from thence doth flow a Liquor, usually called Palm-Wine, which being kept for some time, fermenteth, and becomes very strong. These Trees are also termed Cabbage-Trees, because their Tops resemble European Cabbage, and is commonly used as such by the Spaniards. Here is also great plenty of Sugarcanes, and some rich Mines of Gold. The length of the Days and Nights in Hispaniola, is the same as in the middle Provinces of New Spain, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Cattle, Hides, Cassia, Sugar, Ginger, Cocheneel, Guiacum, 
Commodities.  etc.  
In this Island is some store of Genipa-Trees, whose Fruit (about the bigness of a Man's two Fists) being 
Rarities.  pressed before thorough Ripe, affords a Juice as black as Ink, and fit to write with all, did it not disappear entirely in nine or ten Days. (2.) Here grows another Tree, called Mananilla or Dwarf Appletree, whose Fruit is of so venomous a quality, that if any Person eat thereof, he's instantly seized with an unquenchable Thirst, and dies raving Mad in a short time. (3.) Of the many Infects belonging to this Island, the Glow-worm (termed by the Spaniards, Cochinillas) is most remarkable, and that chiefly for two little Specks on its Head, which by Night give so much Light, that if a Person lay three or four of those Creatures together, he may see to read the smallest Print. (4) In Hispaniola are Spiders about the bigness of an ordinary Hen's Egg, having Legs as long as Sea-Crabs of a middle size. They are hairy all over, and have four black Teeth like Rabbits, and commonly bite very sharply, but are not venomous. (5) Most remarkable of all Creatures in this Island, is the Cayman, (commonly reckoned the Crocodile of Hispaniola) which being an Animal of a prodigious bigness, is much noted for his rare subtlety in catching his Prey; for lying upon a Riverside, he so gathereth his Body together, that, in form, he resembles exactly the large Trunk of an old Tree. In which Posture he continues till Cattle, or other Creatures, come to the River to drink, when to their great surprise, he suddenly springs up and assaults them: And (to enhance the Wonder) this strange Creature is said to use yet a more strange Stratagem to effect his end; for Travellers generally affirm of him, That, before he lays himself (as aforesaid) upon the Riverside, he's employed for some time in swallowing down several hundred Weight of small Peeble-Stones. By which additional Weight of his Body, he can keep a faster hold of his Prey, and be the sooner able to draw it into, and dive with it under Water. Vid. Late History of the Buchaneers in America, Part 1. Cap. 4.  
Here is one Archbishopric, viz. that of St. Domingo. Suffragan to whom are St. Jago in Cuba, 
Archbishoprics, etc.  St. John de Port-rico, and Coro in Terra Firma.  
Universities. None. 
Universities.   
The Inhabitants of this Island (being mostly Spaniards, with some French) are the same in Manners with those 
Manners.  on the Continent.  
The Inhabitants of this Island being Spaniards, and some French, (as aforesaid) do still retain and use their 
Language.  respective maternal Tongues.  
This Island being wholly subject to the Crown of Spain, (except the Western Parts now possessed by 
Government.  the French) is ruled by a particular Governor, appointed by his Catholic Majesty, whose Power doth extend itself over all the Antilloes belonging to Spain.  
The Inhabitants of this Island, whether Spaniards or 
Arms.  French, are of the same Religion with those on the Old 
Religion.  Continent.   

§ 6. Porto-Rico.  
THIS Island was termed S. Johannis Insula by Columbus, at his first Discovery thereof, and Boriquen by the Natives, but now Porto-Rico from its chief City and Haven of that Name. The Soil is tolerably good in many Parts, and Air abundantly temperate, except those Months immediately before and after the Summer and Winter Solstice. From hence are exported Sugarcanes, Ginger. Cassia, and good store of Hides. Here grow divers remarkable Trees, and some poisonous Shrubs upon the Seaside. The whole Island belonging to the Crown of Spain, is ruled by a particular Governor sent thither by his Catholic Majesty; and the Inhabitants thereof being Spaniards, are the same in Manners, Language, and Religion, as elsewhere, either upon the Old or New Continent.   

§. 7. The Caribee Islands.  
THE Caribees are reckoned that goodly Company of Islands, beginning at the 〈◊〉 of Porto-Rico, and reaching Southward almost to Terra Firma. They derive their Appellation from the Nature of their Inhabitants who (when first discovered) were generally Cannibals, the name Caribees being of the same importance. Taken all together, they come nearest (in Form) to the Segment of a great Circle, and are in number about thirty. The chief of which [proceeding from North to South] with their present Possessors; are as followeth,  
VIZ. Anguilla.— At present possessed by The English, but little esteemed. St. Martin— The French and Dutch. Sancta Crux.— The French. Barbada.— The English, but of small Account. St. Christopher's The English and French. Nievis or Mevis The English. Antego.— The English. Montserrat— The English, but mostly inhabited by Irish Guadalupa.— The French. Marigalant— The French. Dominica— The English and Natives. Martinico— The French. Barbados— The English. St. Lucia.— The French. St. Vincent— The English and Dutch, especially the latter Grenada.— The French. Tobago.— The English.  
Of all the Caribee Islands belonging to the English, the most remarkable (upon several accounts) is Barbados. Of it therefore in particular,  

Barbados.  
THIS Island is termed by the Spaniards, Barbadas; by the French, Barbade or Barboude; by the Italians, 
Name.  Germans, and English, Barbados: But why so called, we can give no account, the Name being an Indian Appellation. It was discovered in the Reign of King James 1. by Sir William Curtain, driven upon its Coast by stress of Wether. Meeting with no Inhabitants at his arrival, and finding the Nature of its Soil to be inviting; The English, upon his return, sent some Planters thither, who, for want of Trade, were reduced to great extremity, till about the Year 1627., when they began to Plant it to purpose.  
The Air of this Island is very hot and moist, especially for eight Months, yet in some measure qualified 
Air.  by cold Breezes of Wind, which rising with the Sun, blow commonly from North-East by East, unless there happen a Turnado, and grow fresher as the Sun mounteth up. The opposite Place of the Globe to Barbados, is part of the East-Indian Ocean, between 130 and 140 Degrees of Longitude, with 12 and 18 Degrees of South Latitude.  
This Island (not above eight Leagues in length, and five in breadth, where broadest) is blessed with a Soil 
Soil.  wonderfully fertile. General; taken, 'tis not above one 〈…〉 thick, yet that small depth of Earth resembles, in a 〈…〉 continued hot Bed, being almost every where grounded with white spongy Lime-Stones, which retain and reflect the solar Heat piercing through the overspreading Mould. Whereupon the Island beareth Crops all the Year round, and its Trees, Plants, and Fields, appear always green. Both in this, and the Island Jamaica, were formerly Mountain Cabbage-Trees of a prodigious height. The length of the Days and Nights in Barbados, is the same as in those Parts of New Spain, lying under the same Parallels of Latitude  
The chief Commodities of this Island, are Sugars, Indigo, cotton-wool, Ginger, Logwood, Fustick, 
Commodities.  Lignum Vitae, etc. and those in such abundance, that some hundred Sail of Ships do yearly receive their Loading here.  
In the Island of Barbados, are Ants of a very big size, who build their Nests with Clay and Lome, 
Rarities.  against the Body of a Tree, or Wall of an House; and that to the bigness of ordinary Bee-Hives, and those divided into a great many Cells. (2) Here are some Snakes of a considerable length and bigness, that frequently slide up and down the Wall of an House, and out of one Room into another with wonderful Agility of Body. (3.) The Water of that Rivulet (commonly called Tuigh River) hath upon its Surface in many places a certain Oily Substance, which being carefully taken off, and kept a little time, is sit to burn in Lamps like ordinary Oil. (4.) Here are divers large and hideous Caves, (some of which are big enough to contain five hundred Men) and several remarkable Trees, particularly the Calibash, Palmete, Roucou, and that which goes by the Vulgar Name of the Poyson-Tree. (5.) Among some rare Infects to be seen upon this Island, we may reckon those small Flies, (termed Cayovyou) most observable; and that chiefly for their Wings, which give a mighty Lustre in the Nighttime while they fly.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of this Island (excluding the Negroes) being mostly English, are much the same in Behaviour 
Manners.  and Manner of living, with those here in England.  
What was said of the Inhabitants in respect of Manners, the same may be affirm'd of them in Point 
Language.  of Language. As for the Negroes, the generality of them (if any considerable time upon the Island) do also understand and speak English.  
This Island belonging to the Crown of England, is ruled by a particular Governor appointed, and sent 
Government.  thither by His Majesty, the King of Great Britain▪ He with his Council do discuss all Matters of 〈…〉; and the better to quell any Insurrection 〈…〉 be made (especially by the Slaves) he still keeps a 〈…〉, confiding of two Regiments of Horse, and 〈◊〉 of Foot, always in ●●●diness upon a call. The Laws by which this Island are governed, (except some By-Acts which immediately concern the Plantation) are the same with those of England. The Island b●ing divided into four Circuits, in each of them is established an Inferior Court of Judicatory for hearing all manner of Civil Causes: From which Courts, Appeals may be made to the Supreme Court; and for due Administration of Justice in Criminal Matters, here are yearly held five Sessions. When there appears a real Necessity of making new Laws, (which must never contradict those of England) or abrogating old ones, the Governor calls an Assembly for that end. This Assembly resembles in some manner our English Parliament; for the Governor being reckoned Supreme, those of his Council are as so many Peers; and two Burgesses chosen out of each Parish, represent the Body of the People.  
The English here residing, make Profession of the 
Arms.  same Religion with that generally owned, and by Law 
Religion.  established in England. As for the Negroe-Slaves, their Lot hath hitherto been, and still is, to serve such Christian Masters, who sufficiently declare what Zeal they have for their Conversion, by unkindly using a Serious Divine some time ago, when only proposing to endeavour the same.    

§. 8. The Lucayes.  
THE Lucayes (so called from Lucayone, the biggest of 'em all) are those several Islands lying North of Cuba and Hispaniola: They belong mostly to the Spaniards, and the chief of them  
Are those of Bahama— Extended from the E. of Tegesta in Florida, to the N. of Hispaniola. Lucayone aliter New Providence Cignateo Eleutheria— Guanahani St. Salvador— Yuma.— Samana.— Maiaguana.—  
Of these Islands, Bahama may be reckoned the most remarkable, and that chiefly for the famous rapid Channel between that Island and the Main, through which the Spanish Fleets usually pass in their return from Mexico to Europe. A Passage equally fatal to the Spaniard, as fortunate to the English. Fatal to the former for some dreadful Shipwrecks sustained therein; and fortunate to the latter, for vast quantities of Plate recovered by skilful Divers. This Island is also observable for several uncommon Infects found upon it, particularly the Bahama-Spider already mentioned, Pags 341.   

§ 9 The Sotovento.  
THE Sotovento Islands, are those lying along the Northern Coast of Terra Firma. They belong mostly to the Spaniards, and received the Title Sotovento (quasi sub vento) from them, because they appear to the Leeward of their Fleet coming down before the Wind to enter the Gulf of Mexico. The chief of such Islands,  
Are those of Trinidada— Found from E. to W. Margarita— Tortuga— Orchilla— Rocca— Bonayrc— Curacao— Oruba—  
Trinidada (termed by the Natives Samsonate) is observable for being a noted place of Bartery between the Inhabitants of New Spain, and those of Peru. And Margarita is much frequented upon the account of Pearl Fishery, from whence it derives its Name. The rest are not of any great moment.   

§ 10 Bermudas.  
THIS little Cluster of Islands (lying about five hundred Leagues East of Florida) is termed by 
Name.  the Italians, Bermuda; by the French, Bermudes; by the Spaniards, Germans, and English, Bermudas. So called from one John Bermudas, a Spaniard, who made the first Discovery of them. They are otherways termed the Summer Islands, from Sr. George Summer, an Englishman, who suffered Shipwreck near to them, Anno 1609.  
The Air of these Islands is reckoned extraordinary healthful to breath in, the Sky being almost always 
Air.  Serene and Smiling. But when overcast at any time, then they're sure of a terrible Tempest, attended with frightful Claps of Thunder, and Flashes of Lightning. So healthful are these Islands to breath in, that their Inhabitants (now in number, about four or five thousand) are seldom visited with Sickness, and generally arrive to a good old Age. The opposite Place of the Globe to Bermudas, is that part of the vast East-Indian Ocean, lying between 134 and 138 Degrees of Longitude, with 32 and 35 Degrees of South Latitude.  
The Soil of these Islands is extraordinary fertile, yielding the Labourer two Crops every Year, which they 
Soil.  commonly reap in the Months of July and December. Of so rich a Mould is the Arable Ground in this Island, that it affords neither Sand, Flints, Pebbles, nor Stones so hard, as are fit to grind Knives. They are well furnished with variety of Fruits, Roots, Fish, and Fowl, together with great store of Hogs, and excellent sweet-scented Cedar. The length of the Days and Nights in Bermudas, is the same as in the Northmost Parts of Florida, they both lying under the same Parallels of Latitude.  
The chief Commodities of these Islands, are Oranges, Cochineel, Tobacco, Cedar-Wood, some Pearls, and 
Commodities.  Ambergriss in considerable quantity, etc.  
Observable are these Islands for nourishing no venomous Creature, none such being found upon them, 
Rarities.  nor able to live if brought thither. Here indeed are many Spiders, but those no ways poisonous; and very remarkable for their Webs, having the resemblance of Raw-Silk, and woven so strong, that little Birds are sometimes entangled in them. (2.) If Wells are dug in Bermudas above the Surface of the surrounding Ocean, the Water is sweet and fresh; but lower, than salt or breckish; and all of them have some sensible Flux and Reflux with the Sea. (3.) Upon the Coast of these Islands, is sometimes taken that remarkable Fish, termed the File-Fish; being so called from a part of his Backbone, which hath the exact resemblance of a File.  
Archbishoprics, Bishoprics, Universities. None. 
Archbishoprics, etc.   
The Inhabitants of these Islands being English, are much the same in Manners and Way of living, with 
Manners.  those here in England.  
What was said of the Inhabitants of Bermudas in respect of Manners, the same may be affirmed of them in 
Language.  Point of Language.  
These Islands being wholly subject, and of right belonging to the Crown of England, are ruled by a 
Government.  particular Governor appointed, and sent thither by the King of England.  
The Religion here established, and publicly professed, 
Arms.  is the Protestant, according to the Reformation of the 
Religion.  Church of England.   

§. 11. Terra del Fuogo.  
THIS is a large Triangular Island (or as some think, several) lying on the South part of America, and separated from the main Continent by the straits of Magellan. It's called by the Name of Terra del Fuogo, because (it seems) the first Discoverers thereof did observe some considerable Vulcano's upon it. Out Knowledge of this Island and its Inhabitants, is, at best, but very uncertain; almost every new Adventurer in these Parts of the World, giving us a new Relation of Things. Whosoever therefore desires a certain or satisfactory Account, must defer his Enquiry to the better Discovery of Aftertimes.  
And so much for America, and its Islands.     

AN APPENDIX, Comprehending  
A brief Account of the European Plantations in Asia, afric, and America: As also some Reasonable Proposals for the Propagation of the Blessed Gospel in all Pagan Countries.  
IN running over the various Divisions of Asia, afric, and America, I have (under the Title of Government) transiently mentioned those Principal Kingdoms or States in Europe, who are mostly concerned in those Countries; but since a more particulár Account of the same is desired by some, I shall endeavour to do it in these following Lines, and then (by way of Conclusion to the whole Treatise) shall subjoin some Proposals for the Propagation of the Blessed Gospel in all Pagan Countries. To return to the first.  
The chief of the European Nations, who have any Footing in Asia, afric, and America, are these following, viz. 

The English,  
The French,  
The Spaniards,  
The Dutch,  
The Portugueze,  
The Danes.    
Of all these in Order.  

§. 1. To the English belong  
In Asia. Fort St. George [aliter Madrassipatam] on Coast Cormandel. Bombay Castle and Island, on the West Coast of Decan. A Trade or Factories at Caracal— On Coast Cormandel. Trimly-Watch— Trimly-Bass— Port Nova— Fort St. david's— Cudalor— Cunnamere— Manyetckpatam— Arzapore— Pettipoli— Massulipatam— Madapollam— Viceagaparam— Bengal— In the Gulf of Bengal. Hugly— Ballesore— Cassumbezar— Maulda— Daca— Tutta Nutta— Pattana— Agra— In the Mogul's Empire. Cambaya— Surat— Amadarad— Baroch— Callicus— On the Coast of Malabar. Carnar— Gussarat— Combaia— Batticullay— Durnoforonam— Tully Ch●rey— Beattaer— Bringen— Dabul in Decan. Muscat— In Arabia Faelix. Mocha— Mackulla— Shahare— Kisen— Durgae— Doffare— Aden— Ispahan— In Persia. Gombroone— Bussora— Smyrna in Anatolia. Aleppo in Syria. Achem— In the Island. Sumatra. Indrapona— Bengalis— Jambee— Eyer Banna— Eyer Dickets— Tryamong— Eppou— Bancoula— Silabar— Peque— On the Malay Coast. Tinnacore— Cudda— Yunqucen— In China. Canton— Emoy— Hocksieu— T●siampoo-Coast— Siam— In the Kingdom of Siam. Camboida— Mindano in the Island Mindano. Borneo in the Island Borneo. Judda upon the Red Sea. Macassar in the Isle Celebes, but now expelled. Bantam in Java, till expelled by the Dutch, 1682.  
In Africa, Tangier on the Coast of Barbary near the Straits, but now demolished. The Island of S. Helena, West of Ethiopia, S. Lat. 16 degr. A Trade or Factories at Charles Fort upon an Island in the River Gambia. Sterra d'Leon upon Bence Island, Lat. 8 d. 10 m. N. L. Serbera River— On the Coast Malguette. Druwyn— Rio d' S. Andro— On the Quaqua Coast. Jeaque Jeaque— C. St. Appolonia— Axym in Comore-Bay. Succunde— On the Golden Coast Cabo Corso, chief of all— Fredericksburg formerly Danish, but sold to the English— Annishan unfortified— Annamabou— Aggau, of no defence— Loango— In the Kingdom of Loango. Malemba— Cabenda— In America, New England— Particularly mentioned, Page 107 and 184. New York— Pensilvania— New Jersey East— West— Maryland— Virginia— Carolina— As also they possess Port Nelson in hudson's Bay.  
In America, Many Islands, particularly those of Newfoundland in part. Jamaica one of the greater Antilles. Bermudas lying E of Florida. New Providence one of the Lucajos. Long Island lying S. of New York. Anguilla— Ten of one Caribee Islands. Berbada— St. Christopher— Nevis— Antego.— Monserrat— Dominica— St. Vincent— Barbados— Tobago— Some Settlements at Surinam— On the Coast of Terra Firma. Marone—   

§. 2. To the Spaniards belong  
In Asia, Luconia— Six of the Philippin, and most of the rest. Tandaya— Mindano— S. Juan— Mindore— Panay— Afric The Trade on the West Coast of Africa. The Canary Islands particularly mentioned, Page 101. In America, New Spain, whose Parliaments are Mexico. Guadalajara. Guatimala. A considerable Part of New Mexico. St. Augustins— In Florida. St. Matthews— Terra Firma, whose Parliaments are Panama. Granada. Peru, whose Parliaments are— Quito. Lima. De la Plata. Chili. A great Part of Paraguay. Several Islands, particularly those of Cuba. Hispaniola. Port-Rico.   

§. 3. To the Portugu●ze belong  
In Asia, Several Factories in Persia. Asterin— upon the Ganes. Ougelli— Chaul a considerable Town— In Decan. Massagan a little Village— The Forts of Elephanta Island near that of Bombay. Morro— Caranga— Goa with her Fortresses and adjacent Islands Coran. Divar. Diu Island and City near Guzarat. Macao upon the Coast of China. The Fort Lar●ntoque in the Island Solor E. of Flores. Much of Timor one of the Molucco Isles. The Trade or Factories it Aracan— In Peninsula Indiae extra Gangem. Pegu— Tanacerm— Ligor— Cambodia— Golcond— Already mentioned. Agra— An adabat— Cambata— Surat— Baroch— Bengala— In Africa, Mazagan in the Kingdom of Morocco. Some Forts on the River S. Domingo in the Country of the Jalofes. Some Forts on the Coasts of Guinea. Congo. Angola. A great part of The Coasts of Cafres', and Zanguebar. The Trade of the E. Count from the Cape Good Hope to the R. Sea. Several Islands, viz. Isles of Cape Verde. The Maderas. St. Thomas. Lat. ●0. Isle de Prince— N. E. of St. Thomas. J. de Ferdmando Poo  
In America All the Coast of Brasil divided into many Captainships. Estero— Towards the Mouth of the River Amazon. Conduba— Cogemine—   

§. 4. To the French belong  
In Asia, Bereaux— In the Mogul's Empire. New Surrat— The Island of St. Maria lying South-West of Goa. Some Forts in The Kingdom of Siam. The Island of Java. In Africa, Fort Dauphin in Madagascar. Senega (N. of Cape Verde) the chief French Factory in Africa. A Trade upon the River Senega. Gambia. As also at Rusisque near Cape Verde. Great Sestre— in Guinea. Ardra— In America, Montreal— in Canada. The three Rivers— Quebeck— Tadonsack, and some other places on the River St. Laurence. A great Part of Nova Scotia. Bay Plasensa— in Newfoundland. Bay Blacco— Fort St. Lovis in the Island Cayene, lying E. of Guyana. Several Forts on the Coast of Caribana. Among the Antilles. St. Bartholomew. Sancta Cruz. St. Martin. Guadaloupe. Lafoy Desired. Maria Gallants. Les Saintes. Martinico. St. Aloisia. Granada. Domingo in part. Grenadins. La Tortue.   

§. 5. To the Dutch belong  
In Asia, Tuticoriu— on the Coast Cormandel. Negapatam— Karkall— Fort Gelder's— Pallecate— Several Forts in Malacca. Ceylon. Java, And most of the Moluccoes, though of right they belong to the English. Factories at many places in Persia. The Mogul's Empire. Cormandel. Malabar. Siam. Malacca. Sumatra. China. Java. Celebes. Borneo. Arabia. In Africa, Arguin— near Cape Verde. Gora— Many Forts in Congo, Some near the Cape of Good Hope. St. Maurice in Madagascar. Factories in Guinea, viz. Boutrou— on the Golden-Coast. Commendo formerly English— St. George de'l Mina, chief of all— Maurea or Fort Nassau— Cormantyn formerly English— Cr●vicocur— In America, The City of Coro in the North of Terra Firma. Some Forts on the Coast of Guyana. Querisao— Three of the Sotovento Islands. Aruba— Bon-Airy— Saba— Two of the Caribees near S. Crux. Eustachio—   

§. 6. To the Danes belong  
In Asia Frankebar— on the Coast of Cormandel. Dansburg—  
In Africa is Christianburg or S. Francisco Xavier in Cuinea.  
In America is New Denmark in the North part thereof.  
Having thus briefly considered the chief of the European Plantations, whether in Asia, afric, or America: Come we now to the latter part of the Appendix, viz.   

Some reasonable Proposals for the Propagation of the Blessed Gospel in all Pagan Countries.  
BY what hath been briefly said in the foregoing Treatise, concerning the State of Religion in all Countries of the World; it may sufficiently appear in general, That the Christian Religion is of a very small Extent, if exactly compared with those many and vast Countries, wholly overspread with gross Idolaters, numerous Mahometans, and many others, who either know not, or (at least) own not, the Blessed Messias. But more particularly, this great and sad Truth may farther appear by the following Calculation, ingeniously made by some, who dividing the inhabited World into thirty Parts, do find that  
Nineteen of them are possessed by Blind and gross Idolaters. Six Jews, Turks, and Saracens. Two Those of the Greek Church. Three Those of the Church of Rome. Protestant Communion.  
Thus Christianity taken in its largest Latitude, bears no greater Proportion to the other grossly false Religions, than five to twenty five. This melancholy Consideration doth force me to bewail that woeful neglect of the best Part of the Christian Church, for not being so diligent, as others are, in endeavouring to abolish Heathenish Idolatry, and that most lamentable Ignorance, which as yet overshadoweth so great a Part of the inhabited World. It's undoubtedly well known, that the effectual performance of such a Work as this, would require no inconsiderable Stock of Money (it being now impracticable to make Solemn Missions or qualify Men for them without considerable Charges) and yet a sufficient Fund might be so easily raised, that none could reasonably complain of the burden should the following Proposals be so happily made, as to meet with a due Reception.  Did every Freeholder of the Three Kingdoms, advance only for one Year the Five hundredth part of his yearly Incomes: Did those Merchants of this great City (who are particularly concerned in our Foreign Plantations, and daily employ great multitudes of Pagan Slaves in their Service) allow the Two hundreth part of one years' Gain: And finally, did the Clergy of the Three Kingdoms (whose Zeal in such a Matter would probably transcend others) appropriate to this pious Use, One hundredth part of their yearly Revenues. I say, did Priest and People thus unanimously combine together, in carrying on this most Christian Design; what an easy matter were it in a short time, to raise such a Fund of Money, that the Annual Interest thereof might sufficiently serve to send Yearly some Pious and Able Divines into all Quarters of the World? And since Rational Methods might be taken, to have several Pagan Tongues taught in our own Island: a considerable part of the aforesaid Money might be likewise employed to Educate a competent number of young Students of Theology in these Foreign Languages; which number being still continued, would serve (as a choice Nursery) to afford a constant Supply of able Men, who might yearly go abroad, and be sufficiently qualified at their first arrival, to undertake that great Work for which they were sent. 
But since the latter Part of the foregoing Proposal (which imports that Europeans might learn some of the present Indian Languages) doth seem impracticable to several, by reason of the prodigious multitude of those Pagan Tongues, and their vast variety of quite different Dialects: Then we may follow the Example of the Ancient Romans, whose Custom and Interest it was, to extend their own Language with their Conquests; and so extinguish in process of time, the very Dialect of the Conquered. Did we this in all Parts of our Western Empire, [which without doubt might be fully accomplished in a few Generations, by duly encouraging some hundreds of Christians to endeavour in the most alluring manner, to instruct the younger sort of the Natives in the English Tongue.] Then in the next or following Age, might we Address ourselves to those blind Gentiles in our own Language, and so instilling in them, by degrees, the Principles of Christianity, might thereby in a short time bring in many thousands of Souls to the Sheepfold of the Pastor and Bishop of our Souls. I think it needless to express how commendable such a Design would be in itself, and how desirable the Promotion thereof should be to all, who stile themselves Christians, of what Party or Profession soever they are. And I humbly suppose it might be a Work (if unanimously minded by Christians) more becoming the Followers of the Prince of Peace, than to be Abettors of the frequent Jars and Broils of Christendom. Besides, there's certainly nothing that could prove more beneficial to the Public Good of this Nation, and Particular Interest of the Crown of England; for did most (or many) of the Natives understand and speak our own Language, then might we not thereby more exactly discover the Inland Parts of these Countries? and with greater security improve them to the greatest Advantage. Might we not thereby make multitudes of idle wand'ring Indians very useful to our English Colonies? and then chiefly employ Europeans for the Guard and Safety of the Country. Yea, did many of the Natives but tolerably understand and speak the English Tongue; then might we not (in all human appearance) Civilize them entirely in a short time? and so add many thousands of new English Subjects to the English Empire. All which are morally impossible now to be done, since the numerous Dialects of their barbarous Jargon, together with their own Barbarity, are as so many Bars against such Undertake.  
Great Sirs,  
Pardon these Proposals here offered to the serious Consideration of those whom they chiefly concern; and give me leave to declare unto you, how infinitely it would tend to the Glory of God, the Good of his Church, and Honour of our Nation; did we sincerely endeavour to extend the Limits of our Saviour's Kingdom, with those of our new Dominions; and to spread the true Reformed Religion, as far as the English Sails have done for Traffic. With what Anxiety of Mind, and Fatigue of Body, do we pierce into the remotest Countries of the World? And all to heap up a little White and Yellow Earth, or to purchase some things (called Precious by Man) which [abstracting Human Fancy] do differ nothing from common Pibble Stones; and yet what a supine neglect doth attend us? in doing that which would bring more Honour to our Holy Religion, and prove at last more profitable to ourselves, than the actual Possession of all the Treasures in the Universe. What a lamentable thing is it? That those very Indians who border upon the English Pale (not to mention some thousands of Negroes who slave in our Service) should still continue in most wretched Ignorance? and in stead of Knowing and Worshipping the True God, should as yet reverence not only Stocks and Stones, but also adore the Devil himself. Christians! Shall we covet and thirst after their Talents of Gold? and yet keep hid in a Napkin that Talon entrusted to us. Shall we greedily bereave them of their Precious Pearls? and not declare unto them the Knowledge of the Pearl of Price. No! no! Let us not act as others have done, in making Gold our God, and Gain the sole design of our Trading. But let us effectually improve those choice Opportunities (now in our hands) for the singular Glory of our Great God, and of Jesus Christ, our Blessed Redeemer. And let our Planters duly consider, That to extirpate Natives, is rather a supplanting than planting a new Colony; and that it's far more honourable to overcome Paganism in one, than to destroy a thousand Pagans. Each Convert is a Conquest.    
FINIS.   

CORRIGENDA.  
PAge 50. line 15. for Lancashire read Westmoreland. p. 70. l. 1. r. Escutcheon. p. 74. l. 2. deal §. 2. p. 77. l. 7. r. Dominions. p. 111. l. 31. r. Religion. p. 112. l. 7. r. Buc. p. 116. l. 36. r. Mount. p. 120. l. 21. r. Salizburg. p. 127. l. 13. r. Cujavia. p. 143. l. 16. r. strip him. p. 153. l. 37. r. Agrippina. p. 176. l. 11. r. He proceedeth. p. 192. l. 34. r. Kinross. p. 206. l. 15, 22. r. Villages. p. 235. l. 32. r. very. p. 265. l. 40. r. Tapestry. p. 292. l. 7. r. Thirteen. p. 330. l. 24. r. Archbishopric. Wheresoever the word its (importing the Verb Est) is found, read it either at length, it is, or contractedly thus, it's or 'tis, as p. 3. l. 37. f. it's termed, r. it's, or 'tis, or it is termed; and so in other places.   

To the BOOK-BINDER.  
Place the Maps in Order following.  
The Map of The World— Page 1 Europe— 59 Scandinavia, or Sweden and Norway— 61 Moscovia— 73 France— 79 Germany— 95 Poland— 125 Spain— 133 Italy— 145 Turkey in Europe— 165 Scotland— 187 England— 197 Ireland— 211 Asia— 237 Africa— 293 America— 333   

BOOKS Printed for Thomas Cockerill in Amen Corner.  
THE Works of Mr. Charnock. In Two Volumes. Folio. Reprinting, Geography Rectified: Or, a Description of the World in all its Kingdoms, Countries, Islands, Cities, Towns, Seas, Rivers, Bays, Capes, Ports. Their Ancient and Present Names, Inhabitants, Situations, Histories, Customs, and Governments, etc. As also their Commodities, Coins, Weights, and Measures, compared with those of London. Illustrated with Seventy eight Maps. The whole Work performed to the more accurate Observations and Discoveries of Modern Authors. By Robert Morden. Quarto.  
Sermons preached on Several Occasions. The Third Volume. By John Conant, D. D. Published by John Lord Bishop of Chichester.  
A Funeral Sermon occasioned by the Death of the Lady Lane, late Wife of the Right Worshipful Sir Thomas Lane, Kt. and Alderman of the City of London, who died November 29. 1698. And of John Lane, late Father of the said Sir Thomas Lane, who died the 8th of December following. Published at the Request of the Relations. By Nathanael Taylor. Quarto.  
Familiaria Colloquia, Opera Christopheri Helvici D. etc. Professoris Giessensis Olim Ex. Erasmo Roterodamo Ludovici Vive, etc. Scottano Hasso. Selecta Editio Decima quarta ad pristiva Exemplaria Denuo Recognita.  
English Exercises for Schoolboys to Translate into Latin: Comprising all the Rules of Grammar, and other necessary Observations, ascending gradually from the meanest to higher Capacities. By J. Garretson, Schoolmaster. The Seventh Edition. Twelve.  
The School of Manners, or Rules for children's Behaviour. By the Author of the English Exercises. The Second Edition.  
A Practical Grammar; or the easiest and shortest way to initiate Young Children in the Latin Tongue. By the help whereof a Child of Seven Years old may learn more of the Grounds of that Language in three Months, than is ordinarily learned in a Years space by those of greater Age in common Grammar-Schools. Published for the Use of such as love not to be tedious. To which is added Tables of Mr. Walker's Particles. By the Assistance whereof young Scholars may be the better enabled to peruse that most Excellent and Useful Treatise. By J. Philamoth, Master of a Free-School. The Second Edition.  
Memoirs of the Countess Dunois, Author of the Lady's Travels into Spain. Written by herself before her Retirement. By way of Answer to Monsieur St. Euremont: Containing withal a Modest Vindication of the Female Sex, more frequently injured by Imprudence and Misconstruction, than defect of Virtue. Made English from the Original.